Digital PDFs

EK-DECSY-FP-001

May 1990

538 pages

Original

18MB

view download

OCR Version

20MB

view download

Document:	DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration
Order Number:	EK-DECSY-FP
Revision:	001
Pages:	538
Original Filename:

OCR Text

PR VOSSOSO

G080 80800006880888800008460.60090080-

OO GV GGG H S00000.0.00008900009090090¢004
IS0/ 0 0V POV VOG00S0 00888000.0006085000980080004

PPN PGSR OGP0

0000008.0.6006.0.0.604606000050.0.4

PO OO OO T 000880080608 88006800600608000060060.4
AXKXX K AR K KA KK KKK AKX AKX XKLL K AKX K AKX AKX XKKEXKKXK
08880000
PO 00000800 0.0,000006000830598000
)8.0.0.9.90.00.06:90.6.6.0.8.0.¢0000600506000090606004
}0.0:0.0.0.0.6.6.06600006060088508880980098004
PO0.0.09.8.60.00.6000.0006008093098808390.4
p9:0.5.:4.0/8.6.00.6.0.0.0.0.0.0.08.9.98080008.8¢04

).9.6:4.0.0.60.6.8.60.80.0000000065600004
p G6000.00.09.0.00.00.0600806.9699094

XX KX XU

XXX AKX XK KL KAXKXLXKK

},9.6.0.6.6.0.6.8.0.6.0.0.9.9.9.6.0.000.0.¢¢
£9.0.9.0.0.9.9.0.4.90.9:6.9.9.8.9.0.0.9.0.{
p0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.8.0.0.9.8.9.0,6.6.4

KX
XX AKX XXKKXX
KAXKHU
)0.0.0.0.9.6.6.6.0.5.4.6.0.9.
1.4:0.9.9.0.0.9.¢.9.9.0.44
1:9.9.9.0.9.9.0,0.9.9¢
XEAXKXXXXK
XAKKXXX
XXXXX

XXX

XXX
XXXXX

XXXXXX

p9.9.9.9.9.6.9.9.¢
P0.8.8.0.0.0.9.9.4.0.4

XXX XAAXKXXAXKXX

). 0.0.0.0.0.0.8.9.9.8.¢.0.0.¢¢

).0.0.0.0.0.9.0.0.9.0.9.8..44.04

XXAXX AKX AXXXXKXKXKXKK
XX
AKX UAXXKKXKXXKX
XXAKKE

PO 00.0.0.0.64.:9.9.6.9.9.98 00860904
1.:9.0.0.6.0.90.0:0.0.0.0.0 .9.0.0.0.¢.5.¢ 0.5 9.0

).6.9:9.0.0.6.0.0.9.0.0.0.0.0.9.9 ¢.0.6.9.9.0.98,¢.6
$.9.:0.9.6.000.00.0.000 0099099980804 ¢04
)0.0.0.0:0.0.0.0.6.0.0.0.0.6.0.0:0.0.0.9.9.4.9.00,¢9.6.¢9

P.0.4:010:0.0.0.0.6:0.0.9.00.0.0.6.0.0.00.9.9.960800.0.00
10:0.0:0:0.9:6.6.0.9:0.0.0.0.0.0.6.0.0.00.:68.9¢.:0.:$.9.6.8.8.$.4.64

0.0.0.0.0.¢
000 099 ¢.8.0,9.¢.9.9.9.0
$9:9:9.0:0.6:9:0.0400.0.6.9.9.0.
PUe0i000.0 S S0 10 S AN

0:0.9.0.5:0.9 ¢ 9.9.9,¢ 4

REID 000000:9.0:6:9:6.0.9:9.0.070.0.9:6.010.4:0:0.0:0:0.0.0.9,¢.9.0.9
8.0, ¢ ¢

MDD 5.0:0.0.8.0.4:9.6.0.0.0.6.0.0.0.9.0.0.800.0.00.:0.9.0.0.0.0.0.00.0.80
0.6

EOG00.0.080:9:0.¢.0.9.9.6.0.0.0.0.0.0.006.00.6050089.0.6.00.800960$06
$0.0.0:0.0:0.0.0.0.6.0.0:0.9.0.0.0100.0.0.0.6.0.09.6.6.0.00.600.0.0.0.06¢.6¢06¢88¢4

1:0.0,0.0.0.8.0.0.0.8.9.6.6.000000066,0000866060000888800888480406004

DECconnect System

riber Optic Planning and Configuration

May 1990

This

manual

provides

overview

Digital

Equipment

Corporation's structured wiring cable plant. In addition, it provides
guidelines for designing structured fiber optic wiring subsystems.
Also

included

are

planning

and

configuration

guidelines,

application descriptions and examples, fiber optic design, and cable
and component descriptions.

Supersession/Update Information:

Order Number.

EK-DECSY-FP--001

This is a new manual.

EK-DECSY-FP-001
May 1990

The information in this documentis subjectto change without notice and should notbe construed as
a commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation. Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no
responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.

Printed in U.S.A.

The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

DEBET

DECserver

METROWAVE

DEC
DECbridge

DECsite
DECUS

DECconcentrator
DECconnect
DECdirect
DECNA
DECnet

DELNI
DELUA
DEQNA
DEMPR
DESTA

MASSBUS
ThinWire
UNIBUS
VAX
VAXcluster
VAXstation
VMS

DECrepeater

i oli[t]a] 1}
Amphenol 908 is a trademark of Amphenol.

AT&T is a trademark of American Telephone and Telegraph Company.
Chipcom is a trademark of Chipcom Corporation.

Comning is a trademark of Corning Glass Works.
Fotec is a trademark of Intelco Corporation.

KEVLAR is Dupont's registered name for aramid yarn.
Motorola 68000 is a trademark of Motorola, Inc.
ORnet is a trademark of Chipcom Corporation.

ST is a trademark of American Telephone and Telegraph Company.
VELCRO is a trademark of VELCRO USA, Inc.
Xerox and XNS are registered trademarks of Xerox Corporation.

This manual was produced by Networks and Communications Publications.

Contents
Preface

Qverview
1.1

DECconnect System Structured Wiring ........................

1-2

1.2

Fiber Optic Structured Wiring. . ........ .. ... .. ... ... .. ...

1-3

1.3

Structured Versus Unstructured Wiring........................

i-3

1.4

Industry Standards . . ......... .. ...

.. .. . i

1-4

14.1

EIA/TTIA-568 Commercial Building Wiring Standard ...........

1-5

1.4.2

BICSI Telecommuanications Distribution Methods Manual. . . . . ..

1-5

143

National Electrical Code (NEC) .. ...........
... ... ... .... 1-5

1.5

Structured Wiring Architecture . ..............................

1-6

1.5.1

Backbone Subsystem Architecture ..........................

1-9

1.5.2

Horizontal Wiring Subsystem Architecture ..................

1-12

1.6

Structured Wiring Subsysterns ..............................

1-15
1-15

1.6.1

Campus Backbone Subsystem . ............................

1.6.2

Building Backbone Subsystem ...................
.. ... ... 1-17

1.6.3

Horizontal Wiring Subsystem ............................. 1-19

1.6.4

Work Area Wiring Subsystem ............................. 1-22

1.6.5

Administration Subsystem ...........
.. ... ... ... ... ... 1-23

1.7

Topology ........ e

e e

1-25

1.8

Configurations ..............
...
it i

1-27

1.8.1

Point-to-Point Configuration ..............................

1-27

1.8.2

Star Configuration......

1-30

1.8.3

Ring Configuration ....... ... ... ... .. .. ... ...

...,

1-31

1.84

Tree Configuration. .. .. ... ... ... ... ..ttt

133

...

... ... .

.
...

i,
..

General Planning
2.1

2.11

Unknown Application Design Process........................ 2-2

2.1.2

Known Application Design Process . . ........................ 24

2.2
221

Preplanning Process ...........oiiiiiiiinoninnnnninnnaenns 2-5
Network Analysis ..........cooiiiiiininnnininnnnnnennn. 2-7

2211

Logical Network Design . ..................
.. .. ... .... 2-7

22.1.2

Existing or Planned Buildings........................... 2-9

22.1.3

SizeandGrowth ...........
... .
i, 2-10

2.2.2

2221
2222
223

2.3

Site SUIVeY ... ...

et et 2-10

Survey Process. ... ....c.oitiiiiiianrniiiiiiii
e 2-10
Survey Information...........
... ... i
it 2-11

Review Documentation on Safety, Grounding, and Space
Requirements. ............c.iuuuiiiinnneinnennennnnnnannnn 2-11
Cable Plant Design Process ..................
... . iiiinn... 2-13

231

Concept Diagram Overview ...............
... i, 2-15

2.3.2

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design Overview . .................. 2-15

233

Fiber Optic Distribution Subsystem Design Overview ......... 2-16
Fiber Optic Subsystem Design Worksheets ............... 2-16

23.3.1
2332

234

Subsystem Design Reference Documents . ................ 2-17
Administration Planning Overview......................... 2-17

2341

Cable Plant Labeling ................. e 2-17

2342

Administration Points ...............
.. ... ... .. ... 2-18

24
241

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Components ......................... 2-18
FiberOpticCables. .. ... ... ... i, 2-18

24.1.1

Outdoor Cable ........ ... .. ... .. ... . i, 2-19

2.4.1.2

IndoorCable .......... ... ... .. .. i, 2-22

2413

Cable Considerations . ...................coiiiiiaonnn 2-24

2414
2.4.2

Cable Routing Considerations .......................... 2-26
Fiber Optic Cable Plant Hardware Overview ................ 2-27

2422

Termination Shelf . ......... ... ... ... ... ... ... . ..., 2-28
Splice Shelf ......... ... ... . i 230

2423

Storage Shelf .. ...... ... ... ... . i 2-31

2424

Combination Shelf. .. ... ... ...

2425

Fiber Optic Remote Wall Enclosure ..................... 2-33

2421

...

.. . ..

.. 2-32

2.4.2.6

Splice Closure . ............ottt 2-34

2.4.2.7

Wallbox . . ... e 2-35

2428

25
2.5.1

DECconnect Process Outline . ....................
... . ... ... 2-1

Equipment Racks . ..........
... ... ... ... ..
ilL 2-36

Fiber Optic Cable Installation Methods . ...................... 238
Connector Termination Methods

2.6.2

2.6.2.1

Fiber Connectors ............coiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiinenn, 2-39
2.5 mm Bayonet ST-type Connectors .................... 2-39

2.6.2.2

Field Termination Criteria for 2.5 mm Bayounet ST-type
Conmectors . ......vviiitit
i
it et e i
e 240

2.6.2.3

Connector Optical Losses . . ............................ 242

2.6.3

Splicing Methods . . ...........
..o
i, 242

Concept Diagram
31

Concept Diagram Overview . ........ ... .. ... .. .. ... .vuon.. 3-2

3.2

Concept Diagram Design Process ............................. 3-3

Structured Wiring Hierarchy .. ............
... ... ... ... ..., 3-6

Concept Diagram Symbols .. ...........
... ... .. ... ... ..
.. 3-8

3.6

Creating the Base Horizontal Concept Diagram ................ 3-10

3.6.1

Defining Horizontal Wiring Subsystem Requirements ......... 3-10

3.6.1.1

Horizontal Wiring Distance ............................. 3-11

35.1.2

Horizontal Wiring Cable Link Configuration Design ....... 3-12

3.5.13

Horizontal Wiring Topology .. .........
... ... .. ... .... 3-13

352

Base Horizontal Concept Diagrams ........................ 3-16

3.6

Creating the Base Backbone Concept Diagram ................. 3-18

36.1

Defining Backbone Link Requirements ..................... 3-18

36.1.1

Backbone Distance .................
... . .. ... 0oL, 3-18

36.1.2

Backbone Cable Link Configuration Design .............. 3-22

3.6.1.3

3.6.2
3.7

Site Layout.............
... i
i 3-25

Base Backbone Concept Diagram .......................... 3-26
Modifying the Base Concept Diagrams........................ 3-28

3.71

Cable Distances ... ...... ...ttt

i, 3-28

3.7.2

Fiber Count ......... ... ...

i iiiiinennn. 3-29

3.7.3

Modified Concept Diagrams . .............................. 3-34

Administration Subsystem
4.1

Structured Wiring Hierarchy .. ............................... 4-3

4.2

Crossconmects . .. ... ... .

4.3

Interconnections

4.4

Horizontal Administration Zones ............................ 4-13

4.5

Fiber Optic Structured Wiring Strategy . ...................... 4-15

... e 4-4

.............
... ... ..
i 4-10

4.5.1

Fiber Cable Color Codes . .. ..........
... ... .. .. ... .. ... 4--16

4.5.2

Distribution Subsystem Field Color ........................ 4-19

4.5.3

Fiber Optic Crossover . . ... ... ... .. ... iiuiiiiiiiannnnn. 4-22

45.4
464.1
46542

4.6

Rules of the Fiber Optic Structured Wiring Strategy .......... 4-23
One-to-One Fiber Optic WiringRule .................... 4-23
Crossover Rules for Crossconnects and Interconnects . ... .. 4-26
Labeling ... ... ...
i i i
431

46.1

Identifier Worksheets ................
... ... ... ... ... 4-32

4.6.2

DECconnect System Identifiera ............................ 4-37

46.2.1

4622

46.3

464
46.5
46.5.1
46.5.2

4653
46.54

Distribution Frame Identifiers ......................... 4-39
Cable Identifiers ..............ccviitiiniennnennnnnn. 4-43

Splice Description Worksheet...........................
...
Distribution Subsystem Connection Worksheet Process........
Label Creation Process ... ............
... ... ...
LabelingtheCables ................
... ... ... ...,
Labeling the Wallboxes. .. .........
... ... ... ... ....
Using the Splice Description Worksheets. ................
Using the Distribution Subsystem Connection Worksheet ..

445
448
4-50
4-50
4-52
4-53
4-53

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design
5.1

Required Documents ............
.. ... i, 5-5

5.2

Fiber Optic Links . ...ttt 5-5

5.2.1

Fiber Optic Link Structure. . ........ ... ... ... .. iiiiiin.. 5-6

5.2.2

Optical Link Design Factors .....................
... ... ... 5-6

5221

Power Budget .............
... ..
i

5-6

5.2.2.2

Optical Loss . . ...... .o ittt

5-7

5.2.2.3

Wavelength ....... ... ... .

5.2.2.4

Bandwidth ......... ... ...

5.2.3

5.3

. i 5-7

... . i

System Design Factors . ........ ... ... ... .. iiiiiiiiinennn.. 5-9
Cable Plant Requirements .. ..............
... ... ... .. ..., 5-10

5.3.1

Environmental Specifications. . ....... ... .

5.3.2

Component Requirements .......................couiu.n. 5-12

5.4
54.1
5.4.2

i iiiiii 5-11

Fiber Optic Link-Loss Models for Known Application Design . .. .. 5-14

Fiber Link-Losz Model 850 nm Operation ................... 5-15
Fiber Link-Loss Model 1300 nm Operation .................. 5-19

5.5

Link-Loss Planning for Unknown Application Design ...........

5.6

Product Applications .............
.. .. it 5-23

5.6.1

5-22

FDDI Product Applications ...................ccoviinin.. 5-24

5.6.1.1

FDDI Interface Connections ..... et 5-25

5.6.1.2

FDDI Administration Interconnection Points ............. 5-27

5.6.1.3

FDDI Product Implementations

6.6.2

ORnet Product Applications . . .....................
..., 5-39

6.6.2.1

ORnet Configuration . .. ...........
.. v iiiiiinninnn. 5-39

5.6.2.2

ORnet Components . . ...........
.. ... iiiiiiiinnnnn.. 5-39

5.6.2.3

ORnet Administration Interconnect Points ............... 539

5.6.2.4

ORnet Product Implementations........................ 541

5.7

Creating the Network Schematics............................ 545

5.7.1

Network Schematic Symbols .............................. 5-46

5.7.2

Network Schematics ... ......... ...

.. i, 5-47

6.7.2.1

Types of Network Schematics .......................... 547

5.7.2.2

Network Schematic References ......................... 5417

5.7.2.3

Network Schematic Information ........................ 548

5.7.2.4

Network Schematic Creation Process - Known Applications . 5-48

5.7.2.5

Network Schematic Creation Process - Unknown
Applications .. ........ ... ... .. .. 5-52

5.8

Fiber Optic Link-Loss Calculations - Known Applications........ 5-52

58.1

Link-Looss Calculation Process .. ........................... 5-52

5.8.2

Link-Loss Calculation Methods . . .......................... 5-53

5.8.2.1
5822
5.9

Link-Loss Tables .. ......... ... ...

...

5-563

Link-Loss Calculation Worksheet ....................... 5-b4
Link Certification Losa Values . ..................
... .. ...... 5-57

5.9.1

Link Certification Loss Value Worksheet . . .................. 5-57

59.2

Link Certification Loss Value Summary Worksheet ...........

5-60

Work Area Wiring Design
6.1

Required Documents . . .......... ... ... ... . . . i 6-3

6.2

Work Area Wiring Guidelines ................................

6-3

6.3

Defining Component Locations ............................... 6-3

6.4

Wallbox Installation Recommendations ........................ 64

6.5

Work Area Wiring Connection to Wallbox .. .................... 6—4

6.6

Design Process Overview . ....... ... ... iiutiiirirannnnnn. 6-8

6.7

Selecting Work Area Wiring Cables ........................... 6-9

6.7.1

6.7.1.1
6.7.1.2

6.7.2

6.8

Cable Options. . ... ... ... .. ..

. i, 6-10

Cable Assemblies. . . ....... .. ... .. .. ... ... .. ...

... ... 6-10

CustomCables............
... .. ... ...
... 6-11
Cable Worksheet . .......... ... ... . .

. .

Bill of Materials (BOM) Worksheet............

6-12
..............

6-14

vii

Horizontal Wiring Cabling Design
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.6

7.6.1
7.56.1.1

7.5.1.2
7.56.2
7.6

7.6.1
7.6.2
7.6.3
7.7

Required Documents . ............... ... 74
Defining Component Locations ............................... 74
Design Process Overview ...............coieiiiiiiiinnanenn. 7-6
Wallbox Requirements ...............oviiitiniinriniiiannens 7-7
... ... ... ... 7-9
Defining Cable Routing Methods. ..............
Selecting Cable Routing Methods ........................... 7-9
Cable Routing Methods Selection Process ................. 7-9
Horizontal Cable Routing Methods . ..................... 7-10
... .. oot 7-13
.........
Cable Routing Worksheet . .. ......
Defining Cables .......... ... it 7-13
ittt 7-15
CableJackets . ........oviiiii
CableLengths ......... ... .00t 7-16
.. 7-16
i,
.. ........
Cable Worksheet .....
Bill of Materials (BOM) Worksheet . . ......................... 7-19

Building Backbone Cabling Design
8.1
82
83

8.4
8.4.1
84.1.1

8.4.1.2
8.4.2
85

8.5.1
8.5.2

8.56.3

8.5.4
5.6

Required Documents . . .......... ... .. il 8-3
... . ... ... 83
Defining Component Locations ...................
an.. 84
.....
coiiiiiiiiineinen
...
.....
.
Overview
Design Process
Defining Building Backbone Cable Routing Methods ............. 8-6
Selecting Building Backbone Cable Routing Methods .......... 8-6
Building Backbone Cable Routing Methods Selection Process 8-6
Building Backbone Cable Routing Methods. ............... 8-7
Cable Routing Worksheet . .. .........
... ...
il 8-9
Defining Cables .. ....... ... ... ... i 8-11
i 8-11
ittt iiiiiiiiii
Cable Jackets . .........ciiinii
Cable Comstruction .............c.ciuitiiiiininninnnnn 8-11
CableLengths ....... ... ... ... . i 8-12
Cable Worksheet .. ... e
e e 8-13
Bill of Materials (BOM) Worksheet. . .......... . . ...
... .... 8-16

Campus Backbone Cabling Design

9.2

Required Documents . . ............ciiiiiiiriniiiiiaeaeenn.. 9-3
Defining Component Locations . .............................. 9-3

9.3

Design Process Overview ... ...........coiiiiiniiinnennnannnn 94

9.4

Designing Building Backbone Links . ...................... .
Designing Cable Entrance Points ............................. 9-7

9.1

9.5

viil

9.5.1

Cable Entrance Point Design Process . .. ..................... 9-8

9.5.2

Modifying Floor Plans for Cable Entrance Point Design ........ 9-8

9.5.2.1

9.5.2.2

953
9.6

9.6.1

Entrance Point Cable Routing Methods .. . ................ 9-9

Cable Entrance Point Worksheet. . ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... 9-10
Defining Campus Backbone Cable Routing Methods .........
... 9-12

Selecting Cable Routing Methods .......................... 9-12

9.6.1.1

Cable Routing Methods Selection Process ................ 9-13

96.1.2

Multiple-Segment Links . ... ........................... 9-14

9.6.1.3

Cable Routing Methods ............................... 9-15

9.6.2

9.7

Cable Routing Worksheet . .. ...... .. ... ... ... ... .......... 9-17
Defining Splice Closures . . . ........ ... it 9-19

9.7.1

Splice Closure Design Process .............................

9.7.2

Splice Closure Hardware .................
... iiiiiinn.. 9-20

9.7.3

Splice Closure Worksheet . . . ...... ...

9.8

Defining Cables . .......... ... ..

... ... . ........... 9-20

. . .

. i 9-23

9.8.1

Cable Construction ... ...... ... ... .. . ciiiiiiniinnnnnnnn. 9-23

9.8.2

Cable Lengths .............
... .. 0
i, 9-24

9.8.3

Campus Backbone Cable Worksheet .. ... ................... 9-25

9.9

Cable Entrance Point Requirements. . .................... 9-8

Bill of Materials (BOM) Worksheet . . ......................... 9-28

Distribution Frame Design
10.1

Required Documents .. ............
... ... ... . .
...

104

10.2

Desigr. Process Overview . .. .............iiiniiiinnannnnenn.

104

10.3

Distribution Frame Layout Diagram .........................

10-8

Distribution Frame Components . .. ........................

10-8

10.3.1.1

Active Networking Equipment .........................

10-9

10.3.1.2

Passive Cable Plant Hardware .........................

10-9

10.3.1.3

Mounting Racks. ... ...... ... ... ... ... ... ...

10.3.1

10.3.2

..., 10--11

Rack Layout Guidelines .................................. 10-11

10.3.2.1

Basic Mounting-Rack Layouts . .. ...................
...

10-12

10.3.2.2

Rack Installation Guidelines . .. .......................

10-12

10.3.2.3

Layout Diagram Examples ...........................

10-13

10.4

Equipment Room and Cabinet Configuration—Electrical, Thermal, and

Acoustic Requirements . .. ...... ... ... ...
104.1

... ... . ... ..., 10-20

Configuration Requirements .............................

10-20

104.1.1

Equipment Room Configuration Requirements . . .......
.. 10-20

104.1.2

ODF Configuration Requirements. .. .............
... ...
... ... ... ... .

10-22

104.2.1

Equipment Room Electrical Requirements ..............

10-23

10.4.2.2

ODF Electrical Requirements .........................

10-24

104.2

Electrical Requirements .. ........

.. ... ...

10-22

1043

Equipment Room Thermal Requirements ...............

10.4.3.2

ODF Thermal Requirements .......................... 10-24

10.4.4

10.6

Equipment Room Cable Routing Diagram .................... 10-28

10.7

Distribution Subsyastem Connection Maps .................... 10-30

10.7.3
10.7.3.1

10.7.3.2
10.8

... ...,

10-25

Footprint Diagram..........

10.7.2

ODF Acoustic Requirements .............................

10-24

10.5

10.7.1

Thermal Requirements . . .................
... ... ... 10-24

10.4.3.1

10-26

Distribution Subsystem Connection Worksheet..............
Patch Panel Connection Label Maps.......................
Crossconnect/Interconnect Maps - Known Applications Only ..
Termination and Combination Shelf Maps ..............

10-30
10-31
10-37
10-38

RWDF Interconnect Map .............................

1043

Bill of Materials (BOM) Worksheet. . ......

... ............. 10-45

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Product Descriptions
11.1

Ordering Parts . .. ... ... ..

11.2

Product Descriptions . ... .......

... . .. i,

Ordering DECconnect System Fiber Optic Components
12.1

Using the Order Worksheets ..............
.. ... ... ........

12.2

Compiling Order Information from the Design Worksheets. . ... ..

123

Component Sources............c.ooiuimineetnnenernnnennnn

124

Distributors and Manufacturers ................. 0.,

Preinstallation Procedures
13.1

Create the Installation Project P'an . .. ... ...................

132

Order the Cable riant Components ..........................

13.3

SGelect a Network Installation Contractor. .....................

134

Prepare the Work Site and Oversee Installation................

Using 50/125 or 100/140 Micron Fiber
Al

Specifications for 50/125 and 100/140 Micron Fibers ..........
...

ORnet Product Applications . . ................
... .. ... .......

A21

Ornet Product Set - 50/125 Micron Fiber Operation............

A22

Ornet Product Set - 100/140 Micron Fiber Operation...........

FDDI Product Descriptions

..................................

A3l

Guidelines for Using FDDI Products with Previously Installed

Fiber ... e A-T7
A3.1.1
A312
A32

Link Modal Bandwidth Analysis......................... A-8
Optical Link Length/I.oss Budget Analysis ................ A-8
Guidelines for Using FDDI Products with Dual-Window Fiber... A-9

A321

FDDI Product Set - 50/125 Micron Dual-Window Fiber
Operation ......... ... .. ittt A-10

A3.22

FDDI Product Set - 100/140 Micron Dual-Window Fiber
Operation . ......... ... .
it
e A-11

Using FDDI and ORnet Products with Existing Ethernet/802.3 Networks
B.1

Integrating FDDI or ORnet Products with Ethernet/802.3 HardwareB—-2

B.1.1

Floor Configurations . .. ...........
... ... ............... B-2

B.1.2

Building Components ...............
... ... ... ............ B-€

B.1.3
B.2

Campus Configurations ............
... .. .................. B-8
Using ORnet Products with Digital's Ethernet/802.3 Networking
Products .. ... ... ... . e B-11

B21

Guidelines for Connecting ORnet Products to Ethernet/802.3
Networking Hardware ... ................................ B-12

B.2.2

ORnet-to-Ethernet/802.3 Irterconnection Examples........... B-13

Remote Bridge and Repeaier LAN Prodiicts
(o |

Rem-~te Bridge Producta . .. .................................. C-1

Remcie Repeaters . ......

Maximum Fiber Optic Link Distances for Ethernet LAN Products . C-2

... .. .. ... ... .. ... ...

i, Cc-2

Connecting Sites
D.1

Introduction .. ... ...

... ... ... ... D-1

D.2

Campus Configuration .. ... ... ... ...

D.3

Metropolitea Configuration . ....................

D.4

Global Configuration . ... ... . ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ..... D-3

... .............. D-1
............ D3

Special Distance Situations

E.1l

Introduetion . ...ttt

e E-1

NEC Cabling Requirements
F.1
F1l1

Fl11
F1.1.2

F12
F.2

F3
F4

Overview of the Natirnal Electrical Code ...................... F-1
DECconnect System Copper Wiring Classifications ............ F-1
e F-2
Class 2 Wiring .. . ..o ot e iii it ie e
e F-2
Class CM TMWiriDg . . .. ..ot ii ittt ce i eia
Fiber Optic Cables Installed Along with Electrical Cables ... ... ¥-2
Fire Resistance of Cabling . . ....... ... ... i, F-3
Environmeatal Airspace ... ...... ... .. .o i F-3
Fire Code Considerations . . ............ccuiiutiinrnranneeenns F-5

Reference Documents
G.1

G.2

G.3
G.5

G.6
G.7
G.8
G.9
G.10

G.11

G.12

Glossary
Index

ANSI Documentation .......c.oviiimnrrneieenananneinnienanas G-1
e e G-2
e
e
ASTM Documentation....... e
innens G-2
tt
.t
AT&T Documentation .. ..
eiainaannnns G-3
BICSI Documentation . .. ...ttt

EIA/TIA Decumentation .. ....... e G-3
GTE Docinent@tion . .. .. ..o vvivrimiaeeeeeaaaaeenaeranenann G4
IEEE Documentation ............c.covuvivnn coeeennneneenanns G-5

e e G-5
e
ISDN Documentation ........ e
NEC Documentation .............. e e G-5
NEMA Documentation . ... ....oovirurierinnenennerorrnannnnes G-—6
UL Documentation .............ciurierrinnnaninnennrannns G-6
e G-6
Additional Sources. ... ...cv i ittt

Figures
1-1

EIA/TIA-568 Standard Distribution Subsystem Structure ...........

1-2

DECconnect System Structure ...........
... .. ... ...
... 1-8

1-7

1-3

EIA/TIA-568 Standard Backbone Architecture ....................

1-4

DECconnect System Backbone Architectwme .................
... ... 1-11

1-5

EIA/TIA-568 Standard Horizontal Wiring Architecture............. 1-13

1-6

DECconnect System Horizontal Wiring Architecture . ..............

1-14

1-7

Campus Backbone Svbsystem .. ........ ... Lol

1-16

1-8

Building Backbone Subsystem

1-9

Horizontal Wiring Subsystem ...............
... ... ... ... o... 1-20

1-10

..................
... ... .o 1-18

1-10

Computer Room and System Common Equipment Connections . . .. ..

1-11

Work Area Wiring Subsystem ................
... .. ... ... ...... 1-22

1-21

1-12

Administration Subsystem ............
... .. ... i iiio . 1-24

1-13

Campus Connected Through the Hierarchical Physical Star Topology

1-14

Point-to-Point Configuration ......... ... ... ..

1-15

Hierarchical Star Supporting a Point to-Point Configuration ........ 1-29

1-16

Star Configuration ............
... .
ittt

1-30

1-26

... i, 1-28

1-17

Ring Configuration ... ........... ..ttt

1-31

1-18

Hierarchical Star Supporting a Ring Configuration ................

1-32

1-19

Tree Configuration .......... ... ... it

1-33

1-20

Hierarchical Star Supporting a Tree Configuration

1-34

2-1

Overview of the Preplanning Process .. ........................... 2-6

2-2

Logical Network Design Example . ... ........ ...

2-3

Overview of a Cable Plant Design Process ....................... 2-14

...............

... .. ... ... .... 2-8

Loose-Tube Cable Elements . . ...........
... ... ... ...
.. 2-20
25

Slotted-Core Cable Elements . .. ......... .. ... ... ...

it 2-21

2-6

Light-Duty Stranded Tight-Buffered Cable Elements .............. 2-23

2.7

Work Area Wiring or Patch Cable Factory-Terminated Assembly . ... 2-24
Termination Shelf .. ... .. ... .. . .

2-29

2-9

Splice Shelf ... ... ... e
e 2-30

2-10

Storage Shelf ... ... ... .. .

2-11

Combination Shelf. . ...

2--12

Fiber Optic Remote Wall Enclosure ..................
.. ... .. .... 2-33

.. ... ... ..

. .

e 2-31
2-32

2-13

Splice CloBure . ....... ...ttt ittt 2-34

2-14

Wallbox . . ...

2-15

Equipment Racks .......... .. ...

2-16

2.5 mm Bayonet ST-type Connector ... .......................... 2-40

2-17

Single-Fiber Capillary Splice . .. ....... ... ... .. i, 2-43

3-1

Concept Diagram Design Process Flow Chart .. .. .................. 34

3-2

Distribution Hierarchical Relationship ........................... 3-7

MDF and IDF Sharing Equipment Room ......................... 3-8

e 2-35
.

i i 2-37

Concept Dhagram Symbols ... ..........
... .. ...
i
i 3-9

xiil

3-5

Horizontal Wiring Distance Restriction ....................
... .... 3-11

3-6

Horizontal Wiring Subsystem ................
... . oiiiiena.. 3-16

3-7

Sample Horizontal Wiring Concept Diagram........... ........... 3-17

3-9

Distances Within a DECconnect System Site ..................... 3-21
Campus Backbone Single Cable Links - Recommended . ............ 3-23
Campus Backbone Breakout Cable Links - Not Recommended . .. ... 3-24

3-10
3-11

Sample Backbone Concept Diagram .. .................covvvin.., 3-27

3-12

Video Applications. .. ... ... ittt
i
e 3-30

3-13

Data Application . ....... ...ttt 3-31
Fiber Count Worksheet. . ........ ... ... . . . i, 3-36
Concept Diagrams Modified for Link Distances and Fiber Counts. ... 3-36

3-14
3-156
4-1

4-2
43

Administration Subsystem . . . .. ... ... .
i i
e
e 4-2
Crossconnect Components ... .......... ..ot
iiienen. 46
Right-Side/Left-Side Patch Panel Separation ...................... 4-7
Individual Patch Panels .. ... ..........

... ... .

.. 4-9

4-5

Active Networking Equipment Interconnect Components ........... 4-12

4-6

Administration Zone Numbers Added to a Backbone Concept Diagram 4-14

4-7

Fiber Cable Color-Code Construction . ........................... 4-19

4-8

Distribution Subsystem Field Color-Coding....................... 4-21

4-9

Crossover WirIng . . ... ...

4-10

Black and Red Washer Placements at Panel Couplers .............. 4-24

4-11

Fiber Connections to the Wallbox .. ............
... ... ... ..... 4-25

4-12
4-13

Higher-to-Lower (Passive) Connection Rules..
. . .................. 4-27
Lower-to-Lower (Passive) Connection Rules ...................... 4-28

4-14

Active Equipment Connection Rules. . ........................... 4-29

4-15

Distribution Subsystem Higher and Lower Connections ............ 4-30

4-16

Backbone Identifier Worksheet . .............
... ... ..... ... .. ... 4-33

4-17

Horizonta®' Wiring dentifier Worksheet . ... ...................... 4-34

4-18

Cable Identifier Worksheet ................
... ... .. ... cvv.... 4-35

4-19

Wallbox Identifier Worksheet . . . . ..........
... .. .. ... ... ... ... 4-36

4-20

DECconnect System Identifier Summary Sheet ................... 4-38

4-21

Splice Description Worksheet ..................
. ... .. ... .. 4-47

4-22

Patch Panel Label . . ...

4-23

Sample Cable Label .......... .

4-24

Sample Wallbox Label ...

5-1

Design Process Flow Chart .. ..........
... ... ... .
it 5-3

5-2

Campur Backbone 850 nm Link-Loss Model . .. ................... 5-17

5-3

Building Backbone and Horizontal Wiring 850 nm Link-Loss Model.. 5-18

5-6

Building Backbone and Horizoncal Wiring 1300 nm Link-Loss Model. 5-21

5-6

FDDI Logical Diagram Example . .. ........ ... ... . ... ... ... 5-26

5-7

FDDI-to-2.5 mm Bayonet ST-type Cable Assembly ................ 5--28

5-8

Direct FDDI-to-FDDI Equipment DAC Interconnectio

ittt ittt ittt 4-22

....... .. .

. . i, 4-49

... .. ... ...

... ... ... . ...

il 4-51

i it 4-53

Campus and Building Backbone 1300 nm Link-Loss Model ......... 5-20

xiv

ceii..... B30

5-9

Example FDDI Backbone Concept Diagram for a Tree Configuration . 5-33

5-10

Example FDDI Backbone Network Schematic for a Tree Configuration 5-34

5-11

Example FDDI Dual Ring Campus Backbone Concept Diagram . . ... 5-36

5-12

Example FDDI Dual Ring Campus Backbone Network Schematic ... 5-36

5-13

Example FDDI Horizontal Wiring SAS or DAS Concept Diagram .... 5-37

b5-14

Example FDDI Horizontal Wiring SAS or DAS Network Schematic .. 5-38

5-16

ORnet Concept Diagram ........................... e 5-43

b5-16

ORnet Network Schematic.................
.. ... ..
o L. 544

5-17

Network Schematic Symbols .............
... .. ... .. ...
L. 5-46

5-18

Sample Campus Network Schematic ............................ 5-49

5-19

Sample Building Network Schematic............................ 5-60

5-20

Sample Horizontal Network Schematic .......................... 5-51

5-21

Link-Loss Calculation Worksheet ..............
... ... ... ... ... 5-56

5-22

Link Certification Loss Value Worksheet . . . . ...............
... .. 5-59

5-23

Link Certification Loss Value Summary Worksheet . . .. ............ 5-61

6-1

Work Area Wiring Subsystem .............
... ... ... . ... .. ... ... 6-2

6-2

User’s Active Equipment Connection Labels . .. ... ... ... ... ........ 6-6

6-3

H3114-FF 2.5mm Bayonet ST-type Wallbox Connections ............

6-6

BN24D-xx FDDI-to-2.5mm Bayonet ST-type Wallbox Connections. . . ..

6-17

6-5

Work Area Wiring Design Flow Chart ......

6—6

Work Area Wiring Cable Worksheet .. ........................... 6-13

6-7

Work Area Wiring BOM Worksheet ...........
... ... .. ........ 6-15

7-1

Horizontal Wiring Distribution Subsystem .. ......................

7-2

Horizontal Wiring Design Flow Chart ............................ 7-6

... ... ... ... ......... 6-9

7-3

Wallbox Requirements Worksheet. . ...........
... ... ... ... ...
.. 7-8

Cable Tray ... .. e

7-12

7-5

Horizontal Wiring Cable Routing Worksheet.

7-14

7-6

Horizontal Wiring Cable Worksheet . .. ........
... ... ............

7-7

Horizontal Wiring BOM Worksheet ..........
... .. ... .. ... .... 7-20

8-1

Building Backbone Distribution Subsystem ....................
... 8-2

8-2

Building Backbone Design Flow Chart ........................... 8-5

8-3

Building Backbone Cable Routing. ............................... 8-8

Building Backbone Cable Routing Worksheet . .. ......
... ... ..... 8-10

8-5

Building Backbone Cable Worksheet ............................ 8-15

8-6

Building Backkbone BOM Worksheet............................. 8-17

9-1

Campus Backbone Distribution Subsystem . ...................... .

9-2

Campus Backbone Design Flow Chart . .......
... .. ... .. ... ... 9-5

9-3

Cable Entrance Point Worksheet . ... ...

. . ... ... ... .. ...

.. .. .. ... ... ...

Buried Conduit Kouting Method . . .. ... ... ...

...

7-18

9-2

... ... ... 9-11

... ... .. ... ...... 9-16

9-5

Campu: Backbone Cable Routing Worksheet . ... ..... .. ... ... .. ... 9-18

9-6

Splice Closure Worksheet . .. ....... ...

9-7

Campus Backbone Cable Worksheet. ..........
.. ... e 9-27

9-8

Campus Backbone BOM Worksheet ... ... ...

... ... ... . ...

.. ... .. ...

9-22

... .. ............ 9-29

10-1

Distribution Frame Locations . .. ..........
... ... ... ... ....... 10-3

10-2

Distribution Frame Design Flow Chart .......................
... 10-6

10-3

MDF Layout Diagram Example .. ..........
.. ... ... ... .. ..... 10-15

104

IDF Layout Diagram Example ... ... ... .. .

10-5

HDF Layout Diagram Example. . ....... ... ... .. ... ...........

10-6

SDF Layout Diagram Example . ............
... .. ... .. ... ..., 10-18

10-7
10-8

ODF Layout Diagram Example .. .. ..........
.. ... ... ... ...... 10-19
Equipment Clearances ................ciiiiniiiiitiunan
... 10-21

10-9

ODF Space Requirements ...................
... .. 10-23

10-10

10-14

ODF Footprint Diagram Example.. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Equipment Room Footprint Diagram Example...................
Equipment Room Cable Routing Diagram Example...............
Distribution Subsystem Connection Worksheet ..................
Termination Shelf Connection Label Map . ......................

10-27
10-28
10-29
10-32
10-34

10-15

Combination Shelf Connection Label Map.......................

10-36

10-16

Sample Connection Label Map . ...............................

10-37

10-17

Termination Shelf Crossconnect/Interconnect Map................

1040

10-18

Combination Shelf Crossconnect/Interconnect Map .. .............

1042

10-19

RWDF Interconnect Map ......... .. ...

10-20

Distribution Frame BOM Worksheet ..........
.. .. ... .........

A-1

A-2

50/125 Micron Fiber Specifications . .............................. A-3
100/140 Micron Fiber Specifications . . ...............
... ... ...... A-3

B-1

ThinWire Ethernet Office Cluster . . .. ............................ B-3

B-2

FDDI-to-Ethernet Bridge-to-DEMPR Floor Configuration Example.... B4

10-11

10-12
10-13

... ..........
... 10-16
10-17

it i 1044
10-46

FDDI-to-Ethernet Bridge-to-DELNI Floor Configuration Example .... B-5
B4

FDDI-to-Ethernet/802.3 Building Configuration Example............ B-7

B-5

Campus Configuration Example . . ........ ... ...

.. .. ... ... .. .. B9

B-6

FDDI-to-Ethernet Campus Configuration Example . ............... B-10

B-7

ORnet-to-Ethernet/802.3 .. ... ...

. . .. .

B-11

ORnet-to-LAN Bridge Connections . . .........
... ... ... ... ...... B-14

XVi

B-9

ORnet-to-Repeaters Interconnections . ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. ... B-15

B-10

Multiple ORnet Star Connection Configuration ................... B-16

D-1

Wiring Structure . .......... .. e D-2

E-1

Campus and Building Backbone Distances ........................ E-1

E-2

Fiber Optic Ethernet Backbone with an Extended Connection........ E-3

E-3

FDDI Backbone with 2 km (1.2mi) Connection Between Buildings . ... E4

F-1

Typical Above-Ceiling Environmental Airspace .................... F4

F-2

Typical Above-Ceiling Nonenvironmental Airspace ................. F-5

.. 1-6
... ..ot
Structured Wiring Architecture. . ............
.ol 1-9
... ........
Backbone Subsystem Architecture .....
Horizontal Wiring Subsystem Architecture ....................... 1-12
Unknown Application Design Process ............................ 2-2
Known Application Design Process .. ................c.oiiint. 2-4
Connector Loss Values ...............iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiinnnann. 242
Fiber Count Requirements by Application........................ 3-31
DECconnect System Recommended Fiber Counts for Unknown
Applications . .. ... ... . i 3-32
.. 4-17
it
....
...
Fiber Optic Cable Color Coding. . ....
Fiber Bundle Distribution and Color Coding...................... 4-18
..... 4-22
.. ... oot
Higher/Lower Color Fields . ..........
e 4-51
i e
e
tt
i e
Label Colors . ... ov et
Cable Plant Environmental Specifications......................... 5-11

10-1

Component Requirements ............... ...t 5-12
Maximum Link-Loss Planning for Unknown Applicetons ........... 5-23
FDDI Link-Loss Table ........ ... i, 5-32
ORnet Link-Loas Table . . . ......... ... i i 5-42
.. ... ... 10-25
ODF Acceptable Acoustical Values ..................
ORnet Interconnections with Digital's LAN Products .............. B-12
Remote Fiber Optic LAN Product Maximum Link Lengths .......... C-3

xvii

PAGE

XVIii

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Preface

This manual describes Digital's DECconnect System structured fiber optic wiring.
In addition, it provides planning and configuration guidelines to implement a
structured fiber optic network.
This manual is written for network designers. It provides guidelines that meet
international requirements. Most countries regulate construction through strictly
enforced local building and elactrical codes.

This manual refers to certain codes, such as the National! Electrical Codes (NEC),
that have been adopted by local jurisdictions across the United States. However,
it is beyond the scope of this document to address specific local codes.
NOTE

It is the responsibility of the designer to understand,
implement, and conform to local building and electrical
codes.
Objectives of This Manual

This manual provides:
@

An introduction to Digital’s structured fiber optic wiring to people who are

considering using structured wiring in their campus or building.
a

Descriptions, guidelines, and procedures to help:
— Design fiber optic distribution subsystems for structured wiring cable
plants.
— Integrat- --tive network equipment into structured wiring (for example, FUDI and fiber optic Ethernet).

xix

Intended Audience

This manual is for network designers responsible for:
s

Deciding to use structured wiring at a campus or building.

Planning and designing campus and building wiring.

Structure of This Manual

This manual has thirteen chapters, seven appendixes, a glossary, and an index.
The first two chapters provide architectural and general guidelines for structured wiring. The remaining chapters provide detailed design and planning for
the cable plant. The appendixes provide design and applications information,
and component ordering information.
Chapter 1

Provides an overview of Digital’s structured fiber optic wiring.

Chapter 2

Introduces the general requirements for planning and designing a
structured wiring cable plant.

Chapter 3

Describes the concept diagram that defines how the buildings and
floors will be interconnected into a structured wiring cable plant.

Chapter 4

Describes the administration subsystem and Digital’s implementation
strategy for structured fiber optic wiring.

Chapter &

Describes how to design the fiber links and create the network schematic
diagram.

Chapter 6

Describes how to design the fiber optic work area wiring subsystem.

Chapter 7

Describes how to design the fiber optic horizontal wiring subsystem
cables and cable routing.

Chapter 8

Describes how to design the fiber optic building backbone subsystem
cables and cable routing.

Chapter 9

Describes how to design the campus backbone subsystem cables and
cable routing.

Chapter 10

Describes how to design the distribution frames.

Chapter 11

Describes Digital’s fiber optic products and lists other sources of fiber
products.

Chapter 12

Contains worksheets for ordering fiber products.

Chapter 13

Provides a preinstallation checklist.

Appendix A

Provides design considerations when using 50/125 or 100/140 micron
fiber.

Appendix B

Provides infurmation on using FDDI and ORnet products with IEEE
802.3/Ethernet networks.

Appendix C

Provides information on using Digital’s remote bridges and repeaters.

Appendix D

Provides general information on connecting sites together or connecting
remote sites together.

Appendix E

Provides information on special distance situations where the interbuilding distances are greater than allowed for a site.

Appendix F

Provides a summary of the National Electrical Codes (NEC) cabling
requirements.

Appendix G

Provides information for ordering reference documents.

Glossary

Defines the technical terms used in this manual.

DECconnect System Documentation

Ordering information for Digital documents is provided in the back of this maaual. The following briefly describes the contents of this reference material:
®

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Installation (EK-DECSY-FI)
Provides guidelines for installing fiber optic cable and passive components
as well as preinstallation and postinstallation certification procedures.

DECconnect System Illustrated Parts Breakdown (EK-DECON-IP)

Provides a complete parts breakdown for Digital’s copper and fiber optic
passive cable plant components.
DECconnect System H3111-xx Modular Wallbox Installation Instructions
(EK-Dr. "SY-WI)

Provides guidelines for installing the H3111-xx wallbox and that wallbox’s
snap-in/slide-in connector panels for fiber and copper.
®

DECconnect System General Description (EK-DECSY-GD)

Provides a general overview of the products and services that make up
Digital's DECconnect System and reviews the planning and installation processes for building a comprehensive communications network.

DECconnect System Requirements Evaluation Workbook (EK-DECSY-EG)
Describes how to evaluate network requirements prior to planning a
DECconnect System.

DECconnect System Planning and Configuration Guide (EK-DECSY-CG)

Contains planning requirements and guidelines for configuring DECconnect
System Ethernet LANs using copper and fiber. Includes detailed product
information for all DECconnect System copper wiring products.
DECconnect System Facilities Cabling Installation Guide (EK-DECSY-FC)
Provides procedures for installing copper wiring products (Ethernet coaxial
cables, twisted-pair data and voice cables, ThinWire cables, transceivers,
and wallboxes) within a DECconnect System.
DECconnect System Satellite Equipment Room (SER) Installation Guide
(EK-DECSY-SR)

Describes how to install an SER, including racks and active and passive
equipment used with copper wiring.

DECconnect System Office Communications Cabinet (OCC) Installation
Guide (EK-DECSY-OC)

Describes how to install an OCC used with copper wiring.

DECconnect System Stand-Alone ThinWire Networks: Planning and
Installation Guide (EK-DECSY-TG)
Describes how to plan for and instal .. stand-alone ThinWire network.
Other Digital Documentation

Networks and Communications Product Documentation (EK-NACPD-RE)
Lists the title and order number for each publication associated with Digital’s
networke and communications products.
Networks and Communications Buyer’s Guide
Lists and describes the complete line of Digital’s available networking products.

Introduction to Network Performance (EK-NETWK-TM)

Helps the network designer set reasonable perfermance expectations while
designing, implementing, or reconfiguring a network, by providing a base
from which to formulate performance requirements and eval..ate the results.

xxii

Other Reference Documentation

Consult the following reference during the structured wiring design process.
s

The Building Industry Consulting Service, Internatiunal (BICSI) BICSI

Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual
Appendix E provides ordering information for this reference as well as other reference documents not listed here.

xxiii

}8.0.0:0:0.0.9°0.0:0.0.0.¢.0.9.0.8.0.69.0605.806980.00000.00000900995.9069064

100000.00.09.000.000966600000686000086¢86090890880909804
1.9.8:0.8.8.0.0.9.9.0.0.0.86.608$.6:0.600009008608900090888900094
PO 099069000:0.0000088000880006008898808¢8890808084¢4
OGO 0000000.9880060800800500089880008900484904
}9.8.0.00.0.0.0.90.0.00.09.09999899680900608900008000004
)000.0.0:090.0.0.0.9.0.9.9.0.0.8.6.90.06.6.9006.69000.0000.004
10,00.00.000.0.0.00.0.00.9.909.9.6089000.990900.8004

F0.0.0.0.0880.0605.09.0696006.0969948085999484
$0.06.0.0900000.90089.6080860908004604964
).0.9.6.9.0.000.9.5.0.9.0.4.9.0.00.6.0.0.0.06499.0901
)0.6.0.0.0008.000009.5900890908880.9
)9.9.0.00.0.84.0.0.9.0.8.0.0.580¢0.0009094

)0:0.0.9:0.9.8.0.0.6.0.6.0.9.9.0.0.0.6.960040.4
10.9.9.9.0.0906.0.06.9.90.6.0406.000.4
b.010.0.0.9.0.0.0.0.9.9.9.9.4.6.0¢.¢9.84
)0.0.0.6.0.9.6.0.9.9.0.9.9.0.6.60.04

$.9:9:9:9.0.0.9.9.9,9.4:¢.9.9.9.04
p9.90.9.8.6.0.6.0.9.6.6,6.9.64
):9.6:9.0.9.0.9.9.9.6.0.9.4

XAXXXAXKY
KX
XX XXAXKXX
0,9.9.4.9.9¢
AKXXXX

XXX
X

X
XXX

XXXXX
XXXXXXX

XXAKXXKXXKK
)9.9.0.9.9.9.9.9.0.4.¢
XEXXXAXXXXKAKL
)9.6:4.9.9.6.¢.0.9.4.6.0.6.0.4

19.0.0.9.0.9.0.0.9.9.9.9.9.6.0.04
KXAXARAXXAKAKXKXXAKKXXK
),0.9.0.9.0.8.9.9.4.8.6.9.6.6.0.0.4.¢.0.0.4
):0.6.00:6.9.4.9.9.69.0.0.6.9.9.9.0.0.0.604

).9:9.9.0 60$.6.0.0.0.9.0.9.0.0.0099900
04

p0. 000 V900090899.9.0.09.909.9.909004
p 00,900 6.0 0W 009009.0.9.9.0.996.0850004
b0.9.9.9.9.9.90.8.0.:9.0.99.0.0.0.6.0.0.90.90.609.0.98.9.0
.4

)9.0.0.9.0.0.9.0.9.0.9.0.0.0.9.0599.90:0.0.¢9.9.9.0.9.9.0.9.0.¢
}9.9.0:0.0.6.9.0.5.099.0.99.9.9.90 00508:0.0.00.90.8.64.964
S 8.95.0.5.9.0.05 00009599068

S 9.0 94

BSOSO
N A

9000:0:0.9:9.0.0.9.:6.0.0.44

AD AN

SN GD 9.6:0.9.9.4

DSV ON GOSN D00.0.090.09.6.6.0.6.84

P00 040999909908 000080000:0.00.90899.9.9.9¢
A5, 00.0:0.0.0.0.0.9.9.9.9
0.0:9.0.0 5.0 500000 0:9:9.6.0,0.0.9,0.0.6.0.6..4
KOO 0P 00000900.0809.090.9099800.0000000.96.0000006.0060¢04
).9:0.9.0:0.9.9.6.9.0.9.6.9.0.0.0.6.0009.0.0.0.0.90.0.6.0.9.0.6.9.9.08.90.0.0.0.6.0.0.0.64.$.6.9.
1:9.8.9.0.6.0:9.6.0.9.0.0.9.9.0.0.90.0.9.0.9.0.0.6.909.6.0.0.9.6.09969.6.0.0.06.906.99.09.9.4

Overv.ew
NOTE

There are common terms in this manual (for example,

campus, support, building) that are used in applications
specific to the manual. To understand their meanings
as they apply to this manual, review the terins in the
Glossary.

The introduction of Digital’s DECconnect System has contributed to changing
the way building and campus wiring solutions are installed for local area networks (LLANs). Until now, the DECconnect System building wiring solutions

have supported predominantly copper media for IEEE 802.3/Ethernet and pointto-point (including fiber) solutions to LAN communication. Copper solutions
include ThinWire, standard Thickwire ceaxial cable, RG-58, twisted-pair, and
shielded or unshielded cable.
With the evolution of fiber optic technology, building and campus wiring is

moving to the use of fiber optic cables. This allows the wiring to support new,
high-capacity data communication technologies such as Fiber Distributed Data
Interface (FDDI).

Factors contributing te the copper-to-fiber migration in campus and building
wiring include:
o

A much higher data transfer rate

Protection from ground potential differences and electromagnetic

interference (EMI)
=

Smaller diameter and lighter weight cables

Accommodation of greater distances for high-speed data transfer

Decreasing fiber optic cable and component costs

1.1 DECconnect System Structured Wiring
The DECconnect System has evolved into an application-independent approach
to structured wiring for the campus environment that complies with and expands on the EIA /TIA-568 Commercial Building Wiring Standard. Therefore,
the DECconnect System’s concept:
a

Serves current campus and building communication requirements

Provides for future communication needs

Provides easy maintenance of campus and building wiring

The DECconnect System’s structured wiring supports fiber and copper solutions
as follows:

Defines a wiring system that allows connecting the communication devices
and computer equipment in one building to the communication devices and
computer equipment in any building within the campus.

Provides for all building wiring structure (cabling and associated distribu-

tion components) from work area equipment to mainframe computers.
m

Specifies the connectors, cables, passive components, and installation guidelines that provide for reliability, quality, and compatibility.

Can be used for applications such as:

— Data (high- or low-speed)

— Imaging (plotters, facsimile machines, and graphics stations)
— Sensing (building management)
— Video (interactive teleconferencing or security needs)
— Voice (telephone and intercom)

Digital's DECconnect System structured wiring is a cost-effective appinach to the
design and management of the cable plant.

1-2

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

1.2 Fiber Optic Structured wiring
The DECconnect System’s approach to fiber optic structured wiring is to:
w

Identify a set of passive fiber optic components for use in campus and building wiring

Define the design and installation guidelines to combine fiber optic components to form EIA/TIA-compliant wiring structure

Provide a design model for integrating active networking equipment (such

as FDDI and Fiber Optic Ethernet) with the structured wiring
NOTE
Digital recommends 62.5/125 dual window multimode
fiber for all new installations. For support of 50/125 or
100/140 fiber size, see Appendix A.

As an EIA/TIA-compliant approach to structured wiring, the DECconnect System’s
structured fiber optic wiring allowsa:
=

An application-independent system

The interconnection of many different types of communication devices

Easy reconfiguration and cable management

In addition, Digital's use of an EIA/TIA-compliant structured wiring permits installing fiber optic wiring based on current needs that can still:
a

Grow with the user’s networking requirements

Accommodate advances in fiber optic technology

1.3 Structured Versus Unstructured Wiring
A costly approach to network growth is to install more wiring into the cable
plant with little thought about future requirements. The major risk of unstructured wiring is no maintenance capabilities and high replacement cost for all
new cabling solutions.

Overview

1-3

The following comparison chart describes some advantages of structured wiring:
Structured Wiring

Unstructured Wiring
Application dependent.

Appiication independent.

Often requires rewiring when moving

Allows movement of people and

people or equipment.

equipment without rewiring.

Does not allow for growth or change.

Allows growth and change.

Difficult to reconfigure wiring and

Easy to reconfigure wiring and com-

communication equipment.

munication equipment.

Nonmodular, inflexible system.

Modular design allows flexibility.

Limited management and problem iso-

Allows for administration and
maintenance of the cable plant.
Facilitates the isolation of equipment and cable problems.

lation capabilities.

Dedicated to specific purposes that
become obsolete.

Supports a multiproduct environment.

1.4 Industry Standards

Digital's structured wiring complies with the EIA /TIA-568 Commercial Building
Wiring Standard. Complying with this industry standard ensures that a uniform
building wiring platform is established that supports a multiproduct environment.

The following documents may provide helpful information during the structured
wiring design process:

The Building Industry Consulting Service, International (BICSI) BICSI
Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual

The National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) National Electrical Code

(NEC)

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

1.4.1 EIA/TIA-568 Commercial Building Wiring Standard
The EIA/TIA-568 standard addresses the structure of the wiring and provides
guidelines and restrictions for designing passive structured wiring. The standard includes guidelines and restrictions concerning the physical topology, fiber
optic media size (62.5/125 micron), and the use of copper and fiber in structured
wiring.

1.4.2 BICSi Telecommunlications Distribution Methods Manual
This manual provides technical information, design guidelines, and recommendations for the building facilities needed to support structured wiring. It covers
everything from grounding, bonding, and electrical protection with detailed descriptions of equipment room requirements.

Consult the BICSI manual for various installation methods for the structured
wiring cable plant.
1.4.3 Natlonal Electrical Code (NEC)
The NEC's purpose is to safeguard people and property from hazards arising
from the use of electricity, electrical equipment, and conductors. This advisory
code (updated every three years) regulates the installation of electrical equipment and conductors within buildings.

The NEC is routinely adopted by communities across the United States as part

of their local building codes. Some communities have local requirements that
differ from the NEC. (Local codes supersede the NEC.) Copies of the NEC and
relevant local building codes are needed during the design process. Appendix D
provides a summary of NEC cabling requirements. The current NEC manual is
the 1990 version.

Overview

1-5

1.5 Structured Wiring Architecture
Table 1-1 shows where the DECconnect System'’s structured wiring complies
with, or expands on, the EIA/TIA architecture.
Table 1-1:

Structured Wiring Architecture

EIA/TIA-568 Standard

DECconnect System

Uses the hierarchical physical star
topology.

Complies.

Administration subsystem: consists

Complies.

of the hardware involved in connecting the subsystems and documentation
to manage and maintain end-to-end
connectivity.

Backbone subsystem: consists of the
backbone cables, main and intermediate crossconnects (MCs and ICs),
mechanical terminations, and interbuilding entrance facilities that provide
for connecting the horizontal wiring
subsystems together into a structured
wiring cable plant.

Complies with and expands on the standard
by dividing the single EIA/TIA backbone sub-

system into two separate backbones: a campus backbone, covering the interbuilding portion of the EIA/TIA backbone, and a building

backbone, covering the intrabuilding portion.

Horizontal wiring subsystem: consists

Complies with and expands on the standard

of a telecommunications closet (TC),

by using the horizontal wiring system to con-

telecommunication outlets, and the hor-

nect system common equipment (host comput-

izontal wiring cables that connect the

ers, or central voice or data equipment) and

TC to the telecommunication outlets.

computer room equipment to the structured
wiring, either through a wallbox or through
direct cable connection with the system common equipment or computer room equipment.

Work area subsystem: connects the

Complies.

station equipment to the telecommunications outlet end of the horizontal
wiring subsystem.

Figure 1-1 illustrates the EIA/TTA-568 standard distribution subsystem structure. Figure 1-2 illustrates the overall DECconnect System structure.

1-6

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 1-1:

EIA/TIA-568 Standard Distribution Subsystem Structure

Horizontal
Wiring

Cable

Telecommunications

Outiet

Telecommunications

Closet (TC)

-s8— Sackbone

Cable

VV\Vnc:: Area
9

- ~Cable

Backbone
Cables

Intermediate

Crossconnect (IC) q
Equipment Room

Backbone

Cables
Main

Crossconnect (MC)

Equipment Room

LKXG—3164—-B9A

Qverview

Figure 1-2:

DECconnect Sysiem Structure

Horizontal
Wiring Cabies

Wallbox

Remote Wall
Distribution Frame
Satellite

Distribution Frame
Equipment Room

-7

Office
Distribution Frame

Horizontal
Distribution Frame
Equipment Room

~t—— Campus
Cable

Work Area

Wiring Cable
!

i
|

Building

Backbone
Cables

Intermediate

Distribution Frame
Equipment Room

!
|
i

Horizontal

Wiring Cable

i
|
|
|
1
1
1
|

|
i

System Common
Egquipment
Campus
Backbone
Cables
Main

Distribution Frame
Equipment Room

J
LKG-2924—B9A

1-8

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

1.5.1 Backbone Subsystem Architecture

The backbone connects to the horizontal wiring subsystems. Table 1-2 compares
the EIA/TIA-568 standard with the DECconnect System backbone architecture.
Table 1-2:

Backbone Subsystem Architecture

EIA/TIA-568 Standard

DECconnect System

A single backbone subsystem using the
hierarchical physical star topology.

Complies with and expands on the architecture by dividing the single EIA/TIA backbone
into campus and building backbones.

A main crossconnect (MC) connects the
backbone together.

(MDF) to contain the MC function.

An intermediate crossconnect (IC) con-

Complies by using an intermediate distribu-

nects the intrabuilding and interbuild-

tion frame (IDF) to contain the IC function.

Complies by using a main distribution frame

ing portions of the backbone.

Allows up to two hierarchical levels of

crossconnects within a backbone link,
and no more than three crossconnects

Complies by allowing crossconnects in the
campus backbone’s MDF and the building
backbone’s IDF.

in the backbone links between any two
horizontal wiring subsystems.

Supports using 62.5/125 micron fiber
while referencing other fiber sizes.

Complies with and expands on the standard

by supporting the installation of single-mode

fiber for future applications. See Appendix A
for information about using 50/125 or 100/140

micron fiber.
Allows a total backbone distance of

Complies with and expands on the standard

2000 meters (6560 feet), with up to
500 meters (1640 feet) available to a
backbone'’s intrabuilding link.

by allowing backbone distances greater than
2000 meters (6560 feet). See Appendix E for
information about special distance situations.

Supports using active devices in con-

Complies with and expands on the standard

necting multiple sites. The active de-

by describing how to connect multiple sites

vice connections are outside the scope

together.

of the standard.
Provides fiber uptic link specifications

at 850 nm and 1300 nm operation.

Complies with and expands on the standard
by defining fiber optic link-loss models and
budget planning numkers for 850 nm and
1300 nm operation.

Figure 1-3 and Figure 14 illustrate the EIA/TIA and DECconnect System backbone approaches.

Overview

1-9

Figure 1-3:

EIA/TIA-568 Standard Backbone Archit.cture

—Intrabuilding
Backbone

x—

Intrabuilding

Backbone

—t—

Cable

Bldg

/—- lnterbuilding—\
P

i
W

Cables

N\,

Backbone

A
\?K\

Intrabuilding

Cables

JARAY
«

Bidg

Backbone

Note: Only three buildings shown
egend:

Crossconnect

Intermsdiate Crossconnect

Main Crossconnect

Telecommunications Closet
LKG-33087-891

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 1—4:

DECconnect System Backbone Architecture

HDF

—— Building

IDN’

Backbone

N1/

Cables

MDF

Bidg

LTM

Campus

-;—

Backbone
Cable

IDF

/\- Campus
—/\N
Backbone

‘
H[ilz

Cables

——
.\l-_iDF

Bldg
2

Building
Backbone
Cables

IDF

——
HDF,

HDF

Bidg
3

Legend:

Crossconnect

HOF

Horizontal Distribution Frame

IDF

Intermediate Distribution Frame

MDF

Main Distribution Frame
LKG-3388-89

Overview

1-1

1.5.2 Horizontal Wiring Subsystem Architecture
The horizontal wiring connects:

The active equipment in the work area to the backbone.

System common equipment and computer room equipment to the backbone.

Table 1-3 compares the EIA/TIA-568 standard with the DECconnect System horizontal wiring architecture.

Table 1-3:

Horizontal Wirlng Subsystem Architecture

EIA/TIA-568 Standard

DECconnect System

Allows a sirgle crossconnect in a horizontal wiring link at the telecommunications closet (TC) connection between

Complies with and expands on the standard
by allowing the link’s single horizontal wiring

the horizontal wiring and backbone

tion frame (SDF) or office distribution frame

cables.

(ODF) when active networking equipment
is used in the horizontal distribution frame

crossconnect to occur at a satellite distribu-

(HDF).
Specifies a 90-meter (295-foot) maxi-

Complies.

mum horizontal cable length.

and the telecommunications closet for

Complies with and expands on the standard
by allowing the transition to occur at an
SDF, ODF, or remote wall distribution frame

connecting similar cables together.

(RWDF). The transition can take the form

Allows a single transition point between the telecommunications outlet

of administration interconnects (at the SDF,
ODF, or RWDF) or crossconnects (at the SDF

or ODF).

Connects to the work area wiring

Complies by using a wallbox to perform the

through a telecommunications outlet.

telecommunications outlet function.

Figure 1-5 and Figure 1-6 illustrate the EIA/TIA and DECconnect System’s horizontal wiring approaches.

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 1-5:

EIA/TIA-568 Standard Horizontal Wiring Architecture

Horizontal

Wiring Cables
(90 m [295 fi]

maximum)

Work Area
Wiring Cables
(3m[9.8 ]
maximum)

Legend:

Active User Equipment

Crossconnect

Telecommunications Closet

E
[s)

Telecommunications Outlet
Transition Point

LKG-~3380-801

Overview

1-13

Figure 1-6:

DECconnect System Horizuntal Wiring Architecture

HOF
X

/[\
Horizontal Wiring

Cables
maximum)

Work Area
Wiring Cables
{3m[9.81]

maximum)

*These transition point distribution frames are equal in hierarchy.

Legend:
S
X
HDF

ODF
RWDF

SDF
wB

Active User Equipment
Crossconnect

Horizontal Distribution Frame
Office Distribution Frame
Remote Wall Distributy
in Frame
Satellite Distribution Frame
Walibox

LKG-3300-80i

DECconnact System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

1.6 Structured Wiring Subsystems
As described in Table 1-1, Digital's structured wiring architecture contains the
following subsystems:
=

Campus backbone

Building backbone

Horizontal wiring

Work area wiring

®»

Administration

The following sections briefly describe each of the subsystems.
1.6.1 Campus Backbone Subsystem

This subsystem connects the buildings of the site and consists of the following:
&

Main distribution frame (MDF) - located in an equipment room; consists

of the active, passive, and support components that provide the connection
between the site’s building IDFs.
w

Campus backbone cables - provides the interbuilding connections.

Figure 1-7 illustrates a campus subsystem.

Qverview

1-15

Figure 1-7:

Campus Backbone Subsystem

MDF
Equipment
Room

Campus

/ Backbone
Part of
Building 1

IDF
Equipment

Part of

Room*

Building 2

Part of

/_Building 3

— |DF

Equipment

Room*

Campus —a=

~a——— Campus

Backbone

Backbone
Cable

IDF
Equipment

Room*

Cable

N
g

*IDF is part of the building backbone subsystem
LKG—2928-89A

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

1.6.2 Building Backbone Subsystem

This subsystem connects the building’s horizontal wiring subsystems to the campus backbone. The building backbone subsystem consists of the following:
e

Intermediate distribution frame (IDF) - located in an equipment room; con-

sists of the active, passive, and support components that provide the connection between the building and campus backbones. The IDF also provides
the connection within the building backbone cabling.
»

Building backbone cables - connects the IDF to each horizontal wiring subsystem.

Figure 1-8 illustrates a building backbone subsystem for a multistory building.

Overview

1-17

Figure 1-8:

Bullding Backbone Subsystem

Building

Bockbon:\
Cable

IDF Equipment
Room

Building —" Backbone
Cable

*HDF is part of the
horizontal wiring

subsystem.
LKG—2922—-89A

1-18

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

1.6.3 Horlzontal Wiring Subsystem

This subsystem connects the building backbone to the work area wiring and includes the following:
Horizontal distribution frame (HDF) - consists of the active, passive, and
support components that provide for the connection between the horizontal
wiring and the building backbone.

Other distribution frames - provide for a transition point within the horizontal wiring between the wallbox and the HDF. The transition point can take
any of the following forms:

— Satellite distribution frame (SDF) - an open-rack distribution frame located in an equipment room.

— Office distribution frame (ODF) - an enclosed rack that is usually located in the office area.

— Remote wall distribution frame (RWDF) - a small wall-mounted cabinet.

The transition point at an SDF or ODF can be either an administration interconnect or crossconnect. The crossconnect at the SDF or ODF connects
wallbox cable fiber to HDF cable fiber when active networking equipment is
connecting the horizontal wiring and building backbone cables at the HDF.
An administration interconnect at the SDF or ODF connects active equip-

ment to the horizontal wiring.
Wallbox (WB) - also referred to as the faceplate, information outlet, or
telecommunications outlet, the wallbox provides an interconnection between
the work area wiring and horizontai wiring.
Horizontal wiring cables - connects the various elements of the horizontal
wiring together, such as the HDF, SDFs, ODFs, RWDFs, and wallboxes.
Can also be used to directly connect the HDF to the computer room or to
system common equipment (central computer, data, veice, or video equipment).

Figure 1-9 illustrates the horizontal wiring distribution subsystem used to connect the building backbone to the work area wiring. This figure shows the four
Digital-supported ways of connecting the horizontal wiring subsystems to the
building backbone and to the work area wiring:
HDF-to-wallbox
HDF-to-SDF-to-wallbox

Overview

1-19

HDF-to-ODF-to-wallbox

HDF-to-RWDF-to-wallbox

Figure 1-9:

Horlzontal Wiring Subsystem

Herizontal
Wiring
Cables

Backbone
Cable

Horizontal Wiring
Cables

LKG~2927-89A

Figure 1-10 illustrates how the horizontal wiring subsystem can connect to com-

puter room equipment or system common equipment and to the building backbone.

1-20

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 1-10:

Computer Room and System Common Equipment Connections

Horizontal

Wiring
Cable

System Common
Equipment or
Computer Room

Equipment

\—- Building

Backbone
—able

Overview

LKG~3395—89A

1-21

1.6.4 Work Area Wiring Subsystem
As shown in Figure 1-11, this subsystem consists of the wiring needed to con-

nect the work area active equipment to the horizontal wiring wallbox.
Figure 1-11:

Work Area Wiring Subsystem

Work

Areaq

Wiring Cable

Work Area
Device

Wollbox*/ '

*Wallbox is part of horizontal wiring subsystem.
LKG—~2930-88A

1-22

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

1.6.5 Administration Subsystem
This subsystem consists of crossconnects and interconnects to link the five distribution subsystems. This crossconnect/interconnect provides administration
to allow connection of the structured wiring to various parts of the building as
needs change.

For example, wallboxes are interconnects between the horizontal wiring subsystem and work area -viring subsystems. Wallboxes enable the relocation of station
devices by plugging them into a new wallbox. Network communication can then
be rerouted to the new wallbox by the crossconnect at HDF.
Crossconnects are where two cables from the same or different subsystem connect together at a patch panel using panel-mounted couplers and a patch cable.
Crossconnects can only be used to connect fibers at the:
«

Campus subsystem’s main distribution frame (MDF)

Building backbone’s intermediate distribution frame (IDF)

Horizontal wiring distribution frame.

NOTE

The horizontal wiring subsystem has only one crossconnect. The crossconnect car be located at the HDF, SDF,
or ODF.

Interconnects join two cables with a single pair of connectors using a panel-

mounted fiber optic coupler or wallbox-mounted fiber optic coupler. A wallbox,
for example, is an interconnect point, as is the connection between a patch panel
and active networking equipment.
Figure 1-12 illustrates the interconnects and crossconnects within a site. As

shown, the wallboxes and remote wall distribution frames (RWDFs) are interconnect points only, while the MDF, IDF, HDF, SDF, and ODF can have crossconnects or interconnects.

Overview

1-23

Figure 1-12:

Administration Subsystem

(CC/IC)

IDF

(cc/e)

LKG-3396—-89A

1-24

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

1.7 Topology

The topology is the physical arrangement of the structured cabling and components used for connecting a site’s buildings and floors together. Digital’s topology
is the hierarchical physical star.

Figure 1-13 illustrates a site that is connected using the hierarchical physical
star topology:
s

The highest point in the hierarchical physical star topology is the campus

backbone subsyatem’s MDF. It radially connects the buildings into the star
topology using campus backbone cable.
s

The buildings connect to the topology using building backbone subsystem
IDFs. They radially connect the floors into the star topology using building
backbone connections.

The floors connect to the topology using horizontal wiring subsystem HDFs.
They radially connect the wallboxes into the star topology using the horizontal wiring. This wiring is the end point in the hierarchical physical star
topology.

The following are advantages of this hierarchical physical star topology:

Jverview

Easily configures to support a wide range of active equipment configurations

Provides central management and maintenance points

Allows for modular nondisruptive system growth

1-25

Figure 1-13:

Campus Connected Through the Hierarchical Physical Star Topology

LKG-3397~ 89A

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

1.8 Configuraticns
The cable plant wiring infrastructure is a cabling arrangement which supports

active equipment configurations. Some of the different types of configurations
are:

w»

Point-to-point

Star

®=

Ring

Tree

The hierarchical physical star topology supports the use of different configurations within the same structured wiring cable plant. For example, a ring configuration for the campus and building backbones; a star or tree configuration for

the horizontal wiring.
1.8.1 Point-to-Point Configuration
The point-to-point cabling configuration has no central administration but is a

typical unstructured wiring arrangement as shown in Figure 1-14. Figure 1-15
illustrates point-to-point configurations that are supported over a hierarchical

physical star. As illustrated, the MDF becomes the central administration for

each of the point-to-point links to the IDFs.

Overview

1-27

Figure 1-14:

Point-to-Point Configuration

Bidg 2 [

\ Bldg 3

LKG-3383-801

i-2f

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 1—-15:

Hierarchical Star Supporting a Point-to-Point Configuration

Bldg 4

LKG-4000-001

Overview

1-29

1.8.2 Star Configuration

This cabling configuration is a collection of point-to-point links sharing a central
administration area. Figure 1-16 illustrates a star configuration.

The star configuration is directly supported over the hierarchical physical star
by defining the various hierarchical levels of administration. In this case, the
central administration area is defined as the MDF.
Figure 1-16:

Star Configuration

LKQ-3384-091

1-30

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

1.8.3 Ring Configuration

In a ring configuration, the cabling is arranged so that all the buildings are connected together to form a complete loop as shown in Figure 1-17.

Figure 1-17:

Ring Configuration

Bldg
5

Bidg

9'1"9

Bidg
3

Bldg
2

LKG-3385-801

Overview

1-31

As shown in Figure 1-18, the hierarchical star topology can support a ring cabling configuration.

Figure 1-18:

Hierarchical Star Supporting a Ring Configuration

IDF

Bldg 4

IDF

) Bidg s

IDF

IDF
Bldg 6

Eldg 2

LKG-4100-001

1-32

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

1.8.4 Tree Configuration

In a tree configuration, the cabling is arranged radially from each of the buildings and floors. Figure 1-19 illustrates a tree configuration.
Figure 1—19:

Tree Configuration

Bldg 3

LKG-4101-001

The hierarchical star supports this configuration by defining levels of hierarchy

in the tree. As shown in Figure 1-20, the MDF always connects to the IDF and
the IDF always connects to the HDF through the cabling.

Overview

1-33

Figure 1-20:

Hierarchical Star Supporting a Tree Configuration

HDF
-

Floor 1

Floor 2
LKQ-4102-001

1-34

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

$0:8100.0:0:0.6.0.0.0.0.08.8.0.0.6.0.9.0000.66.6.606000000088680060608004
EO 8000060008608 0060808088606.00880888000¢80080480800¢
$0.0.8.00.0.:6.6.6.0.0.:08.6.6.6.9.009
0806089 00088506000000800 04
).9.0.:0:0109:0:00.0.0.0.9.6090.0.9990900908.9880000.000000080.4

)00.0.0.908.0.00.00.0.060.60080086.600900960088000040¢
$9.9:0.6.9:¢.0.9:0:9.0.6:0.9.90.9.9.9.9.06089.060$9.999009880001
}9:9:0:9.9.99.0.0.90.09.9.0.0.0.0.0.0.6.6.6.000.00.0.9.60.06.00.9094

):0:0.0.9.9.0.09.6.0.0.9.0.0.0.8.0.9.6.000.9.6.009.0.9.6.¢10.6.0094
$8.80.0.009:6090.99.6:09.90964$¢9090094000900¢
J00.00.0.00.09.09.00.8998.09.004608680686004
h0.8.6.6:9.0.0.0.0.0.0.8.8.0.0.0.0.0.0.00480000009064
)0.0.0.8.0.0.0.09.0.0.6.0.0.0.$.0.0.0.0949.6984¢.0.4

}.9:8:0.:0.0.0.9.0.0.9.0.09.8.0.0.09.800690904
0.9,9.0.0.6.9.6.9.0.0.0.0.:9.0.0.6.9.0.6.9,0.0.9.04
).:0.9.9.0.9.9.0.9.0.0.0.9.8.0,9.6.9.6.90.0.64

). 8.9.9.6:0:0.0.9.0.6.0.6.9.0.0.0000.0
P9.9.9:9.6.6.0.0:0.6.6.6.¢.0.0.6994

$.9.0.0.9.0.0.0.:0.0.0.9.0.9.9
0,64
XEXKXXXXXKXKXHEXX

$,:9:9.9.9.9,0.0.0.9.8.9.8.4
).:0.9.9:0.9.9.¢.9.9.0.4
$,0.6.0.6.0.0.8.9.
),9.9.9.9.9.9¢
XXXXX

XXX

X
XXX
XXAXK

XXXXX".X

$.9:0:9.9.9.9.4.9.4
XEXKXAXXXXXX
:0.9.9.9.0.0.8.0.9.0.0.¢

).9.9.0.8.9:9.0.0.0.9.0.4.¢.0.4
AAXAXXXAXKXXXXXEKXX
)9.:9.0.9.9.9.9.9.¢.8.9.9.9.9.90.0.9.4

$.9.9.9.9.9.9.6.9.9.0.9.9.9.9.9.9.0.0.9.0.¢
1.9.0.9.0.6.9.0.0.0.0.9.0.9.0.9.9.9.0.6.0.0.9.¢
).:9.0:0.9.:9.0.9.0.0.9.9.9.:9.9.9.9.9.¢.9.9.9.0.9.¢4
§9.0.9.0.0.9:0.0,0.8.9.9.0.:9:9.9.9.0.9.9.0.9.0.9
0.8
):0.9.6.0.:9.8.9.0.0.0.0.8.0.9.0.9.0.0.9.9.9.6.9.068.¢9.04
).9,:0.9.9.0.9.9.0.0.0.9.09.0.0.0.9.9.6.0.8.0.0.6.9.900.¢04
):9.0.0.9.0.9.0.9.6.0.6.0:0.0.0.0.0.0.00.9 9.9.0.9.0.0.0.6.6.0.0.4
9.6.0.0.0.0.6.9.6.0.9.9.9.0.9.0.9.9.09.0.059.9.0.9.9009.800.61
):9:9.9.0.0.9.9.9.0.0.:90.9.09.0
090996 548§V 05 F.9.9.5.9.0.5.9.4
IR 5,950 NP0 S

SO MNP SN 0.0.0.09.6.0.9.9.0.0.9.4

RS0 0. 0.09.50.0:0.9.0.0.0.90.0.0.5090.0.9.0.0.0.9.909.00.4
)9:9.9.9.0.9.0:0.9.9:6:9:0.9.9.9.9.9.9.0.5:0.9.9.9,0.9.:¢:9.0.9.9.0.9
9.4
PO

00,00109.9.9.0.9.:9.9.9.0,8.0.0.9.0.9.0.9.00.9.0.95.9.9.0.9.9.0.6.0.0.0.9
0,04

k0.0.0.0.9.6.0.9.6.0.0.0.9.0.9.0.6.9.6.0.0.0.6.0.069.66.90006.000.9.0090108.900609¢

):0.0.9.9.9.9.6.0.0.9.0.9.0.0.¢0.0.0.0.9.0.9.6.0.9990.9.0.09.9.0699699.006606499090
):0.0.9.9.0.6.0.9.6:9.0.9.0.0.0.0.9.0.0.6.99.6.0.0.90.6.90.65.8.909.9.6.90.9.90.9.0.9.0.69069.64

General Planning
This chapter provides general information on the planning, design, fiber optic installation methods, and cable plant hardware for DECconnect structured wiring.
Each of the process steps are described as follows:
&

Preplanning process. Reviews the actions to be taken before starting the

design of a DECconnect System structured wiring cable plant.
u

Planning and Design process. Reviews the concept diagram, fiber optic link,

fiber optic subsystem planning and design processes, and provides an introduction to administration planning.
s

Installation methods. Reviews the fiber optic cables and passive cable plant
components as well as the termination and splicing methods that can be
used in the structured wiring cable plar*

2.1 DECconnect Process Outline
This section outlines the major actions taken when planning and designing a
structured wiring cab’e plant. This action involves either a known application
process or an unknovn application process.
To plan and design only the structured wiring infrastructure, follow the unknown application design process (see Section 2.1.1). If planning to implement
active equipment into the fiber optic structured wiring, follow the known application design process (see Section 2.1.2).

2.1.1 Unknown Application Design Process

Table 2-1 outlines the steps to plan and design a site where only the fiber optic cabling and passive hardware are to be installed. No active equipment is
planned in this process. Some items include information for both unknown and
known application design processes. Follow only the unknown application design
process for each section.
Table 2-1:

Unknown Application Design Process

Process Step

Reference

Description

Preplanning

Section 2.2

Perform site survey; review safety,
grounding, and space requirements.

Cable plant design process

Section 2.3

Review process for concept diagram,
network schematic, subsystem design,
design worksheets, and administration
planning.

Fiber optic cable plant com-

Section 2.4

ponents

Review outdoor and indoor fiber optic
cabling and fiber optic passive hardware.

Fiber optic installation methods

Section 2.5

Review connector termination and
splicing methods.

Concept diagram creation

Chapter 3

Create the concept diagram by following configuration rules, recommendations, and defined symbology.

Administration planning

Chapter 4

Review the DECconnect fiber optic implementation strategy, administrative

connections, and labeling.
Fiber optic cable plant design

Sections 5.1,
5.2.3, 6.3, 5.5,
5.7, 5.9

Work area wiring design

Chapter 6

Create network schematic and calculate link certification loss value.
Includes DECconnect System optical
budget planning number.

Design work srea wiring subsystem.
Includes information on work area
wiring connections to the wallbox and
bill of materials worksheet.

Horizontal wiring design

2-2

Chapter 7

Design horizontal wiring subsystem.
Includes wallbox requirements, cable routing, cable selection, and bill of
materials worksheet.

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Table 2-1 (Cont.):

Unknown Application Design Process

Process Step

Reference

Description

Building backbone design

Chapter 8

Design building backbone subsystem.

Includes cable routing requirements,
cable selection, and bill of materials
worksheet.
Campus backbone design

Chapter 9

Design campus backbone subsystem.
Includes cable routing and cable entrance splice closure requirements,

cable selection, and bill of materials
worksheet.
Distribution frame design

Chapter 10

Design distribution frames. Includes
passive equipment layout and requirements, equipment room requirements,

and bill of materials worksheet.
How to order cable plant

Chapters 11

Ordering guide for DECconnect fiber

components

and 12

optic passive components.

Complete preinstallation pro-

Chapter 13

Handling project management tasks.

cedures

General Planning

2-3

2.1.2 Known Application Design Process

Table 2-2 outlines the steps to plan and design a site where both active network
hardware and the cable plant system are to be installed. Some steps include information for both unknown and known application design process. Follow only
the known application design processes for each section.
Table 2-2:

Known Application Design Process

Process Step

Reference

Description

Preplanning

Section 2.1

Creat » logical network design; perform
site survey; review safety, grounding,
and space requirements.

Cable plant design process

Section 2.3

Review process for concept diagram,
network schematic, subsystem design,
design worksheets, and administration
planning.

Fiber optic cable plant com-

Section 2.4

ponents

Review outdoor and indoor fiber optic
cabling and fiber optic passive hardware.

Section 2.6

Review connector termination and
splicing methods.

Concept diagram creation

Chapter 3

Create concept diagram by following
cenfiguration rules, recommendations,
and using defined symbology.

Administration planning

Chapter 4

Review the DECconnect fiber optic im-

Fiber optic installation methods

plementation strategy, administrative

connections, and labeling.
Fiber op’ic cable plant design

Chapter 5

Create network schematic. Includes
link-loss calculation, link certification
loss-value calculation, link-loss model,
and application information connecting

active equipment to the structured
wiring cable plant.

Work area wiring design

Chapter 6

Design work area wiring subsystem.
Includes information on work area
wiring connections to the wallbox and
bill of materials worksheet.

Horizontal wiring design

Chapter 7

Design horizontal wiring subsystem.
Includes wallbox requirements, cable routing, cable selection, and bill of
materials worksheet.

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Table 2-2 (Cont.):

Known Application Design Process

Process Step

Reference

Description

Building backbone design

Chapter 8

Design building backbone subsystem.
Includes cable routing requirements,

cable selection, and bill of materials
worksheet.
Campus backbone design

Chapter 9

Design campus backbone subsystem.
Includes cable routing, cable entrance

splice closure requirements, cable
selection, and bill of materials worksheet.

Distribution frame design

Chapter 10

Design distribution frames. Includes
passive equipment layout and requirements, equipment room requirements,

and bill of materials worksheet.

How to order cable plant

Chapters 11

QOrdering guide for DECconnect fiber

components

and 12

optic passive components.

Complete preinstallation procedures

Chapter 13

Handling project management tasks.

2.2 Preplanning Process

The preplanning process consists of actions that must be taken before the design
of the structured wiring can begin:

Analyze the logical network requirements (for known applications only).
Determine the types of active equipment that the structured wiring needs
to support; create a logical network diagram that provides a conceptual view
of how to connect active equipment.

Perform the site survey. Physically inspect the site and record information
necessary to the design process.

Review safety, grounding, and space requirements. Identify issues that

must be considered when designing a structured wiring cahle plant.
The flow chart shown in Figure 2—-1 provides an overview of the preplanning process.

General Planninig

Figure 2-1:

Overview of the Preplanning Process

Are
Network
Needs
Analyzed
?

Go to Section 2.2.1 and
analyze the network needs
(known application only).

Yes

_Is

Slte_Survey

ug?ne

Go to Section 2.2.2 and

review the site survey
process.

Yes

Are
Requirements
Understood
?

Go to Section 2.2.3 and

review the safety, grounding,
and space requirements.

Yes

Go to Section 2.3 and review
the cable plant design
process.

(=Y}

LKG-3572-89

2-6

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

2.2.1 Network Analysis

When considering known application requirements, the network analysis process
determines the communication and configuration requirements for the site and
for the individual subsystems within the site. The following factors can affect
the site’s communications needs:
»

Existing or planned buildings

Size and growth

The results of the network analysis and definition process is a logical network
design diagram. This diagram accounts for the different types of data communication services, network performance requirements, and active network hardware that the structured wiring must support. This logical network design diagram is required in the design process for known applications.
2.2.1.1 Logical Network Design

When planning and designing a structured cable plant with requirements to define active equipment, complete a logical network design. (This process is outside
the scope of this manual.) For detailed information on the logical network design
process, see the following Digital documents:

n Networks and Communications Buyer’s Guide
s

Introduction to Network Performance (EK-NETWK-TM)

The logical network design begins with analyzing of the types of data communication that need to be provided by the network. This analysis requires understanding the services and applications, communication protocols, and signaling
schemes that must be supported in the current or proposed network.
Once the network requirements are determined, the next step is to determine
the computing and active networking equipment (such as FDDI or Fiber Optic
Ethernet) needed to provide for those services. This process requires understanding the performance criteria of the equipment to be used.
The final step in the logical design process is to create a diagram that provides

a conceptual view of how the defined active equipment is connected. Figure 2-2

provides an example:

General Planning

2-7

Figure 2-2:

Loglcal Network Design Example

FODI
Bridqe

Bridge

FODI

Bridge

DELNI_'_]
To Computer
Room
—

FODI

Bridge

l
M|

IDF
Bidg 1

Legend:

2-8

DAC
DELNI
FDLI
FODI Bridge
IDF

Dual Attachment Concentrator
Local Network Interface
Fiber Distributed Data Interface
FDDI-to—Ethernet Bridge
Intermediate Distribution Frame

MDF

Main

Distribution

Frame

LKG-3585-B9A

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

2.2.1.2 Existing or Planned Bulldings

A building that is in the planning stages (or one that is currently being constructed or renovated) offers an ideal opportunity to design a well-concealed distribution system in a timely and cost-effective manner.

When an existing building already has a distribution system, four questions
about the current arrangements must »e answered when planning for communications needs:

How much of the current system can be used?

How much is technically capable of meeting the long-term interests and
planning considerations?

What must be altered or added to accommodate the communications needs?

What is the cost of determining how much existing cable and distribution

hardware can be used, compared to the cost of insialling new cable and
hardware?

To adapt the new requirements to a current distribution system without sacrificing service, efficiency, and appearance, examine all aspecis of the existing system
as follows:
s

System arrangement.

Type of cable entrance.

Building backbone and horizonta! wiring subsystems.

Number, size, and locations of equipment rooms, including each room’s wall
space, power supplies, and support hardware.

General Planning

2-9

2.2.1.3 Size and Growth

The size of a structured wiring cable plant depends on the type and use of the
site, the diversity of communications requirements, and anticipated growth.
The size of the initial installation affects other planning aspects, including the
location and size of the building entrance area (the cable entrance point); the
size of the equipment rooms and strength of their floors; the need, number, and
size of the riser and satellite locations.
Take future growth into account when planning the size of a system. Because of
advancing technology and the ever-increasing communications needs of building’s
occupants, a distribution system planned to accommodate only current requirements may become obsolete.
Often buildings are constructed without knowing the exact requirements. The
DECconnect System provides guidelines suitable for a wide range of applications
to adopt when exact requirements are not known. This allows wiring to be installed during construction that will lower costs.
2.2.2 Site Survey

The site survey is a critical phase of the preplanning process. A cost-effective
installation of a fiber optic cable plant relies on a comprehensive site survey.
This survey, which is completed using the DECconnect System Requirements
Evaluation Workbook (EK-DECSY-EG), records information about the site’s
buildings (existing or planned). In addition, the survey provides details needed
for the layout of the structured wirinog cable plant.
2.2.2.1 Survey Process

The site survey requires the following actions:
=

Walk through all the buildings and examine all possible cable routes.

®»

Ask about future building plans.

Obtain to-scale site and building floor plans and any other important docu-

ments that define the site’s existing or planned cable requirements.
®

Record all information pertinent to the design and installation of a struc-

tured wiring cable plant.

2-10

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

2.2.2.2 Survey Information

The information recorded during the site survey describes the intrabuilding and
interbuilding physical construction issues. Use the worksheets in the DECconnect
System Requirements Evaluation Workbook to:
o

Identify contacts and record important dates.

Identify and outline environmental issues affecting the site.

Identify existing and proposed intrabuilding and interbuilding cable routing
and cable support structures as well as physical obstacles to cable routing.

Identify equipment rooms and their physical dimensions.

The survey information helps the network designer plan the cable plant, create
bid specifications and project management checklists, and comnplete the installation documentation for finished installations.

2.2.3 Review Documentation on Safety, Grounding, and Space Requirements
Before the design process begins, have available for review reference documents
for safety, grounding, and space requirements.
The required documents are:

Site plan. To-scale drawing of the site is necessary for the design process.
If a site plan is not available, it must be created, since it is used during the
design process to record:

— Cable routing methods (existing and planned) for the interbuilding cable runs and the location of support hardware (such as utility hole covers and telephone poles).

— Location of the cable entrance points for the site buildings.
s

Floor plans. To-scale layouts of the floors within each of the buildings are
needed during the design process to record:
— Location of the building’s network cable entrance.
— Location of distribution elements (distribution frames and wallboxes)
within each floor.

— Routing of cables between distribution elements (distribution frames
and wallboxes) and within equipment rooms.

General Planning

2-1

Copies of the DECconnect System Requirements Evaluation Workbook (EK-

DECSY-EG) worksheets. These worksheets, filled in during the site sur-

vey (see Section 2.2.2), provide reference information on the existing and
planned buildings, floors, and work areas.
#

The BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual. Provides in-

formation on all types of building and cable plant requirements, including:
— Cable entrance points and associated grounding, bonding, and electrical
protection requirements.

— Equipment rooms for distribution frames (such as MDF, IDF, HDF, or
SDF).

— Routing methods for campus or building backbone cable runs.
— Fiber optic cable and cable plant hardware descriptions
m

The National Electrical Code (NEC) and local codes. Provides rules concern-

ing building, fire, and electrical code requirements.

2-12

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

2.3 Cable Plant Design Process
The cable plant design is a step-by-step process that begins with an initial layout
of the site and ends with the design of a complete, manageable cable plant. The
design process for fiber optic subsystems within a structured wiring cable plant
includes the following major steps:
NOTE

This manual provides information on designing fiber optic
subsystems within a structured wiring cable plant. For
information on designing copper-based structured wiring
subsystems, see the DECconnect System Planning and
Configuration Guide (EK-DECSY-CG).
s

Create concept diagrams that illustrate how the structured wiring will con-

nect the site into a single cable plant.
=

Fiber optic cable plant design process for known and unknown applications:

— For known applications, use the fiber optic link-loss models to define

the structure of the fiber optic links, and to create network schematics
that detail how the active fiber optic networking equipment connects to
the structured wiring cable plant.
— For unknown applications, a schematic is created detailing the passive

connections in the wall at each of the distribution subsystems.
s

For subsystem design, define the fiber optic cable and other cable plant
hardware that is required to carry out the cable plant design illustrated in
the concepts diagram and cable plant schematics.

Identify and label administration subsystems that allow management of the
structured wiring cable plant

The flow chart in Figure 2-3 provides an overview of a cable plant design process.

General Planning

2-13

Figure 2-3:

Overview of a Cable Plant Design Process

Concept
Diagram Process
Understood
?

Go to Section 2.3.1 and
review the concept diagram

, 'So )
De?igerrgggss

Go to Section 2.3.2 and
review the fiber optic design

process.

Understood
?

Go to Section 2.3.3 and

Un%erstood

distribution subsystem design

review the fiber optic

Desé?b:%srt:cr:ss

process.

Yes

Go to Section 2.3.4 and
review administration

s
Ad’;,‘l';‘r"sn‘i’:"""'

planning.

Understo%d
?

Yes

Go t- Section 2.4 and review
the fiber optic cable plant
descriptions.
T

2-14

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

2.3.1 Concept Diagram Overview

The concept diagram depicts the framework of the physical topology to be used
in connecting the distribution subsystem into a structured wiring cable plant.
NOTE

For a description of concept diagrams, including samples,
see Chapter 3.

The concept diagrams show:

How the structured wiring subsystems’ distribution elements (distribution
frames and wallboxes) are connected.

How many links will be between each distribution element what fiber type

and size will be used in each link, and what the fiber count will be for each
s

Where the distribution elements are located.

2.3.2 Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design Overview

The fiber optic cable plant design process results in the creation of a network
schematic and the calculation of the link certification value for each of the fiber
nptic links. A network schematic is similar to an electrical schematic. A network
schematic illustrates all of the passive fiber optic hardware. For known applications, it indicates the connection of the active hardware into the structured
wiring.

For the unknown application design, use the concept diagram and optical

planning budget numbers to help create the network schematic.
s

For the known application design, the logical design diagram, concept dia-

gram, link-loss models, link-loss calculations, the optical parameters of the
active hardware contribute to creating the network schematic. Application
information is included for specific network products such as FDDI and the
fiber optic Ethernet systems.

In both cases, complete a worksheet indicating the link certification values used
to provide acceptance criteria for the installed cable plant. Acceptance procedures are included in the DECconnect System Fiber Optic Installation manual.
NOTE

For a description of network schematics, including samples, see Chapter 5.

General Planning

2-15

2.3.3 Fiber Optic Distribution Subsystem Design Overview

The fiber optic distribution subsysiem design involves selecting the fiber optic

cable plant components (including cable) that are needed to create the physical
structured wiring cable plant.
The subsystem design is divided into five major design processes in this manual:
s

Work area wiring design (Chapter 6)

Horizontal wiring cabling design (Chapter 7)

Building backbone cabling design (Chapter 8)

Campus backbone cabling design (Chapter 9)

Distribution frame design (Chapter 10)

Each subsystem design defines all of the requirements for that particular part of
the structured wiring cable plant. At the end of each subsystem design, a bill of
materials (BOM) is created for ordering hardware components.
The distribution frame design process (Chapter 10) provides step-by-step procedures for defining all of the cable plant component requirements of each of the
structured wiring distribution frames, including cable routing hardware require-

ments within all distribution frame equipment rooms.
The other four design processes provide all of the procedures for defining each
subsystem’s cable and cable routing hardware requirements.
2.3.3.1 Fiber Optic Subsystem Design Worksheets

During the design of each fiber optic distribution subsystem, fill out a set of
worksheets. These worksheets define the fiber optic cables and cable plant com-

ponents needed to carry out the subsystem’s design, including:

2-16

Cable types

Cable routing and cable support

Equipment rack layouts

Passive fiber optic hardware components

DECconnwct System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Also use the worksheets to summarize all the components into bills of msrerial
(BOMs).

NOTE

A blank BOM for ordering Digital fiber optic cable plant
components from Digital (or other vendors) is provided in
Chapter 12.

2.3.3.2 Subsystem Design Reference Documents

The following references are available for the subsystem design process:
s

Documents discussed in Section 2.2.3.

Concept diagrams and network schematics created during the design process to define requirements for each subsystem’s cable and cable plant.

Chapter 11, which provides deccriptions of fiber optic cable plant compo-

nents available from Digital, as well as other vendor components approved
for use in a DECconnect System structured wiring cable plant.

2.3.4 Administration Planning Overview

Administration planning is used in both design and installation processes. This
planning, described in Chapter 4, is a twofold process that enables:
s

The development and implementation of physical labeling for the cables and

passive components of the DECconnect System structured wiring.
a

The definition of administration points within the structured wiring where

each of the subsystems are connected together through connection rules.
2.3.4.1 Cable Plant Labeling

Labeling provides physical addresses for cables and cable plant components.
These physical audresses allow the designer, cable plant installer, network manager, and service personnel to convey information to one another about the connectivity that must take place in the installation of the structured wiring cable
plant as follows:

The designer assigns unique labels to the equipment rooms, cables, splices,
and connections of the equipment using the methods described in Chapter 4.

General Planning

2-17

The installer affixes these labels to the components of the cable plant using
the methods described in the DECconnect System Fiber Optic Installation
guide (EK-DECSY-FI).

2.3.4.2 Administration Points

For known applications, the designer is responsible for selecting administration
points (crossconnects and interconnects) for the different distribution frames
within the structured wiring cable plant. At each of these points, either nassive connections connect the subsystems together through crossconnects or active
equipment connects to each subsytem through interconnects.
For unknown applications, crossconnects and interconnects are added at a future
time when active equipment is connected to the cable plant.

2.4 Fiber Optic Cable Plant Components
This section provides brief descriptions of the different types of fiber optic cables and fiber optic cable plant hardware that can be used in a structured wiring
system.

NOTE

Digital recommends 62.5/125 dual window multimode
fiber for all new installations. For support of 50/125 or
100/140 fiber size, see Appendix A.
2.4.1 Fiber Optic Cables

A site’s structured wiring can use all fiber or a mix of fiber and copper segments.
NOTE
For information on copper cabling, refer to the DECconnect
System Facilities Cabling Installation guide (EK-DECSYFO).

The following subsections describe the types of fiber optic cable that Digital recommends for use in a structured wiring system:

2-18

Loose-tube and slotted-core outdoor cables

Stranded tight-buffered indoor cables

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Also provided is information on environmental and other issues that affect the
indoor and cutdoor cables, as well as cable routing considerations for all fiber
optic cable types.
NOTE

For information on other types of fiber optic cables to
use in indoor and cutdoor environments, see the BICST
Telecommunications Distritution Methods Manual.
2.4.1.1 Outdoor Cable

The Digital-recommended outdoor cables (loose-tube and slotted-core) are available in:

Single-mode and/or multimode fiber

Armored or all-dielectric

Loose-Tube Cables

L.oose-tube cables are typically used only in outdoor applications. In these cables, the optical fibers are placed inside buffer tubes within the cable, isolating
the fibers from outside forces. The buffer tubes are then stranded around an antibuckling member at the center of the cable.
NOTE

The National Electrical Codes allow a loose-tube cable
to extend into a building from outside the building for
routing to an equipment room. The NEC routing requirements for that indoor portion of the interbuilding loosetube cable are outlined in the mixed (indoor/outdoor) environmental description in Section 2.4.1.3.
Figure 24 illustrates the elements of a typical loose-tube calle. The steel-tape
armor element shown in this figure is present only in armored versions.
NOTE

The National Electrical Codes require that the armored
portion of the cable must be grounded at the building entrance points. Refer to the BICSI Telecommunications
Distribution Methods Manual for more information.

General Planning

2-19

Figure 2-4:

Loose-Tube Cable Elements

Central Member

Loose Buffer Tube

Fiber Bundle
Tensile Strength
Member
Inner Sheath
s
T

Steel Tape Armor
(Optional)

Outer Sheath
(Optional)
LKQ-3574-891

Siotted-Core Cables

Slotted-core cables are typically used as outdoor cables. In a typical slotted-core
cable, the optical fibers are placed inside water-blocked slots in a core. At the

center of the core is a tension member. The core, and the slots containing the optical fibers, is enclosed in wrapping tape and an outer sheath. Other versions
include cables that have Kevlar reinforcement members or consist of several
slotted-core segments bundled into a single cable.

NOTE

The National Electrical Codes allow a slotted-core cable
to extend into a building from outside the building for
routing to an equipment room. The NEC routing require-

ments for that indoor portion of the interbuilding slottedcore cable are outlined in the mixed (indoor/outdoor) environmental description in Section 2.4.1.3.
Figure 2-5 illustrates the elements of a typical 20-t0-60 fiber slotted-core cable.

The actual construction of the slotted-core cable varies based on the fiber count.

2-20

DECconr act System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 2-5:

Siotted-Core Cable Elements

Wrapping Tape

Water Block

Optical Fibers
Tension Member

TM~ Slotted Core
LKG-3575-801

Outdoor Cabie Appiications

Outdoor cables (loose-tube or slotted-core) are not usually conatructed of materigls that are acceptable to building fire codes. Typical applications for outdoor
cables include:
w

Direct buried. Outdoor cabie that is rodent- and crush-resistant. Some

direct-buried versions of outdoor cable are armored (contain a metal protective member).

Buried conduit. All-dielectric (no metallic elements) outdoor cable that runs
in conduit eliminates the need for grounding the cable at a building en-

trance. This type of cable can run next to power cables without voltages
being induced.
#

Aerial. Armored outdoor cable strung between buildings and poles is de-

signed to withstand wind and ice-load conditions as well as the deteriorating effect of direct exposure to the sun.
e

Underwater. Versions of the outdoor cable that are specifically designed for

running under water (such as ponds or rivers).

General Planning

2-21

2.4.1.2 Indoor Cable

Indoor cables (single-mode, multimode, or mixed multimode/single-mode fiber)
are available in one form: tight-buffered.

Tight-buffered cables are used for the following applications:
=

Building backbones

Horizontal wiring

Work area wiring

Distribution frame patch cable assemblies

Tight-buffered cables are available in two forms: light-duty cable and heavy-duty
cable.

Light-duty cables are used in applications where pulling tension of the cable
does not exceed 45.36 kilograms (100 pounds). Light-duty cables are constructed
from fibers stranded directly around a central cable member and then jacketed
with one of the following:
w

Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) (for general use cable) material

Riser-grade thermoplastic material

Plenum-grade thermoplastic material

Heavy-duty cables are used in applications were pulling tension on the cable
dores not exceed 113.4 kilograms (250 pounds). They are constructed similar to
the light-duty cable except that each fiber strand has an additional layer of thermoplastic material. The additional buffering provides more protection to allow
for higher pulling tension.

Figure 2-6 illustrates the elements of a typical light-duty stranded tight-buffered
cable.

2-22

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 2-6:

Light-Duty Stranded Tight-Buffered Cable Elements

Fiber

Buffer
Tensile Strength
Member

Central Member
Overcoat

Quter Jacket
LKG-3576-801

Building Backbone and Horlzontal Wiring Cable

Use tight-buffered cable in building backbore and horizontal wiring applications.
These cables are rugged, easy t» handle and pull through conduit.

Three types of cable jackets are available for the building backbone and horizontal wiring cables:
-

General use cable (nonplenum). Has outer jacket that meets the NEC requirements for cable that passes through nonenvironmental airspace.

Riser. Has outer jacket that meets the NEC requirements for cable that

passes between floors in a vertical shaft.
s

Plenum. Has outer jacket that meets the NEC requirements for cable that

passes through environmental airspace.

General Planning

2-23

NOTE
Environmental airspace are areas that act as return sys-

tems for a building’s heating, ventilatiun, and air conditioning systems. For more information on environmental
and nonenvironmental airspaces, and plenum and nonplenum cable jackets, see the summary of NEC cabling
requirements provided in Appendix E.
Work Area Wiring and Administration Subsystem Patch Cables

Work area wiring and patch cables usually contain two fibers that are used as:
s

Work area wiring connections between the user active equipment and wallboxes

Patch cables for crossconnects and interconnects at distribution frames

These cables are available as complete, factory terminated assemblies. Figure 2-7
illustrates a dual 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector cable assembly that can be
used (depending on length) as patch or work area wiring cables.
Figure 2-7:

Work Area Wiring or Patch Cable Factory-Terminated Assembly

LKG-3770-89

2.4.1.3 Cable Conslderations

Selecting a cable requires more than a simple understanding of the types of cables available and their general use. This section describes cable considerations
to balon
take into account when planning the cable to be used at a sgite.

2-24

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

indoor Environmental Considerations

Tight-buffered cable is recommended for indoor environments. The major considerations for indoor cabling are the same for each cable run within a site:
e

Environment. Consider whether plenum-grade cable is needed for the cable

run being studied, as well as whether building backbone, horizontal wiring,
office, or patch cable is needed.
=

Cable strength. Consider whether the cable run requires an additional

strength member for long vertical runs.
Outdoor Environmentatl Considerations

The type of cable to be used is defined by the application (aerial, underwater,
buried conduit, or direct buried). Additional considerations for outdoor cable
runs are:

Location of utility hole covers for access to the cable or cable conduit

Location of any aerial supports

Location of building cable entrance points

Mixed (indoor/Outdoor) Environmental Considerations

A mixed environment exists when any outdoor cable extends more than 15 meters (50 feet) into a building. In such cases, the NEC allows routing the cable
used in a campus backbone link from the cable entrance point te the distribution
frame (where the cable terminates) as long as that cable is marked with the fire
resistance rating described in section F.2 in Appendix F. Cables with no marking must be routed inside a metal enclosure. Digital recommends using metal

conduit with inner duct to route the outdoor cable to the distribution frame.
NOTE

Splicing indoor cable to the outdoor cable at the cable
enfrance point is not recommended by Digital. This additional splice in the link is too costly in terms of optical
loss and monetary expense.
Cable Slack Considerations

Cable slack is cable in excess of the amount needed to interconnect a cable at
both ends. Cable slack is needed at each end of a fiber optic cable run in order to
bring the cable end to a suitable work area or surface for performing splicing or
field-termination procedures. Cable slack also provides a service loop for future
maintenance and repairs.

General Planning

2-25

Digital recommends specific cable slack for the following situations:
e

At outdoor splice points: 9.0 meters (29.5 feet) for each cable to be spliced.

At distribution frames: 4.5 meters (14.8 feet) for each distribution frame
cable end.

Computer rooms and system common equipment: 4.6 meters (14.8 feet) for
each cable end.

At wallboxes: 0.6 meters (2 feet) for each wallbox cable end.

2.4.1.4 Cable Routing Considerations

Follow these guidelines when installing any type of fiber optic cable:

Make sure the minimum bend radius for all cable routing support and at-

tachment systems is not less than specified by the cable manufacturer as
the long-term minimum bend radius.

Always use split-mesh grips to support a fiber optic cable’s weight in vertical cable runs particularly at a point where the cable makes a transition
from a vertical run to a horizontal run.

Fiber optic cable that is installed horizontally within a building without the

physical support of cable trays, raceways, conduit, or innerduct, should be
suspended above the ceiling using the building’s structural steel beams.
Directly attach the cable or use J-hooks and guidewires to attach the cable

to the beam. Support the cable along the beam every 2 meters (7 feet) to 3
meters (10 feet).

Vertical runs should be attached or supported every 10 meters (30 feet) or
less.

The maximum length of the vertical run for any cable is directly related to

the maximum pulling tension that the cable manufacturer specifies for the
cable. For example, when the cable is rated at 57 kilograms (125 pounds)
and the cable weighs 372 gram/meter (0.25 pound/foot), then the maximum
length of that cable’s vertical run is 152 meters (500 feet).

Fiber optic cable are installed in an innerduct when they run through conduit. The innerduct is an extruded, semirigid, corrugated, plastic duct in
the conduit. It helps guide the fiber optic cable through the conduit to avoid
exceeding the minimum bend radius.

2-26

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

The diameter of innerduct is between 2.54 centimeters (1.00 inches) and
3.17 centimeters (1.25 inches) and is8 manufactured in 1640-meter (5380foot) lengths. The innerduct fill ratio is 40%.

Other possible applications for innerduct include using it to route fiber optic
cable through plenum airspaces. Spare innerduct can be installed in con-

duit in anticipation of future fiber optic cable installations. This reserves
space in the conduit for future cable runs so that it can be pulled through
the conduit easily.

NOTE

Innerduct is designed to handle a one-time installation
of a bundle of fiber optic cables. Pulling cables through
an innerduct already containing fiber optic cables is not
recommended.

The following guidelines apply to the fill ratio for conduit or enclosed raceways.
These are designed to help prevent damage to the cables during installation:
NOTE

The fill ratio guidelines are critical when installing fiber
optic cables in a conduit or enclosed raceway where the
minimum bend radius and pulling tension exerted on the
cable must not be exceeded. Permanent damage to the
cable is possible.
g

A maximum fill ratio of 50% is recommended for communication cable in-

stalled within a conduit or enclosed raceway.
s

The 50% fill ratio allows for two 90° bends along the length of the conduit

or enclosed raceway, with or without pullboxes installed at each of the two
bends.
=

If a conduit or enclosed raceway has more than two 90° bends, then the fill

ratio of 50% must be derated by 15% for each additional bend.
2.4.2 Fiber Optic Cable Plant Hardware Overview

This section describes the hardware that can be used in a site’s fiber optic structured wiring subsystems. Cable plant hardware includes:
@

Termination shelves

Splice shelves

General Planning

2-27

Storage shelves

Combination shelves

Fiber optic remote wall enclosures

Splice closure

Wallboxes

Equipment racks

NOTE

The cable plant hardware also includes connectors used
to terminate the cables. The fiber optic connectors are
described in Section 2.5.
All shelves come with hardware that mounts on a wall or in an equipment rack
(19 or 23-inch). Rack mounting is used where communication equipment is to be
installed. Use wall mounting when rack space is not available.
NOTE

Chapter 11 provides more detailed information about
Digital's passive components, fiber optic cables, and cable
assemblies.
2.4.2.1 Termination Shelf

Provides for patch panel termination of indoor and outdoor cable. Each termination shelf can contain up to 12 connector panels, with each connector panel
connecting up to 6 fibers, for a total of up to 72 connections. Figure 2-8 shows
the termination shelf.

2-28

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 2-8:

Termination Shelf

LKG~ 3541-89A

General Planning

2-29

2.4.2.2 Splice Shelf

Provides for storing mechanical or fusion splices. Each splice shelf can contain

up to 3 splice organizer trays, with each organizer tray storing up to 24 splices,
for a total of up to 72 splices. Figure 2—9 shows the splice shelf.
Figure 2-9:

Splice Shelf

LKG-3038-89A

2-30

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

2.4.2.2 Storage Shelf
Provides for storing terminated jumpers or buffered cable. Figure 2-10 shows
the storage shelf.
Figure 2-10:

Storage Shelf

LKG-3540—89A

General Planning

2-31

2.4.2.4 Combination Shelf
Provides for storing splice or terminated i~ door or outdoor cable. Each combination shelf has a capacity of 24 fibers. Figure 2-11 shows the combination shelf.
Figure 2-11:

Comblination Shelf

LKG~3037~89A

2-32

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

‘

2.4.2.5 Fiber Optic Remote Wall Enclosure
Provides for wall-mounted splicing or termination ef fiber optic cable. The enclosure has a capacity of 12 fibers, with 2 connector panels of 6 fibers each.

Figure 2-12 is an illustration of a fiber optic remote wall enclosure.
Figure 2-12:

Fiber Optic Remote Wall Enclosure

LKG-3542-89A

General Planning

2-33

2.4.2.6 Splice Closure

A sealable unit used for splicing indoor and outdoor cable. It can be used to

splice indoor-to-indoor, outdoor-to-outdoor, or indoor-to-outdoor cables. Figure 2-13
is an illustration of a splice closure.
Figure 2--13:

Spl.ce Closure

LKG-3543—-89A

2-34

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

The wallbox is the interconnection point between the horizontal and work area
distribution subsystems within the structured wiring. It is the point where active equipment in the work area connects to the structured wiring system.
Digital requires using the DECconnect System H3111-GA (gray), H3111-GB

(white), or H3111-GC (ivory) wallbox. Each order number includes a kit of eight
wallboxes. Figure 2—14 shows the wallbox.

NOTE

The H3111-GA/GB/GC wallbox allows for copper or fiber
connections at the work area’s active equipment.
Figure 2-14:

Wallbox

LKG-3506-891

General Planning

2-35

2.4.2.8 Equipment Racks

Structured wiring can use two types of DECconnect System Satellite Equipment
Room (SER) open racks in MDF, IDF, and HDF locations and an H9646-xx

DECconnect communications cabinet in ODF locations. All three racks provide
for mounting and housing both active and passive devices, when those devices
are specifically designed for rack mounting. Figure 2-15 shows the equipment
racks.

2-36

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 2-15:

Equipment Racks

H3120—xx 218 cm (86 in) Rack

H3130—xx 183 cm (72 in) Rack

LKG-3554 -B9A

Ganearal Planning

2-37

2.5 Fiber Optic Cable Installation Methods
This section provides brief descriptions of the following:
s

Connector termination methods

Fiber connectors

Splicing methods
NOTE

Only Digital-recommended methods or components are

described. Other methods or components are described
in the BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods
Manual.

2.5.1 Connector Termination Methods

As described in Section 2.5.2, Digital recommends terminating 2.5 mm bayonet
ST-type connectors on all fiber installed inside the wall. For these installations,
use the field termination method.

This section provides information on the field termination method only. Two
other methods that can be used are:
s

Pigtail splicing

Installing factory-terminated cable assemblies

These other methods are described in the BICSI Telecommunications Distribution
Methods Manual.
NOTE

Digital does not recommend factory-terminated cable

assemblies for inside the wall wiring. The DECconnect
System structured wiring uses factory-terminated assemblies as patch cables at the distribution frame panels and
as work area wiring cables. Patch and work area wiring
cables are not part of the inside the wall wiring.

2-38

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Field Termination

Field termination requires that the fiber be terminated by the installer at the

site by terminating 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connectors to the ends of the optical
fibers. The installer must:
=

Epoxy the fiber into the selected connector

Polish the fiber end

Once the fiber is epoxied into place and heat cured in the selected connector, the
installer uses a polishing surface and fine grit paper to polish the small length
of optical fiber that is protruding from the connector end until the fiber and the
connector faces are a smooth surface.
2.5.2 Fiber Connectors

Digital recommends the use of 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connectors on all fiber
between distribution subsystems. The H3111-xx wallbox fiber optic insert panels
use ST-type couplers to connect to the inside wall wiring, as do all of the patch
panels used at the distribution frames.
NOTE

FDDI, SMA-type, and Biconic connectors can be used on
patch or work area wiring cable assemblies to connect
active equipment to the DECconnect System structured

wiring. FDDI-t0-2.5 mm bayonet ST-type cable assem-

blies are available for interconnecting FDDI equipment to
the structured wiring. Custom cable assemblies need to
be ordered for interconnecting SMA-type or Biconic active
equipment.

FDDI, SMA-type, Biconic, and ST-type connectors are described in the BICSI Telecommunications Distribution
Methods Manual.
2.5.2.1 2.5 mm Bayonet ST-type Connectors

The 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector is a keyed, spring-loaded connector with
the key slot providing for quicker mating and remating. The spring-loaded assembly attaches to a coupling bushing like a coaxial BNC connector. The spring
is attached to the ferrule so that the ends of the mated connectors make contact,
with the force of contact between the connector fibers determined by the spring’s
tension and not by the tightness of the connector’s ends or other securing mechanisms.

General Planning

2-39

Figure 2-16 illustrates a 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector.
Figure 2-16:

2.5 mm Bayonet ST-type Connector

Ferrule

Buffered Fiber

—L R
-,

L ZL

i amp.

""""

‘a.\-x!svnmmfl§5“

e
=

;\.‘_\\\\\\\\\\-

MVY

WI A VERAL VIR > A

I
//
WMM
WWM%’
2

,,,/A LIS Y.
i

Fiber

Cable Outer
Jacket

LKG-3578—90A

2.5.2.2 Fleid Termination Criteria for 2.5 mm Bayonet ST-type Connectors

Two additional criteria must be taken into account when ordering connectors
that will be field terminated:
e

Ferrule size

Backshell size

Ferrule Size

The inside diameter size of the ferrule depends on the cladding diameter of the
fibers to be terminated:

240

50/125 micron, multimode

62.5/125 micron, multimode

100/140 micron, multimode

Single-mode

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

A single-size ferrule with a nominal inside diameter of 128 microns is used with
multimode 50/125 and 62.5/125 multimode fibers, as these fibers have a tolerance of up to + 3 microns. However, 100/140 fiber and single-mode fiber have
different ferrule gize requirements:
=

100/140 micron fiber requires a ferrule specifically designed to accommodate
140-micron cladding.

Single-mode fiber requires greater precision in the ferrule fit for single-mode
over multimode fiber for ferrules sized at 125, 126, or 127 microns.

The outside diameter of the ferrule is fixed at 2.5 millimeters.
Backshell Size

The backshell is the part of the connector that secures the cable to the connec-

tor, with most connectors designed for use on either an individually jacketed or
unjacketed fiber.

When placing a connector onto an individually jacketed fiber, or when using fanout tubing, the installer must ensure that the connector is compatible with the
jacket’s outside diameter. The three commonly accepted sizes for the outer diameter of jacketed fibers are:
.

2.0 millimeters

2.4 millimeters

29 millimeters

Some connectors accept any size without modification, while other connectors
accept only one size. In addition, other connectors that accept only one size can
use fan-out tubing to build up a jacket to the acceptable size (for example, building up 2.0 millimeter jacket to a 2.4 millimeter or 2.9 millimeter diameter).
When placing a connector onto an unjacketed fiber, the installer must checi
that:

The manufacturer’s specifications ensure that the connector can be properly

secured to unjacketed cable.
=

Additional fan-out tubing is not needed.

General Planning

2-41

2.5.2.3 Connector Optical Losses

All connectors have typical and maximum optical power loss values. These values are used during application design and link-loss calculation processes (see
Chabpter 5) to determine the optical loas values for each of the structured wiring
fiber optic links. Digital recommends calculating connector loss for the link using the connector’s maximum loss values.

Table 2-3 compares the typical and maximum loss values for the 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector against the loss values for SMA and Biconic connectors
when used with single-mode or multimode fiber. This table shows that the 2.5
mm bayonet ST-type connector is superior in optical loss to the other connector
types.
Table 2-3:

Connector Loss Values
Loss in dB

Cabie Type

Connector Type

(Typical/Maximum)

Multimode

2.6 ram bayonet ST-type

0.35/0.7

SMA

0.8/1.8

Biconic

0.7/1.5

All

0.7/1.3

Single-mode

2.5.3 Splicing Methods

Digital recommends using single-fiber capillary splice method to splice fiber optic
cables together. This section provides information on the single-fiber capillary
splicing method only. Other types of splicing method: that can be used include:
m

Fusion

Single-fiber polished ferrule

Multiple-fiber array mechanical

These splicing methods are described in the BICSI Telecommunications Distribution
Methods Manual, as is the single-fiber capillary splicing method.
NOTE

Whenever possible, eliminate splices from the installation
by ordering continuous lengths of cable for all cable runs.
This is an economical and convenient solution. However,
splices cannot always be avoided: repairs may be needed

for broken fiber optic cables.

242

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Single-Fiber Capillary

Single-fiber capillary splices rely on the alignment of the outer diameter of the

fibers. This makes the core and cladding concentricity of the aligned fibers critical to achieving low splice optical losses.
The single-fiber capillary splice method aligns the two fiber ends to a common
center line, thereby aligning the fiber cores. After each fiber is stripped of its
coating, the fiber ends are cleaved and the fiber inserted into an alignment tube.

The ends are then butted together and index-matched to reduce reflections (and
the loss) at the splice point.

Figure 2-17 illustrates a single-fiber capillary splice.
Figure 2-17:

Single-Fiber Caplllary Splice

Location

Coated

Fiber

Fiber
LKG-3582-891

General Planning

2-43

HAUAAKAL R AL A LA LA K I AKX AH KA E XK AKX KA XXX KA KKK KLKRKK
POV OO VIO OGP O NI VOGS 6060808000608080000009.2.04
KEALL A ALK LK KA AL L AR KA AR KL R AR ALK KKK KEXX AKX KEXKKKL
WAL AAL KA XA XA LA X LKL KK KLY KAXK XX AKX LR AKX KA
XAAEAAKAR A XK X KA KA AR AH KK AR AKX AKX KAK IR LKKAXK

POP OO0 08.0.0.0.00 0830800000.98.09.80089090.99001
POVEEO 000000:0.6085.00.080.0800.898¢689008.0¢
NOI0/0/0.0/0:00.0.0.6.0906.0.90506880900069600600.0:
PO D00 99.90 86060000009 800890680000}
KKK LKKK
XAX
KK XXX KX AXLAKA
XXXXXX
KEX

PO O0.0.000.5:0.6.8.0:0:0.68.66.0800808080004
1E0.00.00.08060.0608904808506900004

190.9.0.9.8.0.0.6.46.0.6.9.0.6,9.8.6.0.0.6069.04
PO 0.9.0.9:0.0.00.9:0.0.8.0.9.0.08.4086044
RO0.5.0.0:6.8.0.0.0.8.0.0:0.0.0.98.089¢
00000800450 ¢.64.06.4.90¢
.04
10:08.0:6.0.0.0.0.0.0.9.8.0.8.0.¢
b0 80.0.9.0.9.0.9 890,609
XX KXXARXAXKEKLKX
NO0:0.0:0.0.0.9.0.8.0.84
S
A NO AN
NSN

19.0.9.9.9.8.9.0.094

).9:9.9.9.9.8.9.8.4

XAXXXXX
XXXXX

XXX
X

4.9

XXXXX

XAXKXXX
XXXXXKXXKX

p0.9.9.0.0.9.9.6.0.0

AXAXXXKAXKLXX
10,0€.0.9.:0.8.0.9.8.0.0.0.¢.¢

10.8.6.0.6.6.9.0.9:9.9.88.6.00.

$9.8.0.8.0.:9.6.0.8.6.9.8.4.6.09.04

19:0.0.0.0.0.0.0.6.0.0.0.9.¢,0.0.4,0.,44
XX KKK XXXEXX
KK AKX KXAXK
AAX
$ 00,00 9.6:8.0.8.0.9.9.0.8.9.9.9.09.060.9

P4,0.9.0.0.0:9.0.9.0:9.0.6.0.8.9.0.0.0.0.¢.$.0.9.0,0
):0:970.9:019.0.9.9.0.0.0.:9.0.0.0.6.:0.6.0.8.9.0.0.0.9.9,¢4
)900,0:0,.0.0:0.0.0:0.0:0.0:0.0.0.9.0.0.0.9.0.8.9.98.95.9¢

0.0.9,0.9.0.0.0.9.0.9.9.0.0.0.0.8.0.0.0.0.800.0.0¢90.9064
PO 0,0.9.0,0.0.0:0.9:0.6.9.0.9.0.0.0.6.0.8.0.0.08.9.98.99.60.0

FOCO00000.000.:0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.80.0.0.0.0.0:99.9.9.¢.69.9¢.94
15:0/0.0.0:0. 00000009, 008.6 S S U NP 0:0.:0.0.0.8:6.9.¢ ¢
04
RE0.0.0 0,0000.0.00.9.0.8.9.0.0.006.00:0.0.0.9.0.85.9.9.0.0.¢
Femvour

1 0. 9.9.9.¢.

RO'0.00.0.00.90.0.0:0.00.0.0.9.8.0.99.0.8.0.600.0.0.0.0.90.0.8.0855:0,080861
DO OO T OGP0V E000.0000.0.0000900.800860000880,0080.41
PP PPCP PP ODO OO TV S00.6:0.0.0.0.00.89.0.0.0:0.6,00.6.99¢0,¢9.61

Concept Diagram
This chapter deacribes how to create the concept diagrams for structured fiber
optic wiring.

NOTE

The chapter focuses on fiber optic cabling only. For information on copper cabling, see the DECconnect System

Planning and Configuration Guide (EK-DECSY-CG).
The concept diagrams are conceptual views of how distribution subsystems will
connect a site’s buildings, floors, and work areas into a structured wiring cable
plant. The concept diagrams are valuable tools for design and installation pro-

cesses as they:
e

Identify the building, floor, and horizontal wiring within the structured
wiring.

Define the types of cables and distribution elements (distribution frames

and wallboxes) that will make up the passive structured wiring.
®»

Provide a baseline for developing the network schematics (Chapter 5) that

defines the actual physical connections within the structured wiring cable
plant, including how active networking devices will connect to the structured wiring (FDDI, Ethernet), for the known applications design process.

3.1 Concept Diagram Overview
Two basic types of concept diagrams are created for a site:
s

Horizontal - shows a horizontal wiring subsystem's connections with work
area wiring, computer rooms, and system common equipment, with one concept diagram for each of the site's horizontal wiring subsystems.

Backbone - a single diagram that shows how the site’s horizontal wiring
subsystems will connect through the campus and building backbone subsystems.

NOTE

The backbone diagram can be broken down into campus (showing the interbuilding connections) and building
(showing the connections between the building backbone
and the horizcntal wiring subsystems) concept diagrams.

Both types of concept diagrams show the same basic information:
s

The distribution frames and wallboxes that provide the connection points

The cables that provide the links, including:

— Number of cables for each link
— Types of fiber (single-mode, multimode, or mixed)
— Fiber size (50/125, 62.5/125, or 100/140 micron for multimode)
NOTE

Digital recommends installing 62.5/125 dual window
multimode fiber for all new installations. For support of
50/125 or 100/140 fiber size see Appendix A.
— Fiber count (for fiber optic cables) or wire count (for copper cables)
— Estimated cable lengths

3-2

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

3.2 Concept Diagram Design Process
The concept diagram design process requires understanding the following:
»

The hierarchical structure of the DECconnect System’s structured wiring.

The symbols used in the concept diagrams.

The layout guidelines that can affect the distribution subsystems within the
structured wiring.

Both types of concept diagrams (horizontal and backbone) are created using the
same process:

A base concept diagram is drawn showing:

— Symbols that define the types of cables and distribution elements (distribution frames and wallboxes) that will be used in each of the cable
links within the diagrammed portion of the structured wiring.

— The structured wiring topology, including which distribution elements
will be directly connected and how man; cables will be used between
the elements.

— The building and floor location of each distribution frame, with the locations written inside each distribution frame’s symbol.
s

The base diagram is modified to define the cable distance and fiber count.

The differences between the concept diagrams are:
s

The portion of the structured wiring that the concept diagram defines.

The types of distribution elements uged in the illustrated links.

The layout guidelines that affect the illustrated structured wiring subsystems.

After the concept diagram is created, refer to Chapter 4. It explains how additional leheling information is added to the concept diagram.
Figure 3~1 provides a flow chart overview of the complete concept diagram de8ign process.

Concept Diagram

3-3

Figure 3-1:

Concept Diagram Design Process Flow Chart

Go to Section 3.3 and review
the structural wiring hierarchy.

Structured
Wiring Hierarchy
Underr?stood

Are
Concept

Go to Section 3.4 and review
the concept diagram symbols.

Diagram Symbols
Known
?

re the

Base Hor'zontal
Concept Diagrams
Created

Go to Section 3.5 and create
the base horizontal concept
diagrams.

Are the
Wiring Diagrams

Understood
?

Go to Section 3.5.1 for

horizontal requirements.

Go to Section 3.6.1 for
backbone requirements.

LKG-3630-801

Figure 3-1 Cont’d on next page

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 3-1(Cont.):

Concept Diagram Design Process Flow Chart

Are

the Base
Backbone Concept
Diagrams
Cregted

Are
the Base
Concept Diagrams
Modified
2

Go to Section 3.6 and create

the base backbone concept
diagrams.

Go to Section 3.7 and modify
the base concept diagrams
with cable distance and fiber
count.

Yes
A

Go to Chapter 4 to review the
administration subsystem
descriptions.
¥

End

LKG-3673-891

Concept Diagram

3.3 Structured Wiring Hierarchy
All distribution elements (distribution frames and wallboxes) within Digital’s
DECconnect System structured wiring have a hierarchical relationship to each
other that must be maintained when designing a site. Figure 3-2 illustrates a
block diagram of the distribution hierarchical relationship. This figure shows
the overall hierarchy of the structured wiring and identifies the link relationships between the distribution elements. These link relationships, which must
be maintained in the concept diagrams, are as follows:
s

The Main Distribution Frame (MDF'), the higher-most distribution ele-

ment in the hierarchy, can only connect to building backbone Intermediate
Distribution Frames (IDFs).

IDFs always connect to an MDF and to Horizontal Distribution Frames
(HDFs) for multibuilding sites.

HDFs always connect to an IDF and to any of the following:

— A satellite (SDF), office (ODF), or Remote Wall Distribution Frame
(RWDF)
— Wallbox
— Computer room equipment

— System common equipment
8

The wallbox, the lower-most distribution element in the hierarchy, con-

nects to a distribution frame (HDF, SDF, ODF, or RWDF) and to work area

3-6

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Distribution Hierarchical Relatlonship

Figure 3-2:

Malin

Distribution
(MDF)
Frame

‘

IDF

Campus

Highest Level

(Campus Subsystem)
/-— Campus Backbone

:;\'tet:&e]glate

Frame (DF) |
on

2000 m

Office Bullding

(6560 1)
3

Maximum

Building Backbone Subsystem

ystem)

o oin

]

HLF

Building Backbone

HDF

500 m

(1640 ft)

(Horizontal

Wiring

Horizontal

Frame (HDF) | SuPsystem)

T o
|
Wiring

Computer Room or System
Common Equipment

Lowest Level ———

To ODF, SDF, or RWDF

a0m
(295 ft)

Maximum

Wallbox
(Work Area Wiring
Subsystem)
LKG-4088-001

Concept Diagram

3-7

3.4 Concept Diagram Symbols
The concept diagrams use two basic types of symbols:
=

Distribution element symbols

Cable symbols

Figure 3-4 illustrates the symbols used in the concept diagrams for the distribution elements and the fiber optic cables. The following should be noted about the
symbols:
s

When different types of distribution frames share an equipment room, the

symbols are drawn in the concept diagram so that they are touching, with
no space between them. An example of an MDF and IDF sharing an equipment room is shown in Figure 3-3.
Figure 3-3:

MDF and IDF Sharing Equipment Room

/ MDF Symbol

/ IDF Symbol

LKG--3583—89A

Touching symbols, therefore, indicate that the distribution frames share the
same equipment room and are connected with patch cables.
m

Each fiber type and size used within the cable is identified. When more

than two cables are used between distribution frames, each cable is shown
in the concept diagram and identified. Figure 3—4 shows the codes for fiber
optic cable.

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 3—4:

Concept Diagram Symbois

Main Distribution
Frame (MDF)

Intermediate Distribution
Frame (IDF)

Horizontal Distribution
Frame (HDF)

Satellite Distribution
Frame (SDF)

Office Distribution

Remote Wall Distribution
Frame (RWDF)

Frame (ODF)

System Common Equipment

Wallbox

Computer Room Equipment

Fiber Cptic Single-Mode Cable

—Fm

Fiber Optic Multimode cable

— Fsm

Fsm—

Fiber Optic Single-Mode and
Multimode Cables
LKG-3583—801

Concept Diagram

3.5 Creating the Base Horizontal Concept Diagram

A horizontal concept diagramis created for each existing and planned horizontal
wiring subsystem that will be used to connect work area wiring, computer room
equipment, or system common equipment to the structured wiring.
NOTE

Information about existing horizontal wiring subsystems
is recorded on worksheets in the DECconnect System
Requirements Evaluation Workbook during the site survey
process.

During the base horizontal concept diagram creation process:
s

The site’s horizontal wiring subsystem requirements are defined.

A base concept diagram is created for each subsystem.

3.5.1 Defining Horlzontal Wiring Subsystem Requirements
The first step in creating the base horizontal concept diagrams is to use horizon-

tal wiring distance, cable link configuration, and layout rules to define:
s

How many horizontal wiring subsystems are needed for each floox. Digital
recommends only one horizontal wiring subsystem for each floor, except
when:

— A floor is too large for a single horizontal wiring subsystem to service
without violating horizontal wiring distance restrictions. In this case a
floor is divided into smaller areas called zones. Each zone is serviced
by its own horizontal wiring subsystem which is compliant with the
horizontal wiring distances.

— Multiple building backbones exist, such as when separate cabling is
needed to support separate LANS that are designed for security reaSODS.

3-10

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

3.5.1.1 Horizontal Wiring Distance

A floor is too large for a single horizontal wiring subsystem when the distance
between an HDF and a wallbox exceeds the maximum distance of 30 meters (235
feet) for the horizontal wiring.

As shown in Figure 3-5, the 90-meter (295-foot) distance applies to the total horizontal wiring, including any patch cable at the HDF, SDF, or ODF that is in the
overall HDF-to-wallbox link.

NOTE

No other distribution frames are used in HDF-to-computer
rooms or HDF-to-system common equipment links. For
such links, the 90-meter (295-foot) distance applies to the
cable and to any patch cable at the HDF.
Figure 3-5:

Horlzontal Wiring Distance Restriction

90 m
(295 ft
maximum)

Building

Work Area

Backbone

Wiring

HOF,

Wallbox

P4 's the symbot used for crossconnects

’

Concept Diagram

Is the symbol used for interconnects

LKG-3202-891

311

3.5.1.2 Horlizontal Wiring Cable Link Configuration Design
This section contains factors to consider when designing the horizontal wiring
topology. They are:
m

Cable restrictions

Planning for future growth

Wallbox connectors

Cable Restrictions

The following restrictions apply to cables used in the horizontal wiring:
»

The cable between any two horizontal wiring components (for example,

HDF-to-wallbox or HDF-to-SDF) must be a complete, unspliced cable.
®

The use of breakout-type links within the horizontal wiring is not recommended.

Planning for Future Growth

A horizontal wiring subsystem can be configured to meet only the current requirements. When considering orly initial costs, this is the least expensive
method of design. However, a little planning at the initial design phase of the
horizontal wiring can save time and money when the network expands.
For planning horizontal wiring growth potential, Digital recommends that cables
with the following fiber counts be used in the horizontal wiring:
s

2- or 4-fiber multimode cable in the wallbox links for support of known ap-

plications
m

6-fiber multimode cable in the links between the HDF and an SDF or ODF

12-fiber multimode cable in the links between an HDF and an RWDF

12-fiber multimode and 4-fiber single mode in the link between the HDF
and system common equipment or computer rooms

312

DECconnect System Fiber Cptic Planning and Configuration

Wallbox Connectors

When using fiber optic horizontal wiring, a minimum of two wallboxes are recommended for each work area wiring location:
s

One wallbox for the fiber optic connector used for the data communications

One wallbox for all copper wiring connections

In some applications, such as video, additional connectors are needed. In most
cases, these additional connectors can be handled by the same wallbox as used
for the telephone connector.
NOTE

Digital’'s H3111-GA/GB/GC wallbox has slide-in connector panels. In copper horizontal wiring, the panels are
inserted into a single wallbox which can deliver voice,
daia, and other applications tc the work area. In fiber
optic horizontal wiring, a single wallbox is required for
each fiber optic connector panel. A separate wallbox, or
wallbozxes, is needed in the work area to deliver voice and
other applications.
3.5.1.3 Horizontal Wiring Topology

The three basic type of horizontal wiring subsystem links are:
u

HDF-to-wallbox

HDF-to-computer rooms

HDF-to-system common equipment

The HDF-to-wallbox link can be expanded by using any one of three other distri-

bution frames in the overall HDF-to-wallbox link, as follows:
wn

HDF-to-SDF-to-wallbox

HDF-to-ODF-to-wallbox

HDF-to-RWDPF-to-wallbox

Concept Diagram

3-13

NOTE

Digital does not recommend using other distribution
frames (SDF, ODF, or RWDF) in a link between the HDF
and computer rooms or the system common equipment.

All HDF-to-computer room links and HDF-to-system common equipment links should be single, direct unspliced
cable.

Which distribution frame (SDF, ODF, RWDF), if any, is used in a horizontal
wiring’s topology depends on:
8

Whether or not active equipment will be mounted in the distribution frame
NOTE

The SDF and ODF can be used to house and connect active networking equipment to the horizontal wiring. The

RWDF is only used for interconnections between wallbox
and HDF cable fibers. Active equipment is not supported
at the RWDF.

The facilities (for example, an equipment room is needed for each SDF)

The number of 2-fiber wallbox terminations to be served by the distribution

frame

Figure 3-6 illustrates the four different types of overall HDF-to-wallbox links.

3-14

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

‘

Figure 3-6:

Horizontal Wiring Subsystem

Horizontal
Wiring
Cables

Building
Backbone
Cable

Horizontal Wiring

Cables
LKG—-2927-89A

Concept Diagram

3-15

3.5.2 Base Horizontal Concept Diagrams

Once the horizontal wiring subsystem distance and topology requirements are
understood, a base concept diagram is created for each of the site’s horizontal
wiring subsystems. Figure 3—-7 provides a sample horizontal concept diagram.
As shown in this sample, each horizontal concept diagram identifies:
s

The symbol for the subsystem’s HDF with the building and floor location

written inside that symbol. (See Figure 3—4 for symbol definitions.)
s

The symbols for any and all other distribution frames (SDFs, ODFs, or

RWDFs) used in the topology with the floor location written inside each distribution frame’s symbol.
s

Each HDF-to-computer room link.

Each HDF-to-SDF, ODF, and RWDF link.

@«

A single wallbox symbol for each distribution frame with 2 number inside

the wallbox symbol that identifies the total number of wallboxes the distribution frame is connecting to.
=

The symbol for the type of fiber optic cable to be used in each of the dia-

grammed links.
s

3-16

The fiber size (50/125, 62.5/125, or 100/140 micron) of any multimode cable.

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 3-7:

Sample Horlzontal Wiring Concept Diagram

62.5/125

Pole /

62.5/125

Frm

Bldg 2

Floor 1

Computer

System

102}

Pole K2

62.5/125

16
LKG-3588—89A

Concept Diagram

3-17

3.6 Creating the Base Backbone Concept Diagram
A single backbone concept diagram is created for a site’s existing and planned
campus and building backbone links.
NOTE

Information about existing buildings and building backbone riser systems is recorded in the DECconnect System
Requirements Evaluation Workbook during the site survey
process.

During the base backbone concept diagram creation process:
s

The site’s backbone link requirements are defined

A base concept diagram is created illustrating those links

3.6.1 Defining Backbone Link Requirements
The first step in creating the base backbone concept diagram is to use distance,

cable link configuration, and layout rules to define how the buildings and floors
will be connected together.
3.6.1.1 Backbone Distance

The distance restrictions apply to the total length of cable used to connect campus and building backbone cables, as follows:
o

Campus backbone distance restrictions apply to the length of cable between
the campus backbone’s Main Distribution Frame (MDF) and each building
backbone cable at Intermediate Distribution Frames (IDFs). This includes
the patch cable used at the IDF to crossconnect the campus and building
backbone cables.

Building backbone distance restrictions apply to the length of cable betwe:n
the IDF panel and a horizontal wiring subsystem’s HDF panel, and does not
include any patch cable lengths at either the IDF or the HDF.
NOTE
The patch cable used in the HDF to connect the building

backbone cable to the horizontal wiring is considered part
of the horizontal wiring and is included in that subsystem’s distance restriction.

3-18

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Active Networking Equipment Considerations

When designing a cable plant, where known applications are being considered,

some fiber optic links can exceed the passive distance restrictions. These links
are considered dedicated to specific active networking equipment requirements
and may not function in a multiproduct environment. For further information on

designing dedicated links see Appendix E, Special Distance Situations.
Distance Restrictions

The campus and building backbone distance restrictions are interrelated, as follows:

s«

An overall campus and building backbone link (MDF-to-IDF-to-HDF ca-

bling) cannot exceed a combined distance of 2000 meters (6560 feet).
s

Up to 500 meters (1640 feet) of the overall backbone link’s 2000-meter

(6560-foot) limit can be used for the building backbone (IDF-to-HDF cabling)
portion of the link.
#

The remainder of the 2000-meter (6560-foot) distance restriction is available

to the campus backbone (MDF-to-IDF cabling).
Only two parts of the distance restriction are fixed:
s

The 2000-meter (6560-foot) total available to the overall backbone link

The 500-meter (1640-foot) limitation on the building backbone

The distance available is the total overall backbone limit of 2000 meters (6560
feet) minus the length of the longest MDF-to-IDF cable link. This can be expressed as a simple formula:
2000 - CB = BB
Where:

2000 is the 2000-meter (6560-foot) maximum for an overall backbone

CB is the length of the longest campus backbone between the MDF-to-

IDF

BB is the length available to the building backbone IDF-to-HDF link in
the building (not to exceed 500 meters (1640 feet)

Concept Diagram

3-19

When an IDF-to-HDF link uses the maximum 500 meters (1640 feet), then only
1600 meters (4921 feet) is available for the building’s campus backbone cable

link with the MDF. If the longest IDF-to-HDF link in the building is 100 meters

(328 feet) then the building’s IDF can connect with the MDF using up to 1900
meters (6234 feet) of cable. This assumes that the active networking equipment
in the IDF-to-MDF link can operate over 1900 meters (6234 feet) of cable if the
application is known.

Figure 3-8 illustrates a sample site layout showing different building connections which all fall within the distance restrictions.

3-20

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 3-8:

Distances \Vithin ¢ DECconnect System Site

1850 m
(6068 ft)

Note: All of the links that are shown use the full 2000 meters
(6850 feet) available to the campus and building backbones.
LK(3-3187-89]1

Concept Diagram

3-21

3.6.1.2 Backbone Cable Link < >n:figuration Design

This section provides information that should be kept in mind when designing
the campus and building backbone cable links:
s

Single cable versus breakout cable links

Maximum growth

Alternate cable routing

Single Cable Versus Breakout Cable Links

Single cable links and breakout cable links are described as follows:
s

A single cable link is a single fiber cable segment with connectors at each

end. It has no splices except for required repairs.
e

A breakout cable link is a point in the fiber optic link where fibers from several cables are spliced together within a splice closure.

Digital recommends the use of single cable links in the building backbone and
the campus backbone.

In a campus backbone, breakout cable links are used as follows:
s

Breakout (through splices) one cable run from the MDF to connect with

cables from several buildings closely spaced together. For example; run a
144-fiber cable from the MDF to an outdoor fiber transition enclosure, then
splice three 48-fiber cables (one from each building) to the 144-fiber cable
from the MDF.

Digital recommends that all cable links between buildings be single cable links
becavse splices used for breakout cable links are costly in terms of money, time,
and optical performance.

Figure 3-9 illustrates a site with campus backbone single cable links. Figure 3-10

illustrates a site with breakout cable links.

3-22

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 3-9:

Campus Backbone Single Cable Links - Recommendec

LKG-3194-801

Concept Diagram

3-23

Figure 3-10:

Campus Backbone Breakout Cable Links - Not Recommended

Bidg
1

Cable
Splice
8idg
1

Bldg

9
LKG-3105-801

3-24

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Planning for Future Growth

The campus and building backbones can be configured to meet only the current
cabling requirements. When considering only initial costs, this is the least expensive method of design. However, a little planning at the initial design can
maximize reliability and provide for future growth which can save time and
money when the network expands.

The campus backbone maximum growth factors are as follows:
s

Design single-mode and multimode cables for each campus backbone link -

this allows the site to take advantage of fiber optic technology advances.
s

Use 48 fibers of multimode and 12 fibers of single-mode cabie fur each link

(24 and 6 for each of the separate links). This ensures that the site meets
initial cable requirements and provides for future growth.
s

Design redundant sets of cables in physically separate paths, complete with

cable routing hardware, for each campus backbone. This approach, knewn
as alternate cable routing, provides an alternate path in case of czmpus
backbone cable damage.

Alternate cable routing is recommended for fiber optic links carrying critical
communication services.

The building backbone maximum growth factors are as follows:
=

Design single-mode and multimode cables for each building backbone link.
This allow= the site to take advantage of fiber optic technology advances.

Install 24 fibers of multimode and 6 fibers of single-mode for each link. This

fiber count ensures that the site meets all cabling requirements and maximizes future growth potential.

3.6.1.3 Site Layout
The Digital-supported topology for the structured wiring is the hierarchical physical star. This topology uses a single campus backbone subsystem to connect the
aite’s buildings together into a structured wiring cable plant.
However, some sites can exceed the maximum backbone distance restriction if a
single hierarchical physical star topology is used for the design. In such cases,
the overall site must be broken into smaller sites. The multiple sites are then

connected together. For further information on connecting sites see Appendix D.

Concept Diagram

3-25

3.6.2 Base Backbone Concept Diagram

Once the backbone distance and layout requirements are understood, a base concept diagram is created for the site’s campus and building backbone subsystems.
Figure 3-11 provides a sample concept diagram for a simple three-building
single-site. As shown in this sample, each backhone concept diagram identifies:
s

The symbol for each distribution frame (MDF, IDF, or HDF) with the building and floor location written inside each distribution frame’s symbol.

Each MDF-to-IDF and IDF-to-HDF link, including any alternative cabling

routing (such as for redundant cabling), is used for a single distribution
frame-to-distribution frame link.
s

The fiber type - multimode, single mode, or mixed.

The fiber size (50/125, 62.5/125, or 100/140 micron) of any multimode cable.

NOTE

The sample diagram shows only fiber optic subsystems.
If copper subsystems are used (copper-based Ethernet
building backbone), copper wiring symbols are used to
indicate copper links (ThinWire, shielded or unshielded
twisted-pair).

3-26

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 3-11:

Sample Backbone Concept Diagram

62.5/125

/ Bldg 2
1st Fir

Bidg 4
1st Fir
Single mode

Bidg 2

Single mode

1st Fir

62.5/125

Bidg 3

N\ /Fsm

62.5/125

1st Flir

Fsm

Bldg 2
1st Fir

/Fs m
1st Fir

Fsm

Single

mode

6 2.5/125

—-—\

Bldg 2
ist Fir

Single mode

Bldg 1

62.5/125

1st Fir

Bldg 1
1st Fir
Fm

62.5/125

O¢

62.5/125

Bidg 1

1st Flr

62.5/125

TM~

Bldg 1
2nd Flir

LKG—-3589-89A

Concept Diagram

3-27

3.7 Modifying the Base Concept Diagrams

Once the base horizontal and backbone concept diagrams are created, the following information is added:
a

Cable distances

Fiber count

3.7.1 Cable Distances

Cable diatances are important to know when defining the amount of cable needed

to carry out the structured wiring design. The cable distances are added to the
two types of concept diagrams as follows:
w

Horizontal

— HDF-to-SDF, -ODF, or -RWDF, HDF-to-computer room, or HDF-tosystem common equipment cables; the actual cable distance including
the distance affected by known or planned cable routing methods from
the HDF to the distribution frame, computer room, or system common
equipment.)

— HDF-, SDF-, ODF-, or RWDF-to-wallbox cables; the average distance of
cabling between the distribution frame and the wallbox that the distribution frame services.
w

Backbone

— The actual cable distance, including distance affected by known or
planned cable routing methods.

It is not always possible to identify exactly how long a cable will be. This is particularly true when cable routing methods are still unplanned. However, it is

necessary to make the best estimate possible, with each cable estimate including
the appropriate cable slack requirements:
NOTE
Cable slack requirements must be considered in the overall length of cables and when determining if a link exceeds the maximum distance requirements. For example,
the maximum building hackhone cable distance of 500
meters is actually 9.0 meters (29.5 feet) of cable slack and
491 meters (1610 feet) of distance available to routing the
cable between the IDF and HDF.

3-28

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

9.0 meters (29.5 feet) for distribution frame-to-distribution frame links, 4.5

meters (15 feet) of cable slack at both ends of the cable. This also includes
computer room and system common equipment links.
=

5.1 meters (16.7 feet) for distribution frame-to-wallbox links, 4.5 meters (15

feet) of cable slack at the distribution frame and 0.6 meters (2 feet) at the
wallbox.
NOTE

The concept diagram cable distances are used in creating
the network schematic (Chapter 5), and are, therefore,
critical to the link-loss calculations for known applications. The link-loss calculations are used to verify that
Sher optic links meet their active equipment maximum
allowable system loss budget.
3.7.2 Fiber Count

After the base concept diagrams are modified for cable distances, they are modified for fiber count, and fiber size. For example, the notation 24 - 62.5/125 indicates a cable wit' 24 multimode fibers, each with a size of 62.5/125 microns.
The fiber count of a link is determined in two basic ways:

s When the applications that the link needs to support are known - by adding
up the fiber count needed for each application.

When the applications that the link needs to support are unknown - by us-

ing the DECconnect System recommended fiber counts for each type of link.
NOTE

A fiber count worksheet is provided in Figure 3-14 for de-

termining fiber count by known application requirements.

Fiber Count Growth Considerations

The fiber count of cable used in the structured wiring is critical to current and

future cabling needs and solutions. Many of the fiber optic cables installed for
today’s technology will be integrated into communications networks of future
technologies. Therefore, the number of fibers in each installed cable must be
carefully considered.

Concept Diagram

3-29

The decision regarding the minimum number of fibers an installed cable will
have depends on the following:

The intended end-user applications, if known

The active equipment needed to support those applications, if known

Since installation of building wiring is expensive, and any future cabling can add
significantly to a network’s costs, Digital recommends adding 50% fo 100% to the
actual fiber count to account for spare fibers needed for future growth. Digital
also recommends that single-mode fiber optic cable be installed along with the
multimode cable, with at least one single-mode fiber for every four multimode
fibers.
Fiber Count Application Requirements

Some applications, such as video or telemetry, require only a single fiber to
transmit signals from a source device to a receiving unit (see Figure 3-12).
Figure 3-12:

Video Applications

—

'
q

ill
3‘;;,",2',':“ce

Video Monitor
LKG-3591-891

However, most current applications, such as data or voice communications, re-

quire at least two fibers for two-way communications: one fiber for transmit and
one for receive (see Figure 3-13).

3-30

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 3-13:

Data Application

N
Rx
=

Workstation

‘

LKQ-3500-801

In some data communication networks, a second set of fibers is added to the application requirements. FDDI is an example of a configuration that uses four
fibers (two pairs) in its dual ring backbone application.

Table 3—1 identifies the fiber count needed for each individual application.
Table 3-1:

Fiber Count Requirements by Application

Application

One Fiber

Voice (two-way)

Four Fibers

Voice (intercom)

Video (security)

Video (interactive)

Telemetry

Two Fibers

Data multiplexing

Channel extension

Ethernet

802.5 Ring

FDDI

Concept Diagram

3-31

DECconnect System Recommended Fiber Count for Unknown Applications

The DECconnect System re .ommends fiber counts for each fiber optic distribution subsystem link. These counts are recommended for a cable when the fiber
count requirements of the link cannot be determined. In addition, the recommended fiber counts are based on:
s

The types of applications that can be run over each type of link and the
fiber count required for each of those applications.

Maximizing the ability of the cable plant to meet future growth require-

ments without new fiber needing to be installed.

Table 3-2 lists the DECconnect System reccmmended fiber count by type of link
and type of fiber.
Table 3-2:

DECconnect Systcm Recommended Fiber Counts for Unknown
Applications
Multimode

Single-mode

Type of Link

Cable Flbers

Cable Fibers

MDF-to-IDF

IDF-to-HDF

HDF-to-SDF

—

HDF-to-ODF

—

HDF-to-RWDF

—

HDF-to-System common equipment

HDF-to-computer room

Recommended DECconnect System Horizontal Wiring Fiber Count Suppont

The recommended fiber count between the HDF and an SDF or ODF is six

fibers. This assumes future installation of active equipment support at the SDF
or ODF.

The recommended fiber count for the RWDF, which does not support active
equipment, is based on the 12-fiber maximum capacity of the RWDF.

3-32

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

NOTE

The recommended fiber count to the wallboxes is two or
four fibers depending on the support of the known applications. This allows for any of the following applications:
®

Fiber optic Ethernet application

FDDI single-attachment station (SAS) application

FDDI dual-attachment station (DAS) application

Fiber optic video application

Fiber optic voice application

Recommended DECconnect System Bullding Backbone Fiber Count Support

The recommended fiber count for building backbone IDF-to-HDF links is 24 mul-

timode fibers using two 12-fiber multimode cables. This count allows fibers for
the following applications:

Fiber Optic Ethernet - two fibers

FDDI - four fibers

®#

Video - two fibers (interactive)

Voice - four fibers for two voice channels (two fibers per channel)

Intercom - two fibers for two intercom channels (one fiber per channel)

Ring - two fibers

Telemetry - two fibers

Spares - six fibers

In addition, Digital recommends that a single-mode cable be run for each IDF-toHDF link with this cable having at least six single-mode fibers (one single-mode
fiber for every four multimode fibers) to support future applications.

Concept Diagram

3-33

Recommended DECconnect System Campus Backbone Fiber Count Support

The recommended fiber count for campus backbone MDF-to-IDF links is 48 multimode fibers. This includes:
=

One set of 24 fibers providing the same application capabilities as listed for

the IDF-to-HDF links.
s

A second, separately routed redundant set of 24 fibers.

In addition, Digital recommends that a single-mode cable be run for each of the
24-fiber multimode cable links, with each single-mode cable having at least six
single-mode fibers (one single-mode fiber for every four multimode fibers) to support future applications.
Fiber Count Worksheet for Known Applications

Figure 3-14 provides a blank copy of the Fiber Optic Worksheet. Copy and use
this worksheet to determine the fiber count for known applications (refer to
Table 3-1), as follows:
w

Identify the project.

Identify the link.

List each application the cable needs to support.

List the fiber count for each application.

List the fiber count allocated for multimode and single mode fibers.

Add up the fiber count entries to determine the minimum fiber count needed

by the cable to support the application requirements of that cable’s link.

3.7.3 Modified Concept Diagrams
Figure 3-15 shows sample horizontal and backbone concepts that are modified
for cable distances and fiber counts.

3-34

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 3-14:

Fiber Count Worksheet

1. Project Identfication:

Project ID:

Page

Designer:

Date:

Il. Link Description:

Ill. List applications and fiber count for each application:

Application

Required Count

LKG-3832-801

Concept Diagram

3-35

Figure 3—-15:

Concept Diagrams Modified for Link Distances and Fiber Counts

72 m (236 ft)

4 - 62.5/125

30m (99
ft)
6 — 62.5/125

Sgle

ft)

12 - 62.5/125

41m (135 ft)
4 - 62.5/125

Frm——Fm

48 m (158

System

22 m (72
ft)
4 — 62.5/125

28 m (92
ft)
6 — 62.5/125

Bldg
2
loor 1

Computer

Frm

12 m (40

ft)

4 — 62.5/125

Pole K2

67 m (220 ft)
4 — 62.5/125

16
LKG-3592-89A

Figure 3-15 Cont'd on next page

3-36

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 3—-15(Cont.):

Concept Diagrams Modified for Link Distances and Fiber Counts

100 m (328 ft)
24 — €2.5/125

/ Bldg 2
1st FiIr

228 m (748 ft)

6 — Single Mode

Bidg 2

24 — 62.5/125

1st Flir

300 m (984 ft)

6 ~ Single Mode

24 - 62.5/125

Frm

Fsm

1st Fir

Forn

/ Bidg 3

(Bldg 1

1st Flir

Fsm

200 m (656 ft)

6 — Single Mode

Fsm

_Asm
Y\ 350 m (1148 ft)

6 — Single Mode
24 — 62.5/125

Bide

24 - 62.5/125

Bidg 1
ist Fir

70 m (230 ft)

24 _ 62.5/125

50 m (164 ft)

24 ~ 62.5/125
Bldg 1

90 m (295 ft)

24 — 62.5/125\~

1st Fir

Bidg 1
2nd Fir

LKG—3588--89A

Concept Diagram

357

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXKXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
l
0000
000000 POIPIIIPIGO S0000600.0080000000
080008000000 00000 8000
S0PV
XXX KKK KK LXK KKK
KKK
XA
KX
WHX KX XXX KX XXX
R AKX AX KA XK KK
KKK KR XA KK LA XXX AN
08
IIE
IC008000
II568908
P ODE800
NOOTPP
80
084
100000 0PIPVE0.99.0.0.00.00.000698
YO0 09000.6.00.0.6.8006.050008040e0.01
KX KXXAXKXKX XXX XK KKK KX KKK KK KX KKKK
PSP SO0 5.0.6608.4.88.00890.0,1
HEXKE XX AKX KX KUK N KKK KXEXKHXKK
XXX AKX XXX XKXK XXX XXX KXAY

)O0.0.9.0.0.060.0.0.9.¢.0.6.9.8¢004
19,0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.9.9.8.:6.0.6.8.6.8.4
AANLARKLKARKHKKAX
16.9,9.9.010.6.0.4.6.0.0.8.¢
)9,9.0.0.8.8.5.0.0.0.¢0.4
AXXXKXXKXXXX
XXAKXAAKXKK
9 .¢
p:9,9.8.9.9
).0.9.8.9.8

XXX
X

XXX

XXXXX

KEXAXAX

$.6.9.9.0.9.9.0.8.

AXKXXKKXEXKX

KXAKAXKXXAXKY
h:9:0:0.0.0:9.4.9.9.8.6.6.0.84

XAXEKXXKXANKXXKKKX
KK
EX
R LXXKXX
AXXKXKARK

PO0:0.09.0.8.09¢.6.8.00.8.08.00
EX
XX
AKX AXKXAX
KXK
KX XXAXXX
O 00,00000.0.8.9.0.0.9.0.0.8.0.09.9689

FOCCO P00000.9.0:090.9.6.6,89¢.8.90
PO SOOI 000.90.9.0.0.:0.0.0.0.0.9.9.0.0.¢.8 4
PO LD PO RE000.00.8:0.9.8:0.0.0.09.0.9.9.9.0.00,

0883
G000 000000.00:0.0.0.0:0.00.08805
PO
80980
80009
EE0006
N
0
00000
P
0
00000

UK KX KXARK XK KX KAR XK LR AL X AN KRR KK ARKAEK
PIRPIEI0 010 0 0 COD RN SN S SETER OO $.9.09.0.0.9 4
RO OEREE R 500 0 SO0 DU REONIBO DN O0.0.0.8:5.0.6.8.9.9,0,0.¢
NN XN AR LXK XN K URX K KN KA K LR XA K AN XK R K AAKKX
SRR NN N KR AR KKK KN ARK AR K LA AKX T AR KKK LK AR AKKKKK
CRHXKAK AKX AR XX K AR AKX KX AR L AKX KX X KK A XK AR IKKEXK

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

Administration Subsystem
The concept diagram (created in Chapter 3) defines the distribution subsystem
wiring structure for the site. The administration subsystem consists of the hard-

ware and documentation for managing the distribution subsystem structure as
follows:

Crossconnects and interconnects provide the administration points within
the structured wiring system’s hierarchy. These administration points provide the connections between the inside wall wiring at the distribution elements (distribution frames and wallboxes).

Administration documentation defines the labeling and helps provide the

maintainability of the end-to-end connectivity within the structured wiring
cable plant.

This chapter identifies & nd describes the administration subsystem, including information on the administration function, as well as the administration subsystem's hardware and documentation. This chapter also identifies and describes:
s

The fiber optic wiring strategy for the DECconnect System’s fiber optic
structured wiring.

The cable plant labeling plan that Digital recommends, inciuding labeling

documentation that must be completed before the cable plant installation
process can begin.
Figure 4-1 illustrates the location of the crossconnect (CC) and interconnect (IC)

administration points within the DECconnect System structured wiring cable
plant.

4-1

Figure 4-1:

Administration Subsystem

LKG~3386—-89A

4-2

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

4.1 Structured Wiring Hierarchy
The administration subsystem, its related documentation, labeling, and wiring
strategy, are all based on a higher-to-lower hierarchical approach to the wiring
structure.

As described in Section 3.3, Structured Wiring Hierarchy:
o

The higher-most distribution element within the structured wiring hierarchy is the Main Distribution Frame (MDF), the point where all campus
backbone subsystem cables are connected together.

The lower-most distribution element is the wallbox, the point where the

active user equipment connects to the structured wiring through the work
area wiring.

The higher-to-lower hierarchy of the structured wiring cable plant is important
for:

The location of crossconnect and interconnect administration points within
the structured wiring.

The connection of active networking equipment to the structured wiring cable plant.

The labeling scheme for the structured wiring cable plant.

Administration Subsystem

4-3

4.2 Crossconnects

Crossconnects are structured wiring administration points. Crossconnects can

occur at the following distribution frames:
w

Main Distribution Frame (MDF) - to connect campus backbone fibers together.

Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) - to connect building backbone and
campus backbone fibers. IDF crossconnects can also connect:

— Fibers from two different building backbone cables.
— Two fibers from the same building backbone cable.
»

Horizontal Distribution Frame (HDF) - to connect horizontal wiring and
building backbone cable fibers. HDF crossconnects can also connect:
— Fibers from two different horizontal wiring cables.
— Two fibers from the same horizontal wiring cable.

Satellite or Office Distribution Frame (SDF or ODF) - to connect wallbox
and HDF cable fibers in the horizontal wiring. SDF or ODF crossconnects
can also connect fibers from two different wallbox cables.
NOTE

A crossconnect, which is usually in the HDF, is allowed
in the horizontal wiring. This crossconnect can occur in
the SDF or ODF when the HDF interconnects active networking equipment to the link. Crossconnects cannot oc-

cur at the wallbox or at the horizontal wiring subsystem’s
remote wall distribution frame (RWDF).

Each fiber optic crossconnect in the structured wiring is a patch cable connection
between two separate fibers. As such, each involves a patch panel, two panel
couplers, a patch cable, and four connectors (two connectors for the fibers installed into the rear of the patch panel and two connectors for the patch cable
fiber), as follows:
=

The panel couplers mount to the patch panel.

DECconnect System Fiber Opiic Planning and Configuration

‘

The two terminated fibers connect to the back side of the panel-mounted
couplers as follows:
— A fiber coming to the distribution frame from a point that is higher in
the structured wiring hierarchy than the distribution frame mounts its
connector to a panel coupler at the left side (facing the panel) of the
panel. For example, at an IDF a campus backbone cable fiber connects
to the left side of the IDF's patch panel.
— A fiber coming from a lower hierarchical point mounts to a coupler on

the right side of the panel. For example, a building backbone cable
fiber connects to the right side of the IDF’s patch panel.
e

The patch cable connects to the front side of the panel-mounted couplers

to provide the crossconnect administration point’s connection between the
fibers in the wall.

Figure 4-2 illustrates the components involved in a crossconnect administration
point.

Administration Subsystem

4-5

Figure 4-2:

Crossconnect Components

Coupler

Panels

Fiber in the Wal

Coupler

To/From Distribution
Element

Crossconnect
Patch Cable

LKG—3808—89A

4-6

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

NOTE

It is important to maintain this right-side/left-side panel
separation strategy at all patch panels. This strategy is
necessary for the correct labeling, installation, and management of the structured wiring.
Figure 4-3 illustrates the right-side/left-side patch panel separation stategy.
Figure 4-3:

Right-Side/Left-Slde Patch Panel Separation

MDF

Lower

Lower
°

@
)
°
@

/— Campus backbone

e
Q
)
]

IDF

Lower

Higher

Building backbone

HDF
Higher

R
-

1o
2
®

)
®

Legend

= Patch panel

Lower

@
®

Horizontal Wiring

_/
~Al
LKG--3510-00

Administration Subsystem

4-7

Exceptions to the left-side/right-side patch panel separation strategy can occur
as follows:

At an MDF where all campus backbone fibers are of lower hierarchical
value.

At an MDF, individual patch panels are used for connection to each site

At a distribution subsystem where a large number of fibers coming from an-

buildings and patching is done between the patch panels.

other distribution subsystem require an entire patch panel. In this case,
fibers coming from a higher distribution point and those coming from a
lower distribution point are connected in separate patch panels. Patching
is done between these separate patch panels.

Figure 44 illustrates the individual patch panel strategy.

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 4-4:

Individual Patch Panels

MDF
®

Lower

Lower | ®

Campus Backbone

IDF

-4

)

e
Higher | o
Lower

°
@

| e

|3
o

/— Building Backbone

o——
@

HDF
~®
Higher|

Single patch
panels

@
®

)
°

)

]
?

°
")

tower] o

)

Legend
N

e
2

|3
2

—/

= Patch panel

Horizontal wiring

Wallbox lL lL
LKG—4£087-00!

Administration Subsystem

4-9

4.3 Interconnections

Interconnects are administration points that can be used to:
w

Connect cable or cable segments directly together.

Interconnect active networking equipment to the structured wiring at distribution frame patch panels.

The DECconnect System structured wiring uses interconnects for directly connecting cables together at only two points:
s

Wallbox - to connect the horizontal wiring and work area wiring cable fibers.

RWDF - to connect wallbox and HDF cable fibers.

Active equipment can connect to the structured wiring using interconnects at
any of the following distribution frames:
e

Main Distribution Frame (MDF') - to connect campus backbone cable fiber to
active networking equipment (bridges, concentrators).

Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) - to connect building backbone and
campus backbone cable fibers through active equipment.

Horizontal Distribution Frame (HDF) - to connect horizontal wiring and

building backbone cable fibers through active equipment.
s

Satellite or Office Distribution Frame (SDF or ODF) - to connect wallbox
and HDF cable fibers through active equipment.

Each fiber optic interconnect in the structured wiring is a connection between
two separate fibers, as follows:
=

At the wallbox, the horizontal wiring and work area wiring cable fibers connect to a coupler mounted on a snap-in insert.

At the RWDF, the HDF and wallbox cable fibers connect to a panel-mounted
coupler.

4-10

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

At active networking equipment:

— Each fiber in the wall connects to a panel-mounted coupler at the dis-

tribution frame, with the fibers connected to the panel in the same leftside/right-side panel mounting strategy as used for crossconnect points

(Section 4.2): a fiber from a higher point in the hierarchy mounts to the
left side of the patch panel, and a fiber from a lower hierarchical point
mounts to the right side.
NOTE

As previously noted in Section 4.2 the right-side/left-side
patch panel separation strategy is crucial to the overall wiring, labeling, and management strategies. This
right-side/left-side patch panel mounting strategy must
be maintained at all distribution frame patch panels
within the structured wiring. The exceptions also apply
to interconnects.

— Patch cables connect each fiber’s panel-mounted coupler to the active
equipment’s connectors.

Figure 4-5 shows the components involved in an active networking equipment
interconnect administration point.

Administration Subsystem

4-11

Figure 4-5: Active Networking Equipment Interconnect Cecimponents

Fiber in the Wcll—\

’

eV
®

Coupler Panel

Couple.

Patch Cable

/ Fiber

To/From Distribution
Element

To/From Active

Networking Equipment

\
LKG~3807—-B2A

4-12

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

4.4 Horizontal Administration Zones

This section describes how to define the administration zones for the horizontal
wiring subsytem. Defining these zones, and understanding the administration
zone structure, is important to planning the horizontal structure.

Each horizontal wiring subsystem in the cable plant is an administration zone.
Within the zone, the administration of the offices (wallbox connections) can be
done at the horizontal distribution frame (HDF) or at the satellite, office, or remote wall distribution frames (SDFs, ODFs, or RWDFs).
The site’s concept diagrams (created in Chapter 3) show all of the site’s HDFs.
These diagrams must be updated to identify the administration zones. This is
done by labeling each diagrammed HDF with a two-digit numeric code that defines the HDF’s zone number:
s

If only one HDF is on a floor, that HDF’s administration code is 00.

If multiple zones exist on a floor, each zone has an HDF that is labeled with

a sequential two-digit code, starting with 00, so on a floor with four zones,
the HDFs are numbered 00, 01, 02, and 03.
NOTE

Chapter 3 provides greater detail on the process of laying
out the horizontal wiring subsystems for the site’s floors.
Figure 4-6 illustrates a sample backbone concept diagram updated with the
HDF administration zone numbers.

Administration Subsystem

4-13

Figure 4-6: Administration Zone Numbers Added to a Backbone Concept Diagram
100 m (328 ft)
24 ~ 62.5/125

300 m (984 ft)

2
Bldg
1st Flr

6 — Single Mode

24 - 62.5/125 o

Fsm/

228 m (748 ft)

24 — 62.5/125

(01)

Fsm

350 m (1148 ft)

200 m (656 ft)

6 — Single Mode

m
Bidg 2

24 — 62.5/125

|
\

(02)

24 - 625/125

Ist Fir
Bldg 1

1st Fir

6 -~ Single Mode

Bidg 1

1st Fir

(01)

70 m (230 ft)
24 - 62.5/125

50 m (164 ft)
24 — 62.5/125

90 m (295 ft)

24 - 62.5/125

TM~
Bldg 1

2nd Fir

(00)
LKG—3597-89A

4-14

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

4.5 Fiber Optic Structured Wiring Strategy
The DECconnect System'’s fiber optic approach to a site’s structured wiring affects all of the following:

The design of fiber optic crossconnect and interconnect administration

points at the structured wiring’s distribution frames.
s

The labeling of cable and distribution components.

The installation of structured wiring cables and components.

The management of the administration points.

This section definss and describes the DECconnect System’s fiber optic structured wiring strategy by providing descriptions of the following:
o

Fiber cable color code.

Distribution subsystem field color.

The fiber optic crossover.

The rules for the structured wiring strategy.

Administration Subsystem

4-15

4.5.1 Fiber Cable Color Codes

The DECconnect System fiber optic color code identifies separate colors for each

of the fibers in a pair. The first fiber of the pair is an odd-numbered fiber and
the second fiber of the pair is an even-numbered fiber. For data communications
one fiber in the pair is defined as the transmit fiber and the other fiber is defined

as the receive fiber. This fiber pairing is maintained throughout the structured

wiring cable plant.

The fiber optic cables use a 12 color-code system for coding each fiber. In a cable
with more than 12 fibers, the fibers are combined into bundles with a maximum
of 12 fibers.

The bundles are color-coded with either a colored yarn wrapped around the
fibers or a colored outer protective buffer.
Fiber color-code information is used for the following:
e

Splice Description Worksheets (Section 4.6.3).

Distribution Subsystem Connection Worksheet (Figure 10-13).

Table 4-1 lists the fiber color code for DECconnect System indoor cables. In addition, the table shows:

4-16

The fiber number associated with each color code.

The pair letter associated with each fiber pair.

The recommended color code for outdoor cables.

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Table 4-1:

Fiber

Flber Optic Cable Color Coding

or Unit
Number

Pair
Letter

Indoor Cable
Fiber Colors

OQutdoor Cable
Fiber Colors

Blue

Orange

Green

Brown

Slate

White

Red

Black

Yellow

Violet

Light Blue

Natural with Blue dashes

Light Orange

Natural with Orange dashes

Table 42 describes the distribution of fibers within fiber bundles. It shows:

s Typical and nontypical cable fiber counts
e

The number of fiber bundle units for each fiber count

The color code for each fiber bundle unit

The number of fibers in each bundle unit for each fiber count
NOTE

Table 4-2 lists even-numbered fiber counts up to 72 (6

bundles). Higher fiber counts (always even-numbered
to account for transmit and receive fiber pairing) can be
achieved by adding fiber bundles (for example, a red unit
for up to 84, a black unit for up to 96, a yellow bundle for

up to 108). The use of such high-count cables is limited.
Figure 4-7 illustrates the fiber cable color-code construction.

Administration Subsystem

4-17

Table 4-2:

Number

Unit 1

Unit 2

Unit 3

Unit 4

Flbers

Fibers

Fiber

of Fiber

(Blue)

(Green)

(Brown)

Unit 6

(White)

;

]

;

)

]

;

Bundles

(Orange)

Unit 5

(Slate)

Count

4-18

Flber Bundle Distribution and Color Coding

Fibers

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 4-7:

Fiber Cable Color-Code Construction

Cable jacket

Color-coded
fiber bundle unit

Color—coded
fibers
Aramid strength
members

LKG-3518-89!

4.5.2 Distribution Subsystem Fleld Color

Each of the distribution subsystems is defined by a color field. These color fields
help provide:
s

Identification of the distribution frame

Higher and lower hierarchy indentification at each distribution frame

Easy identification of cables between distribution subsystems

Administration Subsystem

4-19

The five color-coded field definitions for use within the distribution subsystems
are as follows:

White field - Campus and building backbone cable connections at the MDF,
IDF, and HDF

Brown field - The termination field of a campus backbone cable at an IDF

Gray field - Horizontal wiring cable connections between the HDF-to-SDF,
HDF-t0-ODF, or HDF-to-RWDF

Purple field - Horizontal wiring cable connections between the HDF-tocomputer room and HDF-to-system common equipment

Blue field - Horizontal wiring cable connections between the HDF-to-wallbox,

SDF-to-wallbox, ODF-to-wallbox, or RWDF-to-wallbox

During the installation process, color labels are added to each panel coupler at
each of the patch panels.
Information on labeling the field colors at the distribution frames is given in
Section 4.6.

Figure 4-8 illustrates the distribution subsystem field color-coding at each of the
distribution frames.

4-20

DECconnect System F._ ar Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 4-8:

Distribution Subsystem Fileld Color-Coding

varay

}

HDF

Horizontal SDF

Wiring

M Gray
&

Blue [

J4——LJ

Purple D\

Wallboxes

Building

IDF

Blue D< %
r——————————— 4

Backbone

|
Building
2
|
|
=== 1
|
Computer | | |
IDF
I
| White
Room
||
:
[
|
|
|
|
|
|
I——————————————————— —.' |
:

|
! |
||

Brown

Campus

Backbone

|
I|

IDF

Building
3 ——— T

———

Brown

White D

|
]
i

e e e e

Campus

Backbone

|
|
'

Building

MDF [ Backbone

||
:

White

b —————— 4

|
|

e e4
LKG—4088-001

Administration Subsystem

4-21

Table 4-3 identifies the higher and lower field colors at each distribution frame.
Table 4-3:

Higher/Lower Color Flelds

Distribution Frame

Higher

Lower

MDF

—_

White

IDF

Brown

Whaite

HDF

White

G ray

White

Purple

White

Blue

SDF

Gray

Blue

ODF

Gray

Blue

RWDF

Gray

Blue

4.5.3 Fiber Optic Crossover

The definition of a fiber optic crossover is an administration point in a device-todevice link where the transmit fiber of of one device becomes the receive fiber of
the other device.

At the simplest level, all communications within a network are point-to-point.
That is, a signal sent by one device is received by another. This concept is il'astrated in Figure 4-9, which shows two active devices hard-wired together for
communications.

Figure 4-9:

Crossover Wiring

Active

Device

‘Tx

Active

Device

LKG-3594-B9A

4-22

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

As shown in Figure 4-9, at some point in any device-to-device link the fiber going from one device’s transmit output must become a fiber going to the other
device’s receive input. This transmit-to-receive switch, called a crossover, must
occur if the communications between the two devices is to work. Since all communications are essentially point-to-point within the structured wiring cable
plant, and all point-to-point links require a crossover to function correctly, part

of the DECconnect System'’s fiber optic administration strategy is to maucge
those crossovers.

4.5.4 Rules of the Fiber Optic Structured Wiring Strategy

Successful crossover management requires understanding and keeping in mind
the following rules when designing fiber optic subsystems and installing fiber
optic cable and components:
s

The one-to-one fiber optic wiring rule

The crossover rules for crossconnects and interconnects

4.5.4.1 One-to-One Fiber Optic Wiring Rule

The one-to-one rule requires that the fiber pairs installed in the wall between
distribution elements maintain a one-to-one relationship. No crossovers can occur between a fiber pair in the wall. The connection worksheet in Figure 10-13
tracks the one-to-one connection of fiber pairs between the distribution subsys-

tem patch panels. A black and red washer is installed on the couplers at each
of the patch panels to differentiate between fibers in the fiber pairs. Each fiber
pair has an odd-number and an even-number fiber (see Table 4-1). The odd-

numbered fiber is connected to the black washer coupler and the even-numbered
fiber is connected to the red washer coupler. Figure 4—10 illustrates the placement of the black and red washers at the patch panel couplers.
NOTE
The red and black washers used for installation on the
couplers can be ordered from vendors listed in the auxil-

iary section in Chapter 11.

Administration Subsystem

4-23

Black and Red Washer Placements at Panel Couplers

Left

00000

Lower

02000

{

02000

©@0000Q

Fib_er_{_: %

0000

Higher

Figure 4-10:

Right

Legenu.

® = Plastic olack washer
@ = Plastic red washer

LKG—4103-901

The one-to-one rule applies to the fiber pair connection at the wallbox. Each
wallbox insert identifies its fiber pair transmit connector with a black dot. The
odd-numbered fiber connects to the coupler with the black dot and the even-

numbered fiber connects to the other coupler. The receive input of the user active device connects to the black dot coupler (Figure 4-11). More information

about connecting the user’s active equipment or station device to the wallbox is
provided in Chapter 6.

The one-to-one rule is critical to the correct installation of the fiber optic cabling.

As such, the installation rules and guidelines cutlined in the DECconnect System
Fiber Optic Installation guide are based on ensuring that the cne-to-one connection of the fiber optic wiring is maintained.

4-24

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

.- Jure 4-11:

Fiber Connections to the Wallbox

/ 4-Fiber office cable

#1 Blue fiber

{odd—numbered)

\¢’

#4 Brown fiber
{evon—numbered)

;

' W Jé ¢

#3 Green fiber

.:,

(odd—numbered)

bayonet connector adapter

» Y

FDDI-{0-2.5 mm

£~

Zid ‘

Black dot

#2 Orange fiber (even—numbered)
2.5 'nm Bayonet ST/type connector panel

Red boot connector
— Black boot connector

Black dot

LKG-4111-801

Administration Subsystem

4-25

4.5.4.2 Crossover Rules for Crossconnects and Interconnects

The crossover rules define how crossconnects and interconnect patch cables are
used to connect the subsystems together. These rules, which depend on the hierarchical relationship of the fibers installed inside the wall to the distribution
frame, are as follows:
NOTE

The DECconnect System’s hierarchy is described in
greater detail in Section 3.3, Structured Wiring Hierarchy.
m

Passive connection rules - define how crossconnect patch cables are con-

nected to each of the distribution patch panels.
— Higher-to-lower (passive) rule - when a crossconnect connects a pair

of fibers in the wall that are higher in hierarchy than the distribution frame to a pair of fibers in the wall that are a lower hierarchy,
no crossover must occur in the patch cable. Figure 4-12 illustrates a
higher to lower passive connection rule.
— Lower-to-lower (passive) rule - when a crossconnect connects a pair
of fibers in the wall that are both lower in hierarchy than the distri-

bution frame, a crossover must occur in the patch cable. Figure 4-13
illustrates a lower to lower passive rule connection.
=

Active connection rules - define how interconnect patch cables are used for

connecting active equipment to the structured wiring:

— When an interconnect connects an active device to a pair of fibers in
the wall that are higher in hierarchy than the distribution frame, a
crossover must occur in the patch cable.
— When an interconnect connects an active device to a pair of fiber in
the wall that is lower in hierarchy than the distribution frame, no
crossover occurs in the patch cable.
Figure 4-14 illustrates active equipment connection rules.

NOTE
In the DECconnect System’s structured wiring, higher-

to-lower and lower-to-lower are the only hierarchical relationships that can occur. Each of these are defined by
the field colors as indicated in Table 4-3. Figure 4-15
illustrates the distribution subsystem higher and lower
connections.

4-26

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Higher-to-Lower (Passive) Connection Rules

—— T —— — - G s S S ——

—_

Figure 4-12:

Behind-the~-Wall

HDF—to~IDF Fibers

|
|

r—=—="—"=—79

> Behind—ta—Wall

!
|
|

RWDF—-o-HDF Fibers

Non-Crossover
Crossconnect

|
|

j } RWDF
|/

Couplers

]
D Behind—the—Wall

Legend:

l Black-boot connector

B Red-boot connector
@ Black-washer coupler
00

Red-washer coupler

Wallbox—to—-RWDF Fibers

Wallbox
Wallbox

Couplers

L Lower-level hisrarchical
fibers

H Higher-level hierarchical
fibers

LKG-3508-801

Administration Subsystem

4-27

Figure 4-13: Lower-to-Lower (Passive) Connection Rules

Crossover

Campus

backbone cable
MDF-to-1DF fibers

“d_}

crossconnect

\-—Cam us

backbone cable
MDF-to-IDF fibers

Legend:

. Black-boot connector
Red-boot connector

@ Black-washer coupler
{3 Red-washer coupler
L lower-level hierarchical
fiber connections

H Higher-level hierarchical
fiber connections

LKG-3590-801

4-28

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 4-14:

Active Equipment Connection Rules

—

Non-Crossover

c—

interconnect

Crossover /
Interconnect

Active Equipment

Legend:

I Black-boot connector

B Red-boot connector
&} Black-washer coupier

3 Red-vasher coupler

L tower-icve! hierarchical
fiber

H Higher-level hierarchical
fiber

LKG-3600-801

Administration Subsystem

4-29

Figure 4-15: Distribution Subsystem Higher and Lower Connectlons

MDF

Lower
o

..?

Blue

Campus Backbone

Higher

Orange
o

7]
@

IDF

Lower

—-

/— Building Backbone

L o

l--o Tx |l Tx

HDF
Lower
Higher

-0 Rx =0 Rx

sese

Active equipment

seceqd

Lower

Horizontal wirinng —/
Walbox | | |

Legend:

e
a

¢
e

Tx“> Rx
= Patch panel
User equipment
LKG-4080-80)

4-30

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

4.6 Labeling

The labeling strategy consists of two separate but interrelated processes:
a

Identifier definition process - during this process, the network designer:

Uses the concept diagram (created in Chapter 3) to assign identifiers to
all of the structured wiring cable and distribution elements (distribution frames and wallboxes). The assigned identifiers are recorded on a
set of worksheets.

Uses the Cable Identifier Worksheet (Figure 4—18) to fill in Splice
Description Worksheet (Section 4.6.3)for planned structured wiring
splice points.

Uses the Cable Identifier Worksheet during the distribution frame design (provided in Chapter 10) to create the Distribution Subsystem
Connection Worksheet (Figure 10~-13) that defines all of the fiber connections at each distribution frame’s patch panels and defines the field
color locations.

Includes all of the filled-in worksheets (cable identifier, connection, and
splice description) and connection label maps with the installation documents.

Label creation process - during this process, the installer:

Uses the Cable Identifier Worksheet to transfer the information to the
wallbox and cable labels.

Uses the Splice Description Worksheet to splice the cables together as
defined in the worksheet and create the splice component labels.

Uses the panel connection label maps and worksheets in Chapter 10 to
connect the fibers to the distribution frame patch panels and create the
panel labels.

Attaches all labels to the cable and distribution elements.
The following subsections provide descriptions of:
e

Identifier Worksheets

DECconnect System Identifiers

Splice Description Worksheet

Administration Subsystem

4-31

Distribution Subsystem Connection Worksheet Process

Label Creation Process

4.6.1 Identifler Worksheets

This section provides the four types of identifier worksheets to photocopy and fill
in during the label definition process:

Backbone Identifier Worksheet (Figure 4-16). Describes the identifier information for the campus and building backbones, as follows:

— Section I Project Identification. Identifies the project, page number of
the worksheet, designer, and date.

— Section II Main Distribution Frame (MDF) Identifiers. Identifies each
site’s MDF by building, floor, and equipment room identification number. Records the DECconnect System identifier for the MDF, and identifies the total number of cables that will be connected to that MDF.
— Section III Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) Identifiers. Identifies
each of the site’s IDFs by building, floor, and equipment room identification number. Records the DECconnect System identifier for each IDF,
and identifies the total number of cables that will be connected to that
IDF.

Horizontal Wiring Identifier Worksheet (Figure 4—-17). Identifies the project and each of a building’s horizontal wiring distribution frames by floor,

type of distribution frame (HDF, SDF, ODF, or RWDF), and equipment room
identification number. Records the DECconnect System identifier for the
distribution frame, and identifies the total number of cables that will be
connected to that distribution frame.
s

Cable Identifier Worksheet (Figure 4-18). Identifies the project and each of

the building’s cables by its distribution element (distribution frame or wallbox) connections, identifies the cable’s type and fiber count, and records the
DECconnect System identifier for each cable.
s

Wallbox Identifier Worksheet (Figure 4-19). Identifies the project and hori-

zontal wiring subsystem, and records the DECconnect System wallbox identifier. It identifies the distribution frame, the patch panel shelf location, the
fiber pair that connects with the wallbox, the wallbox office location, cable
type, and the snap-in connector.

4-32

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 4-16:

Backbone Identifier Worksheet

I. Project identification:
Project I1D:

Page

Designer:

Date:

il. Main Distribution Frame (MDF) Identifiers:
Building | Floor
ID
Number

ER
D

MDF Identifier

Number of
Cables

Comments

Number of
Cables

Comments

Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) Identifiers:

Building | Floor
ID
Number

ER
ID

IDF Identifier

LKG-23633-801

Administration Subsystem

4-33

Figure 4-17:

Horlzontal Wiring Identifler Worksheet

1. Project Identification:

Project ID:

Page

Designer:

Date:

il. Distribution Elements Location:

Building Identifier:
il. identifiers:

Floor

Typeof | ER

Number | Frame

Distribution Frame | Number
Label ID

of Cables

Equipment

LKG—-3634-801

4-34

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planninn and Configuration

Figure 4-18:

Cable Identifier Worksheet

I. Project Identification:

Project ID:

Page

Designer:

Date:

1l. Cable Location:

Building Identifier:

indoor or Campus Backbone:

{tl. ldentifiers:

Higher-Level
Distribution

Element ID

Lower-Level
Distribution

Element ID

Number
of

Fibers

Cable

Type

Cable Identifier

LKG-3835-891

Administration Subsystem

4-35

Figure 4-19:

Wallbox !dentifler Worksheet

I. Project ldentification:

Project ID:

Page

Designer:

Date:

Il. Subsystem Identification:

HDF identifier:

Building Identifier:
lil. identifiers:

Wallbox

Distribution Frame

Label
iD

Wallbox

Cable
iD

Media | Snap-in
Type
Type

LKG-3836-891

4-36

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

4.6.2 DECconnect System Identifiers

The DECconnect System Identifiers define the types of identifiers that can be
used for the structured wiring distribution elements (distribution frames and
wallboxes) and cables.

Use the DECconnect System identifiers and the concept diagrams, which define
the site’s distribution element structure, to do the following:
s

Define the distribution element identifiers and record those identifiers in the

the Backbone, Horizontal Wiring, and Wallbox Identifier Worksheets.
=

Use the distribution element identifiers to define and record cable identifiers
in the Cable Identifier Worksheets.

Add the identifiers for the cables that connect to each wallbox to the Wallbox
Identifier Worksheets.

Add the distribution frame patch panel numbers that each wallbox connects
with to the Wallbox Identifier Worksheets.
NOTE

The patch panel numbers are not added to the Wallbox
Identifier Worksheets until the distribution frame component layout diagrams are created. These procedures are
explained in Chapter 10.
The completed identifier worksheets are used to create the Distribution Subsystem

Connection Worksheet in the procedures in Chapter 10.
Figure 4-20 provides a summary of the DECconnect System Identifers.

Administration Subsystem

4-37

Figure 4-20:

DECconnect System identifier Summary Sheet

Distributioi: Frame identifiers

Equipment ldentifiers

/— Main Distribution
—
Framc {MDF)

/—-— Computer Equipment
or System Common

E0045

MO1

Equipment

Syt

L Unique Number

. Building Number

Horizontal Distribution

Frame (HDF)

assigned for equipment
in each building

Floor Number

HO0105
Administration Zone
Office Distribution
Frame (ODF)

»~

LO00

Unique Number

~ assigned to each ODF

Wallbox Identifiers

" Wallbox

WB0092

—

Intermediate Distribution

Frame (IDF)

Unigue Number assigned
tc each wallbox in each
building

807
%

N\——— Building Number
Cable Identifiers

/—‘ Satellite Distribution
Frame (SDF)

y 4

Higher-level distribution

element

S004

Sontny et

Unique Number

N assigned to each SDF

e
£

Remote Wall Distribution
Frame (RWDF\

RO12

Cable Number
Lower-level distribution
element

Unique Number

assigned to each RWDF
LKG—4107-901

4-38

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

4.6.2.1 Distribution Frame ldentifiers
Three subsystems use at least one type of distribution frame:

Campus backbone - contains main distribution frame (MDF) only.

Building backbone - contains intermediate distribution frames (1DFs) only.

Horizontal wiring - contains one horizontal distribution frame (HDF) and
any (or none) of the following distribution frames:

— Satellite distribution frame (SDF)
— Office distribution frame (ODF)
— Remote wall distribution frame (RWDF)
Campus Backbone MDF Identifiers

Make a photocopy of the Backbone ldentifier Worksheet and fill in Section I (project identification). Then use Section II (MDF identifiers) to:
#

Identify the MDF by its building, floor, and equipment room ID numbers.

Define and record the idertifier for each MDF.

Identify the total number of cables that will connect to each MDF.

The MDF identifiers use a capital letter M and a two-digit numeric code that is
equal to the MDF’s building number. For example:
MO7 is the identifier for an MDF in building 7.

M16 is the identifier for an MDF in building 16.
Bullding Backbone IDF Identifiers

Use Section III (IDF identifiers) of the Backbone Identifier Worksheet to:
s

Identify each IDF by its building, floor, and equipment room ID numbers.

Define and record the identifier for each IDF.

Identify the total number of cables that will connect to each IDF.

Administration Subsystem

4-39

The IDF identifiers use a capital letter B (for building) and a two-digit numeric
code that is equal to the IDF’s building number. For example:
BO03 is the identifier for an IDF in building 3.
.B22 is the identifier for an IDF in building 22.
NOTE

Use B instead of I to avoid confusion with the number 1.
Horizontal Wiring Districution Frame Identifiers

Photocopy the Horizontal Wiring Identifier Worksheet (Figure 4~17) and fill
in the project (Section 1) and building identifications (Section II). Then use the
identifiers section (Section III) to:

Identify all distribution frames by floor and equipment room ID numbers.
List in this order:

All HDFs

All SDFs

All ODFs

All RWDFs

Define and record the horizontal wiring distribution frame identifiers.

Identify the total number of cables that will connect to each distribution
frame.

The HDF identifiers use a capital letter H and a four-digit code. The first two
digits identify the HDF by it's floor number. For example:

H04XX indicates the HDF is on the fourth floor.
H20XX indicates the HDF is on the twentieth floor.

The second two digits of the HDF's four-digit code identify the administration
zone number with "00" code as the administration zone number for the first HDF
on a floor. For example:

DECccihnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

H0401 indicates the HDF is for administration zone one of the two administration zones on the fourth floor.

H2000 indicates the HDF is the first HDF on the twentieth floor.
NOTE

Administration zone numbers were defined (and recorded
in the site’s concept diagrams) in Section 4.4.

The SDF, ODF, and RWDF identifiers use single letters with numeric codes: a
three-digit codes for all SDFs, ODFs, and RWDFs. The letters used in the codes
are: S for SDF; L (local) for ODF; and R for RWDEF.
NOTE

Use the L instead of O; the capital letter O is often mistaken for the number 0.

Develop the numeric code of the SDF, ODF, and RWDF identifiers as follows:
m

Start with 001 and sequentially number all of the SDFs so that each SDF in
the building has a unique code.

Repeat the process for all of the ODFs.

Repeat the process for all of the RWDFs.

The SDF, ODF, and RWDF identijiers are independent of each other and of their
location within the building.
Equipment Identifiers

Computer room equipment and system common equipment indentifiers use a
single letter with a four-digit code. The letter used in the code is E for the computer or system common equipment.

The numeric code starts with 0001 and sequentially numbers the equipment in
each building.
NOTE

Assign an identifier to computer and system common
equipment involved in direct link with an HDF only.

Computer and system common equipment that connects

Administration Subsystem

4-41

to the structured wiring at wallboxes does not require an
identifier.

These identifiers are recorded on the worksheet under the equipment line for an
HDF which services this equipment.

Wallbox identitiers

Make at least one photocopy of the Wallbox Identifier Worksheet for each horizonta) wiring subsystem in each building and fill in the project (Section I) and
subsystem identifications (Section Il). Then use the identifiers (Section III) to:
s

Define and record the wallbox identifiers.

Record the distribution frame identifier, the patch panel shelf location, the
fiber pair letter, and the columa/row position of the fiber pair that connect
to the wallbox.

NOTE

The patch panel shelf location and fiber pair connections
are added to the worksheet during procedures outlined in
Chapter 10, Distribution Frame Design. In Section 10.3,
Distribution Frame Layout Diagrams, each patch panel
shelf is identified by a number. In Section 10.7, the cable
connections in the wall are defined for each of the distribution frame patch panels. The number for the patch
panel shelf and fiber pair connection that each wallbox
connects to is added to the Wallbox Identifier Worksheet
at that time.

Record the office identification number of the wallbox location, as well as
the cable media and wallbox snap-in connector.

The wallbox identifiers use the capital letters WB and a four-digit code. Develop
the code as follows:

Start at the HDF in administration zone 00 of the first floor (H0100) with
the code 0001 and sequentially number the building’s wallboxes. For example, if H0100 has 86 wallbcxes, the wallbox identifiers for the horizontal
wiring subsystem are WB0001 through WB0086.

Go through the building, one administration zone at a time, sequentially

number each new administration zone’s wallboxes, with the starting number
in each new sequence dependent on the last number used in the previous

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

administration zone sequence. For example, when H0100 has 86 wallboxes,
the first number in the wallbox sequence for H0201 is WB0087.
NOTE

To add a wallbox to a zone at a future date, use the next

available sequential wallbox number for the building.
For example, if the last wallbox number assigned in the
building was WB0756, then additional wallboxes begin
with the identifier value of WB0757. The exact sequence
of the wallbox identifiers in a zone is not important. It is
important, however, that each wallbox in a building has
its own unique identifier value.
4.6.2.2 Cabie ldentifiers
Fill in a Cable Identifier Worksheet for:
s

Each building’s IDF-to-HDF cables.

All of the site’'s MDF-to-IDF cables.

Each of the horizontal wiring subsystem cables.

For each Cable Identificr Worksheet fill in:
s

The project identification section (Section I).

The cable location section (Section II) to identify the building and whether

the worksheet is for indoor or campus backbone cables.
=

Use the identifiers section (Section III) to:

— Identify each cable by its distribution frame, wallbox, computer room,
or system common equipment identifiers, as well as by its fiber count
and cable type.

— Define and record the identifiers for each cable.
The cable identifiers use a thrree-part code that identifies:

— The hierarchically higher-level distribution element from which the cable is coming.

Administration Subsystiem

4-43

— The hierarchically lower-level distribution element to which the cable is
going.

NOTE

In the case of an HDF-to-computer room or HDF-to-

system common equipment cable, the computer room
or system common equipment identifier is listed as
the lower-level distribution element.

— A two-digit cable number. If only one cable is going between the defined distribution link points, the cable number is 01. The cable numbers are always sequential. For example, if four cables are going between the same two distribution elements, then the cables are numbered 01, 02, 03, and 04.
NOTE

For information on defixfing the cable identifiers, see the

descriptions for multiple-segment and breakout link cables later in this section.

Examples of cable identifiers are:
H1203S089/02 identifies the cable as the second cable in a link between the
HDF in zone 3 of the twelfth floor and SDF 089.
M01B02/02 identifies the cable as the second cable in a link between an

MDF in building 1 and an IDF in building 2.
B04H0200/01 identifies the cable as the first (or only) cable in a link between building 4's IDF and the HDF on floor 2 of the building.
HO0201E02/02 identifies the cable as the second cable in an HDF-to-system
common equipment link in administration zone one of the second floor.
Once all the cable identifiers for a building are defined and recorded, use the
Cable Identifier Worksheets to update the Wallbox Ident.iner Worksheets.
Muitiple-Segment Cable Identifiers

When a single link is made up of two or more cable segments spliced together,
each cable has the same identifier except that a letter is added to the two-digit
cable number. For example, for a link that is made up of three segments and
has the basic identifier of M0O3B02/0)1, one segment’s cable is M03B02/01A, the

second segment is M03B02/01B, and the third segment’s cable is M03B02/01C.

Which segment cable in the link is labeled with A, B, or C is not important. It is

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

important, however, that each cable has a unique cable identifier that identifies
it as part of a multiple-segment cable link.
Breakout Link ldentifiers

When a breakout link is used in the campus backbone, the cables going from
IDFs to the breakout point do not need special labels. Each of the IDF-to-breakout
link cables is going to a single MDF. Therefore, each cable label simply lists the
MDF and IDF identifiers and the number of the cable. For example, M02B03/2
is the cable identifier for the second cable from the IDF in building 3 going to
the MDF in building 2 by way of the breakout link.
However, the cable going from the MDF to the breakout point needs an identifier
that shows it is going to more than one IDF. To create this identifier, add both
IDF dentifiers to the label for the cable that goes from the MDF to the breakout
point. For example, M02B03B06/2 is the second MDF cable in a breakout link
between the MDF in building 2 and the IDFs in buildings 3 and 6.
4.6.3 Splice Description Worksheet

A Splice Description Worksheet is only filled out for splice points where a direct
color-to-color splice relationship cannot be maintained between the splice cables.
For example:

At a splice closure that will be used for a campus backbone breakout link

At an RWDF where a single 12-fiber cable from the HDF is spliced to three

between two 24-fiber cables and a single 48-fiber cable.
4-fiber wallbox cables.

In both cases, the color-to-color relationship cannot be directly carried out: either different-colored fibers will be spliced together (in the case of the RWDF’s
splice) or fibers from different-colored bundles will be spliced (as in the case of
the breakout link splice closure).

This section provides instructions for filling in the Splice Description Worksheets.
Photocopy the worksheet in Figure 4~21. Use one copy of the worksheet for each
splice point that does not keep a direct color-to-color splice relationship.
Section | Project Identification

Identify the project, worksheet page number, designer, and date.

Administration Subsystem

4-45

Section 1l Splice Component ldentification

Identify the splice point with a two-digit identifier developed as follows:
e

Assign a sequentially developed two-digit identifier (starting with 01) to

each splice point using the letter code SC (for splice component).
n

[Tpdate the site or building floor plan to show the location of each splice
point and each splice point’s identifier.

Reccd the splice point identifier on the worksheet.

Section HI Splice Descriptions

Use this section to define how the calles will be spliced together, as follows:
s

Use the Cable Identifier Worksheets to identify the cable identifiers for all
cables involved in the splice.

List the fibers for the hierarchically higher-level cable by cable label, fiber
bundle color, and fiber color within that bundle. For example, in a 24-fiber
MDF cable the blue bundle fibers are listed first foll: ved by the orange bundle fibers.

Define which fibers in the hierarchically lower-level cables connect to each

of the higher-level cable’s individual fiber. For example, for two 12-fiber IDF

cables from BO1 and B02, define the 12-fiber cable from B01 as splicing oneto-one to the same color fibers in the blue MDF cable bundle, and define the
fibers from B0O2 as splicing one-to-one to the same color fibers in the MDF
cable’s orange bundle.
NOTE

For additional information on fiber optic color codes, see
the color code information that is given in Section 4.5.1.
Section IV Comments

Use this section to provid= any additional descriptions or special instructions regarding the splice point being defined.

4-46

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 4-21:

Splice Description Worksheet

I. Project Identification:

Project ID:

Page

Designer:

Date:

Il. Splice Component identifier:
. Splice Descriptions:

Higher-Level Cable

Identifier

IV.

Fiber

Lower-Level Cable

Bundle

Identifier

Fiber

Bundle

Comments
LKG-3637-891

Administration Subsystem

4-47

4.6.4 Distribution Subsystem Connection Worksheet Process

This section provides an overview of the connection worksheet process, a process
that is completed during the distribution frame design (Chapter 10).
Each distribution frame has at least one patch panel. A connection worksheet
must be completed in order to provide a connection map between the patch pan-

els located at each of the distribution subsystems. These worksheets are used
during the installation to:
e

Identify which fiber of which cable connects to each panel position.

Maintain the fiber pair relationship.

Identify the higher and lower field colors at each distribution panel.

Fill in the physical labels that attach to each panel.

Figure 4-22 shows a patch panel label with its corresponding positions in the

patch panel. See Chapter 10 for more details about the patch panel connection
label map used by the installer to create this label.

4-48

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 4-22:

Paici Panel Label

LsCheOjeolOeleyOeye)

(il

N N\

LKG—3023—-89A

Administration Subsystem

4-49

4.6.5 Label Creation Process

During the label creation process, the installers use the identifier and splice description worksheets, as well as the patch panel connection label maps, to:
e

Label each cable.

Label each wallbox.

Perform splicing at splice points where direct color-to-color relationships
cannot be maintained and create labels for those splice point components.

Connect the cables to the distribution frame and create the labels for each
distribution frame patch panel.

NOTE

Labels for each of the distribution elements can be ordered from vendors listed in the auxiliary section in
Chapter 11.

In addition, the installation of black and red washers at the distribution frame
patch panels identify which coupler positions are connected with even-numbered
(red) or odd-numbered (black) fibers of a cable fiber pair in the wall (see Table 4-1).
4.6.5.1 Labeling the Cables

The identifier for each cable is listed in the Cable Identifier Worksheets. During
the installation of each cable, the installer:
»

Refers to the appropriate Cable Identifier Worksheet to find the cable identification recorded in the worksheet for that cable.

Transfers the identifier to a cable label and attaches that label to each end
of the cable, with the label attached far enough in from the cable end so
that it will not be removed from the cable during the cable connector termination.

Figure 4-23 shows a sample cable label and identifies the illustrated identifier
values.

4-50

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 4-23:

Sample Cable Label

per-Level
Distribution
Element \

Cable Number

M04B10/04

=\ Lower-Level
Distribution
Element

LKG-3601-801

Each of the cable labels may be color coded to provide easy identification of the
type of cable. These color coded labels would follow the distribution subsystem
field colors identified in Section 4.5.2. The label colors are listed in Table 4—4.
Table 4-4:

Label Colors

Label Color

Cable Color Description

White

Campus backbone or building backbone

Gray

Horizontal wiring between HDF-to-SDF, HDF-to-ODF,
HDF-to-RWDF

Purple

Horizontal wiring between HDF-to-computer rooms, and
HDF-to-system common equipment

Blue

Administration Subsystem

Horizontal wiring between HDF-to-Wallbox, SDF-to-Wallbox,
ODF-to-Wallbox, RWDF-to-Wallbox

4-51

4.6.5.2 Labeling the Wallboxes

Each wallbox has a small white label that attaches to the front cover. The identifier information needed for each wallbox label is listed in the Wallbox Identifier
Worksheets and includes:
s

The wallbox identifier.

The identifier for the distribution frame that the wallbox connects to, in-

cluding the patch panel number at that distribution frame.
e

The office number.
NOTE
The wallbox labels are often typed up separate from the
actual wallbox installation process. The office number
is added to the label primarily as a means of identifying

where the label itself is to be installed. It also provides
& means of identifying an office location when no other
physical identification is provided for that office, such as
during the early stages of a floor’s layout.
Figure 4-24 shows a sample wallbox label and identifies the label values.

4-52

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 4-24:

Sample Wallbox Label

Wallbox Label

A\
Distribution Frame

identifier \

Wallbox Identification

WB0051 -

1505 ~

|~ pach Panel
Number

Office Location
LKG-~3605-801

4.6.5.3 Using the Splice Description Worksheets

Splice Description Worksheets are filled in by the designer for all splice points
where direct color-to-color splice relationships cannot be maintained. The in-

staller uses the worksheets to:
s

Perform the splices as defined in the worksheet.

Create the physical label for the splice component.

4.6.5.4 Using the Distribution Subsystem Connection Worksheet

The connection worksheet (Figure 10~13) created during the distribution frame

design process (Chapter 10) defines exactly which cable fiber goes to which distribution frame patch panel. During the distribution frame installation, the in-

staller:
a

.lefers to the connection worksheet for each distribution frame patch panel

and connects the cable fibers to that patch panel exactly as identified by column letter and row number.
=

Fills in the patch panel label to show where the fiber is connected.

Administration Subsystem

4-53

Provides color identification to the patch panel labels to distinguish the
higher and lower hierarchy and attaches the color labels to the coupler panels.

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
0
sss sl
btletss00
0 00
00
010 00 00000000800
808800:
008
0.99800
000
000
000
DO P P00 000
NS00 000006006000 08880000000
NOIP PO PP IO D00 0.5.9.00069.0008680809.990
PO PSP 0000000090080 0006000¢088000+04
PO OO V000.0.0.906.860860000040680.9000
)09 00.00.0090.9.0.0.88.0600000080008090,
HAX KK AKX AKX AKX ALK LT AUXA LXK LKLK

PO 009.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.080058600090684
} 000959.00.00.0.0.600.0608806604
X
K AU AXKKXK
KK
AXK XKL
AH
KEXA

15.0.0,0:6.0,0.0:9.8.6.9.9.0.9.66.6064
9
)9.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.9.9.9.6.9
.0.0.9:0.0.0.6,0.0.0.0.9.0.090
K
KKK KKKX
XXX KRAA
KAKXXKRERKKXKX
).9.0.6.$.0:9.4.9.9.94
AXXKXXAXXX

XERXXKAX
:9.9.9.9.4
XXX
X

X
XXX

XXXXX

XAXAXKK

0.4, 4.6.4.0
0.0

KX XAXXXXXKXX

)0.9.0.9.0.0.08.96¢.04
XXX XAXAELXKAKXKXX

):9,6.6.0.0.0.0.0.6.0.0.9.6¢

)9,6.0.9.9.9.0.6.6.9.96.6.9090644

)9.5.:0.0.9,0.5.8.6.0.0.0.0.9.9.6¢$994
AA LA A EX AL KHKARKA XK AXKLKL
$0.0.0.0.00.0.0.0,0.5.9.0.0.0.09.9.¢.9896¢4

ORI OIS VIND 9.0.0.69.99.6688.94
HAKH AKX KAK LKA AT AKX AKX KKXKKKXEK

KU KEAXKY AN AAAK KA LKL AKX AKARAKEK
XXX AKX XX AKX LYY KAA KA AL LXK AR EXAKKKAK
WLKK L LKA LA AL LA ARER AT A XA AL ALK ALLKK
WA AR AR AR LA F A AXLE L LKLY AL XA LA L LLXKK
CEMNARAIY

OO0 S0 Out

DN G H0.0.999.9.04

LY LARL LA ARR AL KRR LA AL A LA KXAXKRKREKK
U LKA LA AR LI ALK AR K AT AL AL AL ALAAKXKKKKL
PEP OO O PO VOV VIO 058.0.6.0.6809060408

6004
000
S0 000NV OISO 00000080098004
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXYXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
N 00PN IIIIID D0900.0.0.09999600.609999068.96438

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design
This chapter describes the fiber optic design process used to create the network
schematic and calculate the link certification loss value acceptance criteria for
the installed cable plant.
NOTE

For copper-based structured wiring, refer to the
DECconnect System Planning and Configuration Guide
(EK-DECSY-CG).

The design process for known applications is a procedure for creating network
schematics that define the location of the active equipment, connector pairs, and
splices in the structured wiring cable plant.

Creating the schematics for known applications requires understanding:
s

Fiber optic link structure and design factors

DECconnect System cable plant requirements

Fiber optic link-loss models

Product application information for the active networking equipment

Link-loss calculations

Link certification values

5-1

Designing a structured wiring cable plant where there is an unknown application requires

understanding:
s

DECconnect System cable plant requirements

Fiber optic segment optical budget planning numbers

Link certification values

Figure 5-1 provides an overview flow chart of the design process for both known
and unknown applications.

5-2

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 5—1:

Deslign Process Flow Chart

Are
Required
Documents
Available

Go to Section 5.1 and review
the documentation
requirements.

Yes

Are
Fiber Optic
Links
Understood

Go to Section 5.2 and review
the fiber optic link
descriptions.

Yes

Are
Cable Plant
Requirements
Understood

Go to Section 5.3 and review

the cable plant
requirements.

Yes

Are

Fiber Optic

Link-Loss Models
Understood
2

Are

Link-Loss
Planning Numbers
Unde;stood

Go to Section 5.4 and review
the fiber optic link-loss models
(for known application design
only).

Go to Section 5.5 and review
the link-loss planning
(for unknown application
design only).

LKG-3838-88

Figure 5-1 Cont’d on next page

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

5-3

Figure 5-1(Cont.):

Design Process Flow Chart

Prgrd?: °

Go to Section 5.6 and review
the product application

Applications

descriptions (for known

Unde;stood

application design only).

Go to Section 5.7 and create
the network schematics.

Are
Link-Loss
Calculations
Done

Go to Section 5.8 and perform
the link-loss calculations (for
known application design
only).

Are
Link Certification
Values
Recorded

Go to Section 5.9 and record
the link centification loss
values.

Yes

Go to Chapter 6 and design
the work area wiring
subsystems.

LKG-3639-80!

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

5.1 Required Documents

The following documents are needed during the design process:
=

The network logical diagram created in Chapter 2 - defines the network’s

active equipment for known application design only.
s

The concept diagram created in Cha ter 3 - defines the distribution subsys-

tem structure of the cable plant.
s

Active equipment product documentation - used for referencing any active

equipment specifications during the design process for known application
design only.

5.2 Fiber Optic Links
When designing the fiber optic link with the active equipment, it is important to
understand all of the design factors involved. These factors include:

5.2.1

Fiber optic link structure

Optical link design factors

System design factors

Fiber Optic Link Structure

Each structured wiring cable plant is a series of links. The physical layer of the

fiber optic network has three fundamental parts:
s

Optical transmitters

Fiber optic links

Optical receivers

The optical transmitters and receivers are contained in the active networking
devices. The fiber optic links include the cable and all other passive fiber optic

cable plant components needed to connect the active equipment to the atructured
wiring cable plant.

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

5-5

5.2.2 Optical Link Design Factors

The optical link design factors provide the information necessary to evaluate the
following:
s

The maximum transmission distance.

The ability of the cable plant to integrate various active equipment.

The optical transmission performance required to guarantee a bit error rate
that meets the applicable product standard requirements.

The optical link design factors that can affect the above listed items are:
Power budget

Optical loss
Wavelength

5.2.2.1 Power Budget

The power budget, is specific to the active equipment connected to the link. The
active equipment contains the transmitter and receiver components.
s

The optical transmitter specification defines the average output power (in-

cluding a minimum and maximum tolerance) for the equipment. Power is
specified in decibels per milliwatt (dBm, with 0 dBm equaling one milliwatt)
for a particular fiber core size and numerica! aperture. The mirimum output power is determined by subtracting the minimum tolerance from the
average output power.

5-6

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

The receiver specification defines the receiver sensitivity. Sensitivity is de-

fined as the minimum optical power level at which the bit error rate of the

received signal does not exceed a specified value. The receiver sensitivity is

specified in dBm, and usually is indicated for a particular fiber core size and

numerical aperture.

The total power budget for the active equipment is therefore equal to the difference between the minimum amount of power the transmitter can launch into the
fiber and the sensitivity of the receiver. The power budget is usuallr expressed
in decibels (dB) and represents the active equipment’s allow able system loss
specification.
5.2.2.2 Optical Loss

The optical loss, which is specific to the cable plant, is the optical signal attenuation in the fiber optic link between the transmitter and receiver. Each cable,
splice, and connector within the fiber optic link addr loss to the system. The loss
is expressed in dB for connectors and splices and in dB/km for cable. Each of
these component losses for the DECconnect System are defined in Section 5.8.
NOTE

Digital requires that a cable plant system loss margin
of 1.0 dB be added to the optical loss. This system loss
margin allows for optical loss variability due to:
Connector/splice mechanical coupling
s

Connector polishing

Cable aging

Wavelength correction

5.2.2.3 Wavelength

Wavelength, which is specific to the active equipment, refers to the center wavelength of the optical emitter expressed in nanometers (nm). For Local Area
Networks (LANSs), the operating wavelengths are at two windows:
#

The first window has center wavelengths between 790 nm and 910 nm.

The second window has center wavelengths between 1270 nm and 1380 nm.

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

5-7

NOTE

Digital recommends 62.5/125 dual-window multimode
fiber for all new installations. All of the fiber cables described in the product descriptions in Chapter 11 specifv
dual-window fibers.

The fiber optic cable loss is specified for 850 nm and 1300 nm, and the wavelength of the optical emitter can vary over a specified range. This requires
adding a wavelength correction to the optical loss discussed in Section 5.2.2.2.
5.2.2.4 Bandwldth

Bandwidth, which is specific to the cable plant and the optical source, is a measure of the information transmission capacity of the optical fiber.

The information transmission capacity of multimode fiber is important to the
system design. The capacity to transmit information is limited by the dispersion
or pulse broadening that occurs in fiber. Short duration light pulses are broad-

ened (dispersed in time) as they travel through fiber.
There are two types of dispersion that can occur in multimode fiber with LED
light sources:
®»

Modal

Chromatic

The combined effect of these two dispersions creates the bandwidth limitations
within a fiber optic link.
The modal bandwidth of the fiber is expressed as a frequency-distance product
(MHzekm). For example, a fiber specified for 200 MHzekm allows the transmission of a 200 Megahertz (MHz) signal for a distance of one kilometer (km).
Modal dispersion is primarily due to the different fiber modes traveling at different effective speeds. This creates the broadening of the optical pulse.
Chromatic dispersion is caused by different wavelengths of the LED light source
traveling at slightly different speeds within the fiber. This causes broadening of
the optical pulse. Chromatic dispersion is expressed in units of ps/(nmekm).
Fiber cable suppliers usually report only the modal bandwidth as the fiber bandwidth. It is important to note that the fiber bandwidth is limited by both the

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

modal and chromatic dispersion. Therefore, the chromatic bandwidth must also
be taken into account to understand the total system limitations.
NOTE

All of the fiber cables idcntified and described in Chapter 11
have boti modal and chromatic bandwidths specified for
the fiber’s two operating windows, which are also listed in
Table 5-2.

The fiber bandwidth limitations are sometimes represented as an additional
dB/km loss factor called the bandwidth derating or dispersion penalty. This loss
factor must be included with the fiber's attenuation when performing the linkloss calculation.
NOTE

Except for ORnet, DEBET-xx, and DEREP-xx products,
Digital fiber optic active networking equipment has the
bandwidth derating factor designed into the active equipment’s power budget.
5.2.3 System Design Factors

The following system design factors should be taken into account during the
planning and design of the fiber optic cable plant:
For known applications, verify that the attenuation associated with the fiber
optic connectors that plug directly into the active equipment is accounted
for in the power budget of that active equipment specification. If they are
accounted for in the power budget, do not add them to the loss calculations.

Do not mix fiber sizes or grades. If it is unavoidable to mix fiber grades, design the entire link as though it uses the lower (or lowest) grade specifications.

Avoid mixing connector types or splice types. This simplifies planning, installation, and maintenance, and reduces the kinds of tools and the amount
of inventory.

It cannot be overemphasized that the quality of the polished end of the
fiber is the major cause of connector loss. Connector loss is significantly increased by dirt, scratches, finger smudges, and so on. Keep the connector
ends clean by using the connector cleaning process described in the instruction manual and included in the 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector tool kit.

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

Keep the fiber optic connectors covered when not in use.
NOTE

Chapter 11 describes the H8102-AA (110 volt) and H8102AC (220 volt) 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector tool kits
available from Digital (or Digital-authorized vendors).
=

Do not exceed the bend radius specification of the cable when determining
the cable’s routing methods.

5.3 Cable Plant Requirements
The fiber optic link design requires that all cable plant components be within
specifications. This is important to acceptable performance of the structured
wiring fiber optic links.

Each of Digital'’s structured wiring fiber optic cable plant components meet specific environmental and optical parameter specifications. This section identifies
those cable plant component specifications.

5-10

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

5.3.1 Environmental Specifications

Table 65-1 lists and describes each of the environmental specifications for Digital’s
fiber optic cable plant components.
Table 5-1:

Cable Plant Environmental Specifications

Specitication

Value

Storage temperature

Indoor: -20° to 70° C (-4° to 1568° F)
Outdoor: -40° to 70° C (40° to 1568° F)

Operating temperature

Indoor: 0° to 650° C (32° to 122° F)
Outdoor: -40° to 70° C (-40° to 158° F)

Relative humidity

Storag~: 6% to 95%, noncondensing

Altitude

Storage: 0 - 50,000 ft

Cable plant life expectancy

20 years

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

Operation: 10% to 80%, noncondensing

Operation: 0 - 10,000 ft

5-11

5.3.2 Component Requirements

Table 5-2 lists specific Digital cable plant components and describes optical and
other specifications for those components.
Table 5-2:

Component Requirements

Component

Specifications

Multimode optical fiber,
62.5/126 micron

All specifications are over full operating temperature
range (see Table 5-1):

(See ANSIEIA/TIA-492AAAA

specification)

.
.
Numerical Aperture (NA) - 0.275 +.015 microns

Additional information 1s

Indoor cable attenuation - 3.76 dB/km maximum at 850

provided in Appendix E.

nm and 1.5 dB/km maximum at 1300 nm

Qutdoor cable attenuation - 3.50 dB/km maximum at
850 nm and 1.5 dB/km maximum at 1300 nm
Bandwidth - 160 MHzekm minimum at 850 nm and 500
MHzekm minimum at 1300 nm
Chromatic dispersion requirements: the zero dispersion

wavelength and dispersion slope must fall below the
following bounds when plotted as wavelength (x points)
versus dispersion slope (y points) on a graph:
1295 nm, 0.105 ps/(nmZkm)
1300 nm, 0.110 ps/(nm?km)
1348 nm, 0.110 ps/(nm? km)
1365 nm, 0.093 ps/(nm?2km)

Single-mode optical fiber

All specifications are over full operating temperature
range (see Table 5-1):

Buffer size - 250 microns (z 15)

Claddiug size - 126 microns (= 2)
Mode field diameter - 8.7 to 10.0 microns (+ 0.5)
Cable attenuation - 0.4 dB/km maximum at 1310 nm
and 0.3 dB/km maximum at 1550 nm
Cutoff wavelength - Aec< 1270 nm

Chromatic dispersion - zero dispersion wavelength
within the range of 1300 to 1322 nm and zero dispersion slope < 0.095 ps/(nmZ?.km)

5-12

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Table 5-2 (Cont.):

Component Requirements

Component

Specifications

Indoor cable

Digital offers two versions of indoor fiber optic cable:

The light-duty has a maximum pull tension of 100 lbs,
and the heavy-duty has a maximum pull tension of 250
Ibs. The following listings identify both heavy- and

light-duty cable by cable jacket type and fiber count,
and defines the fiber color code:

Cable Type

Fiber Count

Light-duty
riser PVC,

4-fiber
6-fiber

OFNR-rated

12-fiber

Light-duty

4-fiber

plenum,

6-fiber

OFNP-rated
Heavy-duty

4-fiber

riser PVC,

6-fiber

Heavy-duty
plenum,
OFNP-rated

4-fiber
6-fiber
12-fiber

Fiber or

Color

Unit Number

Code

OFNR-rated

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

12-fiber

Blue

Orange

3
4

Green
Brown

5
6
7

Slate
White

Red
Black

9
10

Yellow
Violet

Light Blue (indoor)

Light Orange (indoor)

11
12

Natural with Blue dashes (outdoor)
Natural with Orange dashes (outdoor)

5-13

Table 5-2 (Cont.):

Component Requirements

Component

Specifications

Splice loss

0.4 dB maximum loss over the outdoor operating temperature range (see Table 5—1). The splice should be
made in the field in less than two minutes (average
time), and require less than 10% remakes done with
existing splices.

Field installable 2.6 mm
bayonet ST-type connector,
option number H3114-FA

0.7 dB maximum loss over the indoor operating temperature range (see Table 5~1). The 2.5 mm bayonet STtype connector is field mountable in eight minutes (or
less), has a cable pull-out strength greater than 20 1bs,
and a loss change 0.2 dB (or less) for 100 reconnections
without cleaning.

FDDI connector

See ANSI X3T9.5 FDDI PMD Standard. (Additional

information is given in Appendix E.)

5.4 Fiber Optic Link-Loss Models for Known Application Design
This section provides DECconnect System fiber optic link-loss models for known
application design process based on the following distances:
s

2000 meters (6560 feet) maximum for campus backbone cables only

2000 meters (6560 feet) maximum for campus and building backbone cables

90 meters (295 feet) for horizontal wiring cables

3 meters (10 feet) for work area wiring cables

The models do not cover extended interbuilding connections where the building
connections are greater than the 2000-meter (6560-foot) backbone limits.
NOTE

For information on extended interbuilding distances see
Appendix E Special Distance Situations.

5-14

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

The models are provided for two operating wavelengths:

e 850 nm
s

1300 om

Configuration guidelines are provided with each model. These guidelines indicate where fiber optic networking equipment is required in the distribution subsystems to achieve link operation with the optical losses specified by the models.
Each link between distribution subsystems requires two splices to budget for any
future repairs.

NOTE

Before designing specific fiber optic network equipment
for the cable plant, the active equipment’s allowable system loss should equal or exceed the optical losses specified in the link models. This helps ensure that the active
equipment operates correctly in the network. Further information on the fiber optic link-loss calculations is provided in Section 5.8.

5.4.1 Fiber Link-Loss Model 850 nm Operation

This section provides two link-loss models for fiber optic active networking

equipment operating with a center wavelength between 790 nm to 910 nm.
s

The first model, shown in Figure 5-2, is for a maximum-length backbone of

2000 meters (6560 feet). The maximum allowable system loss for the active
equipment is 11.5 dB.
NOTE

The first model also assumes that indoor cable (with a
higher cable attenuation than outdoor cable, and, therefore, a greater loss factor) is used for campus backbone
cable. This can occur, for example, when the campus cable is run in a pedestrian tunnel (either elevated or underground) between the buildings.
m

The second model, shown in Figure 5-3, is for 2 maximum-length building

backbone and horizontal cable distance. The maximum allowable system
loss for the active equipment is 10.33 dB.

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

5-15

The configuration rules for the 860 nm operation links (Figures 5-2 and 5-3)
are:

All cables are 62.5/125 micron fiber

Indoor cable, with a maximum attenuation of 3.75 dB/km, is used for all
links

Interconnects have a maximum loss of 0.7 dB

Crossconnects have a maximum loss of 1.4 dB

Splices have a maximum loss of 0.4 dB

Active equipment is required at the MDF and the IDF

Active equipment is connected to the distribution subsystem with interconnects

An interconnect is used at a RWDF to connect the cable from the wallbox to

the cable going to the HDF
¢

5-16

A 1.0 dB system loss margin is added to each link.

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 5-2: Campus Backbone 850 nm Link-Loss Model

Symbol Definition Loss:
P

Interconnect

0.7dB

Splice

04dB

—

Fiber Cable

3.75 dB/km

ST TTT T T T T (23..‘?6?0?1)
Active
Device

Active

Device

Budget Table:

Total fiber cable 2000 m (6560 ft)

7.50 dB

Total pigtail splices 2 x 0.4 dB

0.80 dB

Total service splices 2 x 0.4 dB

0.80 dB

Total interconnects 2 x 0.7

140 dB

Cable plant system loss margin

1.00 dB

Total fink loss:

11.50

LKG~-3840-591

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

5-17

Figure 5-3:

Building Backbone and Horizontal Wiring 850 nm Link-Loss Model

Crossconnect

1.4dB

interconnect

0.7 dB

Splice

0.4dB

Fiber Cable

3.75 dB/km

|
|
|

IDF

| vk

Symbol Definition Loss:

HDF
Building Backbone

e e 500m

_ _ o

(1640 ft)
Active

Device

Budget Table:

Total fiber cable length 593 m (19451t)

Total pigtail splices 5 x 0.4

(

)

= 2.23dB

(295 ft)

= 2.00dB

Total service splices 4 x 0.4

1.60dB

Total crossconnects 1 x 1 4

1.40dB

Total interconnects 3 x 0.70

210dB

Cable plant system loss margin

1.00dB

Total:

90 m

10.33 dB

Horizontal

Wallbox

3
[}

Active

1Im

Y (981)

Work Area

Device

LKG-3641-801

5-18

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

5.4.2 Fiber Link-Loss Model 1300 nm Operation

This section provides two link-loss models for fiber optic active networking

equipment operating with a center wavelength between 1270 nm to 1380 nm.
The first model, shown in Figure 54, is for a maximum-length backbone of

2000 meters (6560 feet). The maximum allowable system loss for the active
equipment is 10.0 dB.
The second model, shown in Figure 5-5, is for a maximum-length building
backbone and horizontal cable distance. The maximum allowable system
loss for the active equipment is 9.0 dB.
The configuration rules for the 1300 nm operation links (Figures 54 and 5-5)
are:

All cables are 62.5/125 micron fiber
All cable has a maximum attenuation of 1.5 dB/km
Interconnects have a maximum loss of 0.7 dB

Crossconnects have a maximum loss of 1.4 dB
Splices have a maximum loss of 0.4 dB
Active equipment is connected to the distribution subsystem with interconnects only

An interconnect is used at a RWDF to connect cable from the wallbox to cable to the HDF

A crossconnect exists in the MDF when there is no MDF active equipment
A crossconnect exists in the IDF when there is no IDF active equipment

A 1.0 dB system loss margin is added to each link

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

5-19

Figure 5-4:

Campus and Bullding Backbone 1300 nm Link-Loss Model

Symbol Definition Loss:

| 2vX

Crossconnect 1.4 dB
interconnect

0.7 dB

Splice

04 dB

Fiber Cable

1.5 dB/km

IDF

MDF

———————

——

—

———

——

—

-V

—

HDF

—

Active

Device

Budget Table:

Total fiber cable length 2000 m (6560 ft)

= 3.00 dB

Total pigtail splices 4 x 0.4 dB

= 1.60 dB

Total service splices 4 x 0.4 dB

= 1.60dB

Total crossconnects 1 x 1.4

= 1.40dB

Total interconnects 2 x 0.7

= 1.40dB

Cable plant system loss margin

= 1.00dB

Total:

-_10.00 dB

LKG-3642-881

5-20

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 5-5:

Bullding Backborie and Horizontal Wiring 1300 nm Link-Loss Model

Symbol Definition Loss:

Crossconnect

1.4dB

interconnect

0.7 dB

“u

Splice

0.4dB

~—

Fiber Cable

1.5 dB/km

|
|-

HDF

IDF

Active

Device

RWDF

Budget Table:

90 m

Total fiber cable length 593 m (19451 = 0.90 dB

Horizontal

Total pigtail splices 5 x 0.4 dB

= 2.00 dB

Total service splices 4 x 0.4 dB

= 1.60 dB

Total crossconnects 1 x 1.4

= 140 dB

Total interconnects 3x 0.7

= 210 dB

Cable plant system loss margin

Total:

= 1.00 dB

(295 ft)

Wallbox

9.00 dB

TE—

Active
Device

Work Area

LKG-2643-801

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

5-21

5.5 Link-Loss Planning for Unknown Application Design
This section provides DECconnect system fiber optic link-loss planning for the
unknown application design process based on the following distances:
2000 meters (6560 feet) maximum for campus backbone cables only

2000 meters (6560 feet) maximum for campus and building backbone cables
500 meters (1640 feet) maximum for building backbone cables

¢0 meters (295 feet) for horizontal wiring cables
3 meters (10 feet) for work area wiring cables
The configuration rules for planning unknown application design links between
distribution subsystems are:

All cables are 62.5/125 micron dual-window fiber

Indoor cable with a maximum attenuation of 3.75 dB/km is used for all
links

Crossconnects have a maximum loss of 1.4 dB

Interconnects have a maximum loss of 0.7 dB
Splices have a maximum loss of 0.4 dB
A 1.0 dB system loss margin is added to each link

Each link between distribution systems requires two splices to bndget for
any future repair
NOTE

Each fiber optic link between subsystems should not have
more than four allocated splices (two for service, two
for pigtails). Exceptions: (1) when a breakout cable is

used in the backbone where additional splices may be
required, or (2) in the horizontal wiring where an SDF,
ODF, or RWDF have splices. There should be no more
than two connectors in each cable segment.

5-22

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Table 5-3:

Maximum Link-Loss Planning for Unknown Applicatons

Distribution Subsystem

850 nm Wavelength (loss)

1300 nm Wavelength (loss)

MDF-to-IDF

11.5 dB

7.0 dB

IDF-to-HDF

5.9 dB

4.8 dB

HDF-to-work areat

6.2 dB

6.0 dB

PI'his includes a crossconnect
il used at an SDF
or ODF.

5.6 Product Applications

When designing for known applications, the product specification for the active
equipment to be used in the network must be reviewed for optical and configuration information that defines the following:

How the active equipment’s allowable system loss and operational factors
impacts the fiber optic link designs.

How the equipment connects to the structured wiring cable plant.

This section provides detailed descriptions of Digital's FDDI and ORnet fiber optic active networking equipment as follows:
u

Gives overviews of each product application.

Illustrates logical and wiring diagrams for both FDDI and ORnet applications.

Provides a table that defines the achievable cable link distances based on:
— The active equipment’s allowable system loss.
— Indoor cable use.

— The number of splices in the link.

— The number of connector pairs in the link.
— The cable plant system loss margin of 1.0 dB.
s

Discusses and shows examples of how the Digital products integrate into

the structured wiring’s hierarchical physical star topology.

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

5-23

NOTE

This information i8 based on using the FDDI and ORnet
products with 62.5/125 dual-window fiber.

Appendix A provides information on using FDDI and
ORnet products with 50/125 and 100/140 fiber. Appendix
B provides information on using FDDI and ORnet products to integrate copper and fiber structured wiring subsystems.

Appendix C provides information on Digital's IEEE
802.3/Ethernet bridge and repeater products. When using other vendor’s active equipment, refer to the product’s
specifications and review optical and other operational
factors that could affect the network application design.

5.6.1 FDDI Product Applications

Connecting the FDDI product set to the DECconnect System structured wiring
oo e

o ot
.

network requires upderstanding:
g

The FDDI interface conneciions.

The administration interconnect points needed at the cable plant’s distribu-

tion frames to integrate the FDDI logical configurations into the DECconnect

System structured wiring.

5-24

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

5.6.1.1 FDDI Interface Connections
The FDDI active equipment includes the following devices:
s

Dual-attachment concentrators (DAC)

Dual-attachment stations (DAS)

Single-attachment stations (SAS)

Refer to the specific vendor operation manuals for complete information on configuring these products.
As shown in Figure 56, the FDDI DAC, DAS, and SAS equipment can be configured into a dual ring of trees.

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

5-25

FDDI Logical Diagram Example

S‘

EL__;::E

FDDI

DAC

Dual

DAS

Ring

SAS

Attach
Dual
atorment
Concentr

DAC

Single Attachment
Station

SAS

]

Figure 5-6:

Dual Attachment
.
Station

DAC

DAC
ST

T T

DAS

S
SAS

LAl
B
DAS

5-26

S
SAS

B
DAS

LKG~3714~89A

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Dual-Attachment Connections

The FDDI equipment’s dual-attachment interface uses Port A and Port B optical
connector pairs as follows:
s

Port A connection - the primary ring optical input (PI) and the secondary
ring optical output (SO) connections.

Port B connection - the primary ring optical output (PO) and the secondary

ring optical input (SI) connections.

Figure 5-6 shows FDDI equipment connected to a dual-ring configuration. The
Port A (PI/SO) of one FDDI dual-attachment device connects to the Port B

(PO/SI) of a second dual-attachment device. This sequence continues until all
of the FDDI dual-attachment devices are interconnected. Two fibers are involved
in each of the Port A to Port B connections.
Single-Attachment Connections

The FDDI equipment’s single-attachment interface uses Port S and Port M optical connector pairs as follows:
s

Port M connection - located on the FDDI concentrator (Dual-Attachment

Concentrator on DAC).
#

Port S connection - located on the FDDI single-attachment station (SAS)
equipment.

As shown in Figure 5-6, the FDDI SAS equipment Port S may be connected to
the Port M on the FDDI DAC. Also, FDDI dual-attachment station (DAS) device’s Port B may be connected to the Port M of an FDDI DAC. This configures

the DAS device for use as a SAS.
5.6.1.2 FDDI Administration Interconnection Points

The FDDI active equipment connects to the structured wiring using interconnect patch cables. To connect the FDDI DAS, SAS, and DAC equipment to the

structured wiring, use the following process:
s
e

Follow all the connection rules outlined in Chapter 4, Section 4.5.4.2.
Provide an additional label for each FDDI device interconnection with a dis-

tribution frame panel with this label which indicates what kind of FDDI
connection (Port A, B, M, or S) is being made at the panel position.

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

5-27

As shown in Figure 5-7, the FDDI connection to a distribution frame patch

panel uses a BN24D-xx FDDI-to-2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector cable as-

sembly. This BN24D-xx cable assembly has a keyed FDDI Media Interface

Connector (MIC) on one end and two 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connectors on
the other end. One of the 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector has a black

boot which indicates it is associated with the optical output of the FDDI
equipment. The other 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector has a red boot and
is associated with the optical input to the FDDI equipment.
NOTE

To plug into the receptable on the FDDI active equipment, key the FDDI MIC connector for the appropriate
type of FDDI connection. The MIC connectors can be

keyed for Port A, B, M, or S connections. Refer to the
specific vendor instructions for keying the FDDI MIC
connectors.

Figure 5-7:

FDDI-t0-2.5 mm Bayonet ST-type Cable Assembly

—FDDI

Connector

LKG-3767-89

5-28

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

The 2.6 mm bayonet ST-type connectors on the other end of the FDDI patch
cable assembly have black and red boots that identify the 2.6 mm bayonet

ST-type connections to the panel for non-crossover and crossover connections:

NOTE

Non-crossover connections occur when active equipment
uses a patch cable to connect with fiber that is coming
from a distribution element (distribution frame or wallbox) that is lower in hierarchy than the patch panel.
Crossover connections occur when connecting the active
equipment to higher level fibers.
— Non-crossover connections - the black-booted connector goes to the fiber
pair’s black-washer (or black-marker) panel coupler at the patch panel
and the red-booted connector goes to the red-washer (or red-marker)
panel coupler of the fiber pair.
— Crossover connections - the interconnection is reversed. The red-booted
connector goes to the black-washer (or marker) panel coupler and the
black-booted connector goes to the red washer panel coupler of the fiber
pair.
s

As sho'/n in Figure 5-8, a BN24B-xx FDDI-to-FDDI crossover cable assem-

bly connects the Port A and Port B of the DACs together when two or more
FDDI DACs are connected into a dual ring at the same point in the structured wiring network.
In a dual-ring configuration, the Port A and Port B MIC connections of the FDDI

equipment should form complete primary and secondary rings.
For a tree configuration, the Port M MIC connections on the FDDI DACs are
connected to the Port S MIC connections on the FDDI SAS equipment or to the
Port B MIC connection on the FDDI DAS equipment. For FDDI DACs in the
tree configuration, the Port M MIC connection of the dual-ring DAC can connect
to the Port B MIC connection of the FDDI DAC (refer to Figure 5-6).

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

5-29

Figure 5-8:

Direct FDDI-to-FDDI Equipment DAC Interconnections

——
S @&__DAaCB1
M

Legend:

e Campus Wiring
Building Wiring

* TM Horizontal Wiring
Patch Cable

<10)

— — —

Work Area Cable

Upper Lower

UAAAAY

[ DAC
T8I R—

90589

M_IM|_[M

0508

AAAAA

<]®

Patch Panel

Black—Washer

@®

Coupler

Red—Washer
Coupler

<10p>

Coupler Connection

Crossover
Patch

MDF

Patch

Panel

Patch

Panel

®
@

Cable

—1

Non~Crossover

Patch

Cable

MMl

Dual

Concentrator

DAC [B Attachment

Patch
Panel 3
LKG-~-3700~-89A

5-30

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

5.6.1.3 FDDI Product Impiementations

This section describes the optical parameters affecting FDDI operation. It also
provides the following concept and network schematic diagrams:
NOTE

FDDI products use the 1300 nm wavelength. The optical
parameters given in this section are for FDDI products
with dual-window 62.5/125 micron fiber. Appendix A provides information about FDDI products with dual-window
50/125 and 100/140 micron fiber and FDDI products with
fiber (50/125, 62.5/125, or 100/140 micron) that do not
meet the optical requirements for 1300 nm cperation.
Figure 5-9 - provides a concept diagram for a 2-kilometer (6560-foot) campus and building backbone tree configuration that uses Port M to Port S
connections between a DAC in an MDF and FDDI-to-Ethernet bridges at
HDFs.

Figure 5-10 - provides an example of a network schematic for the configuration identified in Figure 5-9.

Figure 5-11 - provides a concept diagram for a 2-kilometer (6560-foot) dual
ring campus backbone that uses Port A to Port B connections between DACs
located in the building IDFs and a passive MDF. This figure also shows
building backbone tree configuration Port M to Port B connections between
the DACs in the IDFs and DACs in the HDFs.

Figure 5~12 - provides an example of a network schematic for the configuration identified in Figure 5-11.

Figure 5-13 - provides a concept diagram for a horizontal wiring SAS or
DAS configuration.

Figure 5~14 - provides an example of a network schematic for the configuration identified in Figure 5-13.
FDD! Product Description

Application - FDDI

Fiber size - 62.5/125 micron
Wavelength - 1300 nm
Maximum link length - 2000 m (6560 ft)

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

5-31

Maximum allowable system loss - 11.0 dB

Bandwidth derating - 0.00 db/km

Table 5—4 provides a method to determine a link’s maximum distance based on
the number of splices and connecter pairs designed for the link. Be sure to add

two splices for each link to budget service splices. The table includes a 1.0 dB
cable plant system loss marcin and uses the indoor cable attenuation.
Table 5-4:

FDDI Link-Loss Table

Nfumber
0

Number of Connector Pairs

Splices | 0
2

|2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000

3 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 { 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000
4

12000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 1866

5 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 1599

6 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 1799 | 1333
7 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 { 2000 | 2000 | 1533 | 1066
8 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 1733

[1266 | 799

Distance in Meters
LKG-3758--89!

NOTE
Table 5—4 shows how the maximum link distance can be

affected by splices and connector pairs used at interconnect and crossconnect administration points. It does not

mean to imply that Digital recommends or supports links
that consist of multiple small segments.

5-32

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 5-9:

Exampie FDDI Backbone Concept Diagram for a Tree Config.ration

MDF

DAC

1.5 km (4920)
2 - 62.5/125

1.5 km (4920)
2 — 62.5/125

IDF
Cross—
Connect

500 m (1640ft)
Fm
2 — 62.5/125

500 m (1640 ft)
2 - 62.5/125

500 m (1640ft)
2

62.5/125 (M

HDF

FDDi—to—

FDDI—to—|

FDDI—to—

Ethernet

Bridge

Ethernet
Bridge

Ethernet

Bridge

LKG-3707-89A

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

5-33

Figure 5-10:

Example FDDI Backbone Network Schematic for a Tree Configuration

MDF
Patch Panel

rfl.b

== |

DAC

IDF

HDF

FDD!—to—
Ethernet
Bridge

Higher

/32

Lower

A=Sah>=11
=
@
1
2

Lower

395 132
$® Il so

Higher

Lower

Higher

HDF

FDDI-to—
Ethernet
Bridge

FDDI-to~
Ethernet
Bridge
LKG~ 3701-89A

5-34

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 5-11:

Example FDDI Dual Ring Campus Backbone Concept Diagram

MDF
Patch

1 km (3280 ft)
4 — 62.5/125
Fm

Panel

1 km (3280 ft)
4 - 62.5/125
Fm

IDF

500 m (1640ft)
2 - 62.5/125

DAC

fFm

500 m (1640ft) fm
2 - 62.5/125

90 m (295 ft)

2 ~ 625/125 "

90 m (295 ft)

2 ~ 62.5/125 F["

WwB

3m (9.8

IDF

ft)

2 - 62.5/125 "
FDDI
Station
Equipment

3m (9.8

ft)

Flm

2 - 62.5/125
FDDI
Station
Equipment
LKG—3702-89A

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

5-35

Example FDDI Dual Ring Campus Backbone Network Schematic

oot

=55 s

Station

Equipment

5-36

Wallbox

S00000

Figure 5-12:

Walibox

Station

Equipment

LKG—3703-89A

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 5-13:

Example FDDI Horizontal Wiring SAS or DAS Concept Diagram

HDF
DAC

90 m (295 ft)
2 - 62.5/125
Fm

80 m (295 ft)
2 — 62.5/125
‘

80 m (295 ft)
2 - 62.5/125

Frm

3m (9.8 ft) L

3Im (9.8 ft) FTrn

3m (9.8 ft) Jm

2 - 62.5/125

FDDI
Station
Equipment

2 - 62.5/125

FDDI
Station
Equipment

2 - 62.5/125

FDDI
Station
Equipment
LKG-3704-89A

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

5-37

Figure 5-14:

Example FDDI Horizontal Wiring SAS or DAS Network Schematic

HDF

Higher

Qe
32

Lower

= 3;1.

=ty

SIS
I
32—

JKSAJ

FOD!

Station
Equipment

Hgeet
.

!
!
!

:
;
;

.
i
|

r &
|

Wallbox

;

r &3

FDDI
Station
Equipment

89‘""""

I‘A

Wallbox

|
.

8(;>""J

s
FDD!

Station

Equipment
LXG~3705—89A

5-38

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

5.6.2 ORnet Product Applications

ORnet products provide a fiber optic Ethernet system with the capability of distributing an Ethernet backbone over a structured fiber optic cable plant without
the need for baseband coaxial cable. ORnet products use interconnect patch cables to connect to the structured wiring cable plant.
NOTE

ORnet products are manufactured by Chipcom Corporation
and are sold by Digital under the Chipcom label.
5.6.2.1 ORnet Configuration

Traditionally, Ethernet uses a bus topology. ORnet products allow using Ethernet
in a hierarchical physical star topology. This allows the Ethernet backbone to radially connect from a fiber optic multiport active star, to other active stars within
a building, or in other buildings within a site.
5.6.2.2 ORnet Components
The ORnet fiber optic Ethernet system consists of two types of active components:

A fiber optic multiport star with transceivers with either eight or fourteen
ports.

A fiber-to-copper transceiver.

ORnet products operate over 62.5/125 micron fiber, using ST-type connectors.
Digital recommends 62.5/125 dual-window multimode fiber for all new installations.

5.6.2.3 ORnet Administration Interconnect Points

ORnet active equipment connects to the structured wiring cable plant using interconnect points. Use the following process to connect the ORnet equipment to
the cable plant:

Follow the connection rules outlined in Chapter 4, Section 4.5.4.2.

Connect the patch cables to the ORnet equipment as follows:

— The red-booted connector goes to the ORnet equipment receive (Rx)
port.

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

5-39

— The black-booted connector goes to the ORnet equipment transmit (Tx)
port.

The 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connectors on the other end of the cable connect to the patch panel and provide non-crossover or crossover connections:

NOTE

Non-crossover connections occur when active equipment
uses an interconnect cable to connect with fiber that is
coming from a distribution element (distribution frame
or wallbox) that is lower in hierarchy than the pane!.
Crossover connections occur when the active eqv ,ment
is connected to higher level fibers.

— Non-crossover connections - the black-booted connector connects to the
fiber pair’s black-washer (or black-marker) panel coupler at the patch
panel. The red-booted connector connects to the red-washer (or redmarker) panel coupler of the fiber pair.
— Crossover connections - the interconnection is reversed. The red-booted
connector connects to the black-washer (or black marker) panel coupler, and the black-booted connector connects to the red washer (or red
marker) panel coupler of the fiber pair.

540

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

5.6.2.4 ORnet Product Iimplementations
This section prrovides the following:

A description of the optical parameters affecting ORnet product operation.
A sample concept diagram (Figure 5-15) of an ORnet configuration.

A sample 1ietwork schematic (Figure 5~16) provides an example of the configuration shown in Figure 5~15).
ORnet Product Jescription

Applicati n - fiber optic Ethernet
Fiber siz : - 62.5/125 micron
Wavelergth - 820 nm

Maximam link length - 2000 m
Maxiraoum allowable system loss - 10.75 dBt
Bar iwidth derating - 0.25 db/km

Table 5-5 provides a method of determining the maximum length for a link with

a nv nber of splices and connector pairs. Add two splices for each link to budget
ger sice splices. The table includes a 1.0 dB cable plant system loss margin and

u .es the indoor cable attenuation.

t The maximum power budget for the ORnet product does not meet the link-loss requirements for
the DECconnect System structured wiring and may be limited to an operating link distance on the
order of 1500 meters (4920 feet) when used in a structured wiring cable plant with crossconnects
and interconnects.

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

5-41

Table 5-5:

ORnet Link-Loss Table

N'umber

Number of Connector Pairs

Splices | 0

2 | 2000 | 2000 | 1887 | 1712 | 1537 | 1362 | 1187 | 1012 | 837

|2000 | 1962 | 1787 | 1612 | 1437 | 1262 | 1087 | 912 | 737

12000 | 1862 | 1687

{1512 | 1337 | 1162 | 987 | 812 | 637

5 | 1937 | 1762 | 1587 | 1412 | 1237 | 1062 | 887 | 712 | 537
6 | 1837 | 1662 | 1487 | 1312 | 1137 | 962 | 787 | 612 | 437
7 | 1737 | 1562 | 1387 | 1212 | 1037 | 862 | 687 | 512 | 337

8 ] 1637

1462 | 1287 | 1112 | 937 | 762 | 587 | 412 | 237
Distance in Meters
LKG-3757-89)

NOTE

Table 5-5 shows how the maximum link distance can be
affected by the use of splices and by connector pairs used
at interconnect and crossconnect administration points.

The table does not mean to imply that Digital racommends or supports links that are made up of multiple
small segments.

5-42

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 5-15:

ORnet Concept Diagram

MDF
ORnet
Star

1 km (3280 ft)
2 - 62.5/125

1 km (3280 ft)
2 - 682.5/125

IDF

ORnet
Star

500 m (1640ft)

2 - 625/125 "

500 m (1640 ft) '_l
2 - 62.5/125

500 m (1640ft)

2 - 62.5/125

[

LKG-3706—-89A

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

Figure 5-16:

ORnet Network Schematic

IDF

IDF
Higher

Higher

Lower

00000

ORnet Star

Tooaesad
ORnat Star

r-—o—o—-—l—-

HDF

Fx olgooong
%]O}0 0 0 0 0 O

ORnet Star

_I
-

Higher

@
1
®
[%]

Fiber
Optic
MAU

Fiber
Optic
MAU
LKG~3708—~89A

5-44

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

5.7 Creating the Network Schematics
The creation of the network schematics completes the planning phase of the site
design process. This planning phase consists of creating the three diagrams that
define the structured wiring as follows:
s

The network logical diagram (created in Chapter 2) that defines the network’s active r.etworking equipment requirements for known applications.

The ccacept diagram (created in Chapter 3) that defines the cable plant distribucion subsystem structure.

The network schematics that define:

— Where and how the active networking equipment, identified in the network logical diagram, connects to the structure wiring for known applications.

— The crossconnects, interconnects, and splices needed to connect the
subsystem structure identified in the concept diagram together into a
structured wiring cable plant.

Once the network schematic is completed (and each diagrammed link is verified
using link-loss calculation information provided in Section 5.8 for known application design), the rest of the design process consists of the following actions:
s

Calculate the link certification loss value for each link and record these values in the Summary Worksheet (Section 5.9).

Select the cables and other passive cable plant components that each sub-

system requires to physically carry out the planned site:

— Chapters 6 through 10 provide the procedures needed to select the cable plant components.

— Chapter 11 provides descriptions of the cable plant components available from Digital or from other vendors.
NOTE

The concept diagrams and network schematics are used
during the cable plant component selection process. They
define the types of components needed to carry out the
site design.
u

Order the cable plant components (Chapter 12).

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

545

Perforn the preinstallation procedures (Chapter 13).

5.7.1 Network Schematic Symbois

The network schematic uses a set of specific symbols. Using these symbols ensures that a standardized network schematic is created that can be easily interpreted by anyone familiar with the symbol set.
Figure 5-17 illustrates and defines all of the symbols that can be used in a network schematic.

Figure 5-17:

Network Schematic Symbols

Splice

Crossover

Non-Crossover

Red-Booted Connector

Black-Booted Connector

Black-Washer Panel Coupler

Active Equipment

Red-Washer Panel Coupler
LKG-3584-891

546

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

5.7.2 Network Schematics

The structured wiring is a series of point-to-point cables connected at distribution elements (distribution frames and wallboxes) by crossconnect or intercon-

nect patch cables. Interconnect patch cables are also used at the distribution
frames to connect the active networking equipment to the structured wiring cable plant.
5.7.2.1 Types f Network Schematics

Different types of network schematics are created for different parts of the structured wiring cable p:ant:
s

Campus - defines the crossconnect, interconnect, and splice points for the

site’s MDF-to-IDF links and shows how any active equipment at the MDF
or IDFs are connected to the structured wiring.
s

Building - defines the crossconnect, interconnect, and splice points for the

IDF-to-HDF links and shows how any active equipment at the IDF or HDFs
is connected to the structured wiring.
NOTE

At small sites, the campus and buiiding network schematics can be combined into a single schematic.
s

Horizontal - defines the crossconnect, interconnect, and splice points for

each of the site's horizontal wiring subsystem cables and shows how any
active equipment at the HDF, SDF, or ODF is connected to the structured

5.7.2.2 Network Schematic References

For known applications, the active equipment’s optical and other network product application information must be understood before the network schematic
diagram can be created.
u

If the network will be using active fiber optic networking equipment avail-

able from Digital, review the application descriptions given in Section 5.6
and Appendix C for each type of active equipment.
w

If the network will be using active equiyment that is not available from
Digital, review that equipment’s product documentation to understand the
optical and configuration constraints for each type of active equipment.

Fiber Optic Cable Piant Design

547

5.7.2.3 Network Schematic Information

Each type of network schematic (campus, building, or horizontal) shows the following types of information for each of the links:
What active equipment is at each distribution frame for known applications
and:

— How interconnects are used to connect that equipment to the structured wiring.

.— The total fiber count required to connect each piece of active equipment
to the cable plant.

The total length of the cable in each link and each cable’s fiber count.

The number of splices within each distribution frame.

The number of splices in the links between the distribution elementa
The number of connector pairs at each distribution frame for the administration crossconnects and interconnects.

5.7.2.4 Network Schematics Creation Process - Known Applications

In general, the process used in creating the network schematics for known applications is as follows:

Review the product application information for optical and other restrictions, as well as for information that defines the application’s logical network configuration connection guidelines and rules.

Verify that the cable and other passive cable plant components planned
for the links meet the DECconnect System’s cable plant requirements
(Section 5.3).
Create the schematics.

Use the link-loss calculation information given in Section 5.8 to verify that
each of the links diagrammed in all of the network schematics meet the allowable system ioss requirements of the link’s active equipment.
Figure 5-18 provides a sample campus network schematic. Figure 5-19 provides
a sample building network schematic. Figure 520 provides a sample horizontal
network schematic.

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 5-18:

Sample Campus Network Schematic

m —»

l
1

(91.84 ft) | P49 2

ii@.@. ;

505050

[Bldg 1

228
m &

(747.8 ft)

Bldg 1
MDF

Bldg
3

Campus

Bc :kbone

300 m

(984 ft)

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

Bidg 2
IDF

0000eseQ

III

I
S000eceo

IF ]

Bldg 1
IDF

Bldg 3
IDF

LKG~3710-89A

549

Sample Bullding Network Schematic

Figure 5-19:

d}*Compus

Backbone
-—

Higher

]
@ -

]
@ P

—

l—ot——
IDF

—

Lower

—
_

] © Pp———

Q>
@ Pp——
el

L—.—Q%D.-——.——

<] O >

Building Backbone—CD

200 m

Hlfirer

thernet

3m (98 ft) @oL
m—
g - ||o
ol

gridegrge
5

o >—-

HDF

p—
34

H4005

v ( (9.8 ft )‘

Lo:er

- ~—
-

50 Ohm Terminator 9%

e Standard Coaxial Cable

Station

Equipment

]

Horizontal Wiring —@

——

FDDI

0
{65
:
3

FDDI-to

3 m (9.8 ft)| Wallbox r

8;\ (262.4 10

..... o

LKG-3709-89A

5-50

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 5-20:

Sample Horizontal Network Schematic

Higher

® Pt
@ Lr——mmrt
© p—-——ri
@

—{
o0 eoe

(9.8 ft)
|
P

—
38—
p—

Lower

[—

Horizontal Wiring-——CD

ie—90 m (295 ft)
I —

Higher

\3 m

®
_—<leop—i
o>——
L

f ft)
8
2 (9.8

@ >———

]
@——

50 Ohm Terminator
a——— Standard

Coxial

Cable

LKG~3715~B9A

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

5-51

5.7.2.5 Network Schematic Creation Process - Unknown Applications

In general, the process used in creating the network schematics for unknown #7plications is as follows:

Verify that the cable and other passive cable plant components planned
for the links meet the DECconnect System'’s cable plant requirements
(Section 5.3)

Create the schematic

Verify that each link between distribution subsystems does not exceed the
link-loss planning numbers given in Table 5-3

5.8 Fiber Optic Link-Loss Caiculations - Known Applications
A link-loss calculation, which is a simple arithmetic process, is used to determine
if the active equipment's allowable system loss supports the designed fiber optic
link. The calculation is based on optical specifications for the active equipment
and the cable plant, including:
s

The active equipment’s allowable system loss specification

The bandwidth derating loss value for the active equipment

Splice losses

Connector pair losses

Cable attenuation

Cable plant system loss margin

The active equipment’s allowable system loss is a product-specific value that defines the maximum amount of loss that can occur in the fiber optic link between
that active equipment’s transmit optical connection with the link, and the optical
receiver’s connection at the other end o.” the link.
5.8.1 Link-Loss Calculation Process

A link-loss calculation must be done for ¢ ach fiber optic link in the structured
wiring cable plant. The calculation ensures that the link does not exceed the
allowable system loss for the active equipment involved in the link.

5-52

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

If a link does not meet the allowable system loss for the active equipment, then
the link needs to be redesigned. The actions that can be taken in the redesign
are:

Use active equipment with a higher allowable system loss.

Reduce the number of splices or connectors in the link, if possible.

Use a high-grade fiber optic cable that has a cable attenuation that is less
than that for standard cables.

Design a new cable route for the cable if rerouting the cable can cut down
on the distance enough to meet the allowable system loss

Redesign the subsystem structure to cut the distance, if possible.

5.8.2 Link-Loss Calculation Methods

Two methods of doing the link-loss calculation are provided:

5.8.2.1

Link-loss tables

Link-loss calculation worksheet

Link-Loss Tables

The FDDI and ORnet product descriptions (Section 5.6) both include a linkloss table. Each table defines a maximum link distance that is based on using
62.5/125 micron indoor multimode cable and takes into account the equipment’s
allowable system loss and bandwidth derating values, as well as the cable plant
system loss margin (1.0 dB). Remember to add two splices for each link to budget for se1vice splices.
NOTE

When using other than the Digital-recommended 62.5/125
micron fiber size (50/125 or 100/140), with Digital FDDI
or ORnet equipment, refer to Appendix A to determine
the maximum link lengths for the active equipment.

Fiber Optic Cabla Plant Design

5-53

To use the link-loss tables:
s

Determine the number of connector pairs (one pair for each interconnect,
two pairs for each crossconnect) in the link.
NOTE

Do not count the active equipment’s connector on Digital’s
products, or the patch cable connector that connects directly to the active equipment. These connectors are already accounted for in the design of the active equipment
allowable system loss. Do not acd in their losses again.
For products not made by Digita., refer to the vendor’s

technical manual for this connector information.
s

Determine the number of splices in the link (including the two service

splices that are required to be budgetesi for).
s

Find the link’s maximum length in the link-lcss table’s column and row that
corresponds to the connector pair and splice numbers.

Compare the maximum length from the table with the actual link length.

If the actual link length is not greater than the link-loss table value, then the
link is within the active equipment’s allowable system loss.
5.8.2.2 Link-Loss Calculation Worksheet
The link-loss calculation worksheet evaluates the design of each fiber optic link
in the structured wiring cable plant when:
s

Fiber optic Ethernet or FDDI products are used.

Active equipment not available from Digital is used.

The link-loss tables in Section 5.6 cannot be used because a different cable

attenuation is used.

This section provides instructions on how to use the Link-Loss Calculation
Worksheet shown in Figure 5-21. Make one pltoc py of the worksheet for each
link-loss calculation. The result of the calculaticz .3 the maximum allowed fiber
optic cable length which can be installed with tl. .. specific link.

5-54

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

The worksheet contains several numbered entries. Each of these requires action,

as follows:
Enter the allowable system loss value for the active equipment.
Enter the number of splices in the link, multiply that number by 0.4 dB

(the maximum allowable loss for DECconnect System splices), and record
the result. For example, three splices result in a total splice loss of 1.2 dB.
Enter the number of connector pairs (one pair for each interconnect, two

pairs for each crossconnect), multiply the number of pairs by 0.7 dB (the
maximum allowable loss for DECconnect System connectors), and record the
result. For example, a link with two interconnects and one crossconnect has
4 connector pairs, with a total loss of 2.8 dB.
Enter a value equal to 0.4 dB for each planned maintenance splice (Digital

recommends that two maintenance splices be planned for each link, with a
maintenance splice loss value of 0.8 dB).
Enter the cable plant system loss margin (1.0 dB).

Add the splice (line 2), connector (line 3), maintenance splice (line 4), and
system margin (line 5) loss values together and record the resuit.
Subtract the fixed loss value recorded on line 6 from the allowable system
loss value on line 1 and record the remaining value.

Record the cable attenuation value of the cable to be used in the link. For
example, record 1.5 dB when using outdoor multimode 62.5/125 micron fiber

optic cable in a 1300 nm product application.
Include the bandwidth derating value.
NOTE

If the bandwidth derating value is unknown for the active
device, consult the equipment specifications or, if neces-

sary, the vendor, for the bandwidth derating value.
9.

Add the cable attenuation (line 8) to the bandwidth derating value (line 9)
and record the result.

10. Determine the maximum link length by dividing the cable pow 2r budget
recorded in line 7 by the length dependent losses recorded in line 10 and

record the result.

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

555

Figure 5-21:

Link-Loss Calculation Worksheet

1. Project Identification:

Project ID:

Page

Designer:

Date:

li. Cable Link ldentification:

Cable ldentifier:

. Link Loss Calculation:

(1)

Allowable System Loss:

Fixed Losses:

No. of

(2)

Splice Loss:

Splices:

X0.4dB =

(3)

Connector Loss: Pairs:

X0.7dB =

(4)

Planned Maintenance Splice Loss:

(5)

System Loss Margin:

(6)

Total Fixed Losses (add lines 2, 3, 4 and 5):

(7)

Cable Power Budget (subtract line 6 from line 1):

No. of

Length Dependent Losses:

(8)

©)

Cable Attenuation:

dB/km

Other Losses, such as Bandwidth

Derating (if applicable):

dB/km

(10)

Total Dependent Losses (add lines 8 and 9):

dB/km

(11)

Maximum Link Length (divide line 7 by line 10):

km
LKG-3644-891

5-56

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

5.9 Link Certification Loss Values
A link certification loss value for both 850 nm and 1300 nm wavelengths must be
calculated for each fiber optic cable link between the structured wiring distribution elements (distribution frames and wallboxes). Two worksheets are used in

calculating and recording the link certification loss values:
s

Link Certification Loss Value Worksheet Figure 5-22 - provides the step-by-

step arithmetic process for determining the loss values for each cable link.
=

Link Certification Loss Value Summary Worksheet Figure 5-22 - provides a

means of summarizing the loss values.
The Link Certification Loss Value Summary Worksheet should be included with
the installation documents. These worksheets are used during the installation
acceptance process outlined in the DECconnect System Fiber Optic Installation
guide (EK-DECSY-FI). During the cable plant acceptance procedures, the linkloss for each complete fiber optic cable link is measured and compared against
the value recorded in the summary worksheet. These results are part of the ac-

ceptance criteria for the installed cable plant.
5.9.1 Link Certification Loss Value Worksheet
This section provides instructions for using the Link Certification Loss Value
Worksheet Figure 5-22. The worksheet provides a simple arithmetic process for
determining a loss value for a fiber optic cable link. The loss values are recorded

on the Link Certification Loss Value Summary Worksheet.
Section | Project Identification

Identify the project, designer, and date.
Section It Cable Link Identification

Identify the cable link by the cable identifier.

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

5-57

Sectlon |l Loss Caiculations

This section of the worksheet has three main parts:
u

Splice and Connector Loss - determines the total dB loss for the link’s
splices and connector pairs through a self-explanatory three-step (Steps 1
through 3) arithmetic process.

1300 nm Cable Loss - determines the loss value for 1300 nm wavelength
operation through a self-explanatory seven-step (Steps 4 through 10) arithmetic process.

850 nm Cable Loss - determines the loss value for 850 nm wavelength operation through a self-explanatory seven-step (Steps 11 through 17) arithmetic
process.

5-58

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 5-22:

Link Certification Loss Value Worksheet

I. Project identification:
Project ID:

Page

Designer:

Date:

Il. Cable Link Idantification:

Cable Identifier
lll. Loss Calr uations:

Splice and Connector Loss:
{1) Number of splices:

—_—

X04=

——_ __

(2) Number of connector pairs:

—

X07=

_____dB

(3) Total loss (add lines 1 and 2):

—_— dB

850 nm Cable Loss:
(4) Length of cable link:

—_ km

(5) Cable attenuation (3.75 indoor or 3.5 outdoor cable):

(7) Total splice/connector toss from line 3:

(6) Attenuation loss (mulitiply line 4 by line 5):

(8) Attenuation/splice/connector loss (add lines 6 and 7):

(9) Certification measurement margin:

____05dB

(10) 850 nm certification loss value (subtract line 9 from line 8):

—ee. B

1300 nm Cable Loss:

(11) Length of cable link:
(12) Cable attenuation:

km
1.5

(13) Attenuation loss (multiply line 11 by line 12):

(14) Total splice/connector loss from line 3:

(15) Attenuation/splice/connector loss (add lines 13 and 14):
(16) Certification measurement margin:
(17) 1300 nm certification loss value (subtract line 16 from line 15):

dB
0.5 dB
dB
LKG-3690-8081

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

5-59

5.9.2 Link Certification Loss Value Summary Worksheet

This section provides instructions for filling in the Link Certification Loss Value
Summary Worksheet (Figure 5-23). It provides a means of recording the 1300
nm and 850 nm link-loss values for all of the fiber optic cable links in the structured wiring cable plant. Fill in a separate worksheet for each building’s cables.
Fill in one worksheet for all of the campus backbone cable.
Section | Project Identification

Identify the project, worksheet page number, designer, and date.
Section It Subsystem ldentification

F111 in the IDF identifier, if the worksTM. -zt is for building backbone or horizontal
wiring.

Fill in the MDF identifier, if the worksheet is for the campus backbone cables.
Section il Link Certification Values

Fill in the 850 nm and 1300 nm calculated certified loss values from each of the
Link Certification Loss Value Worksheets (Figure 5-22) by cable identifier.
NOTE

The remainder of the worksheet is filled in during cer-

tification procedures performed after the site has been
completely installed. For more information ox: the installation link acceptance process, see Chapter 7 of the
DECconnect System Fiber Optic Installation guide (EKDECSY-FI).

5-60

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 5-23:

Link Certification Loss Value Summary Worksheet

I. Project ldentification:

Project ID.

Page

Name:

Date:

Il. Subsystem Identification:
Identifier:

il. Link Certification Values:
Calculated

Certified

Loss Value

Cable Identifier
850

1300

Total Corrected

Cable Loss

850

1300

Value

Differences

850

1300

LKG-2382-801

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Design

5-61

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
7000000000 P OPO 00000000000 00008e880000001
NS0 G 0000000 PO000000800000008008000009090
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
[0 00000000 0000000000008 0000068000000)
XX
KL KLKKK
KX
X EX KX KKK
XK XXX XR
XX
XX KX
KAXX
PGP000008.0.0.0.860000.00.8860¢00
AX
LK KKK KKKEKX
A AKX XXXE
XXK
XXX
KAXXKK
O 0.9:09.9.0.9.0.0.0.0.6.8.6.0.08.0090860600.0
PO 0P G 0000800000 ¢8800¢0000004
PO 09.0.0.09.000.0.0.000.8 880000804

PO 0 0.009.0.0606.0.6.80.0.0.000068
PO0.0.0.0.8.09.0.0.0.0.0.9.9.9.8.90.9
XXXXKXXAXAXKXAKKKXKXX
)9:0:0:0.0.0.0.0.6.0.9.4.0.0.8,0.4
XXX KAXXXXKAXXAX
&4
1.9°9.€.0:0.0.8.8.0.9.9
XXXXAXXXXXXK
XAXKXAXXX
XAXXXXX
XXXXY
XXX
X

XXX
XXXXX

XXXXXXX

XXXXXKXXXK

KARXKAXKXXXAXX

KAXKXAEKAXKLXK

)0:9.8.4.0.6.0.9.:4.9.9,0.004

1.0.9.0.0.6.0.0.0.09.0.0.8.0.694
X
XXXKXK
KKK
UXK
K XXX
XXA
)9.:6.0.6.0,6.0.0.0.0.9.6.0.$.6.9000.44
.0.
.0.0.0.04¢.04
0.8 9.9.89.8.
PO00.0.0

HO10.0.0:0.0.0.0.0.6.0.0.0.0.0.8.6.9.¢0.60004
50.0.00.00.0.0.0.0.0.00.0.0008089.08660
0000000 0.9.00.0.5.00.0.80.06.0.08908060.

PO.0.9.00.000.000.006.00.0.6600.008988800¢
LK AAXKL
KX R KKKAA
AR AR XK
XXXAX
REXXXX

NOOC PO VOOITOO:0:0.0.00.0.0.00.9.0.8.09.0.6.9.01
O PP POTONS VP00 0000.9.0.$.0.9050.6.8.060
EIE.5.0.:910:0.9,0.6.0.0.0.¢
AP
00
SRS 0T0' 0 5 0 ORSSO
.0.0:9
.0.0:0986,060
OOED.9
VTS
VSO
TGP CS PO P OO

HXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
HXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

Work Area Wiring Design
This chapter provides work area wiring recommendations and procedures needed
to:

®#

Define wallbox locations and mounting procedures.

Define cable requirements.

Define work area wiring connections to the wallbox.

Create a bills of materials (BOM) for cable requirements.

Each work area wiring subsystem is a cable assembly (or assemblies) that connects the active equipment device to a horizontal wiring subsystem’s wallbox.
The construction of work area wiring cables is identical to patch panel cables

used at the distribution frames. Each type of cable assembly contains:
e

A length of 2-fiber cable.

On the fibers at one end of the cable, FDDI 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type or
SMA-type connectors for connection to the active device.

On the fibers at the other end of the cable, either 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type

connectors (for connection to the H3111-GA/GB/GC wallbox’s H3114-FF 2.5
mm bayonet ST-type connector panel) or an FDDI connector (for connection
to the H3111-GA/GB/GC wallbox’s H3114-FE FDDI connector panel).

6-1

Figure 6-1 illustrates a work area wiring subsystem.
Figure 6-1:

Work Area Wiring Subsystem

Work Area
Wiring Cable

Work Area
Device

Wallb ox*

*Walibox is part of horizontal wiring subsystem.
LKG-2930—-89A

6-2

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

6.1 Required Documents
The following documents are used during the work area wiring design process:
s

Floor plans - Updated to show all wallbox locations.

The Work Area Wiring Worksheet filled in during the site survey (DECconnect

System Requirements Evaluation Workbook (EK-DECSY-EG)).
s

The Wallbox Identifier Worksheets filled in during the labeling process in
Chapter 4, Section 4.6.

6.2 Work Area Wiring Guidelines
The following guidelines apply to the work area wiring design:
s

Cable length - Digital recommends that work area wiring be a maximum
length of 3 meters (10 feet).

Cable bend radius - wherever possible, use cable ties or cable clamps to se-

cure the work area wiring cables. This will help prevent damage due to
sharp bends of the fiber optic cable. The bend radius should not be smaller
than 3.8 centimeters (1.5 inches).

6.3 Defining Component Locations
The present or planned location of the wallboxes and the active equipment

that connect to those wallboxes is important to the work area wiring design.
Therefore, on the floor plans for each building, clearly mark all existing wall-

boxes and active equipment. Update the floor plans to show present locations.
NOTE

Wallboxes are identified in the floor plans by their identifier values. These values were defined during the wallbox
identifier process (Chapter 4) and recorded in Wallbox
Identifier Worksheets.

Work Area Wiring Design

6-3

6.4 Wallbox !nstallation Recommendations

Wallboxes should be located within 15 centimeters to 30 centimeters (6 to 12
inches) of a work area’s duplex electrical receptacle. When the wallbox is installed, it should be at the same level as that receptacle.

The following types of wallbox mounting can be used:
=

Installed onto a standard U.S. electrical box mounted in the wall. The mini-

mum dimensions of the electrical box are 8.9 cm (3.5 inches) high by 5.3 cm
(2.1 inches) wide by 6.4 cm (2.5 inches) deep.
s

Installed onto an international electrical box with hole spacing of 60.45 mm
(2.38 inches).

Installed directly on the wall surface using mounting components included
in the wallbox kit.
Installed in movable partition offices by referring to the partition manufac-

turer’s recommended methods for attaching communications receptacles to
their partitions.

6.5 Work Area Wiring Connection to Wallbox
Proper operation of the user’s active equipment in the fiber optic network requires correct installation of the work area wiring to the wallbox and to the
user’s active equipment. This requires understanding:
s

The location of the fiber optic transmit and receive connectors on the user’s
active equipment or station device.

The proper connection of the user’s active equipment or station device to the

wallbox.

Connection of the FDDI receptical on the user’s active equipment to an H3111GA/GB/GC wallbox with an H3114-FF FDDI connector panel requires a BN24B-

xx FDDI-to-FDDI crossover cable. The ends of the cable have keyed FDDI connectors so that they insert into the FDDI receptical at the active equipment and
wallbox the correct way.
Some active equipment have individual fiber optic ST or SMA-type connectors
for transmit and receive. These connectors are usually identified by the symbols
or terms shown in Figure 6-2.

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 6-2:

User’s Active Equipment Connection Labels

Transmit Connector

Receive Connector

Transmit

Receive

[X ]

[]

LKG-4108-001

Figure 6-3 shows the proper connections to the H3114-FF 2.5 mm bayonet STtype connector panel on the wallbox. On the front of each wallbox is a single-dot
symbol (bottom left side) and a two-dot symbol (bottom right side). The active
equipment transmit connector connects to the wallbox 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type
coupler with the two-dot symbol above it. The active equipment receive connector connects to the other wallbox coupler with the single-dot symbol above it.

When using a BN24D-xx FDDI-to-2.5mm bayonet ST-type connector cable to
connect active equipment with an FDDI receptacle to a wallbox with a ST connector insert, the active equipment transmit connector is the ST connector with
the black boot. The active equipment receive connector is the red boot connector.

The black boot ST connector is connected to the wallbox ST-type coupler with
the two-dot symbol above it and the red boot connector is connected to the coupler with the single-dot symbol above it. See Figure 64 for an illustration of the
connections.

Work Area Wiring Design

iigure 6-3:

H3114-FF 2.5mm Bayonet ST-type Wallbox Connections

Transmit

LKQ-4100-801

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 6—4:

BN24D-xx FDDI-to-2.5mm 2=, cnet ST-type Wailbox Connections

Transmit

LKG—4110-001

Work Area Wiring Design

6-7

6.6 Design Process Overview

The work area wiring design process is done on a horizontal wiring subsystemto-subsystem basis. That is, the work area wiring cables that connect to a specific horizontal wiring subsystem'’s wallboxes are designed as a single unit.
The result of the design is a worksheet set that defines all of the work area
wiring requirements for a single horizontal wiring subsystem as follows:
®

Work Area Wiring Cable Worksheet - defines the cable requirements.

Work Area Wiring BOM Worksheet - provides a bill of materials for all of

the requirements identified in the cable worksheet.
Figure 6-5 provides a flow chart overview of the work area wiring design process.

6-8

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

‘

Work Area Wiring Design Flow Chart

Figure 6-5:

Are
Cables
Selected
?

Are
BOMs
Created

Go to Section 6.7 and select
the work area wiring cables.

Go to Section 6.8 and fill in

the BOM worksheets.

Yes

Go to Chapter 7 and perform
the horizontal wiring cabling
design.

End
LKG—3845-89|

6.7 Selecting Work Area Wiring Cables
During this phase of the design:

Review the work area wiring cable options.

Photocopy and fill in a Work Area Wiring Cable Worksheet Figure 6-6 for
each of the site’s horizontal wiring subsystems.

Work Area Wiring Design

Use one worksheet for each horizontal wiring subsystem to define the work
area wiring cables.

6.7.1 Cable Options

Each work area wiring cable is defined by three major factors:
s

Recommended cable length (to a maximum of 3 meters (10 feet)).

The active equipment connectors (FDDI 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type or SMA-

type).
=

The wallbox connector type.

Additional factors that can be important are the cable’s jacket type (PVC or
plenum) and fiber size (50/125, 62.5/125, or 100/140).
Two options exist for selecting and ordering the cables:
s

(Cable assemblies terminated with connectors.

Custom cables

6.7.1.1 Cable Assemblies

Cable assemblies come in specific lengths and are terminated with the connectors needed for both the wallbox and active equipment cable ends. Three types
of terminated cable assemblies are available from Digital for use as work area
wiring (or patch cables):
NOTE

Terminated cable assemblies for connecting SMA-type

active equipment are not available directly from Digital.
They are ordered as custom cables (see Section 6.7.1.2).
s

BN24-xx dual 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector cable (for connecting STtype active devices to a 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector panel at the wallbox)

BN24D-xx FDDI-to-2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector cable (for connect-

ing FDDI active devices to a 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector panel at the
wallbox)

6-10

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

BN24B-xx FDDI-to-FDDI crossover cable (for connecting an FDDI device to

an FDDI connector panel at the wallbox)
NOTE

The H3111-GA/GB/GC wallbox (the only wallbox Digital
supports in the DECconnect System fiber optic structured
wiring) uses an H3114-FF 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector panel or an H3114-FE FDDI connector panel for
fiber optic connections. Work area fiber optic cables must
have either 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connectors (for the
H3114-FF panel) or an FDDI connector (for the H3114-FE
panel) on the wallbox end of the cable.

These cable assemblies, described in Chapter 11, come in various lengths and
are all PVC-jacketed, with 62.5/125 micron fiber.
NOTE

Only 3 meter (10 feet) or shorter versions of the cable assemblies are recommended for use as work area wiring
cables. The longer versions described in Chapter 11 are
for use as distribution frame patch cables. They are supported for use in work area wiring if the link-loss calculations in Chapter 5 allow longer lengths.
6.7.1.2 Custom Cables
Digital does not recommend the field-assembly of custom work area wiring
cables. They can be ordered from vendors listed in the auxiliary section of
Chapter 11.

For example the following work area cables can be ordered as custom, factory-

built assemblies:

— Cables that use 50/125 or 100/140 micron fiber
— Cables with SMA-type or Biconic-type connectors

— Custom-length cables
NOTE

Digital does not recommend using custom cable assemblies that exceed the 3-meter (10-foot) maximum length
for work area wiring.

Work Area Wiring Design

6-11

6.7.2 Cable Worksheet

This section provides instructions for the Work Area Wiring Cable Worksheet

(Figure 6-6). Photocopy and fill in a cable worksheet for each horizontal wiring
subsystem. This defines the work area wiring cable requirements for connecting
to the horizontal wiring’s wallboxes.

NOTE

Consult the cable vendor to solve any unique cable requirements not covered in this chapter.
Section 1 Project ldentification

Identify the project, worksheet page number, designer, and date.
Section H Subsystem Identitication

Identify the horizontal wiring subsystem work area wiring with the building IDF
and horizontal wiring HDF cable identifiers.
Section Il Component Requirements

Identify the work area wiring cable and connector requirements as follows:
»

List the wallbox identifier for each wallbox.

Define the active device’s connector type.

Define the wallbox connector type (H3114-FF for 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type

connectors or an H3114-FE for FDDI connectors).
=

Define the fiber length (3 meters (10 feet) maximum), fiber type (50/125,
62.5/125, or 100/140), and jacket type (PVC or plenum).

Use the Comments column to indicate any special issues, such as the listed
cable components for a field-assembled custom cable.

Section 1V Cable Routing Methods

Describe any special cable routing requirements within the work area.

6-12

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 6-6:

Work Area Wiring Cable Worksheet

I. Project identification:

Project ID:

Page

Name:

Date:

Il. Subsystem |dentification:

IDF Identifier:

HDF Identifier:

lil. Component Requirements:

Active

Wallbox | Device

Wallbox

Identifier | Connector | Connector|

Wallbox

Panel

Type

Fiber

Fiber | Jacket

Length | Type | Type

Comments

IV: Cable Routing Methods:

LKG-3648-801

Work Area Wiring Design

6—13

6.8 Bill of Materials (BOM) Worksheet
This section provides instructions for the Work Area Wiring BOM Worksheet
(Figure 6-7). Photocopy and fill in a BOM worksheet for the work area wiring
that connects to a single horizontal wiring subsystem'’s wallboxes. Each BOM
worksheet is compiled from the Workstation Wiring Cable Worksheet.
Section | Project identification

Identify the project, worksheet page number, designer, and date.
Section Il Subsystem Identification

Identify the horiz.atal wiring subsystem by its IDF and HDF cable identifiers.
Section Il Component Requirements

List each cable assembly, cable, or connector component by:
»

Component description (for example, 62.5/125, 3-meter, PVC-jacketed,
FDDI-to-2.5 mm, bayonet ST-type connector ceble assembly)

Order number (for example, BN24D-03 is the order number for the 3-meter
PVC-jacketed 62.5/1256 micron FDDI-t0-2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector
cable assembly)

Quantity required

Unit price

Total price (quantity multiplied by the unit price)

Then summarize the total cost of the listed components.

614

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Flgure 6-7:

Work Area Wiring BOM Worksheet

I. Project Identification:
Project 1D:

Page

Designer:

Date:

iI.

Subsystem ldentification:

IDF Identifier:

HDF identifier:

lit. Component Requirements:

tem
Number

Part
Number

Description

Quantity

Unit
Price

Total
Price

Total Cost:

LKG-3647-891

Work Area Wiring Design

6-15

KRKXARAAX KX KX KKK XK XX KKK X AR AKX KKK KX KK XXX XXX KA KKK KAKKX
NOPOPCLPPID D0 000000 0.0000000 00000080886 08000.08800¢
PO OPCIPIOVI DO L5 6 0008.0.00.69980808008600600
XXX XXKXXX XXX KK AR KK XKK KKK A X XK KX XXX AL XK KK AXKKKX
PO

P00 9.0.0.0.0.0.08.00.0900.6608.08.0.000.48.680.6980004

FOS 0000090080 0.00.0089060.60808 8880600800060
POO D00 0009:09.6:9.:9.9.69.0.506.99.608.890,08000600

PO 0.00.0.0.00.0.0.8.0/0.0.0.9.0.0.0.5.66.06.0008800868004
1O P00 0000004080880 08080899860.00004
8
.0588060600
0.0.0
800.000.9000
.0.0.
900
P9.0.0
PO0:0.0.0.04:6.0.0.0.66.0.0.080.99¢8600006.904
PO00.0:0.0.0.0.0.08.8.4.6.806.0.6888888000.4
$O

000008 8.8.0.8.99.4:08.00 66900004

PO OIS0 6.0.008.090860864
:0.914:9:¢.8.6.8.6.0.8.:0.0.0.9.9.0.9.9.9.0.6
XXXXKLXKXKX
KXAX
XA XK
KXXE
119:918.6°6:0.8.6.9.9.0.9.9.9.9.9.8,¢4
AXK
KXAX
XX AXKAKXKX
$.9.9:0.9.9.9.9.0.0.9.9.0.9,9.4
XX XXXXKXXXNXKXX

XXXKXKXXXKKX

).9.9.0.9.9.9.9.0.¢
XXXXXXX

XXXXX
XXX
X

XXX
XXXXX

XAAAXXX
D9.9.0.6.9.9.0.9.4

KAAXKAXXKXX

XAXXXXKXKKLXKXX
4
$.0.0.9.0.4:0.0.9.9,9.8.9.6.0
). 5:6.0.0.0.6.9.8.8.9.9.0.6.9.9.04

1.0.0.0.0.6.0.0.0.9.0.9.0.9.9.6.0.9¢
19:0.0.0.6.0.0.0.0.0.0.9.4.0.9.9.6.0.0.0.¢
):6.0:0.0.0.0.0.0.0.4.0.0.0.9.8.0.¢.9.$.09.04

100000.0.00.8:0.0.0999.00.0.099¢08

.90¢
984
.9:9.9.0:9.0.9.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.9.0.0.9:0.8.0
D0:9.0.9.0.0.90.0.0.6.0.6.0.0.9.:0.0.9.0.0.9000.8.6004

PO00.9.0.0.0.0,0.0.6:0:0:0.0.0.0.6.0.6.6.008.9.9.0.4.9.64

10:0:0.0.0.:9.0.9.0.6:0.0:0.0.0.0.9:0.0.0.0:0.0.0.0.0.9.:¢.9,6.0.94
P OO0 0 00.T0.090.0.0.0.00.0.6.0.0.0.0.06.0.00900¢90.48

1O00.0:9.0:0.0.0.9.0.0.0.0.0.0.9.0.0.0.:0.0:6.0.0.0.9.0.9.0.8.8.$.0.9.01
R0.9:0.904.9.009,4 RS0 O

0 800 0.0

008000.9:0.8.9.8.0.0.6¢

0. b RG0.0:0.0.0.6.9.90:9.0.0.0.00.0.80.00 9:9:9,6.9.8.0.0.9.6.9.6.0 ¢

000
08000408000
ROND PO 00.000.00.0.0.0 0 0.0.66.¢06000.0.0.
RYS0.00.0.9.0.0.0.0.0.4.9.0.9.0.0.6.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.99.00.9.609.00.94

POR00090:0.0.0.0.0.09.0.0.0.0.9.0.0.9066808000.00.6.9.80640.0000080004
G0 0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.9.60.9.0:0.9.0.9.9.0.06006000000.0.00.0800008000000
PO 000 0.0.0.0.00.000600.000.098660.60:600000000.6.000.000099000609

Horizontal Wiring Cabling Design
This chapter provides the horizontal wiring recommendations, procedures, and
worksheets needed to:

Define wallbox requirements.
Select cable routing methods.
Define cable and connector requirements.
Create bills of materials {BOMs) for the component requirements.
Each horizontal wiring subsystem has the following main components:

A horizontal distribution frame (HDF) - the connection points between the
horizontal wiring and building backbone cables.
The wallboxes - the connection point between the horizontal and work area
wiring cables.

The horizontal wiring cables - the cables between the horizontal wiring’s
distribution elements (distribution frames and wallboxes).

The support hardware for routing the cables.
The DECconnect System’s horizontal wiring can also include direct-cable connections between the HDF and computer equipment and the HDF and system
common equipment, as well ag anv of the following other distribution frames:

Satellite distribution frame (SDF) - an open-rack distribution frame located
within an equipment room.

Office distribution frame (ODF) - a free-standing, enclosed cabinet.

v Remote wall distribution frame (RWDF) - a small wall-mounted cabinet.
NOTE

The SDF, ODF, RWDF can only be used in wallbox links.
Digital does not support using distribution frames in
HDF-to-computer rooms or HDF-to-system common
equipment links.

The RWDF is used only for interconnecting or splicing cables from wallboxes to
the HDF. The SDF and ODF can be used for interconnecting active networking
equipment to the structured wiring or for crossconnects between the wallbox and
HDF cable fiber.
NOTE

Only one crossconnect is allowed in the horizontal wiring.
Usually that crossconnect is in the HDF. When an interconnect is used in the HDF (for connecting active networking equipment to the link) the horizontal wiring’s

crossconnect can be in an SDF or ODF.
Figure 7-1 illustrates the horizontal wiring components.

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 7-1:

Horizontal Wiring Distribution Subsystem

Horizontal
Wiring

HDF

System o
Common
Equipment

LKG—3555—89A

Horizontal Wiring Cabling Design

7-3

7.1 Required Documents

The following documents are used during the horizontal wiring design process:
s

Floor plans - Updated during the design process to show the existing or
planned locations of all distribution frames and wallboxes and all cable
routing methods.

The identifier worksheets filled in during the labeling procedure in Chapter 4,
Section 4.6.

The Horizontal Wiring Information Worksheet filled in during the site sur-

vey from the DECconnect System Requirements Evaluation Workbook.
s

BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual - for reference

when designing the cable routing.
s

NEC and local building codes - for reference during the design process.

7.2 Defining Component Locations
The exact existing or planned locations of the horizontal components (HDF,
SDFs, ODFs, RWDFs, wallboxes, computers, and system common equipment
that connects directly to an HDF) are very important to the design of the horizontal wiring subsystems. Therefore, on the floor plans for each building, check

to see that each existing or planned location of the distribution frame, computer
rocm equipment, or system common equipment that directly connects to the
HDF is clearly marked. If not, update the floor plans by adding any missing distribution frame (computer room or system common equipment) locations.
NOTE

The floor plans were updated to show the wallbox locetions in Chapter 6. The distribution frames are identified
in the floor plans by their identifier values. These values
were defined during the distribution frame identifier process (Chapter 4) and recorded in the Horizontal Wiring
Identifier Worksheets.

7-4

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

7.3 Design Process Overview
The horizontal wiring design process is done on a subsystem-by-subsystem ba-

sis. The result of each subsystem design is a worksheet set that defines ail of
the subsystem’s wallbox, cable routing, cable, and connector requirements, as
follows:
=

Wallbox Requirements Worksheet (Figure 7-3) - defines the wallbox and

snap-in connector panel requirements.

Horizontal Wiring Cahle Routing Worksheet (Figure 7-5) - defines the rout-

ing methods and any hardware needed for those methods.
s

Horizontal Wiring Cable Worksheet (Figure 7-6) - defines the cable and connector requirements.

Horizontal Wiring BOM Worksheet (Figure 7-7) - provides a kill of materi-

als for all of the components.
In addition, building floor plans are updated during the design process to reflect
the design.

Figure 7-2 provides a flow chart overview of the horizontal wiring design process.

Horizontal Wiring Cabling Des'gn

7-5

Figure 7-2:

Horizontal Wiring Design Flow Chart

Are
Wallbox
Requirements
Defi7ned

Go to Section 7.4 and define
the walibox requirements.

Yes

Are
Cable

Go to Section 7.5 and define
the horizontal cabie routing.

Routing Methoas
Defined

Go to Section 7.6 and define
the cables.

Are
BOMs
Created
?

Go to Section 7.7 and fill in
the BOM worksheets.

Yes

Go to Chapter 8 and perform
the building backbone
cabling design.

LKG-3848-891

7-6

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

7.4 Wallbox Requirements
This section provides instructions for the Wallbox Requirements Worksheet
(Figure 7-3). Photocopy and fill in a worksheet for each horizontal wiring sub-

system to identify the subsystem’s wallbox and snap-in connector panel requirements.

Section | Project identification

Identify the project, worksheet page number, designer, and date.
Section |l Subsystem Identification

Identify the subsystem by its IDF and HDF identifiers.
Section lil Component Requirements

List each wallbox by its identifier (for example, WB0134), and describe the type
of snap-in connector panel (or panels) the wallbox needs (such as voice, video,
twisted-pair data, ThinWire, or fiber optic data).
Section IV Comments

Describe any special issues concerning the wallboxes.

Horizontal Wiring Cabling Design

7-7

Figure 7-3:

Wallbox Requirements Worksheet

{. Project ldentification:

Project ID:

Page

Designer:

Date:

Il. Horizontal Wiring Subsystem tdentification:

IDF Identifier:

HDF Identifier:

lii. Component Requirements:
Wallbox

identifier

Type of Snap-in/Sfide-in
Connector Panel(s)

Wallbox

Type of Snap-in/Slide-in

Identifier

Connector Panel(s)

IV. Comments:

LKG-3640-801

7-8

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

7.5 Defining Cable Routing Methods
During this phase of the design:

Select the routing method for each cable between the horizontal wiring connection points.

Fill in a Horizontal Wiring Cable Routing Worksheet for each horizontal
wiring subsystem to:

— Define all of th: routing methods for the cables.
— Identify each cable that uses each defined method.

— Identify any support components needed for the routing methods.
7.5.1 Selecting Cable Routing Methods

This section provides descriptions of the:
s

Overall process for determining horizontal cable routing requirements.

The Digital-recommended horizontal cable routing method.
NOTE

Cable routing considerations are described in Chapter 2,
Section 2.4.1.4. Review those guidelines before designing
any cable routing.
7.5.1.1 Cable Routing Methods Selection Process
During this phase of the design:

Refer to the site plans and to tiic DECconnect System Requirements Evaluation
Workbook Horizontal Wiring Information Worksheet or visually inspect the
building to see if a routing method exists that the cable can use.

If a routing method exists, verify that there is enough room for running new
cable using that method’s hardware.

Horizontal Wiring Cabling Design

7-9

For example, if existing conduit is selected, make sure there is enough room in
the conduit to pull in an inner duct. This inner duct is required for isolating the
fiber optic cable from other cables in the conduit. If there is room, indicate on
the building floor plan that inner duct is needed. If there is no room, design a
new conduit run for the cable, or select another routing method.
@

If no routing method exists, or existing methods cannot be used:
— Refer to the building’s floor plans or visit the site to identify any obstacles that can affect the cable routing.

NOTE

A visit to the building with the cable installation
contractor is recommended. The contractor can point
out issues that can affect the selection of the routing
methods, which are not readily apparent.
— Review the horizontal cable routing method description in Section 7.5.1.2.

— Mark the floor plans to show the routing method, as well as to identify
any hardware needed and where it is needed (such as the location of
cable trays).

7.5.1.2 Horlzontal Cable Routing Methods

This section provides a brief description of the above-ceiling cable tray method
(Figure 7—4) for the horizontal cable routing recommended by Digital.
Keep the following points in mind when designing an above-ceiling cable routing
run:

Stuthed conduit should be installed in the wall from the wallbox to just
above the dropped ceiling line. This helps avoid having to fish the fiber optic cable from the cable tray and through the wall to the wallbox.
Proper fire blocking procedures must be observed when running cable

through any wall that is designated as a fire stop.
NOTE

Information on fire blocking is provided in the BICSI

Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual. This
manual also describes other types of horizontal cable
routing methods, and the above-ceiling cable trays method.

7-10

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Above-Celling Cable Trays

With this routing method, the cables are run to cable trays that are in the ceil-

ing and routed through the horizontal wiring area. When a cable reaches the
distribution frame or wallbox that it will connect with, it drops down from the
trays to that frame or wallbox. In the case of the wallbox, the cable usually
drops down from ihe cable tray to the wallbox through stubbed conduit (conduit
that runs from just above the dropped ceiling line to the wallbox location).

Horizontal Wiring Cabling Design

7-1

Figure 7-4:

Cable Tray

5] ] ra) 2 o 0 4] x

LKG—3560—-89A

7-12

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

7.5.2 Cable Routing Worksheet
This section provides instructions for the Horizontal Wiring Cable Routing
Worksheet (Figure 7-5). Photocopy and fill in a worksheet for each horizontal
wiring subsystem to define the subsystem's routing methods and hardware requirements.

NOTE

Consult with the cable routing hardware vendor or contractor to solve any unique requirements not covered in
this chapter.
Section | Project Identification

Identify the project, worksheet page number, designer, and date.
Section Il Subsystem Identification

Identify the subsystem by its IDF and HDF identifiers.
Section lil Cable Routing Methods Descriptions

Describe each type of routing method to be used, its status (existing or planned),

and the identifiers for the cables that use the method.
If only one method is used, the entry should list that method and its status,
while the cable identifier entry should state, "All."
Section IV Component Requirements

Describe any hardware needed for the routing methods (such as trays, cable ties,
or cable clamps), and the quantity of each listed item.
Sectlon V Comments

Describe any special issues concerning any of the cable routing methods.

7.6 Defining Cables
The horizontal concept diagrams identify some of the requirements for each hori-

zontal wiring cable:
e

Fiber type

(multimode)

Horizontal Wiring Cabling Design

7-13

Figure 7-5:

Horizontal Wiring Cable Routing Worksheet

I. Project Identification:

Project ID:

Page

Designer:

Date:

Il. Subsystem Identification:

IDF \dentifier:

HDF Identifier:

. Cable Routing Method Descriptions:
Routing

Method

Status

Identifiers for Cables Using Method

IV. Component Requirements:
Component

.
Quantity

V. Comments:

LKG-3650-691

7-14

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Fiber count

w Fiber size
=

Estimated cable lengths (in the case of the wallbox cables, only the average
length is listed in the concept diagram)

The cable definition process consists of the following:
u

Define each cable’s jacket type (PVC or plenum)

Verify the exact cable lengths

Define the connector requirements for each cable

The result of the process is a filled in Horizontal Wiring Cable Worksheet that
defines a single horizontal wiring subsystem’s cable and connector requirements.
The process is repeated for all of the site’s horizontal wiring subsystems.
7.6.1 Cable Jackets

Each cable can have either a PVC jacket or a plenum jacket. The type of jacket
depends on whether the cable runs through environmendial (plenum-jacketed cable) or only nonenvironmental airspace (PVC-jacketed cable).

NOTE

For more information on environmental and nonenvironmental airspace, see Appendix F.

Horizontal Wiring Cabling Design

7-15

7.6.2 Cable Lengths

During the horizontal concept diagram process (Chapter 3), estimated cable
length values were defined and recorded on the diagrams. However, the actual
length of cable needed for each horizontal wiring cable is determined as follows:
s

Determine the length of cable required to go between the distribution con-

nection points (distribution frame, wallbox, computer room or system common equipment) using the selected cable routing method.
s

Add 4.5 meters (14.8 feet) of cable slack for each distribution frame, com-

puter room, or system common equipment end of the cable, or 0.6 meters (2
feet) of slack for a wallbox cable end.
Once the actual cable length is determined:
=

Record the length on the cable worksheet.

Verify that the overall HDF-to-wallbox (HDF-to-computer rooTM or HDF-to-

system common equipment) cable length, including all cables in the wall
and patch cables at the HDF, SDF, or ODF, does not exceed the 90-meter
(295-foot) maximum length for a horizontal wiring. If the overall HDF-towallbox (HDF-to-computer room, or system common equipment) cable is

greater than 90 meters (295 feet), including the patch cables used in the
link, the link must be redesigned.

= If the length recorded on the cable worksheet is greater than the length

recorded on the horizontal concept diagram, review the Link-Loss Calculation
Worksheet (Figure 5-21)that was filled out for the link and ensure that the

allowable system loss for the active equipment can support the additional
cable length (the difference in length between the worksheet and concept
diagram lengths).
7.6.3 Cable Worksheet
This section provides instructions for the Horizontal Wiring Cable Worksheet
(Figure 7-6). Photocopy and fill in a worksheet for each horizontal wiring subsystem to define that subsystem's cable and connector requirements. Each work-

sheet compiles and expands on information from the subsystem’s horizontal concept diagram.
NOTE
Consult with the cable vendor to solve any unique cable
requirements not covered in this section.

7-16

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Section | Project Identification

Identify the project, worksheet page number, designer, and date.
Section Il Subsystem Identification

Identify the subsystem by its IDF and HDF identifiers.
Section {ll Environmental Considerations

Describe any environmental factors that can affect the cables.
Section IV Cable Descriptions:

Define the cable and connector requirements as follows:

Refer to the horizontal concept diagram and list each cable by its identifier,
fiber type, fiber count, and fiber size.

Define the cable jacket (plenum for environmental airspace or PVC for nonenvironmental airspace).

Refer to the subsystem’s cable routing worksheet and identify the cable
routing method the cable uses.

Use the procedure in Section 7.6.2 to verify and record each cable’s length.

Define the cable connection as either heavy-duty, light-duty, or zip conductor.

Define the cable’s connector requirements by:

— Quantity: two connectors are needed for each fiber that connects to
panels at the distribution frame or to a wallbox, and no connectors are
needed for spare wallbox fibers.
— Type: the connector type is 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type.
Section V Comments

Describe any special issues concerning the cables or connectors.

Horizontal Wiring Cabling Design

7-17

Figure 7-6:

Horizontal Wiring Cable Worksheet

I. Project Identification:

Project ID:

Page

Designer:

Date:

il. Subsystem Identification:

IDF Identifier:

HDF identifier:

. Environmental Considerations:
Describe:

V. Cable Descriptions:

Cable

Identifier | Type

Count | Size

Connectors

Jacket | Method | Const. | Length | Quantity

Type

V. Comments:

LKG-3651-801

7-18

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

7.7 Bill of Materials (BOM) Worksheet
This section provides instructions for the Horizontal Wiring BOM Worksheet
(Figure 7-7). Photocopy and fill in a BOM worksheet for each horizontal wiring
subsystem’s wallbox, cable, connector, and cable routing hardware requirements.
Each BOM worksheet is compiled from the component requirements defined in
the subsystem’s wallbox requirements, cable routing, and cable worksheets.
Section | Project Identification

Identify the project, worksheet page number, designer, and date.
Section H Horizontal Wiring Subsystem ldentification

Identify the subsystem by its IDF and HDF identifiers.
Section Il Component Requirements

List each component by:
s

Component description (for example, 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector kit)

Order number (the number is H3114-FA for the 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type

connector kits given in the example component description)
m

Quantity required (for the example, 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector kits,

one kit is needed for every six 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connectors required)
s

Unit price

Total price (quantity multiplied by the unit price)

Then summarize the total cost of the listed components.

Horizontal Wiring Cabling Design

7-19

Figure 7-7:

Horizontal Wiring BOM Worksheet

I. Project identification:
Project ID:

Page_ of

Designer: _

Date:

Il.

Subsystem ldentification:

IDF

HDF

identifier:

Identifier:

Iil. Component Requirements:

item

Nurnber

Part

Number

Description

Quantity

Unit

Price

Total

Price

Total Cost:

LKG-3652-891

7-20

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

RUKXKKAAAXKXK XXX XXX XXX EXXKXAXX KX AR XL AKX KKK XK KXXX KKK
KUK K KXXXXAXKX XXX XA XXX XXX XX KA RXHXAX XA KL RXR AKX KKK AKKX
PP TP PPV EP VOO0 00.00.0. 0000000080050880880000
000000 OIS 000.0.0.0:0.00.0060008880860680000
6001
8888600
OIOE0000000000
NOSSC TSP
NP0 PTO OO 00.000000008080¢88060000:
NP PP OVVOT VIO O0.0.60.0606809.60.6088008009604

NOPOS VIO 000.00.:0.0.000.00.00.00880880000.00¢
AKX XX XXX ERK KK AR XK KK HE KKK KKK HKKKK
PO 000000000 00088080000008000060004
PO 0.0.00.0.0.00.0.009.0.00.0084880886809094
XK
AXKKKKKX
KKK
XXX XXX
KEX
KKK
KEXXKX
.604
0900008060
.5.0.9.66.
000 0.00.0.0.8
1000000 0.000.0.0.000080.088888
KX
XKL XXX KAXAXKXEX
KKXAX
XXA
F0.0:6:0.0.0.8.0.0.0.6:0.0,6.0.9.0,0.0.0
P10:0.0.0.0:6.0.6.0.0.0.:0.0.9.9.¢.0.8.¢
P0.8.0.0.6.0.0.0.0.000.0.8¢
)0.0.8.6.0.0.:8.9.0.0,0.9.0.0.4¢

$.0.8.0:6.9.9.9.9.0.0.0.9.¢
}.0:0.6.0.9.9.9.9.8.6

XX KAXAXAXX
KXXXKXXX
HHAXX
XXX
X

XXX

XXXXX
).9.:9.9.0.0.4.4
$.0.6.9.0.6.0,0.0.4

1.9.6.6.0.9.0.98.9.94

1.0.0.0.9:9.9.0.9,9.0.0,04
.00
1,:8.9.9.0.0.0.0.0.4.6.4

0.4
10:9.9.9.6.0.0.9.0.9.9.6.0.9.¢
P0.0.9.9.9.9.0.0.9.9.99.$6.9.60.6.4

P894.0:6.0.¢.9.0.0.:0.4.0.0.0.4.8.$.0.6.4

64
P9.9.0.0.0.0.8.9.9.0.0.0,0.9.0.0.6.¢50.0
909094
16.0:9.90.0.0.8.0.8.0.6.0.9.0.9.0.9.6.0

10.0.0.9.0.0.0.0.0:0.09.0990.0.8.00.08.609.6
j0.0.0.0.00.0.0.0:00.00.9.0:0.0.8.0.00.80.¢.609.0,

19.9.9.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.9.6.0.8.0.0.0.6.9,0.9.¢..09.08.0

1'010.0.0.0.9.9:0.0.9:0.0.0.0.000.0.0.008090.98800.0
10.0.0:0.0.00.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.00.00.6:000999.9.6994$0690.0
PO 0. 8.0.0.0.0.9.9.9.90.0.0.0.6.0.0.00.000.00.9.9.90.0886.080

U AXA AKX AL AN AR T ARLEAX A7 R K KA KA LA KKKK
MATT DRV OO0 0000 00.0:9.0.0,0.9.008.0.6:0.0.9.0.96.0.0.0.8.694¢
VEG S0G00.0.90.0.0.0590900000.09.9.0.00000090.909.99
PR
OO VR GOV 0.0.0.6.0.0.0.00000800008.85.00080$0600.000

004
.000000
80808600
PO TOLVVE DSD.0.00.0.0.0.0.9.0:0.0900.6.60
PP PP 00000000 0IIIVEPP V0080.00.0000080088850660000
OV
00.60.00886000008:
0.60.0000OII
IPN
OO0
00000000 POPIII

Building Backbone Cabling Design
This chapter contains information for design of indoor building backbone (intrabuilding) cabling. It includes recommendations, procedures, and worksheets to:
u

Select building backbone cable routing methods.

Define cable and connector requirements.

This chapter also provides instructions on how to create a bills of material
(BOM) for all of the building backbone’s component requirements.
Each building backbone subsystem has the following components:
s

An intermediate distribution frame (IDF) - the connection point between the
building and campus backbone cables.

The building hackbone cables - the cable between the IDF and the building’s
horizontal distribution ‘rames (HDFs).

The support hardware for routing the cables.

Figure 8-1 illustrates the building backbone components.

Figure 8-1:

Building Backbone Distribution Subsystem

- RN

Building

Backbone

>I Cables

IDFEquipment
Room
LKG~—3185—80A

8-2

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

8.1 Required Documents

The following documents are used during the design process:
u

Floor plans - Updated during the design process to show the existing or
planned locations of all IDFs and all indoor IDF-to-HDF cable routing methods.

The identifier worksheets filled in during the labeling procedure in Chapter 4,
Section 4.6.

The Building Backbn:

Infar—_ .. on Worksheet filled in during the site sur-

vey from the DECcon. .cc. System Requirements Evaluation Workbook.

BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual - for reference
when designing the cable routing.

NEC and local building codes - for reference during the design process.

8.2 Defining Component Locations

The exact existing or planned locations of the IDF and HDFs in a buiiding are
very important to the design of the building backbone subsystems. Therefor:,
check to see that each existing or planned IDF is clearly marked on the : noi

plans for each building. If not, update the floor plans by adding the missing 1DF
locations.
NOTE

The IDF's are identified on the floor plans by their identifier values. These values were defined during the distribution frame identifier process (Chapter 4) and recorded
in the Backbone Identifier Worksheets.

Building Backbone Cabling Design

8-3

8.3 Design Process Overview

The building backbone design process iz done on a subsystem-by-subsystem ba-

sis. The result of each subsystem design is a worksheet set that defines the subsystem's cable routing, cable, and connector requirements as follows:
u»

Building Backbone Cable Routing Worksheet (Figure 8—4) - defines the in-

door cable routing methods and any needed hardware.
s

Building Backbone Cable Worksheet (Figure 8-5) - defines the indoor cable
and connector requirements.

Building Backbone BOM Worksheet (Figure 8-6) - provides a bill OF material for the components.

In addition, site and floor plans are updated during the design process.
Figure 8-2 provides a flow chart overview of the building backbone design process.

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 8—2:

Building Backbone Design Flow Chart

Are
Cable
Routing Methods
Defined
?

Are

Cables
Defined
?

Are
BOMs
Created
?

Go to Section 8.4 and define
the building backbone cable
routing methods.

Go to Section 8.5 and define
the building cables.

Go to Seciion 8.6 and fill in
the BOM worksheets.

Yes

Go to Chapter 9 and perform
the Campus Backbone
Cabling Design.

LKG-3653—89i

Building Backbone Cabling Design

8.4 Defining Building Backbone Cable Routing Methods
During this phase of the design:

Select the routing method for each indoor backbone cable.

Fill in a Horizontal Wiring Cable Routing Worksheet (Figure 7-5) for each
subsystem to:

— Define all indoor routing methods for the cables.
— Identify each cable that uses each defined method.

— Identify any support components needed for the routing methods.
NOTE

The procedures, gu..
., and worksheets in this section, in conjunction with the campus backbone cabling
design (Chapter 9), can be used to design indoor building backbone cable routing methods and cable routing of
indoor MDF-to-IDF links.

8.4.1 Selecting Building Backbone Cable Routing Methods
This section provides descriptions of the:
s

Overall process for determining each building backbone cable routing requirements.

e«

The Digital-recommended building backbone cable routing methods.
NOTE

Cable routing considerations are described in Chapter 2,
Section 2.4.1.4. Review those guidelines before designing
any cable routing.

8.4.1.1 Building Backborie Cable Routing Methods Selection Process
During this phase of the design:

Refer to the floor plans and the backbone information worksheets from the
DECconnect System Requirements Evaluation Workbook or visually inspect

the building to see if a routing method exists that the cable segment can
use.

8-6

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

If a routing method exists, verify that there is enough room for running new

cable using that method's hardware.
For example, if existing conduit is selected, make sure there is enough room
in the conduit to pull in an inner duct. This inner duct is required for isolating the link's fiber optic cable from other cables in the conduit. If there is
room, indicate on the building floor plan that inner duct is needed. If there
is no room, design a new conduit run for the link, or select another routing
method.

If no routing method exists, or existing methods cannot be used:

— Refer to the building’s floor plans or visit the site to identify any obstacles that can affect the cable routing.
NOTE

A visit to the building with the cable installation
contractor is recommended. The contractor can point
out issues that can affect the selection of the routing
methods, issues which are not readily apparent.

— Review the routing methods descriptions in Section 8.4.1.2.
— Mark the floor plans to show the method, as well as to identify any
hardware that is needed and where it is needed (such as the location

of sleeves or cable trays).

8.4.1.2 Building Backbone Cable Routing Methods

Digital recommends the sleeve cable routing method (Figure 8-3) for vertical
backbone cable runs and the above-ceiling cable tray method for horizontal backbone cables. This section provides a brief description of the sleeve method only.
The above-ceiling cable tray method is described in Chapter 7, Section 7.5.1.2.

Other types of vertical and horizontal building backbone cable routing methods
are described in the BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, as
are the Digital-recommended methods (sleeve and above-ceiling cable trays).
Sleeve

Used in vertically aligned riser shaft systems, sleeves are short lengths of conduit, usually made of rigid metal pipe. The sleeves are placed in the concrete
floor as the concrete is being poured, and project up to 10.16 centimeters (4
inches) above the floor. This above-the-floor projection allows protection against
water spilling into the riser shaft openings.

Building Backbone Cabiing Design

8-7

Figure 8-3:

Bullding Backbone Cable Routing

/—-—Wol| Strap

Cable Tied
to Steel
Support Strand

Sleeves
LKG-3568-89A

Sleeve systems, which are easy to firestop, usually include a steel support strand
that runs through the vertically aligned riser shaft and sleeves. The support
strand is bolted to a wall on each floor with a metal strap. The fiber optic cables
are tied to the support strand using cable ties.

8-8

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

8.4.2 Cable Routing Worksheet

This section provides instructions for the Building Backbone Cable Routing

Worksheet (Figure 8—4). Photocopy and fill in a worksheet to define a subsystem'’s routing methods und hardware requirements.
NOTE

Consult with the cable routing hardware vendor or contractor to solve any unique requirements not covered in
this chapter.
Section | Project Identification

Identify the project, worksheet page number, designer, and date.
Section Il Subsystem ldentification

Identify the subsystem by its distribution frame identifier.
Section Il Cable Routing Methods Descripilons

Describe each type of routing method to be used, its status (existing or planned),
and the identifiers for the cables that use the method.
NOTE

If only one method is used, list that method and its sta-

tus, while the cable identifier entry should state "AllL"
Section iV Component Requirements

Describe any hardware needed for the routing methods (such as racks, conduits,
or inner duct), and the quantity of each listed item.
Section V Comments

Describe any special issues concerning any of the cable routing methods.

Building Backbone Cabling Design

8-9

Figure 8—4:

Building Backbone Cable Routing Worksheet

|. Project ldentification:

Project *

Page

Designer:

Date:

Il. Subsystem Description:
Distribution Frame ldentifier:

ill. Cable Routing Method Descriptions:
Routing

Method

Status

Cabile Identifiers

V. Component Requirements:
Item

Quantity

V. Comments:

LKG-3654-801

8-10

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

8.5 Defining Cables
The backbone concept diagram identifies some of the cable requirements for each
building backbone link:
Fiber type ( multimode or single-mode)
s

Fiber count

Fiber size

Estimated cable lengths

The cable definition process consists of the following actions:
s

Define each cable’s jacket type (PVC or plenum).

Define the cable’s construction (riser or nonriser).

Verify the exact cable lengths.

Define the connector requirements for each cable.

The result of the process is a Building Backbone Cable Worksheet that defines a
single subsystem’s cable and connector requirements, with the process repeated
for each one of the site's subsystems that have building backbone cable requirements.

8.5.1 Cable Jackets

Each cable can have either a PVC jacket or a plenum jacket. The type of jacket
depends on whether the cable runs through environmental (plenum-jacketed cable) or only nonenvironmental airspace (PVC-jacketed cable).
NOTE

Information on environmental and nonenvironmental

airspace is given in Appendix F.
8.5.2 Cable Construction

Digital supports using only heavy-duty tight-buffered cable in vertical building
backbone cable runs. For horizontal building backbone cables, Digital recommends using heavy-duty cable, and supports the use of light-duty cable in short
horizontal runs.

Building Backbene Cabling Design

8-11

8.5.3 Cable Lengths

During the backbone concept diagram process (Chapter 3), estimated cable

length values were defined and recorded on the diagrams. Each of the IDF-toHDF cable lengths must be reverified as actually being under the 500-meter
(1640-foot) maximum length, including the cable slack of 9.0 meters (29.5 feet).
The overall campus and building backbone cable (MDF-to-IDF-to-HDF) must be
verified as being under the 2000-meter (6560-foot) maximum, including all cable

slack.

The cable length verification is done when filling in the cable worksheets (Section 8.5.4)
by actually going to the site, or by using the to-scale floor plans and figuring out
how much cable is needed for each link, as follows:
s

Determine how much cable is required to go from the IDF to the HDF using

the selected cable routing method.
s

For cable slack and connector termination requirements, add 9.0 meters

(29.5 feet) to the cable length (4.5 meters (14.8 feet) for each end of the cable).
=

Record the length on the cable worksheet.

Check the length against the backbone concept diagram length. If the

length is greater than that listed in the concept diagram, make sure the:

— IDF-to HDF cable is 500 meters (1640 ieet) or less
— Total campus and building backbone cable (MDF-to-IDF-to-HDF) is
2000 meters (6560 feet) or less
— Allowable system loss for the active networking equipment can support
the corrected cable length for the IDF-to-HDF link
if the added length results in an IDF-to-HDF cable that is greater than 500 me-

ters (1640 feet), or an MDF-to-IDF-to-HDF cable that is greater than 2000 meters (6560 feet), the link must be redesigned. This requires modifying the back-

bone concept diagram (Chapter 3) and redoing the building network schematic

(Chapter 5).

8-12

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

8.5.4 Cable Worksheet

This section provides instructions for the Building Backbone Cable Worksheet

(Figure 8-5). Photocopy and fill in a worksheet to define a subsystem’s building backbone cable and connector requirements. Each worksheet compiles and
expands on the information from the backbone concept diagram.
NOTE

Consult with the cable vendor to solve any unique cable
requirements not covered in this section.
Section 1 Project Identification

Identify the project, worksheet page number, designer, and date.
Section 1l Subsystem ldentification

Identify the subsystem by distribution frame identifier.
Section Il Environmental Considerations

Describe any environmental factors that can affect the cables.
Section IV Cable Descriptions

Define the cable and connector requirements as follows:
s

Refer to the backbone concept dir gram and list each cable by its identifier,
fiber type, fiber count, and fiber size.

Define the cable jacket (plenum for environmental airspace or PVC for non-

environmental airspace).

Use the procedure in Section 8.5.3 to verify and record each cable’s length.

Refer to the subsystem’s cable routing worksheet and identify the cable

routing method that the cable uses.

Building Backbone Cabling Design

8-13

Define the cable construction (riser or nonriser).

Define the cable’s connector requirements by:

— Quantity: two connectors are needed for each fiber, one connector for
each end.
— Type: the connector type is 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type.
Section V Comments

Describe any special issues concerning the cables or connectors.

8-14

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 8-5:

Building Backbone Cable Worksheet

I. Project Identification:

Project ID:

Page _ of __

Designer:

Date:

Il.

Building Backbone Subsystem Description:

Distribution Frame Identifier:

Environmental Considerations:

Describe:

V. Cable Descriptions:

Cable

Identifier | Type

Cable

Connectors

Count | Size | Jacket | Method | Const. } Length | Quantity

Type

Comments:

LKG-3655~-8091

Building Backbone Cabling Design

8-15

8.6 Bill of Materials (BOM) Worksheet

This section provides
instructions for the Building Backbone BOM Worksheet
Photocopy and fill in a worksheet for each building backbhone sub(Figure 8-6).

system's cable, connector, and cable routing hardware r>quirements. Each BOM
worksheet is compiled from the component requirements defined in the subsystem’s building backbone cable routing and cable worksheets.
Section | Project Identitication

Identify the project, worksheet page number, designer, and date.
Section |l Subsystem identification

Identify the subsystem by its IDF identifier.
Section il Component Requirements

List each component by:

Component description (for example, 12-fiber heavy-duty plenum building
cable)

Order number (for the 12-fiber heavy-duty building cable given as an example, the number is 17-02535-01 when ordered from Digital

Quantity required (total the lengths of all the example cable to order the
cable in bulk form)

Unit price

Total price (quantity multiplied by the unit price)

Then summarize the total cost of the listed components.

8-16

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 8-6:

Bullding Backbone BOM Worksheet

1. Project Identification:

Project ID:

Page

Designer:

Date:

{i. Subsystem Identification:
IDF Identifier:
ilt. Compsnent Requirements:

tem

Number

Part

Number

Description

Quantity

Unit

Price

Total

Price

Tetal Cost:

LKG-3656-801

Building Backbone Cabling Design

8-17

VON IS EN OGN OR

SIS
TEGAGAIESIASREESEIO
NN OGO
000004

ORGSO
GO NS FGA RIS RS AOINIA NG 0508006.00.00.4
AN ORGONIIGINIIOIIIGISSHINCODCHTNEN
I GOS0 S9.54
PO

VOISO

HONNOIVNS

IO N

SN ADNSTHOID

IONON

ORISRV ENSN OSSO H

HON VOV

FR I A

A R

GBI

GG SSENG IO IO

OHED

5090094

0 095000504

NN GOG00060.00400060004

DO IIG S00800800000000808000

A B

AR A

Y,
A,

PO 000040005
0BNGHIA S
05894000004
FS00.0.00000
055005 0.00:60400006655.004

PG04S0 0000000.000808000000.004
D0.0.0.0.0.00.0.0.9.6.050.5690080000904
$9.0.0.90.00.60608.0940050806069004

$9.6.9.9.4.0.0.9.0.0.8.0.6.0.0.0.6.00064.04
1,6.8,6.0.0.9.6,6.6.0.6.0,9.0.0.9.9.0.00.4
).6.0.0.0.¢.0.4.9.0.0,9.¢.9.0.6.4.¢.64
XAXKXXXXKEXLXKXKKLX

1.9,9:0.0.9.9.9.9.0.9.6.9.¢.44
$9.9.0.9.0.9.0.9.0.4.6.64
19.0.9.9.4.6.8.9.0.0.4
},6:8.:9.6.9.9.9.04

XXXXXXX
XAAKX

XXX
X

XXX

XXXXX
XXXXXXX

AAXAXKXXX
KRXXXXXXXXX

.0.9.¢.9.9.4.9.0.9.0.9.¢4
).9.0.9.9.0.8.0.0.9.6.9.0.0.64¢

P.9.8.9.0.0.9.9.9.0.8.9.0.9.8.¢.9.4
$.9.9.9.0.9.9.9.4.6.9.0.0.9.9.6.9.0.9.¢
$.9:9.0.0.9.0.0.9.9.9.4.0.9.0.6.9.9.9.¢.9.4
h00.0.0.:0.9.0.9.0.6.0.9.6.0.8 6.0.0.0,0.9.9.4

§0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.5.0.9.0.0.8.0.9.9.9.6604
). 9:9.0.¢.0.8,9.0.9.9.0.8:0.0.0.9 ¢.9.4.0.99.09994
10.9.9.0.9.9.9.0.9.9.9.0.00.6.9.9.0.9.0.8.9.6.0.96.90
.4
},9:9.9.9.9.9.9:9.0.0.9.0:0.0.9.9.0.9.0.9.9.9.0.09.6.0.0.9
64
):0.0.9.0.6.0.0.9.9.9.0.0.0.00.0.0.0.0.6.00.0909096968
}0.9.0.0.9:6.9.0.0.90.8.9.9.9.0.9.9.9.0.09.0.0.0.0.0:4.0.0.:¢.9.¢.94
19.8.9.0:9.¢.9.9.0.9.0,0:9:9.9.0.9,0.0.5.9:06.9.0.:9.0.0.0.0.0.0.9.5.0..4
.......

19:9.9.9:0.9 505.9.:000.9.0:0 590 96500

0.0.9.0.9.0:0 ¢.9.0.0 6.

9.6.9.9:9.0.0.0:9.9.9:9.9.9.0:9.0.0.0.0,0:9.0.9.0.0.¢.0.:0.09
9.0.0.6.4

100.0:0.09.0.0.6.6.9.0.9 85.9.¢.0:0.0.9.0.00.9.00008.0.0.009

60,0604

BO80.0.0.9.0.0.069999.99.0.9.9.90.89.9.0.00.69.09.0.00.00.0.0
06009904

19:0:9.0.0.0.0.9.0.9.0.8.4.009.800.00.90080.9.90009.0000.9.09¢06004004
$9.0.0.0.0.6.0.0.0.9.9..9.0.80.0.89.0.00.006.6900000000000008089
8660

}5.0.9.9.0.9.9.0.9.0.0.0.0.6.0.0.9.9.0
966060000 8.000.9.8000.0060.6690.800084

Campus Backbone Cabling Design
This chapter provides information on designing campus backbone cabling (interbuilding). It includes recommendations, procedures, and worksheets needed
to:

Select campus backbone cable routing methods.

Define cable entrance point, splice closure, cable, and connector requirements.

Also, the chapter contains instructions on how to use the building backbone cable and cable routing information in Chapter 8 to design cable between an MDF
and IDF inside the same building, and how to create a bill of materials (BOM)
for each campus subsystem’s component requirements.

Each campus backbone subsystem has the following components:
a

A main distribution frame (MDF) - the connection point between the campus backbone cables.

The campus backbone cables - the cables between the MDF and the building’s intermediate distribution frames (IDFs).

The support hardware for routing the cables.

Figure 9-1 illustrates the campus backbone components.

Figure 9-1:

Campus Backbone Distribution Subsystem

Campus ——=

Backbone

Cable

MDF
Equipment
Room
Campus

lew—— Campus

Backbone
Cable

Backbone

Cable

LKG~3166—-89A

9-2

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

9.1 Required Documents

The following documents are used during the design process:

Floor plans - Updated during the design process to show the existing or
planned locations of all MDFs, cable entrance points, and indoor cable routing methods.

Site plars - Updated during the design process to show the existing or
planned locations of cable entrance points and outdoor cable routing methods.

The identifier worksheets filled in during the labeling procedure given in
Chapter 4, Section 4.6.

The Campus Backbone Information Worksheets filled in during the site survey from the DECconnect System Requirements Evaluation Workbook.
BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual - for reference
when designing the cable routing.

NEC and local building codes - for reference during the design process.

9.2 Defining Component Locations

The exact existing or planned locations of the MDFs, IDFs, and cable entrance
points are very important to the design of the campus backbone subsystems.
Therefore, on the floor plans for each building, check to see that each existing
or planned MDF is clearly marked. If not, update the floor plans by adding the
missing MDF locations.

NOTE

The floor plans, which were updated for IDF location
in Chapter 8, are updated for cable entrance points in
Section 9.5. The MDF is identified in the floor plans by
its identifier value. This value was defined during the
distribution frame identifier process (Chapter 4) and
recorded in the Backbone Identifier Worksheets.

Campus Backbone Cabling Design

9-3

9.3 Design Process Overview
The campus backbone design process is done on a subsystem-by-subsystem basis.
The result of each subsystem design is a completed worksheet set that defines
the subsystem’s routing, cable, and connector requirements as follows:
®

Cable Entrance Point Worksheet (Figure 9-3) - defines the cable entrance
point hardware needed, including the routing hardware needed to route ca-

bles from the entrance point to MDFs and IDFs and any hardware needed
for grounding armored cable at the entrance point.
s

Campus Backbone Cable Routing Worksheet (Figure 9-5) - defines the out-

door cable routing methods and any hardware needed for the methods.
=

Campus Backbone Cable Worksheet (Figure 9-7) - defines the outdoor cable
and connector needs.

Campus Backbone BOM Worksheet (Figure 9-8) - provides a bill of materials for all of the indoor, outdoor, and cable entrance components.

Building Backbone Cable Routing Worksheet - defines the cable routing
methods and any hardware needed for indoor MDF-to-IDF cables.

Building Backbone Cable Worksheet - defines the cable and connector needs

for any indoor MDF-to-IDF cables.
NOTE
The building backbone routing and cable worksheets
are filled in using cabling design procedures described in Chapter 8. The building backbone procedures are needed only when designing a campus
backbone subsystem that includes connections between an MDF and IDF that are in different equipment rooms within the same building.

In addition, site and building floor plans are updated during the design process
to reflect the design.

Figure 9-2 provides a flow chart overview of the campus backbone design process.

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 9-2:

Campus Backbone Design Flow Chart

Are
building
backbone
Design Issues
Known
?

Are
Cable
Entrance Points
Designed

Go to Section 9.4 and review
the designing building
backbone links description.

Go to Section 9.5 and design
the cable entrance points.

Are
Cable
Routing Methods
Defined

Go to Section 9.6 and define
the campus backbone cable
routing methods.

Are
Splice
Closures
Defined

Go to Section 8.7 and define
the splice closures.

LKG-3657-89!

Figure 9-2 Cont’d on next page

Campus Backbone Cabling Design

Figure 9-2(Cont.):

Campus Backbone Design Fiow Chart

Go to Section 9.8 and define

the campus backbone cables.

Are

Go 1o Section 9.9 and fill

BOMs
Created
?

in the BOM worksheets.

Yes

Go to Chapter 10 and perform
the distribution frame design.

End
LKG-3658-881

9-6

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

9.4 Designing Building Backbone Links

For most campus backbone subsystems, all of the MDF-to-IDF cables are outdoor

(interbuilding) cabling. The MDF and the IDF that are in the same building will
usually be located in the same equipment room where they can connect through
patch cables. However, in some cases, such as when upgrading a building that
ha3s existing separate IDF and MDF equipment rooms, the MDF-to-IDF cable is
designed using building backbone cable routing and cable procedures.
When designing a campus backbone subsystem that has an indoor MDF-to-IDF
cable, the procedures provided in Chapter 8 for building backbone cables are
used, as follows:

The building backbone cable routing section (Section 8.4) — for filling in a
Building Backbone Cable Routing Worksheet that defines the indoor cable
routing methods and hardware needed for the methods.

The building backbone cable section (Section 8.5) - for filling in a Building
Backbone Cable Worksheet that defines the indoor cable and connector requirements.

9.5 Designing Cable Entrance Points

The cable entrance point is an area that provides space for the cables coming

into a building. Ideally, it is located at an MDF or IDF equipment room. When

the cable entrance point is not part of an equipment room, it is usually located
in an enclosed basemen* ~oom or wall space.
NOTE

If fiber optic cable containing any metallic elements
is used in the campus backbone cable, the National
Electrical Code (NEC) requires that the armored portion of the cable be grounded at the building entrance
point. This grounding helps protect the building against
electrical surges. After the outdoor cables are designed
using the procedures in Section 9.8, indicate on the site
plans any cable entrance points that require grounding of
metallic cable elements.

For more information on grounding requirements, and on
cable entrance points, see the BICSI Telecommunications
Distribution Methods Manual.

Campus Backbone Cabling Design

9.5.1 Cable Entrance Point Design Process

Information on cable entrance design is recorded on a worksheet (Figure 9-3),
one for each building's cable entrance point. Each worksheet defines:
s

Any hardware needed for the cable entrance point, including hardware
needed to ground metallic cable elements.

Any hardware needed for routing the cable from the entrance point to the
distribution frame where the cable terminates.

9.5.2 Modifying Floor Plans for Cable Entrance Point Design
Ideally, the cable entrance point is inside the building’s MDF or IDF equipment
room. In this case, the cable routing methods are designed during the distribution frame design process described in Chapter 10. When the entrance point is
not in the equipment room where the MDF or IDF is located, mark each building’s floor plans to show:
s

Hardware needed at the cable entrance point (such as conduit, inner duct,
or grounding hardware).

The routing method the cable uses to go from the entrance point to the

equipr

! room, and any hardware needed and where it is needed.

9.5.2.1 Cable Entrance Point Requirements
Each cable entrance point is essentially a hole in the building through which the
campus backbone cable enters 1..... *he outside. The minimum requirements for
any entrance point are:

Existing conduit - protective encasement that provides the cable entrance
point structure

Inner duct - to isolate the campus backbone cable fram any cables that are

in the conduit {or will be in the conduit)
®#

Grounding hardware - for grounding metallic cable elements

In some cases, the cable entrance point needs to be constructed, either because

none currently exists, or an existing cable entrance cannot be used. These cases
require defining the entrance point construction and ordering the construction
material, including the conduit and inner duct.

9-8

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

NOTE

Consult with the cable installation contractor to determine the exact materials needed for grounding requirements or for constructing a new cable entrance point.

9.5.2.2 Entrance Point Cable Routing Methods

Digital does not support the use of transition components (splics ¢r interconnect
hardware) at cable entrance points. These components, which are used to connect indoor-type cable from the distribution frame to the outdoor-type campus
backbone cable at the entrance point, are costly in terms of component costs,
splice costs, and optical budget costs.
Digital recommends the distribution frame be located at the entrance point.

When this is not possible, route all campus backbone cables as follows:
s

When the distribution frame is more than 15 meters (50 feet) from the cable
entrance. In accordance with NEC requirements, any outdoor-type (loosetube or slotted-core) cable without markings (see Section F.2, Appendix F)
must be routed to the distribution frame in a metal enclosure. Digital recommends using metal conduit with inner duct.

In accordance with NEC requirements, when the distribution frame is less

than 15 meters (50 feet) from the cable entrance, no special cable routing
method is required.

Campus Backbone Cabling Design

9-9

9.5.3 Cable Entrance Point Worksheet

This section provides instructions for filling in the Cable Entrance Point Worksheet
(Figure 9-3). Photocopy and fill in a worksheet to define each building’s cable

entrance and related cable routing hardware requirements.
Section | Project identification

Identify the project, worksheet page nuiuber, designer, and date.
Section II Cable Entrance Point Location

Identify the cable entrance point building number. Use the actual building number and not an IDF or MDF identifier.
Section I| Cable Entrance Point Component Requirements

List all of the hardware and other material needed for the cable entrance point,
as well as material needed to ground metallic cable elements.
NOTE

Grounding material requirements usually are added to
the worksheet after the campus backbone cables are defined in Section 9.8. These requirements are identified
after the cables that use the cable entrance point are defined.

Section IV Cable Routing Component Requirements

List all of the hardware needed to route the cables from the entrance point to
the distribution frames where the cables terminate.
Section V Comments

Define any special issues affecting the entrance point of the cable routing methods associated with it.

9-10

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 9-3:

Cable Entrance Point Worksheet

i. Project Identification:
Project ID:

Page

Designer:

Date:

{l. Cable Entrance Point Location:
Building Number:

ill. Cable Entrance Point Component Requirements:

Item

Quantity

IV. Cable Rout 1g Component Requirements:

Item

Quantity

V. Comments:

£XG-3650--801

Campus Backbone Cabling Design

9-11

9.6 Defining Campus Backbone Cable Routing Methods
During this phase of the design:
s

Select the routing method to be used for each outdoor cable segment.
NOTE

Although Digital recommends thet each campus backbone cable use only buried conduit as the routing method,
some cables may require two or more routing methods. A
description of multiple-segment links is in this secticn.
s

fill in a Campus Backbone Cable Routing Worksheet (Figure 9-5) for each
subsystem to:

— Define all outdoor routing methods for the cables.
— Identify each cable that uses each defined method.
— Identify any support components needed for the routing methods.
9.5.1 Selecting Cable Routing Methods

This secticn provides descriptions of the:
s

Overall process for determining each campus b ickbone cable’s routing requirements.

The Digital-recommended campus backbone cable routing meth.d.

NOTE

Cable routing considerations are desc-ibed in Chapter 2,
Section 2.4.1.4. Review those guidelines before designing
any cable routing.

9-12

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

9.6.1.1 Cable Routing Methods Selection Process
During this phase of the design:
=

Refer to the site plans and to the DECconnect System Requirements Evaluation
Workbook backbone information worksheets.

If a routing method exists, verify that there is enough room to run new cable using that method’s hardware.

For example, if existing conduit is selected, make sure that there is enough
room in the conduit to pull in an inner duct. This inner duct is required
for isolating the link’s fiber optic cable irom other cables in the conduit. If
there is room, indicate on the site plan that inner duct is needed. If there
is no room, design a new conduit run for the link, or select another routing
method.

If no routing method exists, or existing methods cannot be used:

— Refer to the site plans or visit the site to identify any obstacles that can
affect the cable routing.
NOTE

Visiting the site with the cable installation contractor is recommended. The countractor can point out

issues that affect the selection of the routing methods.

— Review the routing methods descriptions in Section 9.6.1.3.
— Mark the site plans to show the method, as well as to identify any
hardware needed and where it is needed (such as the location of conduit).

Campus Backbone Cabling Design

9-13

9.6.1.2 Multiple-Segment Links

Some campus backbone links can be designed using two or more routing methods. For example, using existing aerial poles to bridge a stream and then using
conduit to go from the poles to the buildings.

When designing multiple-segment links, treat each of the routing methods in the
link as if it were a completely separate cable link as follows:
s

Different types of cable are required for different types of campus backbone

cable routing methods, as the cable stress and environmental factors that
affect the cables are different for each method.
s

Assign the same basic cable identifier to each type of cable in the link, but
use a letter after each segment cable’s identifier code to differentiate that
cable from the other segment cables.
NOTE

The procedure for assigning an identifier to cables is provided in Chapter 4, Section 4.6.2.2.
s

Determine where the different cable construction types will be spliced together (cable-segment junctions) and fill in a Splice Description Worksheets

(Figure 4-21) for each of the splice closures to be used at the cable-segment
junctions.

NOTE

Procedures for defining the splice closures needed when
using multiple-segment links are provided in Section 9.7.
Procedures for filling in the Splice Description Worksheet

(Figure 4-21) that the closures need are provided in
Chapter 4, Section 4.6.3.

9-14

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

9.6.1.3 Cable Routing Methods

Digital recommends using buried conduit as the campus backbone cable routing
method. This section provides a brief description of the buried conduit method.
Refer to the BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual for additional details on direct buried conduit and for other types of campus backbone
cable routing methods.
Burled Conduilt Method

The buried conduit method is an underground system of conduit and utility covers that interconnects the site’s buildings.
The conduit is made of corrosion-resistant material and provides a routing
method that gives maximum mechanical protection to the campus backbone
cables. In addition, the fact that the conduit is buried helps preserve the site'’s
appearunce.

When using the buried conduit method, it is important to remember that:
s

The conduit’s location, as well as the location of any utility hole covers,
must be planned well in advance of the construction start date to avoid unnecessary disruption of the completed installation.

The local codes provide strict guidelines that govern the placement of the
buried conduit.

Figure 9—4 illustrates the buried conduit routing method.

Campus Backbone Cabling Design

9-15

Figure 9-4:

Buried Condult Routing Method

Buried
Conduit

LKG-3565—-89A

9-16

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

9.6.2 Cable Routing Worksheet

This section provides instructions for the Campus Backbone Cable Routing

Worksheet (Figure 9-5). Photocopy and fill in the worksheet to define a subsystem's routing methods and hardware requirements.
NOTE

Consult with the cable routing hardware vendor or contractor to solve any unique requirements not covered in
this chapter.
Section | Project Identification

Identify the project, worksheet page number, designer, and date.
Section |l Subsystem ldentification

Identify the subsystem by its distribution frame identifier.
Section lll Cable Routing Methods Descriptions

Describe each type of routing method to be used, its status (existing or planned),
and the identifiers for the cables that use the method.
NOTE

‘

If only one method is used, list that method and its sta-

tus, while the cable identifier entry should state "All."
Section IV Component Requirements

Describe any hardware needed for the routing methods (such as utility hole covers, conduit, or inner duct), and the quantity of each listed item.
Section V Comments

Describe any special issues concerning any of the cable routing methods.

Campus Backbone Cabling Design

9-17

Figure 9-5:

Campus Backbone Cable Routing Worksheet

I. Project Identification:

Project ID:

Page

Dasigner;

Date:

Il. Subsystem Description:

Distribution Frame Identifier:
I11. Cable Routing Method Descriptions:
Routing

Method

Status

Cable Identifiers

V. Component Requirements:

Item

Quantity

V. Comments:

LKG-3680-80]

9-18

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

9.7 Detining Splice Closures
Digital recommends that the campus backbone cables be complete, nonspliced
cables from end-to-end whenever possible. However, outdoor splicing, and, therefore, splice closures, may be needed, as follows:
w

To splice cables used in long distance intersite links that are greater than
2000 meters (6560 feet).

At the transition between different types of cable used in a multiple-segment

link. For example, aerial cable splicing to direct-buried canle.
s

At the breakout point of a breakout link.

9.7.1 Splice Closure Design Process
During this phase of the design:
=

Make sure that for each of the outdcor splice closures:

— The splice closure has an identifier.

— The site plans show the location of each splice closure and that closure’s identifier.

— A Splice Definition Worksheet exists for the closure.
NOTE

Procedures for assigning splice closure identifiers and filling in the Splice Definition Worksheet are provided in
Chapter 4, Section 4.6.3.
s

Fill in a Splice Closure Worksheet (Figure 9-6) for the subsystem to:

— Identify each splice closure by its identifier.
— Define the environmental and cable routing factors that can affect each
closure.

— Define the type of cover each closure needs.

Campus Backbone Cabling Design

g9-19

9.7.2 Splice Closure Hardware

The splice closure must meet the following functional requirements:
e

Can splice up to four cables, two cables at each end of the closure.

Accommodates up to 144 individual, fiber-to-fiber mechanical splices, or 192

individual, fiber-to-fiber fusion splices.
NOTE

Digital offers a fiber transition closure kit (22-00493-01)
for outdoor splice closure functions. However, different
covers are required for the closure, depending on what
environmental factors the cover must protect against.

These covers are not available directly from Digital.
Chapter 11 provides a description of the fiber transition
closure kit that is available. Chapter 11 also provides
a list of auxiliary items available from other sources,
and their part numbers. The closure covers are listed in
Chapter 11.

9.7.3 Splice Closure Worksheet

This section provides instructions for filling in the Splice Closure Worksheet
(Figure 9-6). Photocopy and fill in the worksheet.
Section | Project Identification

Identify the project, worksheet page number, designer, and date.
Section Il Cable Identifier

List the MDF to IDF cable identifier.
Section il Environmental Considerations

List by number all of the environmental considerations that can affect the splice
closures defined in the worksheet.
Section IV Splice Closure Descriptions

List each splice closure by its identifier and:

Use the numbers assigned to the environmental factors listed in Section 111
to identify the factors that can affect the closure.

9-20

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Define the type of cover the closure needs based cn the environmental fac-

tors (for example, watertight).
Section V Comments

Describe any special issues concerning the splice closures, including any additional hardware needed by a splice enclosure.
NOTE

Additional splice closure hardware is listed in the auxilliary list in Chapter 11.

Campus Backbone Cabling Design

9-21

Figure 9-6:

Splice Closure Worksheet

Project ldentification:

Project ID: _

Page

Designer:

Date:

Il. Cable ldentifier:
MDF to IDF Cable identifier:
il. Environmental Considerations:
1.

10.

IV. Splice Closure Descriptions:

Closure
Identifier

Environmental
Factors

‘

Cover Type

Closure
Identifier

Environmental
Factors

Cover Type

V. Comments:

LKG—-3661-89)

9-22

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

9.8 Defining Cables

The backbone concept diagram identifies some of the cable requirements for each
campus backbone link:
s

Fiber ( multimode, single-mode, or mixed types)

Fiber count

Fiber size

Estimated cable lengths

The cable definition process consists of the following actions:
s

Define the cable’s construction (loose-tube, slotted-core, or tight-buffered).

Verify the exact cable lengths.

Define the connector requirements for each cable.

The result of the process is a completed Campus Backbone Cable Worksheet
(Figure 9-7) that defines all of the cable and connector requirements for all campus backbone cables.

9.8.1 Cable Construction
Outdoor cables come in two basic types of construction:
s

Loose-tube

Slotted-core

For a description of both types of outdoor cable construction, see the outdoor cable descriptions in Chapter 2.

Digital does not recommend the use of indoor cables (tight-buffered) in campus
backbone links except in very limited situations where the cable will never be
exposed to outdoor cable stress or environmental factors. For example, tightbuffered cable can be used in an campus backbone link when the cable is run
through a pedestrian tunnel that joins the buildings.

Campus Backbone Cabling Design

9-23

NOTE

When using indoor (tight-buffered) cable, the cable jacket

type must also be included in the cable construction entry
in the Campus Backbone Cable Worksheet described in
Section 9.8.3. The entry for cable that passes through

environmental airspace could read indoor-plenum or
buffered-plenum, while nonenvironmental airspace cable
could be listed as indoor-PVC or buffered-PVC.
9.8.2 Cable Lengths

During the backbone concept diagram process (Chapter 3), estimated cable
length values were defined and recorded on the diagrams. Each of the overall
MDF-to-IDF-to-HDF cable lengths must be verified as actually being under the
2000-meter (6560-foot) maximum for the campus and building backbone cable.
Verify the calile length when filling in the Campus Backbone Cable Worksheets
(Figure 9-7) at the actual site, or by using the to-scale floor plans. Compute how

much cable is needed for each link as follows:
w

Determine how much cable is required to go from the MDF to the IDF using

the selected cable routing method.
s

For cable slack and connector termination requirements, add 9.0 meters

(29.5 feet) to the cable length, 4.5 neters (14.8 feet) for each end of the cable.
®#

Record the length on the cable worksheet.

Check the length against the backbone concept diagram length and, if the

length is greater than that listed in the concept diagram, make sure the
total campus and building backbone cable (MDF-to-IDF-to-HDF) is 2000
meters (6560 feet) or less, and that the allowable system loss for the active
networking equipment can support the longer MDF-to-IDF cable.
If the added length results in an overall MDF-to-IDF-to-HDF cable that is

greater than 2000 meters (6560 feet), the link rmust be redesigned. This requires
medifying the backbone concept diagram (Chapter 3) and redoing the campus

network schematic (Chapter 5).

9-24

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

9.8.3 Campus Backbone Cable Worksheet

This section provides instructions for the Campus Backbhae 0.0+ Worksheet

(Figure 9-7). Photocupy and fill in a worksheet to define the v.:r pus backbone

cable and connector requirements. Each worksheet compiles and sxpands on the
information from the backbone concept diagram.
NOTE

Consult with the cable vendor to solve any unique cable
requirements not covered in this section.
Section | Project Identification

Identify the project, worksheet page number, designer, and date.
Section Il Subsystem Identification

Identify the subsystem by its distribution frame identifier.
Section ill Environmental Considerations

List by number all of the environmental factors that can affect any of the subsystem’s campus backbone cables (such as exposure to temperature extremes,
water, acid soil, or ice and snow loads).
Section IV Cable Descriptions

Define the cable and connector requirements as follows:
=

Refer to the backhone concept diagrar: and list each cable by its identifier,
fiber type, fiber coun(, and fiber size.

Use the procedure in Section 9.8.2 to verify and record each cable’s length.

Refer to the Cable Routing Worksheet (Figure 9-5) and identify the cable
roiting method the cable uses.

Defire the cable construction (for exa:nple, loose-tube, slotted-core, indoorPVC, or indoor-plenum).

Define the cable’s connector needs by:

— Quantity: two connectors for each fiber when the fiber terminates at

both ends at a distribution frame, one connector for each fiber in a
cable that is spliced at one end, and no connectcrs for a cable that is
spliced at both ends.

Campus Backbone Cabling Design

9-25

— Type: the connector type is 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type.
Section V Comments

Describe any special issues concerning the cables vr connectors.

9-26

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 9-7:

Campus Backbone Cable Worksheet

I. Project ldentification:

Page

Designer:

Date:

Il. Subsystem Description:

Distribution Frame |dentifier:
ili. Environmental Considerations:

10.

IV. Cable Descriptions:

| Type | Count|

Size | Factors

Method | Construction]

Connectors

Length | Quantity | Type

V. Comments:

LK/ +-3662-89]

Campus Backbone Cabling Design

9-27

9.9 Bill of Materials (BOM) Worksheet

Thie section provides instructions for the Campus Backbone BOM Worksheet

(Figure 9-8). Photocopy and fill in a worksheet to define each campus backbone
subsystem's cable, connector, cable entrance point, and cable routing hardware
requirements. Each BOM worksheet is compiled from the component requirements defined in the subsystem’s campus and building backbone cable routing,
cable, and cable entrance worksheets.

‘

Sectlon | Project Identification

Identify the project, worksheet page number, designer, and date.
Section |l Subsystem identification

Identify the subsystem by its MDF identifier.
Section Il Component Requirements

List each component by:
s

Component description (for example, 24-fiber slotted-core cable)

Order number (list the vendor’s part number for the component)

Quantity needed (for exampie, for cable, total the lengths of all the specific

type of cable needed to order the cable in bulk form)
=

Unit price

Total price (quantity multiplied by the unit price)

Then summarize the total cost of the listed components.

9-28

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 9-8:

Campus Backbone BOM Worksheet

1. Project Identification:

Project ID:

Page

Designer:

Date:

Il. Subsystem Identification:
MDF Identifier:
lil. Cornponent Requirements:

item
Number

Part
Number

Description

Quantity

Unit
Price

Total
Price

Total Cost:
LKG-3663-891

Campus Backbone Cabling Design

9-29

S0P 0COIOPPODPO 00000000000850.0.080000808000088.0081
A KKLK
KKK XXX AKXEX
RXH
KK AKX XX
KXK
XX KX XXX XXX
XXXAAX
XAXKXK
000009
69.6.00.68
.60.00.908
DOV TTOIVEO VOO0V 0.0.0.8.00
OIS OP VTV 0.0:0.9.0.0.9.60.8.0.5.0.90.99.5.08.6.000.80.88089004
XXKXKAHAXKX XXX KK XXX KK AKX AR KKK KKK HKXKIAERLAXR?
OO S 009 000.0.00.00.0.0.0.0.0.06000088.88880900888804

FOP ORI 0000.0:90.9.6.6.0.0.08660688806000000004
1O 00.00:000000008800006000.08800880884004
PO 0.00.0.000.0.0.0.0.0.080090.00¢065806000¢
000000 0.0.0.0.00.0.8.5.9.0.6.0.0.0.0.0 658000064
HOPP00.0008.9.0.0.¢.6.0.0.0.00.00009088600
NO00.00.0.0.0.0.0.418.8.8.69.0.0.06.6.066.0000.4
IO0.0.0.0,0.0.0.0.8.0.0.0.0.0.0.9.09.80.0.0¢94
)6.0.8:016:0.61¢.0.0.0.0.9.0.0,9.0.5.0,6.0.0,0.0.¢
D9:0.0.9.0.0.6.0.0.0.6.6.0.00.90¢8¢9.44
¢4
869890.0
110.9:0.0.6.0.0.0.6:6.0.6.

KEXXXXXXXXXXKAKKXKX
XXX AAKXKXXXAXKXKKXX
XXXXXKXXXXAXXKXKX

AAAXXKXKKXKKXX

XX XXXXXXKXX
XXXXXXXXX

XAKXXKXX
AXXXX
XXX
X

XXX
XXXXX

KAXXKKX

KXAXXXXXXK

h0.0.9.9,9.6.9.9.6.04

HAXKAAXXXKXAKXK

).8.0.9.0.6.:0.0.9,9.0.0.0.¢.94
64
).0.0.0.0.4.0:9.6.9.8.986,00

}.9.0.0.6.0.0.0.9.0.8.06.0.6.8.609

£.9.9.0.6.0.6.69.0.0.9.0.60.66.0.60.9.4

):0.0.0.0.6.0.0.0.9.9.9.0.0909859.904¢4

1. 0.9.0.0.0:0.0.0.0.0:9.9.6:0.9.9.9.9.9.9646.004

KAXLX AT AL LA LT LA LA LA

AT AKALY,

L
AT ALK LKL AXARLKAKAK
A LA AXAL
XAAX
A XK XAKL K LAAKLK

NANKK KA LK AL L LAY A

1:0.0.0.6.0.0. 0900090000 800.9:0.000080599804
AL ARA AL A A LA ARKALAAKR

ARRARXR R AKX A LKA

D09:9.9,0.8

KXAKKK A E A ALY A AL L LA
A

A AT AL LN LAKRE,

RSV
NN 9995094

CE A

AL A

N OGO GOSN OOV VIONIP00.6044

F00:0/0. 0.0V VOV GN VYO VIVI IOV

9.8805.9004

0
0600594
680000
00NV INI90.800880
RO 000 V0N 000.90.000.0
0¢C
000904
0.08.99900
0000000
000000000
0000.08
ROD.0.0.0.0.0.

PO 0.000.09000.00.990006800080000000005008000.068080088
PO00.00900.0000006.0008000060060.0000000060689996908080.0¢

- Distribution Frame Design
This chapter provides recommendations and procedures for defining each of the
structured wiring cable plant distribution frame’s:
Passive fiber optic cable plant components
Equipment room cable routing requirements
Passive cable plant and active equipment connections
Physical location within the equipment room

General equipment room and equipment cabinet electrical, thermal, and
acoustic requirements

The chapter also provides procedures for creating diagrains, connection maps,
and distribution frame bill of materials (BOMs).
The five types of distribution frames are:

Main distribution frame (MDF). A part of the campus backbone subsystem.
It contains the active and passive components that connect buildings together. It can also contain the components used to connect other areas on
a campus or provide connections with remote buildings.
Intermediate distribution frame (IDF). A part of the building backbone subsystem. It contains the active and passive components that connect the
building backbone cables to the campus backbone cables. The building backbone cables connect the building’s floors to the IDF and the campus backbone cables connect the IDFs to the MDF.

Horizontal distribution frame (HDF). A part of the horizontal wiring subsys-

tem. It contains the active and passive components that connect the horizontal wiring cables to the IDF through the building backbone cable.
s

Satellite distribution frame (SDF). It is located in an equipment room and

contains crossconnect hardware or passive components used to interconnect
active networking equipment to the horizontal wiring between an HDF and
wallboxes.
m

Office distribution frame (ODF). An enclosed, free-standing equipment cab-

inet that contains crossconnect hardware or passive components used to interconnect active networking equipment to the horizontal wiring between an
HDF and wallboxes.
®

Remote wall distribution frame (RWDF). A small wall-mounted cabinet. It

is a passive-only component used to interconnect wallbox cables to an HDF
cable.

Figure 10-1 shows where distribution frames occur in the structured wiring cable plant.

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 10-1:

Distribution Frame Locations

Horizontal

Wiring
Cable

RWDF

SDF

ODF

~—— Campus

~L-

Bac«bone
Cable
-7~

Building

Backbone
Cables

'DF Equipment
Room

Campus

Bockbone\
Cables

~a,

MDF Equipment
Reoom

LKG-3553—B9A

Distribution Frame Design

10.1 Required Documents

The following documents are used during the design process:

Floor plans - Updated during the distribution subsystem cabling design processes (Chapters 6 through 9) to show the existing or planned location of all
distribution frames.

Network schematic diagrams - identify the active and passive equipment for

each distribution frame when applications are known. For unknown applications only passive equipment is identified for each distribution frame.
s

Concept diagrams - identify the cable links between each distribution frame,
including the number of cables and each cable’s fiber count.

Identifier worksheets filled in during the labeling p. ~cedure in Chapter 4,
Section 4.6.

Copies of the equipment room and computer/common equipment room worksheets from the DECconnect System Requirements Evaluation Workbook’s
filled in during the site survey.

BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual - for reference information on equipment rooms.

NEC and local building codes - for reference during the design process.

10.2 Design Process Overview

The distribution frame design process creates layout diagrams, connection worksheets, connection label maps, and a BOM worksheet for each distribution frame
as follows:
s

Distribution frame layout diagram - defines the passive and active components that make up the distribution frame and the arrangement of the
components within the mounting racks.

Footprint diagram - defines the location of the mounting racks within equipment rooms, or in office (ODF) or wall areas (RWDF').

Equipmert room routing diagram - defines how cables route to and from
equipment room distribution frame components.

104

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Distribution subsystem connection worksheet - fill out to provide a map
for the installer to connect the fibers at each of the distribution subsystem
patch panels to other distribution subsystem patch panels. It alsc helps pro-

vide information to create the panel conrection label map.
s

Panel connection label maps - provide labeling information on the location of

a far end connection of a fiber pair.
s

Crossconnect/interconnect maps - define how patch cables connect to the

patch panels to provide the administration crossconnect and interconnect
points at the distribution frame.
=

BOM worksheet - provides a bill of materials for all of the passive fiber op-

tic and cable routing hardware requirements defined in the diagrams and
maps.

In addition, site and floor plans are updated during the design process to reflect
the design.

Figure 10-2 provides a flow chart overview of the distribution frame design process.

Distribution Frame Design

10-5

Figure 10-2:

Distribution Frame Design Flow Chart

Are
Distribution Frame
Layout Diagrams
Cregted

Go to Section 10.3 and create
the distribution frame layout
diagrams.

Yes

Equipment
and Configuration
Requirements
Understood

Go to Section 10.4 and review
equipment room and cabinet
configuration requirements.

Yes

Are
Footprint
Diagrams
Cre;lted

Go to Section 11.5 and cieate
the footprint diagrams.

Yes

Are
Cable
Routing Diagrams
Created

Go to Section 10.6 and create
the equipment room cable
routing diagrams.

LKG-3504-89)

Figure 10-2 Cont'd on next page

106

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 16-2(Cont.):

Distribution Frame Design Flow Chart

Go io Section 10.7 and create
the connection worksheets,
label maps, and CC/IC maps.

Go to Section 10.8 and fill in
the distribution frame BOM
worksheets.

Go to Chapters11 and 12 to
review and orcder ‘he fiber
optic cable plant components.

End
LXG-3811-891

Distribution Frame Design

10.3 Distribution Frame Layout Diagram
A layout diagram, which is created for each distribution frame, identifies:
s

The active (for known applications only) and passive components that make

up the distribution frame.
s

Where the components mount in the distribution frame’s rack (or racks).

The patch panel shelf numbers fi - termination and combination shelves.

The identification of the cables that connect to each patch panel.
NOTE

No layout diagram is needed for RWDFs.

This section describes how to create the distribution frame layout diagram by:
=

Describing the types of components that can be used in a distribution frame.

Providing the rack guidelines that can affect how components are mounted
in distribution frame racks.

Providing layout diagram examples.

10.3.1 Distribution Frame Components
Each distribution frame can contain the following:

Active networking equipment (for known applications only)

Passive cable plant hardware

Mounting racks

NOTE
The RWDF is a wall-mounted unit and does not use active networking equipment or mounting racks.

10-8

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

10.3.1.1 Active Networking Equipment

The network schematic diagrams created in Chapter 5 define what active equipment is part of which distribution frames for known applications.

The part of the distribution frame design that involves the active networking
equipment ig limited to defining:
s

Thermal requirements for rack-mounted active equipment.

Locations of the active equipment in the mounting racks.

How the active equipment connects to the structured wiring cable plant at
the distribution frames.

The guidelines for defining the active equipment locations within the distribution
frame racks are provided in Section 10.3.2. The procedures for defining the active equipment connections to the distribution frames is provided in Section 10.7.
10.3.1.2 Passive Cable Plant Hardware

The distribution frame passive hardware consists of the components needed to:
s

Connect the wiring to the rear of the patch panel at each of the distribution
frames.

Connect the patch cables used for the crossconnect and interconnect administration points.

For all distribution frames (except the RWDF') the cable plant hardware can include the:
s

Termination shelf - provides for connecting up to 72 fibers. The termination
shelf is recommended for use at:

~— MDFT - one termination shelf for each building, with all multimode and
single-mode cable fibers from the building’s IDF connection to the termination shelf at the MDF.

— IDF's - at least one termination shelf for all of the campus backbone

multimode and single-mode fibers.
— HDFs - at least one termination shelf for connecting building backbone
and horizontal wiring fibers.

Distribution Frame Design

10-9

— SDFs or ODFs - at least one termination shelf for interconnecting active equipment to the horizontal wiring or for providing crossconnects.
s

Storage shelf - at least one storage shelf, which provides for storing wiring

and patch cable slack, is needed for each termination shelf used at a distribution frame.

Splice shelf - provides for protective storage of spliced fibers, with one shelf

required for every 72 splices.
NOTE

Splice shelves are used only for storing splices when using pigtail assemblies. When fiber is field-terminated
with a 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector, splice shelves
are not required in the distribution frame.
»

Combination shelf - provides for connecting up to 24 fibers, and includes

splice termination protection and storage space for organizing cable slack.
The combination shelf is recommended for use in low-fiber count termination capacity situations (such a MDF, IDF, HDF).

Splice hardware - used for splicing pigtail assemblies to the wiring inside
the wall.

Cable clamps and management hardware - used to secure and manage ca-

bles within the distribution frame’s racks.
s

Patch cable assemblies - prefabricated cable assemblies for interconnecting

active equipment to the patch panels, or for use in crossconnects.
»

Panel couplers - for mounting fibers to the termination or combination shelf

patch panels and for connecting the patch cables to the patch panels. One
coupler is used for each fiber.
For an RWDF, the components consist of:
s

A wall-mounted unit which allows up to 12 fiber connections.

The patch panel couplers or splice hardware needed to interconnect the

HDF-cable and wallbox-cable fibers at the RWDF panels.

10-10

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

NOTE

Chapter 11 contains descriptions of the distribution frame
passive cable plant components available directly from
Digital or from authorized Digital distributors. It also
lists components approved for use in the DECconnect

System structured wiring cable plant that are not directly
available from Digital.

10.3.1.3 Mounting Racks

The RWDF is a wali-mounting unit that does not use mounting racks. The ODF
uses an enclosed, 152 centimeter (60 inch) high, 48 centimeter (19 inch) rack. All
other distribution frames (MDFs, IDFs, HDFs, and SDFs) can use open mounting racks for mounting the active and passive components.

Three different types of open racks are approved for used in the equipment
room:

183 centimeters (72 inches) high, 48 centimeter (19 inch) rack - for mounting active and passive components.

213 centimeters (84 inches) high, 48 centimeter (19 inch) rack - for mounting active and passive components.

58 centimeter (23 inch) rack - for mounting passive components only.

The RWDF, ODF enclosed rack, and the open 48 centimeter (19 inch) racks are
available directly from Digital or authorized Digital distributors. The 58 centimeter (23 inch) rack is not. (See Chapter 11 for a list of resources.)
10.3.2 Rack Layout Guidelines

The layout guidelines that can affect the design of a distribution frame are:
=

Basic mounting-rack layouts

Rack installation guidelines

The rack-mounting of active equipment within a distribution frame can also be
affected by the requirements outlined in Section 10.4.

Distribution Frame Design

10-11

10.3.2.1 Basic Mounting-Rack Layouts

There are two basic mounting-rack layouts for distribution frames:
u

Separate-rack layouts - in this recommended layout, active and passive

components are mounted in separate racks. That is, any given distribution
frame rack has only one type of component mounted in it: active or passive.
e

Mixed-rack layout - ir this layout, active and passive components are
mounted in the same rack. This layout is the only possibility for ODF's.

10.3.2.2 Rack Installation Guidelines

When planning the location of active and passive equipment within a distribution frame’s mounting rack, follow the guidelines listed below:
w

Plan for installing the fiber optic shelves, involved in storing and terminat-

ing the same group of fibers together, in a logical group within the mounting
rack. For example, a termination shelf and storage shelf grouping (when
fibers are terminated using the Digital-recommended field-termination procedures) or a splice shelf, termination shelf, and storage shelf grouping
(when fibers are terminated using pigtail assemblies).
s

Always mount the splice shelves above the termination shelves to maintain
the cable routing from the top to the bottom of the rack.

Always mount the storage shelves below the termination shelves for storing

behind-the-wall fibers and patch cable fibers.
s

For stability, bolt racks to the floor or walls. Plan on mounting equipment
in the rack based on the weight of the equipment. Mount lighter equipment

towards the top of a rack and heavier equipment towards the bottom.
NOTE

In mixed-rack layouts, passive equipment always mounts
at the top of the rack because it is lighter than active
equipment.

Plan for the cable clamp and other cable management hardware (such as ca-

ble management raceways) locations within the rack. Make sure that space
is left in the rack for access to the management hardware locations.
s

Plan for the separation of all fiber optic active and passive equipment from
any copper based equipment within each rack. This helps separate management of the fiber optic wiring from the copper wiring.

10-12

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

NOTE

For information on distribution frame mounting rack layouts, see the rack installation guidelines in Chapter 4 of
the DECconnect System Fiber Optic Installation guide
(EK-DECSY-FI)).
10.3.2.3 Layout Diagram Examples

The following figures provide distribution frame layout diagram examples for
each type of distribution frame (except the RWDF) used in the DECconnect
System’s structured wiring cable plant:

Figure 10-3 shows an MDF that connects to 5 IDF using active fiber optic
Ethernet equipment.

Figure 104 shows an IDF that connects to 6 HDFs using an FDDI concentrator.

Figure 10-5 shows an HDF that connects to 4 SC
s using an FDDI concentrator.

Figure 10-6 shows an SDF that connects to 32 wallboxes using active fiber

optic Ethernet stars. Also shown is copper-based network equipment separate from the fiber optic equipment.

Figure 10-7 shows an ODF that connects to wallboxes using active fiber optic Ethernei stars. Aiso shown is copper-based network equipment separate
from the fiber optic equipment.

Distribution Frame Design

10-13

No splice shelves are shewn in any of the examples because it is assumed that
the fiber will be field-terminated. Spiice shelves are usually required only when

fibers are terminated using pigtaii assemblies.

In addition, the MDF, IDF, and HDF examples assume that other active equip-

ment (such as voice, video, telemetry, or security) will be mounted in the distri-

bution frame's active rack.

10-14

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 10-3:

MDF Layout Diagram Example

H3130 Racks

Termination

Shelf (No. 1)
For BO1
Cables

Termination

‘v

Storage
Shelf

Shelf (No. 2) |

For BO2

Storage
Voice,

Shelf

Video,

Telemetry, Security,
or other Fiber—Optic

Cables

Termination

Shelf (No. 3) |

tquipment,

Storage
_

For BO3

Cables

Shelf

Termination

Shelf (No. 4) [Tw_

‘Vk For BO4

Storage

’

Cables

Shelf

Ethernet Star

Brackets

Cable Manager

- - - Ethernet Star

F‘ GO0 0000

Termination

Shelf (No. 5) [

Storage
Shelf

Cables

For BG5S

LKG— 368+89A

Distribution Frame Design

10-15

Figure 10-4:

|IDF Layout Diagram Example

H3130 Racks

Termingtion

Shelf (No. 1) “W
\

Storage
Shelf

For MO1

Cables

For HO1O
Shelf (No. 2) + —— Cables
Combination

—

Combination

Cables

Voice, Video,

Telemetry, Security,

Combination

Shelf (No. 4)

or other Fiber—Optic —fi

Equipment.

Combination

Shelf (No. 5) |]

Combination

Shelf (No. 6) [T

E‘;‘;)'ngm
€

For H0202
Cables

For HO301
Cables

St (o) T For HO302

FDDI

Cables

Concentrator
FlO OO D0 00

FDDI

Cable Manager

Concentrator

Brackets

LKG-3682-B9A

10-16

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 10-5:

HDF Layout Diagram Example

H3130 Racks

Termination

Shelf (No. 1)

Storage

Shelf

Combination

>— For B02

Shelf (No. 2) [T

—

Combination

Shelf (No. 3) |]

Voice, Video,

Te'~-metry, Security,

Cables

For S022
Cables

For 5023
Cables

Combination

Shelf (No. 4) —— For 5024

c. other Fiber—Optic 'fi

Cables

Equipment.

Combination

Shelf (No. 5) |]

For S025

Cables

FDDI

Concentrator

FoDI
Concentrator

Cable Manager
Brackets
T

0000

LKG—3683—89A

Distribution Frame Design

10-17

Figure 10-6:

SDF Layout Diagram Example

H3130 Racks

DELNI

Active Copper
Equipment

DEMPR

Shelf (No. 1)

Termination

For all
Wallbox Cables

Storage
Shelf
Combination

Shelf (No. 2)

+—— For HO201
Cables

Ethernet Star
0 00
D020

Ethernet
Active Fiber—

Optic Equipment

Sy
AR

Star

v
A
B

Yy
O
O B
]

Fthernet Star

Cable Manager

0000000

Brackets

Ethernet Star
000

0000

LKG~-3684—~89A

10-18

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 10-7:

ODF Layout Diagram Exampie
H9646 Rack

A _tive Copper

DELNI

Equipment
DEMPR

Termination

Shelf (No. 1)

|]
For all

Storage

Wallbox

Shelf

Cables

Combination

Shelf (No. 2)

<'L—— For HO102
Cables

Ethernet Star
Active Fiber—

Optic Equipment

20000
00

Ethernet Star

Cable Manager

2000
CC OO0 =

Brackets

LKG~3685—-89A

Distribution Frame Design

10-19

10.4 Equipment Room and Cabinet Configuration—Electrical, Thermal, and
Acoustic Requirements

This section provides requirements and guidelines for equipment rooms and the
ODF cabinets.
»

Configuration requirements for equipment rooms and ODF cabinets

Power requirements for equipment rooms and ODF cabinets

Thermal requirements for equipment rooms and ODF cabinets

Acoustic requirements for ODF cabinets

The configuration and thermal guidelines for equipment rooms are based on using two racks for layout of the active and passive distribution frame equipment.
10.4.1 Configuration Requirements

This section describes the configuration requirements for:
s

Equipment rooms

ODFs

10.4.1.1 Equipment Room Configuration Requirements

The following configuration requirements apply to all equipment rooms in which
the MDF, IDF, HDF, and SDF are located:
=

The ceiling must be at least 2.6 meters (8.5 feet) high.

There must be a lockable door with a sign reading: WARNING - QUALIFIED
PERSONNEL ONLY.

The distribution frame mounting racks must be located along the wall oppo-

site the door.
s

Adequate lighting is required, and must include an emergency light that

turns on automatically whenever the power 1o the room is lost.
@

There must be no storage of material or equipment not directly related to

the cabling system, especially flammable material.

10-20

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Avoid locating the mounting racks within 15 centimeters (6 inches) of highvoltage power lines or any other possible source of electromagnetic interference (EMI).

The equipment room must be large enough to accommodate location of the
distribution frame’s mounting racks and a minumum footprint space for

installed mounting racks. Figure 10-8 illustrates the required clearances.

Figure 10-8:

Equipment Clearances

60 cm

pif

Zs-, 2

(30 in)

~»| (236in) -

Active
Rack

Passive

60 c.a

Rack

(236 in)

\N
I'-— Vent in Door '——'I
Located Anywhere
Within Line-of-Sight
Range
LKG-3613-801

As shown, the clearances outlined by the solid lines must be provided for the
mounting racks. Also, there must be an air vent located anywhere within the
illustrated line-of-sight (shaded area) for the equipment room’s fan.
If the equipment room has to accommodate voice, video, or other data equipment, the 76 centimeters (30 inches) of clear all space shown in Figure 10-8
can be used for mounting telephone punchdown blocks or other equipment.

The floor should have a nonporous surface (such as linoleum, vinyl, tile, or
sealed concrete) and be suitable for accepting the lag bolts that are used to
secure the mounting racks to the floor.

Distribution Framz Design

10-21

Digital strongly recommends that the room include a telephone that allows

service personnel to communicate with other service personnel at the site or
with their home office.
NOTE

For more information on equipment room configuration
requirements, refer to the BICSI Telecommunicat.ons
Distribution Methods Manual.
10.4.1.2 ODF Configuration Requirements

The following configuration requirements apply to the ODF cabinet:
w

Avoid locating an ODF cabinet within 15 centimeters (6 inches) of high-

voltage power lines or any other possible source of electromagnetic interference (EMI).
s

Each ODF must be installed in a manner that allows the ODFs to have the

minimum footprint space required for these cabinets.
The clearances outlined by the solid lines in Figure 10—9 must be provided
for proper ventilation and for service access to the ODF components.
10.4.2 Electrical Requirements

This section describes the electrical requirements for:
»

Equipment rooms

ODFs

NOTE
Equipment room and ODF electrical '‘equirements vary
from country to country. The requirements listed in this
chapter are for U.S. installations.

10-22

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 10-9:

ODF Space Requirements

20 ¢m (8in)

—

l——,—

76cm
,
(30in) ¢ Door

— 76cm

(301n)

r L

—

76 cm
7N in)
i

X
LKG-3614-861

10.4.2.1 Equipment Room Electrical Requirements

The equipment room requires the following provisions for ac power:
m

Voltage: 120 Vac nominal

Frequency: 60 Hz

Service: two dedicated (from a circuit-breaker panel) 15-ampere power cir-

cuits, each terminated with a NEMA 5-15R outlet. The outlets must be
within 0.6 meters (2 feet) of the active equipment rack location. Both outlets must have an earth ground.

NOTE

The distribution frame racks are grounded through the
outlet earth grounds; no further grounding of the racks is
necessary.

In addition, a 15-ampere duplex outlet that is not on the dedicated power circuits should be available for use by service personnel. This outlet should be
within 0.9 meters (3 feet) of the active equipment rack.

Distribution Frame Design

10-23

10.4.2.2 ODF Electrical Requirements

A 120 Vac nominal, 12 ampere, 60 Hz power source outlet is required for the
ODF. This outlet must be within 0.9 meters (3 feet) of the cabinet. In addition, a second 15-ampere duplex outlet that is not on the same circuit as the
ODF should be available for use by service personnel. This outlet should also
be within 0.9 meters (3 feet) of the cabinet.
10.4.3 Thermal Requirements

This section describes the thermal requirements for:
s

Equipment rooms

ODFs

10.4.3.1 Equipment Room Thermal Requirements

The equipment room is specified to handle approximately 1100 watts and must
have a forced-air ventilation system to flush the room’s air. The forced-air ventilation system must meet the following requirements:
m

The room must have an exhaust fan with a 7.1 cubic meter per minute (250
cubic feet per minute) capacity. This is based on an 8° C (14.4° F) tempera-

ture rise between class A (15° to 32° C (59° to 90° F)) environment outside
the room and the class B (10° to 40° C (50° to 104° F)) environment inside
the room. If a lower limit is required, then a higher cubic meter per minute
capacity is recommended.
NOTE

For higher CMM capacity systems, including air conditioning, contact the HVAC contractor.
w

The room’s air inlet must be placed at floor level in the equipment room

door and must have an minimum opening size of at least 0.233 square meters (2.5 square feet).
10.4.3.2 ODF Thermal Requirements

Digital recommends using an H9646-EA (110 Vac) or H9646-EB (220 Vac) DECconnect
communications cabinet for the ODF. This cabinet has a thermal capacity of 650
watts and can be placed in a class B environment (10° C to 40° C, 50° F to 104°
F) and a humidity range of 10% to 90% (noncondensing).

10-24

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

10.4.4 ODF Acoustic Requirements

The ODF cabinet i8 placed in office or other end-user environments where the

noise generated by active equipment mounted in the cabinet can have an environmental impact. Table 10-1 lists the recommended A-weighted sound power
level values (expressed as LwA) for both open office areas and computer room
environments.
NOTE

A special installation consideration, such as installing
an H9646-xx DECconnect communications cabinet in an
office or work area that requires more noise control than
a normal office area, requires consulting an acoustical
engineer for guidance.
Table 10-1:

ODF Acceptable Acoustical Values

Environment

Recommended LwA
Maximum Levels

Open office (large office, drafting areas,

Up to 6.5 bels

or office with multiple desks)

Computer room (dedicated equipment

Up to 7.5 bels

room for computer or other system common equipment)

‘

NOTE
The LwA values identified in Table 10-1 are measured in
accordance with the ANSI §12.10-1985 Standard or the
ISO 7999 Standard.

Distribution Frame Design

10-25

10.5 Footprint Diagram

A to-scale footprint diagram is created for each distribution frame. The diagram
identifies exactly where:

Racks are to be installed in the equipment room (MDF, IDF, HDF, and
SDF).

The ODF is to be placed in the office area.

The RWDF is to be wall-mounted.

Each footprint diagram also shows the clearance that must be maintained
around the racks for service access. The clearance for distribution frame racks
is 76 centimeters (30 inches) at the rear and at one side.

For the ODF and RWDF, however, the access requirements are different:
s

ODF - requires 76 centimeters (30 inches) of clearance at the front, back,
and on one side of the ODF cabinet for service access and ventilation.

RWDF - requires service clearance in front of the RWDF only.

Figure 10-10 shows an example of a footprint diagram for an ODF. Figure 10-11

shows an example of a footprint diagram for a typical two-rack equipment room.
NOTE

The minimum space requirements for an ODF footprint
are described in Section 10.4.1.2, ODF Configuration
Requirements. The minimum space requirements for
a two-rack MDF, IDF, HDF, or SDF footprint are described in Section 10.4.1.1, Equipment Room General
Requirements.

10-26

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

’

Figure 10-10:

ODF Footprint Diagram Example

Office 1505

Office 1511

3.048 m x 3.048 m

(10 ft x 10 ft)

(10t
x 10 ft)

LKG-4155-801

Distribution Frame Design

10-27

Figure 10-11:

Equipment Room Footprint Diagram Example

3 m (10 ft)

4l
5

Active
Rack

Passive
Rack

3. m(10ft)

= oom@Mn |-

le—1.2m
(4 t)—

N Door

09m3f)
LKG-3686-891

10.6 Equipmerit Room Cable Routing Diagram
Each distribution frame (MDF, IDF, HDF, or SDF) needs a to-scale diagram of
the equipment room that shows exactly how the cables will be routed to and
from the distribution frame racks within the room. In most cases, the cable routing diagram can be created as an update of the footprint diagram.
Digital recommends using the above-ceiling cable tray horizontal routing method.

In addition, the cable routing should deliver the cable to the left-rear corner of

each rack.

10-28

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 10-12 provides an example for using a cable rack to route cables to the
passive rack in a typical two-rack equipment room.
Figure 10-12:

Equipment Room Cable Routing Diagram Example

foa-

—

1))
(:

3m(101t)

Fiber Optic
Cable

»]
=N

—

Cable Tray

Active | Passive
Rack | Rack

3m (101t)

—| com@tn —

l— 1.2m (4 t)—=]

Door

0.9m31f)
LKG-3687-891

Distribution Frame Design

10-29

10.7 Distribution Subsystem Connection Maps
This section provides information on connecting the individual fiber pairs to each
subsystem’s patch panel, labeling maps for the combination and termination
shelf at each distribution frame, and connection maps for the crossconnect and
interconnect patch cables. During this process the network designer completes:
s

Distribution subsystem connection worksheet

Patch panel connection label maps

Crossconnect/interconnect maps (for known applications only)

10.7.1 Distribution Subsystem Connection Worksheet
This worksheet (Figure 10-13) provides a connection map for the installer to
connect each fiber pair to its proper location at each of the distribution frame
patch panel shelves. (Photocopy the worksheet.)
The following documents and information are used to complete the worksheet.
s

Network schematics.

Concept diagrams.

Identifier worksheets.

The patch panel numbers assigned for each termination shelf and combina-

tion shelf from the distribution frame layout diagram in Section 10.3.
s

The distribution frame higher/lower color fields identified in Table 4-3.

Th .dentification of which cables connect to which patch panel shelf from the
distribution frame layout diagram in Section 10.3.

Termination and combination shelf layout (Figure 10-14 and Figure 10-15.)

The designer fills out the worksheet as follows:
Section 1, Project Identification

Identify the project, worksheet page number, designer, and date.
Section 2, Distribution Frame Locatlon

Identify the building number(s) where the distribution frames are located.

10-30

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Section 3, Distribution Subsystem Connection Map

Provide the cable information. This includes the cable ID, the cable bundie
unit color, the fiber pair letter, and the fiber color involved in the connection
with the subsystem patch panel.

Provide the higher level distribution frame ID. This includes the shelf number, the coupler column/row position, and the distribution frame field color
to which one end of the cable connects.

Provide the lower level distribution frame ID. This includes the shelf num-

ber, the coupler column/row position, and the distribution field color to
which the other end of the cable connects.

When connecting fibers to a termination or combination shelf from cables coming from two different points in the structured wiring, the fiber coming from
the higher cable connects to the left-most panels and the fibers coming from the
lower cable connects to the right-most panels. For more information on this leftside/right-side panel connection strategy and exceptions see Section 4.2.
NOTE

The additional information required for the Wallbox
Identifier Worksheet must be completed at this point.

(This worksheet was partially completed in Section 4.6.1
with wallbox identifier information). These worksheets
contain complete connection information for the installer.
Include them with the installation documentation.
10.7.2 Patch Panel Connection Label Maps

This section provides information for filling in the two types of patch panel connection label maps:

Termination shelf panel connection label map (Figure 10-14)

Combination shelf panel connection label map (Figure 10-15)

Photcopy each type of connection label map and follow these instructions. The
difference between the two label maps is the number and arrangement of the
patch panels each shelf can have.

Distribution Frame Design

10-31

Figure 10-13:

Distribution Subsystem Connection Worksheet

I. Project Identification:

Project ID:

Page

Designer:

Date:

il. Distribution Frame Location:
Building dentifier:

1. Distribution Subsystem Connection Map
Higher Level Distribution

Lower Level Distribution

Cable Information

Frame ID

Cable]
No.

Shelf | Column]
No.
Letter

Unit
Color|

Pair
Fiber
Letter | Color

Row| Field || Shelf | Column| Row|
No. | Color|l No.
Letter | No.

Field
Color

{ KG-4104-901

10-32

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

A connection label map is filled in for each termination and combination shelf
at a distribution frame. These label maps are used by the installer to transfer
the label identifier to the labels at each of the patch panel shelves. They also
identify the fiber pairing for installation of the black and red washers at the termination and combination shelves. Each map has three parts:
=

A map identification section that is filled in to define:
The project identifier.
The designer.
The distribution frame patch panel number that the map is for (the lay-

out diagram for each distribution frame identifies a patch panel number for each termination and combination shelf).
The distribution frame's identifier.
The building number (the actual building number identified on the site

plans—not the identifier of the building’'s MDF or IDF).
s

An illustration of the shelf’s coupler panels identifying each coupler position

with a row number and a column letter.
s

A chart of the coupler positions and a place to fill in the label identifier for

each fiber in a pair that connects at each position.

The identifier that is filled in for each coupler position is created by using information from the distribution subsystem connection worksheets created earlier in
this section.

Distribution Frame Design

10-33

Figure 10-14:

Termination Shelf Connection Label Map

Position|

£l

Identifier

Pair

Letter

Color

Building No.:

Letter

10/0/0/0(0/0/0/0/0/0(00

Patch
Panel

Frame ID: _

Fiald

2|©|0|©|0|0|0|0|0|0/0|0|0
:|0|0|0/0|0|0/0|0|0/0|0|0

Position | Identiner

Pioed 0
Designer

Pair

]

Patch
Pane!

Jdap Identification

Field

Color

LKG-3664-891

Figure 10-14 Cont’d on next page

10-34

DECcennect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 10-14(Cont.):

Patch

Panel

Position | ldentifier

Pair

Letter

Termination Shelf Connection Label Map

Field

Color

Patch

Panel

Position]

Identifier

Pair

Letter

Field

Color

LKG~3664-801

Distribuiion Frame Design

10-35

Figure 10-15:

Map Identification

Project ID:

Designer:

Combination Shelf Connection Label Map

€

®
IO00
QI0O
© 0O
1100@
|lOo@O0O®
OG|IIOO0O00O 0O

Frame ID:

Building No.. ___

Patch

Panel
Position | Identitier

Patch

Pair
Letter

Field
Color

Pane!
Position|

)

Identifier

Pair
Letter

Field
Color

LKG-3665-881

10-36

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

The connection label 1 ap information is printed on a label attached to the patch
panel door. It indicates connection information for the other end of the cable.
Figure 10-16 is an example of the information shown on the label.
Sample Connection Label Map

Figure 10-16:

/- Patch Panel Shelf Number

/— Fiber Pair Letter

MO01/4 — c/6—-a*
\—/
-/
o

Main Distribution Frame—/

\ Column C-Row 6
LKG~4108-001

10.7.3 Crossconnect/Interconnect Maps - Known Applications Only
A crossconnect/interconnect map is created for:
s

Each termination shelf at the distribution frame

Each combination shelf at the distribution frame

Each RWDF

Except at the RWDF, where wallbox cable fibers connect directly to panel-mounted
HDF cable fibers, terminated cable assemblies are used at distribution frame
panels for the administration crossconnect and interconnect points that connect
the behind-the-wall fibers at the panel coupler into a structured wiring cable
plant.

Distribution Frame Design

10-37

NOTE

The fiber connections at the panel coupler are defined
by the distribution subsystem connection worksheet described in Section 10.7.1.

The crossconnect/interconnect maps define how patch cables connect at the patch
panels to provide the crossconnect and interconnect points. These maps are used
during the installation of the patch cables to the coupler positions.
Crossconnect/Interconnect Map Procedure

This section provides instructions for filling in three types of
crossconnect/interconnect maps. (Photocopy the maps.)
s

Termination shelf crossconnect/interconnect map (Figure 10-17)

Combination shelf crossconnect/interconnect map (Figure 10-18)

RWDF interconnect map (Figure 10-19)

10.7.3.1 Termination and Combination Shelf Maps
A crossconnect/interconnect map is completed for each termination shelf

(Figure 10-17) and combination shelf (Figure 10-18) at a distribution frame.
NOTE
When creating the crossconnect/interconnection maps,
review the crossover rules outlined in Chapter 4 to determine the crossover and non-crossover fiber pair connections.

Each map has three parts:
s

A filled-in map identification section that defines:

— The project identifier.
— The designer.

— The number distribution frame’s patch panel number. (The layout diagram for each distribution frame identifies a patch panel number for
each termination and combination shelf.)
— The distribution frame’s identifier.

10-38

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Pianning and Configuration

— The building number (the actual building number identified on the site
plans—not the building’s MDF or IDF identifier).

.
=

An illustration of the shelf’s patch panel, identifying each coupler position
by a row number and column letter.

A chart that has the following:

— From ldentifier (fiber pair letter and coupler position number) - fill in
the pair letter, and the row numbers and column letters that the patch
cable connects to.
— To Identifier - fill in the identification of the point where the other end
of the patch cable connects:
For active equipment, identify the equipment by number and connector.

For a coupler position at another termination or combination shelf,
identify the patch panel number, pair letter, and the row numbers

and column letters.
— Patch Cable - fill in with a description of the cable assembly to be used.

If it is a dual-fiber assembly, indicate the assembly connector that connects to the coupler pair by the color code of the connector’s boot. For
example, an FDDI-to-ST connector cabie assembly connects to a coupler

pair at the panel with one position defined as black hoot, and the other
as red boot.

Distribution Frame Design

10-39

From

Panel
Position

Pair
Letter

@0B®000|:

0000
|=

Building No.:

Frame ID:

@00000|>

Panel No.:

Designer.

@000
|~

Project ID:

@O0R000|-

Map identification

@000
|x

Termination Shelf Crossconnect/interconnect Map

@00000)

Figure 10-17:

Field
Color

Panel
Position

Pair
Letter

Field
Coior

Cable
Description

A4
A5

A6
B1

B2
B3
B4
B5
B6

C1
C2
C3

C4
C5
Cé
D1
D2

D4
05
D6
El

E2
E3

E4
ES
E6

F1
F2
F3

Figure 10-17 Cont’d on next page
1040

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure 10-17(Cont.):

Termination Shelf Crossconnect/Interconnect Map
To

From
Panel
Position

Pair
Letter

Field

Color

Panel
Position

Pair
| etter

Field

Cable

Color

Description

F4
FS

G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
H1
H2
H3

H4
H5
H6

J1
J2

J3
J4

J5
J6
K1
K2

K3
K4

K5
K6
L1

L3
L4
L5

L6
M1
M2
M3
M4

M6
LKG-3666—89)

@
Distribution Frame Design

1041

Figure 10-18:

Combination Shelf Crossconnect/Interconnect Map

Map Identification

100
0 ©® 0 ©

Project ID:

Designer:

0O©®0

anel No.:

©®0©®

Frame ID:

Building No.:

From

Panel
Position

Pair
Letter

Field
Color

Panel
Position

Pair
Letter

Field
Color

Cable

Description

B1
Ci
D1

E1
F1
A2

B2
G2
D2

F2
G1
H1

J1
K1
L1

G2
H2

J2
K2

L2
M2
LKG-3608-801

1042

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

10.7.3.2 RWDF Interconnect Map
An interconnect map is completed for each RWDF (Figure 10-19). Each map has
three parts.

The first part includes:
s

The map identification section

A panel illustration that identifies the coupler positions with row numbers

and column letters
The second part is an RDWF interconnect map that defines:
#

Which HDF cable fibers connect to the rear of each coupler position (inside

the RWDF)
s

Which wallbox cable fibers connect to each coupler position on the outside of

the RWDF

The third section defines the cable connections as follows:
@«

The HDF cable fiber connection to each coupler position is identified by the

HDF cable’s identifier with a fiber color code.
s

The wallbox cable connections to the panel positions are identified with the

same cable-label/fiber-color entry.

Distribution Frame Design

1043

Figure 10-19:

RWDF inierconnect Map

Map Identification
Project ID:

A
B
110110

Designer:

Panel No.:

Frame 1D:

Building No.:

510||

Panei
Pair
Position | Letter

Fiber Connection
Inside Panel

Pair
Letter

Fiber Connection
Outside Panel

A2
A3
A4

A5
A6

B1
B2

83
B4

B5
B6

LKG-36867-801

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

10.8 Bill of Materials (BOM) Worksheet

’

This section provides instructions for the Distribution Frame BOM Worksheet

(Figure 10-20). Photocopy and complete a BOM worksheet completed for each
distribution frame’s passive fiber optic cable plant and cable routing hardware requirements. Each BOM workeheet is compiled from the component
requirements defined in the distribution frame’s layout diagram, Equipment
Room Cable Routing Diagram, panel connection worksheets, and crossconnect/interconnect map.
Section | Project Identification

Identify the project, worksheet page number, designer, and date.
Section 11 Distribution Frame identification

Identify the distribution frame by its identifier and building number (the actual
building number—not the building’s MDF or IDF identifier).
Section Ili Component Requirements

List each component by:
s

Component description (for example, FDDI-to-2.£ mm baycnet ST-type connector cable, 10 meter (33 foot))

‘

Order number (for ordering the 10 meter (33 foot) FDDI-to-2.5 mm cable from Digital, or an authorized Digital distriputor, the order number is
BN24D-10)

Quantivy needed (total all of the 10 meter (33 foot) FDDI-to-2.5 mm cables

listed in the distribution frame’s crossconnect/interconnect maps)
s

Unit price

Total price (quantity multiplied by the unit price)

Summarize the total cost of the listed components.

Distribution Frame Design

10-45

Figure 10-20:

Distribution Frame BOM Worksheet

I. Project Identification:
Project ID:

Page

Designer:

Date:

I' Distribution Frame Identification:

Building

Number:

Floor

Number:

Distribution

Frame

Identifier:

Ill. Component Requirements:

ltem
Number

Part
Number

Description

Quantity

Unit
Price

Total
Price

Total Cost:
LKG-3668-89)

10-46

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Pianning and Configuration

VOOV OV NSO TOO NSO IIGS ANPEED088000.000.60004
K K KA KK KK HLXKKKLK
LA AT AR AL A A F A AT T H A AL KA
8000800.4
09.08090008
DO
OGS IO
PYO OO IOINS IO GO
IXAKK
K
KL
KL
XK
KAAALAKXAAL LA X AL LA AL A AKX IR I KA KK AL
XAV KKK XA AKX AL KA AL ALK KX LR XK AKX KX EXAKKALKKK
P09 00.00.0.900.0.0.9,08060.8660.69065008080000004
OGP OGO OGO PN 0.800.680808000088880000,
PO 0000090.009.96068800800660660048648094
PPV 00.0.6.0.0.0.0.9960600000008099.980.904
PO0.9:0:9.0.6:0.6:0.0.0.0.9.005.0.9.9060604090.9004
)0.0.0.0.9.0.0.0.0.9,0.6.0.00080989.0000040.996.794
}O 000900088.00000080004806000004
P.00.0:8.800006806.9096058800004
)80:0:00.6.6.6.0.6.0.0.0.¢8.0,8¢.96.68004
XX XK XXX XXX AKX XXX XXXKXKX
$0:9.0.0:0.0.9.8.9.0.0.6.0.0.699848.494
04
P0,0.0.6.0.0.0.9.9.8.6.69.9.6.9.9
110.0.0.6.0.0.0.0.9.699.9.0.8.0

KXAXXAXAKAKKAKX
XXXXXXXXXKXKKK

KXXXAXXKKXKX
XXXXXAKXKX
AXKXAXXXX

XXXXX

XXX
X

XXX
XXXXX

XXXKXXX

HAXXAXXXX
1:9.0.0.4.4.0.0.9.0.9¢

0,64
)9.6.9.0.0.¢.¢.0.0.¢

P00 8.9.0.0:90.0.9.6.6.9.0.04

).9.0.0:9.9.0.9.0.9.0.9.0.¢.0.0.0.4

XEXX XX XXX AXXXXALAXK
P0.0.0.0.:0.0.0.0.0.0:0.:0.0.0.9.6.0.0.9,0¢

10 0.0:0.¢.0.0.6:0.0.9.0.0.0.99.980.08¢

D900 0.9.0.6.00.0.0.0.6.6.6.6.0.680¢660¢4

898048
P.0.0.0.0:0.0.9.0.0.0.0.0.0.60809

46,0 6 ¢
10:0.9.0.0.0.9.9.0.0.:0.8:4.0.9.0.0.0.9.8.0.9.8.6
¢4
1.9,0.0.610.0,0.0.9.0.64.0.:0.0.9.0.:0.:0:0.:0.0.0.9.0.9.8.0.6

POSV000.0.0.0:0.8.9.006:0:009.69.9.00889.8¢¢04

10.0.9,0.0.9.0.9.0.0.9:0.0.0.0.0.0.5.9.0.0.0.6.0.6.6,0.6.6.0.0.0.6¢
.0.0.9:0.8.0.0.:0.0.0.0:0.00.0.9.:0.9,8:9.8.9.9.8.9.¢.¢.¢
0:0.0.9.0.0.0
10
.3.6.9.44
:0.
BN 0:0.0.0.0.0.0.9.¢.8
0PN9.0:0
TD09.
D000 0V S0 0005056.:0.0.0.0.0.9.0.0.9.9.6.0,6.¢6
20O

008
880001
RO OO VOO0 000000809080 80000.0000009.89.9.0
0008080
800008000
POCP G009 90.0 0000800006 000688600

[0100 00000900000.00000.0.0.0.0,0.086.0.0000060000869608608es4¢

Fiber Optic Cable Plant
Product Descriptions

This chapter identifies and describes the cables and passive components that are available
as part of the DECconnect System fiber optic cable plants. This information is provided
in the form of product descriptions.

11.1 Ordering Parts
The Digital products listed and described in this chapter can be ordered from a Digital

Sales Representative, DECdirect, or an authorized DECconnect System distributor.

NOTE
Blank order sheets, which list all of the parts available
from Digital by Digital part number, are provided in
Chapter 12.

11.2 Product Descriptions
Two types of products are described in this chapter: Digital products and auxiliary items.
e

Digital products — individual descriptions are provided for each Digital
product. Each description includes some or all of the following information:

—

Functional description

—

Physical specification

—

Environmental specification

—

Ordering information

Auxiliary items — a list at the end of the chapter identifies products that are not
directly available from Digital, but that are approved for use in Digital's fiber
optic structured wiring. The auxiliary items list includes:

11-2

—

Part descriptions

—

Vendor identification

—

Vendor part number

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Splice Shelf

Ordering Information
Order No.
H3107-G

Includes:

* Recessed access brackets (2)
¢ Universal mounting brackets (2)
«

Routing rings

* Metal door

¢ Shelf subassembly
¢ Splice label

e Splice organizer trays (3)

LKG-3038-89A

e 3-tray housing
+ Mounting hardware
»

Instructions

Physical Specifications

Height:

12.5cm (5 in)

Width:

42.5cm (17 in)

Depth:

27.5cm (1l in)

The splice shelf is used to store mechanical or fusion splices. This rack mounted unit has a capacity
of 3 splice organizer trays, each of which can contain 24 splices for a total capacity of 72 splices.
Indoor and outdoor cable can be secured to the shelf using the supplied cable clamps.

The supplied splice organizer tray can accommodate, but does not include, the Digital recommended splice (Order No. H3114-FG).

With the brackets supplied, the splice shelf can be mounted in an Office Communications Cabinet
(Order No. H9646-EA), Sateilite Equipment Room Rack (Order No. H3120), or 19-inch RETMA
and 23-inch standard telecommunications racks.

Refer to the Auxiliary Items section for accessory items.

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Product Descriptions

11-3

Storage Shelf

Ordering Information
Order No.
H3107-H

Includes:

+ Recessed access brackets (2)
« Universal mounting brackets (2)
e 5-inch shelf assembly
¢ Metal door

o Fiber routing rings

¢ Mounting hardware
¢

Instructions

LKG~3540—89A

Physical Specifications

Height:

12.5cm (5 in)

Width:

42.5cm (17 in)

Depth:

27.5cm (11 in)

The storage shelf is used for the storage of preconnectorized jumpers, field-made jumpers, or buffered cable. Fiber routing rings are used to organize and provide strain relief for fibers.
With the brackets supplied, the storage shelf can be mounted in an Office Communications Cabinet
(Order No. H9646-EA), Satellite Equipment Room Rack (Order Mo. H3120), or 19-inch RETMA
and 23-inch standard telecommunications racks.

Refer to the Auxiliary Items section for accessory items.

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Combination Shelf

Ordering Information
Order No.

H3107—J

includes:

o Recessed access brackets (2)

¢ Universal mounting brackets (2)
¢ 5-inch shelf assembly
e Connector panels (4)
+ Metal door
¢ Splice label

o Splice organizer tray (1)
¢ Fiber routing rings

LKG—3037-89A

+ Mounting hardware
«

Instructions

Physical Specifications

Height:

12.5cm (51n)

Width :

42.5cm (17 in)

Depth:

27.5cm (11 in)

The combination shelf is used for splicing and termination of indoor or outdoor cable. This rack
mounted unit has a capacity of 24 fibers. A maximum of 4 connector panels (each with a capacity of
6 couplers) can be installed in the upper shelf area. An extendable shelf housing contains a single
splice organizer tray. Routing rings are used to organize fibers and provide strain relief.

The 4 supplied connector panels can accommodate, but do not include, 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type
connector couplers (Order Nos. H3114-FC and H3114-FH).
The supplied splice organizer tray can acconunodaie, but does not include, the Digital recommended splice (Order No. H3114-FG).

With the brackets supplied, the combination shelf can be mounted in an Office Communications
Cabinet (Order No. H9646-EA
), Satellite Equipment Room Rack (Order No. H3120), or 19-inch
RETMA and 23-inch standard telecommunications racks.
Refer to the Auxiliary Items section for accessory items.

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Product Descriptions

11-5

Termination Shelf

Ordering Information
Order No.

H3107-K

Includes:

¢ Recessed access brackets (2)
¢ Universal mounting brackets (2)
¢ Shelf subassembly, with hinges
s Connector panel (twelve 6-capacity panels)
« Front and rear ring stand and routing rings

¢ Label and label bracket
«

Plexigiass door

« Mounting hardware
LKG— 3541-89A

Instructions

Physlical Specifications

Height:

17.5cm (7 in)

Width:

42.5cm (17 in)

Depth:

275 cm (11 in)

The termination shelf is used for the termination of indoor or outdoor cable. A maximum of 12
coupler panels (each with a capacity of 6 couplers) can be installed, providing the capability for
terminating 72 fibers. The shelf has provisions for storing fiber, while fiber routing rings are used to
organize and provide strain relief. The shelf includes a label bracket and blank label for identifying
cable terminations.
The 12 supplied coupler panels can accommodate, but do not include, 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type con-

nector couplers (Order Nos. H3114-FC and H3114-FH).
With the brackets supplied. the termination shelf can be mounted in an Office Communications

Cabinet (Order No. H9646-EA), Satellite Equipment Rack (Order No. H3120), or in 19-inch
RETMA and 23-inch standard telecommunications racks.
Refer to the Auxiliary Items section for accessory items.

11-6

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Cable Manager Bracket

Ordering Information
Order No.

Description

H3108-AA

DECconnect System

Cable Manager Kit

Includes:

Cable organizer bracket with 20 cutouts
20 bushings

2 U-nuts

2 rack mounting screws

LKG-3552—-89A

Physical Specitications

Height:

381 em (1.5 1)

Depth:

6.35cm (2.5 in)

Width:

22.86 cm (9 in) (rack width)

The DECconnect System cable manager bracket provides strain relief for patching cables and
guides to the rear of the cabinet for cable management. The bracket mounts into any standard
19-inch rack.

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Product Descriptions

-7

Modular Office Wallbox Kit

/'l‘\ c

Ordering Information

Order No.

H3111-GA
H3111-GB

H3111-GC

Quantity: 8 wallboxes per kit
Each kit includes:

‘

LKG-4124-80!

» Blank panels

¢ Base unit

¢ Dual inserts

s Label cover

» Wiring clips

e Labels

« Blank plugs

« Mounting hardware

e Cover

s Installation instructions

Physical Specifications
Height :

A =10cm (4in)

Width :

B=75cm (3 in)

Depth:

C=47cm (1-7/8in)

Description

Color

H3111-GA

Digital Grey

H3111-GB

White

H3111-GC

Ivory

The modular office wailbox is a wall-mountable receptacle that provides the connection point for
office communications equipment. The wallbox accepts all DECconnect System modular connector systems for both copper and fiber.

11-8

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Field-Installable 2.5 mm Bayonet

ST-type Fiber Optic Connector Kit

Typical connector, actual kits may differ.

LKG-3544-B9A

Ordering Information
Order No.
H3114-FA

Quantity: 6 connectors per kit
Includes:

2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector, black boot (3)

2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector, red boot (3)

Physical Speclifications

- Maximum loss after coupling: less than or equal to (.7 dB per connector pair at 20° C.
- Operating Temperature range: --20° C to 55° C.

- Terminated using fiber optic termination tool kit (Order No. H8102—-AA [110 volt] or
Order No. H8102-AC [220 volt]).

~ Average termination time: less than 10 minutes per connector.
~ Works with 2.0 mm, 2.4 mm, or 3 mm breakout cables, with aramid strength members, or
900 micron-buffered fiber or 250 micron-coated fiber.

- Requires H8102-AB consumables kit (material for 100 terminations).
— This connector is for 62.5/125 micron fiber.

- This connector is compatible with the AT&T ST2 connector.

The 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector is used in cable-to-cable or cable-to-equipment applica-

tions, providing high performance, low cost, and easy ficld-mounting in a rugged compact package.
See the Auxiliary Items section for additional information.

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Product Descriptions

11-9

2.5 mm Bayonet ST-type Connector Coupler Kit

LKG-3545—-B9A

Ordering Information
Order No.
H3114-FC

Quantity: 12 couplers per kit

Physical Specifications

- Operating temperature range: —20° C to 55° C
—~ Compatible with H3114-FA connectors

- Used with H3131-C, H3107-J, and H3107-K kits
This 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector coupler is used in termination shelves, combination

shelves, and remote wall enclosures.

11-10

DECconnect System Fiber Opiic Planning and Configuration

Splice Tool Kit

Ordering Information
Order No.
H3114-FD

Includes:

+ Base and splice tool hardware
+ Magnifier

¢ Optical fiber stripping tool

o Cleaving tool
¢

Splice too!

« Alcohol dispenser
* Scissors
¢ Mandrel tool

e Epoxy dispensing tool with coupling gel
and dipensing fip

This splice tool kit contains all the tools needed to mount a mechanical splice. Used in conjunction
with the H3114-FG splice kit.

Replacement parts for kit replenishment are available directly from the suppliers listed in the
Auxiliary Items section.

Fiber Cotic Cable Plant Product Descriptions

11-11

FDDI-to-Dual 2.5 mm Bayonet ST-type

Connector Panel for the Modular Office Wallbox

Ordering Information
Order No.
H3114-FE

Quantity: 8 panels per kit
Each unit includes:

e FDDI-to-dual 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type

connector adapter mounted on a modular
wallbox standard insert.

LKG-37%50--891

The FDDI-to-dual 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector panel is designed for installation in the

modular office wallbox. This panel provides for using the ANSI-standard FDDI connector and transition to 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connectors, which are used in LAN field installations.

The panel comes premounted on the modular wallbox standard insert with a spring-loaded dust
protection door.

1-12

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Dual 2.5 mm Bayonet ST-type Connector Panel
for the Modular Office Wallbox

Ordering Information
Order No.
H3114-FF

Quantity:

8 panels per kit

Each unit includes:

e 8 Dual 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector
panel for the modutar wallbox.

LKG-3718-89I

Figure shown may differ from the actual product.

The dual 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector panel is designec for installation in the modular office
wallbox. This panel provides the office interface to dual 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connectors.
The panels come premounted on the modular wallbox standard insert and include tethered dust
covers.

Fiber Optlic Cable Plant Product Descriptions

11-13

Splice Kit

Ordering Information
Order No.
MH3114-FG

Includes:

fi)

» 12 mechanical splices with adapter chocks
per kit.

LKG-3548-89A

Specitications

— Operating temperature range: —40° C to +70° C

- Average splice time: less than 5 minutes
- Splices can be “redone” to reduce loss

- Maximum loss less than or equal to .( + dB
This splice kit contains all the materials needed to mount mechanical splices. Used in conjunction
with the H3114-FD splice tool kit.

See the Auxiliary Items section for accessory items.

11-14

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Panel for Termination Shelf and Combination Shelf
Ordering Information
o

Order No.

% @o Q/Q)

H3114-FH

g @g

&, )

Quantity: 2 panels per kit

A @

B %Q

Each unit includes:

N AT
] @fl

Al %Q)

4
0!

‘

6l %Q

« Panels loaded with six 2.5 mm ST-type
ayonet connector couplers
bayonet
|

By
L

(‘\D
LKG—3547~88A

The panel. used in the H3107-K termination shelf and H3107-J combination shelf, is supplied
loaded with six 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector couplers.

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Product Descriptions

11-15

2.5 mm Bayonet ST-type Splice Pigtails

LKG—3546—89A

Ordering Information
Order No.
H3118-FA

Quantity: 6 pigtails per kit

Physical Specifications

Operating temperature range: -20° C to 55° C
The splice pigtail consists of a preconnectorized 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector and 62.5/125

pm tight buffered cable (3 meter [9.8 foot] length) suitable for splice applications.

See the Auxiliary Items section for other pigtail designs.

11-16

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Satellite Equipment Room Equipment Racks
H3120 8u-inch Rack

Ordering Information
Order No.

Description

H3120

86-inch rack

Includes:

o Two 19-inch RETMA racks

« Two eight-outlet power strips

» Cable management hardware
¢ Installation instructions

Physical Specifications

Height:

215 cm (86 in)

Depth:

57.5cm (23 in)

Width:

115 cm (46 in)

LKG~3549—-89A

The H3120 86-inch rack is two industry standard 19-inch RETMA racks attached side-by-side. The
H3120 ships complete with two steel racks, two 8-outlet power strips, miscellaneous hardware, and
installation instructions.

Fiber Optic Cahle Plant Product Descriptions

11-17

Satellite Equipment Room Equipment Racks (Con’t)

H3130-XX 72-inch Rack

Ordering Information
Order No.

=
A

-"fi

a2 i

H
Ni
\ 1k

/flfl

E0-H3130—C3

1M ’% |
;

‘

9 L\

‘

il
|

’

72-inch rack, open

active and open
passive bays

72-inch rack, open

active bay

72-inch rack, open
passive bay

E0-H3130—-CA

72-inch rack, enclosed

active and enclosed

Tilll

Description

E0-H3130-D3
S

hotlil

E0-H3130-CB

passive bays

| {

E0-H3130-C2

X 1

E0-H3130-D2

active bay

ULl

E0-H3130-X2

Side panels to

| /

Includes:

72-inch rack, enclosed

passive bay

enclose C2 or D2

Two 16-outlet power strips (220 V)
Physical Specifications

o 3550_0A

Heightt

178.8 cm (70.4 in)

Depth:

60.0 cm (23.6 in)

Width:

120.0 cm (47.2 in)

Weight:

E0-H3130-CA 154 kg

EO-H3130-CB 76 kg
The H3130 72-inch rack is two single bay 19-inch racks that are bolted together. It is available in
open or enclosed configurations or in a combination of both. Enclosed configurations include steel

side and rear panels, and safety glass front doors. Two 16-outlet power strips are also included.
Note: This rack is available only from DECDirect Europe.

11-18

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Remote Wall Enclosure for Fiber

Ordering Information

/
Q@
3.

Order No.
H3131-C

Includes:
+ Remote wall enclosure

* Splice label

Fiber routing rings

e Connector panels (2)

* Mounting hardware
¢ Instruction booklet

LKG-3542-89A

Physical Specifications

Height:
.

21.875 cm (8-3/4 in)

Width:

19.06 cm (7-5/8 in)

Depth:

7.5cm (3 in)

The remote wall enclosure for fiber is a wall-mountable module designed for the splicing, termination, and storage of fiber optic cable. This unit has a capacity of 12 fibers. The unit contains 2 cou-

pler panels (12 coupler total capacity), and 8 double-fiber routing rings. Units can be ganged
together for large installations.

The two supplied coupler panels can accommodate, but do not include, 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type
connector couplers (Order No. H3114-FC).

A splice adapter kit is available. Refer to the Auxiliary Items section for ordering information.

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Product Descriptions

11-19

2.5 mm Bayonet ST-type
Connector Termination Tool Kit

Ordering Information
Order No.
HB8102-AA (110 volt)
H8102-AC (220 volt)

Includes:

» Crimping tool

« Holder block

« Stripping tool

» Cleaving tool

+ Curing ovenr

» Scissors

* Microscope

« Glass plate

Polishing tool

e Conneclor hoiders

Eyeloupe

e Carrying case

Specitications

— Terminates H3114-FA field-installable connectors

— Tool kit is compatible with the AT&T ST2 series connector

— An intemational 220 volt version (Order No. H§102—-AC) s available
This tool kit contains all the tools needed to mount the connectors provided in the field-installable

2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector kit (Order No. H3114-FA).

Used in conjunction with the

HR102-AB consumables kit.

Replacement parts for kit replenishment are available directly from the suppliers listed in the
Auxiliary Items section.

11-20

DECcoannect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

2.5 mm Bayonet ST-type Connector Consumables Kit

Ordering Information
Order No.
H8102-AB

Includes:

¢ 5 pm polishing paper
1 um polishing paper
Wipes

Epoxy Dispensing Tools
Dispensing tips
Epoxy

This tool kit contains all the consumables needed to mount 100 of the 2.5 mm bayonet ST type connectors. Used in conjunction -vith the H8102-AA/-AC 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector termination tool kit and the H31i 4-FA field-installable 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector kit.
See the Auxiliary Items section for additional information.

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Product Descriptions

11-21

H9646—-XX DECconnect Communications Cabinet

Ordering Information
Order No.

Description

H9646—-EA

DECconnect Communications
Cabinet (110 V)

H9646—-EB

DECconnect Communications

Cabinet (220 V)

The H9646-EA/EB includes:
e Cabinet (enclosedfockable)
¢ Power strip
o Stabilizer feet
«

Installation instructions

Physical Specifications

Height:

151.3 cm (60.5 in)

Depth:

95 cm (38.0 in)

Width:

56.3 cm (22.5 in)

LKG— 3551-89A

The DECconnect Communications Cabinet is a stand-alone wiring cabinet suitable for the office
environment. This product is ideal for small sites that plan on expanding and require a secure
environment for their network products. The cabinet can accommodate a variety of active and
passive devices.

11-22

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Patch Cables

FDDI-to-FDDI Patch Cables

LKG-3760-80

Key

Left E)i'!_’_g_i&l_u Port

Crossover
;

(Flip)

Ordering Information
Order No.

Wiring Description

Length

BN24B—01

Crossover

1Tm33f)

BN24B-03

Crassover

3m@9f)

BN24B—E

Crossover

4.5m(14.85 1)

BN24B-10

Crossover

10m (32.811)

BN24B-20

Crossover

20m (65.6 ft)

BN24B-30

Crossover

30 m (98.4 ft)

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Product Descriptions

11-23

Patch Cables (Con'’t)

FDDI-to-FDDI Patch Cables (Con’t)
Th: FDDi-to-FDDI patch cable is available in several lengths: 1 meter (3.3 feet), 3 meters (9.8 feet),
4 = meters (14.85 feet), 10 meters (32.8 feet), 20 meters (65.5 feet) and 30 meters (98.4 feet). The

patch cable consists of a dual 62.5/125 pm fiber of round construction for flexibility. The FDDI
connectors have field-programmable keying and are supplied with tethered dust covers.
Physical Specifications

- Number of fibers: 2

— Core/clad diameter: 62.5/125 pm
- Cable minimum bend radius (inches) long term=1.5
— FDDI connector meets ANSI FDDI PMD requirements
— Bandwidth: 160/500 MHz—km for 850/1300 nm wavelength
- Chromatic Dispersion Requirements:

The zero dispersion wavelength and dispersion slope must fall below

the following pounds when plotted as wavelength (x points) versus
dispersion slope (v points) on a graph:

1295 nm, 0.105 ps/(nm%ekm)
1300 TM, 0.110 ps/(nm?ekm)
1348 nm, 0.110 ps/(nm”ekm)
1365 nm, 0.093 ps/(nm?ekn:}
Environmental Specifications

- Operating temperature range: —10° C to 55° C
~ Storage temperature range: —20° C to 70° C
— Operating relative humidity 1 wnge: 5% to 85%

— Storage relative humidity range: 5% to 95%

11-24

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Patch Cables (Con’t)
FDDI-to-2.5 mm Bayonet ST-type Connector Patch Cables

FDDI

Connector

LKG-3767-89

Ordering Information
Order No.

Description

BN24D—01

Tm(32ft)

BN24D-03

3m (9.9 f1)

BN24D—E

4.5m (14.85 f1)

BN24D-10

10m(32.81)

BN24D-20

20m (65.6 1t)

BN24D-30

30 m (98.4 ft)

F.ber Optic Cable Plant Product Descriptions

11-25

Patch Cables (Con’t)
FDDI-to-2.5 mm Bayonet ST-type Connector Patch Cables (Con’t)
Physical Specifications

— Number of fibers: 2

— Core/clad diameter: 62.5/125 pm
— Cable minimum bend radius (inches) long term=1.5
~ Bandwidth: 160/500 MHz—km for 850/1300 nm wavelengths

~ Chromatic Dispersion Requirements:
The zero dispersion wavelength and dispersion slope must fall below
the following bounds when plotted as wavelength (x points) versus
dispersion slope (v points) on a graph:

1295 nm, 0.105 ps/(nm2ekm)
1300 nm, 0.110 ps/(nm?ekm)
1348 nm, 0.110 ps/(nm?ekm)
1365 nm, 0.093 ps/(nmzvkm)
Environmental Specifications

~ Operating temperature range: —10° C to 55° C

— Storage temperature range: —20° C to 70° C
~ Operating relative humidity range: 5% to 85%
— Storage relative humidity range: 5% to 95%
The FDDI-to-2.5 mmbayonet ST-type connector patch cable is available in several lengths: I meter

(3.2 feet), 3 meter (9.9 feet), 4.5 meter (14.85 feet), 10 meter (32.8 feet), 20 meter (65/6 feet) and 30
meter (98.4). It consists of a dual 62.5/125 pm fiber of zipcord construction for flexibility. Each

patch cable is color coded with red and black connector boots for easy identification. The FDDI

connector is coded with a black identification mark that corresponds with the 2.5 mm bayonet STtype connector black boot for easy line tracing. The FDDI connector has field-programmable keying and is supplied with an integral dust cover.

11-26

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Patch Cables (Con’t)
Dual 2.5 mm Bayonet ST-type Connector Patch Cables

LKG-3770-89

Ordering Information
Ordetr No.

Description

BN24E-01

1m(3.2#)

BN24E—03

3m (9.9

BNZ24E4E

4.5m (14.85 ft)

BN24E-10

10m (32.8 ft)

BN24E-20

20m (65.6 ft)

BN24E-30

30m (98.4 ft)

Physical Specifications

- Number of fibers:

- Core/clad diameter: 62.5/125 um

— Cable minimum bend radius (inches): long term=1.5
- Bandwidth: 160/500 MHz—km for 850/1300 nm wavelengths
-~ Chromatic Dispersion Requirements:

The zero dispersion wavelength and dispersion slope must fall below
the following bounds when plotted as wavelength (x points) versus
dispersion slope (v points) on a graph:

1295 nm, 0.105 ps/(nmZekm)
1300 nm, 0.110 ps/{nm?ekm)
1348 nm, 0.110 ps/(nm?ekm)
1365 nm, 0.093 ps/(nmZekm)

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Product Descriptions

11-27

Patch Cables (Con’t)

Dual 2.5 mm Bayonet ST-type Connector Patch Cables (Con’t’
Environmental Specifications

- Operating temperature range: —10° Cto 55° C

— Storage temperature range: —20° C to 70° C
- Operating relative humidity range: 5% to 85%

— Storage relative humidity range: 5% to 95%
The dual 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector patch cable is available in several lengths: 1 meter, 3
meters, 4.5 meters, 10 meters, 20 meters, and 30 meters. It consists of a dual 62.5/125 um fiber of
zipcord construction for flexibility. Each patch cable is color coded with red and black connector
boots for easy identification. The zipcord can also be “ripped downTM to create two separate patch
cables.

11-28

DECconnect System Fiber Optlic Planning and Configuration

Cables for Horizontal Wiring
4-Fiber Cable (Light-Duty)
Ordering Information
Order No.

Description

Application

17-02432~01

Plenum

Splicing, light-duty pulling

17-02433-01

PVC

Splicing, light-duty pulling

Length supplied as requested by the customer.
Specifications

— Number of fibers: 4
~ Core/clad diameter: 62.5/125 pm

-~ Cable outside diameter (inches): 0.180 nominal
-~ Maximum pulling tension (Ibs): 100
- Cable minimum bend radius (inches). short term=2.0 long term=4.0

- Individual buffered fiber bend radius (inches): long term=0.75
~ Insertion loss: 3.75/1.5 dB/km at 850/1300 mn wavelengihs

— Flammability: PVC meets UL Type OFNR requirements; plenum meets UL Type OFNP
requirements

- Bandwidth: 160/500 MHz—~km for 850/1300 nm wavelengths
- Chromatic Dispersion Requirements:
The zero dispersion wavelength and dispersion slope must fall below
the following bounds when plotted as wavelength (x points) vetsus
dispersion slope (v points) on a graph:

1295 nm, 0.105 ps/(nm?ekm)
1300 nm, 0.110 ps/(nm”ekm)
1348 nm, 0.110 ps/(nm-ekm)
1365 nm, 0.093 ps/(nm?ekm)
Environmental Specifications

Operating \emperature range: —10° C to +55° C

Storage temperature range: —40° C to +70° C
Operating relative humidity range: 5% to 85%
Storage relative humidity range: 5% to 95%

The 4-fiber light-duty cable contains four 62.5/125 micron fibers. The fibers are buffered up to 900
microns, which in addition to providing fiber protection also facilitates fiber identification through
color coding. The fibers are stranded, covered by an aramid yarn and an overjacket of either PVCor
plenum-grade thermoplastic. according to the application.

Note: These cables are not available through DECdirect USA. Contact Anixter Bros. Inc.

(approved cable manufacturers) or other authorized DECconnect System distributors.

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Product Descriptions

11-29

Cables for Horizontal Wiring (Con’t)
4-Fiber Cable (Heavy-Duty)
Ordering Information
Order No.

Description

Application

17-02491-01

Plenum

Connectorization, heavy-duty pulling

17-02490-01

PVC

Connectorization. heavy-duty pulling

Length supplied as requested by the customer.
Physical Speclfications

- Number of fibers: 4

~ Core/clad diameter: 62.5/125 pm
— Cable outside diameter (inches): 0.235 nominal
—~ Maximum pulling tension (Ibs): 250
~ Cable minimum bend radius (inches): short term= 3.0, long term=5.0
- Individual buffered fiber bend radius (inches): long term=0.75
— Insertion loss: 3.75/1.5 dB/km at 850/1300 nm wavelengths

~ Flammability: PVC meets UL Type OFNR requirements; plenum meets UL Type OFNP
requirement

— Bandwidth: 160/500 MHz-km for 850/1300 nm wavelengths
~ Chromatic Dispersion Requirements:
The zero dispersion wavelength and dispersion slope must fall below
the following bounds when plotted as wavelength (x points) versus
dispersion slope (v points) on a graph:

1295 nm, 0.105 ps/(nmZekm)
1300 nm, 0.110 ps/(nmZekm)
1348 nm, 0.110 ps/(nm°ekm)
1365 nm, 0.093 ps/(nm’ekm)
Environmental Specitications

Operating temperature range: —10° C to +55° C

Storage temperature range: —40° C to +70° C
Operating relative humidity range: 5% to 85%

Storage relative humidity range: 5% to 95%
The 4-fiber heavy-duty cable contains four 62.5/125 micron fiber subunits. Each 900 micron buff-

ered fiber is covered by an aramid yarn, and by an inner jacket of either PVC or plenum-grade thermoplastic, according to the application. An overjacket of PVC or plenum-grade thermoplastic is
applied over cabled bundles containing a central strength member.
Note: These cables are not available through DECdirect USA. Contact Anixter Bros. Inc.

(approved cable manufacturers) or other authorized DECconnect System distributors.

11-30

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Building Backbone Cables
12-Fiber Building Backbone Cable (Heavy-Duty)
Ordering Information

Order No.

Description

Application

17-02535-01

Plenum

Connectorization, heavy-duty pulling

17-02534-01

PVC

Connectorization, heavy-duty pulling

Length supplied as requested by the customer.
Physical Specifications

~ Number of fibers: 12

— Core/clad diameter: 62.5/125 pm
— Cable outside diameter (inches): 0.425 nominal
~ Maximum pulling tension (lbs): 125
- Cable minimum bend radius (inches): short term=6.0 long term=10.0
~ Individual buffered fiber bend radius (inches): long term=0.75
- Insertion loss: 3.75/1.5 dB/km at §50/1300 nm wavelengths

— Flammability: PVC meets UL Type OFNR requirements; plenum meets UL Type OFNP
requirements

~ Bandwidth: 160/500 MHz—km for 850/1300 nm wavelengths
— Chromatic Dispersion Requirements:

The zero dispersion wavelength and dispersion slope must fall below
the following bounds when plotted as wavelength (x points) versus
dispersion slope (v points) on a graph:

1295 nm, 0.105 ps/(nm>ekm)
1300 nm. 0.110 ps/(nm>ekm)
1348 nm, 0.110 ps/(nmZekm)
1365 nm. 0.093 ps/(mnZekm)
Environmentai Specifications

— Operating temperature range: —10° C to +55° C

— Storage temperature range: —40° C to +70° C
- Operating relative humidity range: 5% to 85%

- Storage relative humidity range: 5% to 95%

The 12-fiber building backbone cable contains twelve 62.5/125 micron fibers. Each fiber is covered
by an aramid yam and an inner jacket of either PVC or plenum-grade thermoplastic, according to
the application. An overjacket of PVC or plenum-grade thermoplastic is applied over cabled
bundles containing a central strength member.

Note: These cables are not available through DECdirect USA. Contact Anixter Bros. Inc.
(approved cable manufacturers) or other authorized DECconnect System distributors.

Fiher Optic Cable Plant Product Descrintions
i

11-31

Building Backbone Cables (Con’t)
12-Fiber Building Backbone Cable (Light-Duty)
Ordering Information
Order No.

Description

Application

17-02537-01

Plenum

Splicing, light-duty

17-02536-01

PVC

Splicing, light-duty

Length supplied as requested by the customer.
Physical Specifications

— Number of fibers:

— Core/clad diameter: 62.5/125 pm
~ Cable outside diameter (inches): §.290 nominal
-~ Maximum pulling tension (Ibs): 125

— Cable minimum bend radius (inches): short term=2.5 long term=5.0
- Individual buffered fiber bend radius (inches): long term=0.75

- Insertion loss: 3.75/1.5 dB/km at 850/1300 nm wavelengths
— Flammability: PVC meets UL Type OFNR requirements; plenum meets UL Type OFNP
requirements

- Bandwidth: 160/500 MHz-km for 850/1300 nm wavelengths
- Chromatic Dispersion Requirements:
The zero dispersion wavelength and dispersion slope must fall below
the following bounds when plotted as wavelength (x points) versus
dispersion slope (v points) on a graph:

1295 nm, 0.105 ps/(nm?ekm)
1300 nm, 0.110 ps/(nm®ekm)
1348 nm. 0.110 ps/(nm20km)
1365 nm, 0.093 ps/(nm’ekm)
Environmental Specifications

- Operating temperature range: —10° C to +55° C

- Storage temperature range: —40° Cto +70° C
- Qperating relative humidity range: 5% to 85%

- Storage relative humidity range: 5% to 95%

The 12-fiber building backbone cable contains twelve 62.5/125 micron fibers. The fibers are buffered up to 900 microns, which in addition to providing fiber protection also facilitates fiber identification through color coding. The fibers are stranded around a nonrigid central strength member,

covered by an aramid yam and an overjacket of either PVC or plenum-grade thermoplastic, according to the application.

Note: These cables are not available through DECdirect USA. Contact Anixter Bros. Inc.

(approved cable manufacturers) or other authorized DECconnect System distributors.

11-32

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Building Backbone Cables (Con’t)
6-Fiber Building Backbone Cable (Light-Duty)
Ordering Information
Order No.

Description

Application

17-02538-01

Plenum

Splicing, light-duty

17-02539-01

PVC

Splicing, light-duty

Length supplied as requested by the customer.
Physical Specifications

— Number of fibers: 6

— Core/clad diameter: 62.5/125 pm
~ Cable outside diameter (inches): 0.220 nominal
— Maximum pulling tension (Ibs):

125

— Cable minimum bend radius (inches): short term=2.0 long term=4.0
— Individual buffered fiber bend radius (inches): long term=0.75
- Insertion loss: 3.75/1.5 dB/km at 850/1300 nm wavelengths
~ Flammability: PVC meets UL Type OFNR requirements; plenum meets UL Type OFNP
requirements

- Bandwidth: 160/500 MHz—km for 850/1300 nm wavelengths
— Chromatic Dispersion Requirements:
The zero dispersion wavelength and dispersion slope must fall below
the following bounds when plotted as wavelength (x points) versus

dispersion slope (v points) on a graph:

1295 nm, 0.105 ps/(nmZekm)
1300 nm, 0.110 ps/(nm2ekm)
1348 nm, 0.110 ps/(nmZekm)
1365 nm, 0.093 ps/(nm?ekm)
Environmental Specifications

— Operating temperature range: —10° C to +55° C

— Storage temperature range: —40° C to +70° C
— Operating relative humidity range: 8% to 85%

— Storage relative humidity range: 5% to 95%
The 6-fiber building backbone cable contains six 62.5/125 micron fibers. The fibers are buffered up
to 900 microns, which in addition to providing fiber protection also facilitates fiber identification

through color coding. The fibers are stranded around a nonrigid central strength member, covered
by an aramid yam and an overjacket of either PVC or plenum-grade thermoplastic, according to the
application.
Note: These cables are not gvailabie through DECdirect USA. Contact Anixter Bros. Inc.

(approved cable manufacturers) or other authorized DECconnect System distributors.

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Product Descriptions

11-33

Building Backbone Cables (Con’t)
6-Fiber Building Backbone Cable (Heavy-Duty)
Ordering Information
Order No.
17-02540-01

Description
Plenum

Application
Connectorization, heavy-duty pulling

17-02541-01

pvC

Connectorization, heavy-duty pulling

Length supplied as requested by the customer.
Physlical Specitications

~ Number of fibers: 6

- Core/clad diameter: 62.5/125 pm
- Cable outside diameter (inches): 0.280 nominal
~ Maximum pulling tension (1bs): 250
~ Cable minimum bend radius (inches): short term=4.0, long term=6.0
- Individual buffered fiber bend radius (inches): long term=0.75
- Insertion loss: 3.75/1.5 dB/km at 850/1300 nm wavelengths

— Flammability: PVC meets UL Type OFNR requirements; plenum meets UL Type OFNP
requirements

- Bandwidth: 160/500 MHz—km for 850/1300 nm wavelengths
- Chromatic Dispersion Requirements:

The zero dispersion wavelength and dispersion slope must fall below
the following bounds when plotted as wavelength (x points) versus
dispersion slope (v points) on a graph:

1295 nm, 0.105 ps/(nmZekm)
1300 nm, 0.110 ps/(nm?ekm)
1348 nm, 0.110 ps/(nmZekm)
1365 nm, 0.093 ps/(nm?ekm)
Environmental Specitications

~ Operating temperature range: —10° C to +55° C
— Storage temperature range: —40° Cto +70° C
— Operating relative humidity range: 5% to 85%
— Storage relative humidity range: 5% to 95%

The 6-fiber building backbone cable contains six 62.5/125 micron fiber subunits. Each fiber is cov-

ered by an aramid yam and an inner jacket of either PVC or plenum-grade thermoplastic, according
to the application. An overjacket of PVC or plenum-grade thermoplastic is applied over cabled
bundles containing a central strength member.

Note: These cables are not available through DECdirect USA. Contact Anixter Bros. Inc.,
(approved cable manufacturers) or other authorized DECconnect System distributors.

11-34

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Fiber Transition Enclosure Kit
Ordering Information
See note below.
Includes:

o Base
e Cover

Cable clamps
Grommets

Splice organizer trays

Wall mounting bracket

LKG-3543-89A

Physical Specifications

Heightt

12.5cm(5in)

Length:

22.5cm (22.51n)

Width:

13.75 cm (5.5 in)

The fiber transition enclosure kit is a sealable unit used for splicing indoor and outdoor fiber optic
cables in building entrance and noncorrosive aerial applications. An optional housing is available
for buried and underground applications. The unit is wall- or rack-mountable and can accommodate
indoor or outdoor cables up to 144 mechanical splices or 192 fusion splices.
Lightning protection and grounding features are incorporated into the design, allowing both nonisolated and isolated unit/cable grounding.

Refer to the Auxiliary Items section for accessory items for this enclosure. Additional cable sealing

grommets are required. Select these grommets after determining the cables to be used.

Nofe: This item is not available through DECdirect USA. Contact Anixter Bros. Inc., AT&T, or

other authorized DECconnect System distributors.

Fiber Optic Cabie Plant Product Descriptions

11-35

Auxiliary Iltems

2.5 mm Bayonet Connector Kit
Digital Order No. H3114-FA
Accessory

2.5 mm ST2 Connector

Supplier

AT&T

Supplier P/N

105 143 911

Qty

Description

PVC Buffer Tubing and Unit Splitter
Note: This accessory must be purchased from the supplier.

Accessory
PVC Buffer Tubing and
Unit Splitter

Suppiier
AT&T

Supplier P/N
105 317 549

Qty

Description

Used to buffer 125 micron fiber for field installation of connectors on
coated fibers only. Con-

tains enough material to
buffer 100 fibers (average of 21” per fiber). Includes unit splitter for
blocking and organizing

fiber termination of outdoor cable at patch panel.

11-36

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuraiion

2.5 mm Bayonet Connector Tool Kit
Digital Order No. H8102-AA/AC
Accessory

Supplier

Supplier P/N

Qty

[102A crimping tool

AT&T

| 104 389 903

200A curing oven

AT&T

104 055 058

]

300B microscope

AT&T

104 412 077

400B polishing tool

AT&T

105 246 185

MSN-(}8-5BS$ stripping tool

AT&T

105 257 414

600A connector holders

AT&T

104 153 937

7T00A stripping tool

AT&T

104 278 478

971-A holder blocks

AT&T

104 229 398

975A cleaver tool

AT&T

103 808 770

Scissors

AT&T

105 257 364

6-inch scale

AT&T

105 257 356

Alcohol bottle

AT&T

105 257 463

Instruction manual

AT&T

845831 114

Polishing glass plate

AT&T

105075618

Carrying case

AT&T

845 769 264

Stripping tool (R4366)

AT&T

105 114 581

Description

2.5 mm Bayonet Connector Consumablas Kit
Digital Order No. H8102—-AB

Accessory

Supplier

Supplier P/N

Qty

Texwipes

AT&T

105 205 678

250

Music wire in vial

AT&T

105 071 013

Dispensing tips

AT&T

105 157 879

Epoxy

AT&T

105 489 355

Polishing paper (type A)

AT&T

105 488 175

100

Polishing paper (type C)

AT&T

105 076 798

100

Fiber Optic Cable Piant Product Descriptions

Description

11-37

Splice Tool Kit
Digital Order No. H3114-FD

Accessory

Supplier

Suppller P/N

Qty

Base and splice tool

80-6104-4365-9

Cleaving tool

80-6104-4364-2

Splice tool

80-6104-4363-4

Cable strippers

80-6104-4314-7

Cleaning alcohol bottle

80-6104-4329-5

Instruction manual

78-6900-1804-5

Scissors

80-6104-4754-4

No-Nik fiber stripper

80-6104-4808-8

80-6104-4809-6

80-6105-7014-7

Pipe cleaners

80-6104-4349-3 | 50/pkg

Lint-free cloth

80-6104-4324-6 | 100/pkg

Magnifier, cleaver fiber

80-6104-4799-9

Splice tool hardware only

80-6104-4332-9

Video NTSC VHS (USA)

80-6104-4814-6

Instruction

D/i(ie() PAL VHS (Europe)

80-6104-5374-4

Instruction

Accessory

Supplier

Supplier P/N

Qty

Dorran mechanical splice

80-6105-7012-2

hardware

Description

Does not include splice

tool.

(0.008)

Epoxy dispensing tool with
coupling gel and dispensing
tip

Mandrel tool for 45 mm

Dorran #08-009-78

splice

inspection

Splice Kit
Digital Order No. H3114-FG
Description

45 mm mechanical
splice.
Dorran #07-000-75

In-line protective splice

RIY|

80-6104-5374-0

caover

11-38

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Termination Shelf
Digital Order No. H3107-K
Accessory

Supplier

Supplier P/N

Qty

Description

1000 ST connector 1x6 unit

AT&T

105 392 605

1000 ST connector 1x6 unit

AT&T

105 428 486

12A1 clamps

AT&T

104 384 490

1/cable

1x6 for biconics

AT&T

105 383 830

Connector coupler panel

1x6 for biconics

AT&T

105 428 478

Connector coupler panel

1x6 for SMA

AT&T

105 428 239

Connector coupler panel

Qty

Description

{Outdoor cable clamp

Splice Sheif
Digital Order No. H3107-G
Accessory
Fusion splice tray

Supplier

Supplier P/N

AT&T

105 339 899

AT&T

105 339 907

AT&T

104 384 490

1/cable

(LT1A-F/F)
Mechanical splice tray
(LTIA-M/M)
12A1 clamps

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Product Descriptions

11-39

Storage Shelt
Digital Order No. H3107-H

~Accessory

12A0 clamps

Supplier

AT&T

Supplier P/N

104 384 490

Qty

Description

1/cable

Combination Shelf
Digital Order No. H3107-J

Accessory

Supplier

Supplier P/N

Qty

12A1 clamps

AT&T

104 384 490

I/cable

1000 ST connector 1x6 unit

AT&T

105 392 005

1000 ST connector 1x6 unit

AT&T

105 428 386

Fusion splice tray

AT&T

105 339 899

AT&T

105 339 907

Description

(LT1A-F/F)

Mechanical splice tray
(LTIA-M/M)

Remote Wall Enclosure for Fiber
Digital Order No. H3131-C

- WT\ccessnr_\'

Supplier

Supplier P/N

Qty

[12A1 clamps

AT&T

104 384 490

1/cable

10A ST coupler panel

AT&T

104 141 858

Coupler panel blank

AT&T

105 276 570

D181706 mechanical splice
adaptor

AT&T

105 289 656

1/12
fibers

Mechanical splice organizer

AT&T

105 356 570

10/pkg

AT&T

105 289 664

1/16

Description

tray

D181707 fusion splice

adaptor

fibers

Fusion splice holder

AT&T

105 356 562

10/pkg

Dual unit mounting bracker

AT&T

105 483 218

1/2 units | For ganged installations

1-40

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Fiber Transition Enclosure Kit
Based on the AT&T UCB-1 concept:

Consult AT&T for technical assistance with the UCB~| implementation.

Consult Hysol Corporation for proper implementation of cable clamping
through grip and grommet kits.

AT&T
The following is a brief listing of accessories available from AT&T:

ACCeSSOry

Supplier

Supplier P/N

Qty

UCB-1

AT&T

103 921 946

Closure gasket

AT&T

845 628 775

Blank plugs

AT&T

845 771 252

3-ounce B sealant

AT&T

400 494 811

AT&T

105 040 661

51B wall mounting bracket

AT&T

100 013 705

UC-SS/F1 fusion splice tray

AT&T

104 375 063

AT&T

105 037 550

Description

Complementary Products:
UC-SS/MI mechanical
splice tray

kit

2000/L.G 7/20 outer closure

For underground or

buried applications
For cable clamping of 0.41 inch outside diameter cable:

UC-41 grommet and grip kit

AT&T

103 922 035

Can accommodate rodent and lightning proof
designs

UC-41/41 grommet and grip

AT&T

kit

105 150 247

Accommodates two

cables of 0.41 inch outside diameter

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Product Descriptions

11-41

Auusun

Supplier

Supplier P/N

Qty

Description

For cable clamping of 0.48 inch outside diameter cable:

UC-48 g;bmmet and grip kit

AT&T

103 922 043

For crossply sheath

ribbon cable without
sheath terminating

hardware and LightpackTM cable with 50 or
more fibers including
rodent and lightning
protection.

UC-—41/48 grommet and grip
kit

AT&T

105 150 254

Accommodates one
cable of 0.41 inch outside diameter and 1

cable of 0.48 inch outside diameter.

For cable clamping of 0.50 inch outside diameter cable:

UC-50 LXE grommet and

AT&T

105 389 258

grip kit

For cable clamping of 0.58 inch outside diameter cable:

' UC-58 LXE grommet and

AT&T

105 439 376

grip kit

For cable clamping of 0.59 inch outside diameter cable:

UC-59 grommet and grip kit

AT&T

105 323 679

Accominodates crossply
ribbon cable with guar-

anteed fiber count greater than 72.

For cable clamping of 0.65 inch outside diameter cable:

UC-65 grommet and grip kit

AT&T

103 922 050

Accommodates single
ply sheath, 3 unit

stranded cable

1142

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Supplier

Supplier P/N

Qty

Description

Accommodates crossply

For cable clamping of 0.75 inch outside diameter cable:

UC 75 grommet and grip kit

AT&T

103 922 068

sheath, 3 unit s* anded

cable

For cable clamping of 0.79/0.82 inch outside diameter cable:
UC-79 grommet and grip kit

AT&T

103 922 076

Rodent/lightning
sheath, 3 unit stranded
cable

UC-82 grommet and grip kit

AT&T

104 145 016

Single ply sheath, 6 unit

stranded cable
L.

For cable clamping of 0.95/0.98 inch outside diameter cable:

UC-98 grommet and grip kit

AT&T

104 145 024

Rodent/lightning
sheath, 6 unit stranded
cable

UC-95/98 grip kit

AT&T

845 771 385

For cable clamping building cable:

BC12-1 grommet kit

AT&T

104 316 716

One LGBC-012A cable

BC12-2 grommet kit

AT&T

104 316 708

Two LGBC-012A
cables

BC6-3 grommet kit

AT&T

104 316 690

Three LGBC-012A

cables
BC4-6 grommet kit

AT&T

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Product Descriptions

104 316 658

Six LGBC-012A cabics

11-43

Hysol

For specialized grommet and grip requirements and for other enclosure and cable accommodating,

contact Hysol at the following address:
Hysol

Aerospace and Industrial Products Division
164 Folly Mill Road

Seabrook, NH 03874
Attn: Technical services

The following is a brief listing of accessories available from Hysol:

Access]vry Description
Grip block insert

Supplier
Hysol

Supplier P/N
CL-0060

Qty

Description

10/box |Accommodates 0.230
inch to 0.405 inch
cable, or 5.8 mm to 10.3
mm cable.

Grip block insert

Hysol

CL-0061

10/box | Accommodates 0.410
inch to 0.585 inch
cable, or 10.4 mm to
14.9 mm cable.

Grip block insert

Hysol

CL-0062

10/box |Accommodates 0.590
inch to 0.765 inch

cable, or 15.0 mm to 9.4
mm cable.

Fiber optic .able adaptor kit

Hysol

CL-0601

Diameter for 0.230 inch
to 0.405 inch cable.

Fiber optic cable adaptor kit

Hysol

CL-0602

Diameter for 0.410 inch
to 0.585 inch cable.

Fiber optic cable adaptor kit

Hysol

CL-0603

Diameter for 0.590 inch
to 0.765 inch cable.

1144

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

SMA Accessories

for your SMA interconnection needs, Digital recommends that you contact one of the following:
Amphenol Corporation
1925 Ohio Street

Lisle, IL 60532

(312) 810-5636
AMP Incorporated
Worldwide Headquarters

Harrisburg, PA 17105

(717) 5640100

Mixed Connector Patch Cables, Alternate Fiber Size
Patch Cables, and Custom Lengths
For cables requiring .i‘fferent fiber optic connectors (SMA, Biconic, and ST), or fcr patch cables requiring
.

100/140 or 50/125 fiber or custom lengths, contact one of the following:
AMP Incorporated
Worldwide Headquarters

Harrisburg, PA 17015

(717) 5640100
Computer Crafts
57 Thomas Rd.
Hawthome, NJ 07507

(201)423-3500
Anixter Bros.
4711 Golf Road

Skokie, IL 60076

(312)677-2600
1-800-323-8164

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Product Descriptions

11-45

Two-Fiber Zipcord Cable for Custom Patch Cable Use
Digital Pan No. 170249201
Contact one of the following:

Berk-Tek

Chromatic Technologies

Box 888

P.O. Box 578

RD 1

31 Hayward Street

New Holland, PA 17557

Franklin, MA 02038

(717) 354-6200

(508) 520-1200

L
-

Single-Mode Connectors and Consumables
Digital recommends using the AT&T STII single-mode connector. Contact AT&T for single-mode
information and consumables.

The ST2 single-mode connector can be used with the 2.5 mm bayonet connector tool kit in the DECconnect
Fiber Optic structured wiring.

DECconnect Labels for Cables and Patch Panels
Brady Part No. Brady TMK-1

Contact:
W. H. Brady Company

2221 W. Camden Road

P. 0. Box 2131
Milwaukee, W1 53201

(414) 351-6630
In Wisconsin; 1-414-228-1456
FAX 1-800-292-2289

1146

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Identification Washers (red and black)
Red and black identification washers used in DECconnect labeling can be obtained from:
Computer Crafts
57 Thomas Rd.

Hawthorne, NJ 07507

(201) 423-3500

Part No. RI-11389 (package of 100 red and 100 black washers)

Alternative Pigtail Constructions
®

ST-type pigtails using only 900 micron buffered fiber are available in 12 different colors and in
any desired length.

Pigtails with other connector types (SMA, Biconic, etc.) are available on request.

Contact one of the folowing:

Computer Crafts

57 Thomas Rd.
Hawthome, NJ 07507
(201)423-3500
AMP Incorporated
Worldwide Headquarters

Harrisburg. PA 17015
(717)564-0100

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Product Descriptions

11-47

Alternative 2.5 mm Bayonet Connectors for 62.5/125 Fiber
The following suppliers have alternative 2.5 mm Bayonet Connectors approved for use in
DECconnect System Fiber Optic structured wiring.

These connectors require the use of the individual supplier’s tool kits and assembly procedures.
Contact the individual suppliers for more information:
OFTI:

S Fortune Drive
Billerica, MA (1821

(508) 663-6629
AT&T:

2000 Northeast Expressway

Norcross, GA 30071
1-800-824-1931

3M Fiber Optic products:
10 Industrial Way East

Eatontown, NJ 07724
(201) 5440938
Amphenol Fiber Optics:

Amphenol Corporation
1925 Ohio Street

Lisle, IL. 60532

{312) 810-5636

AMP Incorporated
Worldwide Headquarters

Harrisburg, PA 17105
(717) 564-0100

1148

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Alternative Mechanical Splices
The following suppliers have alternative mechanical splices approved for use in the

DECconnect System Fiber Optic structured wiring.
These splices require the use of the individual supplier’s tool kit, consumables, and procedures.
Contact the individua! suppliers for more information:
3M/Dorran Mechanical Splice:
3M Fiber Optic Products
10 Industrial Way East

Eatontown, NJ 07724

(201) 544-0938
Siecor “C”” Splice:
Siecor

489 Siecor Park
Hickory, NC 286030489

(704) 327-5000
AT&T Rotary Mechanical Splice:

AT&T

2000 Northeast Expressway

Norcross, GA 30071
1-800-824-1931

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Product Descriptions

1149

Alternative Patch Panels

Each of the following suppliers offer a complete patch panel system approved for use in DECconnect
fiber optic structured wiring:
AT&T

2000 Northeast Expressway
Norcross. GA 30071
1-800-824-1931

BICC Network Solutions, Inc.*

910 Boston Turnpike Road
Shrewsbury, MA 01545

(508) 842-7300

*The BICC patch panel system is not compatible with the DECconnect patch panel compcnents.

Contact the supplier for additional information.

11-50

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Approved Fiber Optic Cable Manufacturers
The following manufacturers have fiber optic cable approved for use in the DECconnect System
Fiber Optic structured wiring. Contact Digital Equipment Corporation for additional authorized
manufacturers.

AT&T
2000 Northeast Expressway
Norcross, GA 30071

1-800-824-1931
Siecor
489 Siecor Park

Hickory, NC 28603-0489

(704) 327-5000
BELDEN/Cooper Industries
P.O. Box 1980
Richmond, IN 47375

(317)983-5200
Chromatic Technologies
P.O. Box 578

31 Hayward St.

Franklin, MA 02038
(508) 520-1200

Fiber Optic Cable Plant Product Descriptions

11-51

FONVH V9000600000000 0800068.090000860.00000.00098060,4
POV GO OO N OGN G GE 000800000000 80000900890.4000003

PONGIF NGO

IO 0009800000 000808 888000888688 0002804

b 00000050000 06560898089900800000888990848994
PO EP PSSP0 000.00000.00960080060096000090804888
POD000
O UUIINS 0.0 0.90.809.0048.0009 0000000800908

KAXXAAKAKT.

10:0.050:0.0.9.0.0.8.0.00.9.0.0.9.080.900.6900
04

XHAXXAXKKXK.

0.5.6.0.6.:6.6.0.808¢00008.6:6.8060994

D00:0.0.6.0006.40.80.80.95050$0000806480000¢
hi0:0:0.6:0.0.0¢.00,00.6.0.00090 6800800090984
XXXXXXXX
XXX XX K XX KX AR KA XXX ALK AKX
b90.09.0.0.9.69.0.6.6.0.0.0.0.9.08686089088.4

b859.0.00.0090.008990¢80.900.0450064
}90.0.0.0.0006.090.0.9.99068080064
h0.6.0.9.8.0.6.6.6.0.0.59.8.0,00088044
b0.8:0.0.0.9.8.6.0.0.90.8.0.904.9.0.09
04
P0.8:0.6.8.0.0.4.$.0.9.9.0.8.¢,9.0
¢4

$.9,0.0.9.9.9.9.¢.9.¢.6.8.4.9.0.9.¢
}9.:9:6.0.8.9.9.9.9.8.9.¢.9.9
XAXXXXXAXAXEX

XXXXXKXXXXXX

XXAXXXAXX
HXHUXKKX
HXHXKXX
XXX
X

X
XXX

XXXXX
XXXKXXXK

XAXAXXXXX
XYXAXAKXKXAXX

XRXAXKAXXAKAKK
XXAXKXAKAXKXXKKKXX

110.0.¢.:9.8.0.0.0.0.6.0.0.¢0.0.94
10.8:4.9.0.0.0:0.6.0.6.8.9.8.0.9.8.9

P0.0.0.0.99.0.9.9.0.9.09090600¢4
§0.0.0:0:0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.9.8.0,0.9,9:¢.9:4.04
$9.0.90.0:9.0.0.9.0.05.9.0.0.9.8.98.6.9.0.9
8.9

1.9.0:0.9:010.9:9.:0.9.0,:8.6.:9.9..0.8.0.0.9.0.8.9.8.9¢
P0.:0.0.9.0.0.6.0.:9.:0.0,89.90.0,9.0.9.0:¢.9,¢:9.0.984
).9.9:0.9.8:9.9.4.9.0.0.9.0.8.0.0.0.9.9.9.0.8.0.6.6.$.9.6.8.¢¢

}.0:9:9.6.0.0.6:0.8.0.9.0.9.0.0.0.0.:0.0.0.$:0.9.0.¢.0.0.0.8.6.8.¢4
19.9.0.0.0.0.0.8.9.0,:9.9.9.0.0.0.0.9.0.85.¢9.0.9.$,6.6.¢.0
8,$.4 .4
1. 8.0.9:9.6.0.9:0.0.:9.9.:6.8.9.:0
0.0 0 LR 9008090090 ¢
.4
I 010:3.0.9.000:8.00019.0.0
0 SO NEVES0.0.0.5.9.9.0.9.8.9.8.0 ¢
N SRR

RPL01078:00810:9:0.0.0.9.9.9:0.0.0:0.0.0:0:0.:00.9.0:0.9.9,0.0.9.0
¢ 8.0.9.8.88.¢.4
ERD0,0.0:0:9:0.919.9.0.9.0.0.9.9.0.9.0.00.0 $.0.90.86.0:¢.0.9:0:0.9.8.:0.8.$.9.6.9.9.¢ 4
RO910.0.6.0.6.6.0.¢.:0.8:6.8.089.9.0.0.9.6.9.6.000.9869.08.00.8.96408904684¢4

}9:0.9.9:6:010.9.0.400.:9.0,00.0.6.0.0.6.06.0.680.06,0$.99$9¢.86600860
699 ¢
}9.3.8.0.5.8:9.0.8.0.8.8:¢0.8.0.0.9.¢.69.0.0.9.9.0.0.6.0.0.¢.08.9.0.0.¢:9.0,0.0890990604

Ordering DECconnect System Fiber

Optic Components
This chapter contains blank order worksheets. Use these worksheets to order cable and

components needed for the structured wiring installation.

NOTE
Descriptions of the cables and components listed on the

order worksheets are provided in Chapter 10. Information about Digital’s communications components (both

active and passive) is available in the Networks and
Communications Buver's Guide.

12.1 Using the Order Worksheets
The order worksheets are organized by part number. Only Digital parts identified in Chapter 10 are listed in the worksheets. Make photocopies of the worksheets for ordering the
needed cables and components.

12.2 Compiling Order Information from the Design Worksheets
To use the order worksheets:
e
o

Organize the completed design worksheets by building and floor.
Use the worksheets to total the cables (types and lengths) and components
needed to build the passive portion of the structured wiring.

Enter the results in the order worksheets.

12-1

When the total requirements for the cable plant have been specified in the order
worksheets, contact a sales representative to review the requirements and to
place the order.

12.3 Component Sources
Use the following guidelines when ordering fiber optic cable plant components:
)

All items can be ordered through authorized distributors, such as Anixter Bros.
Inc. See Section 12.4 for the address and phone number of the distributor.

Items with order numbers — numbers beginning with H (H3107-J, for example)

or BN (BN2D-01, for example) — are also available through DECdirect USA.
¢

Auxiliary items can be ordered directly from the manufacturer (see Auxiliary
Items section in Chapter 11):

SMA accessories are available from Amphenol Corporation.

Mizxed connector patch cables, alternate fiber size patch cables, and custom
lengths are available from AMP Inc., Computer Crafts, and Anixter Bros.
Inc.

Single-mode connectors and consumables are available from AT&T.

Alternative 2.5 mm bayonet connectors are available from OFTI, AT&T,
IM Corporation, Amphenol Corporation, and AMP Inc.

Altermative mechanical splices are available from AT&T, 3M Corporation,
and Siecor.

12.4 Distributors and Manufacturers
Amphenol Corporation
1925 Ohio Street

Lisle, IL 60532

(312) 810-5636
AMP Incorporated
Worldwide Headqrarters

Harrisburg, PA 1705

(717) 5640100
AT&T

2000 Northeast Expressway

Norcross, GA 30071
1-800-824-1931

12-2

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Anixter Bros. Inc.
4711 Golf Road

Skokie, IL 60076

(312) 677-2600

1-800-323-8164

Berk-Tek

Box 888
RD. 1
New Holland, PA 17557
(717) 3546200

Chromatic Technologies
P.O. Box 578
31 Hayward Street
Franklin, MA 02038
(508) 520-1200
Computer Crafts
57 Thomas Rd.
Hawthome, NJ 07507
(201) 423-3500
HYSOL

Aerospace and Industrial Products Division
164 Folly Mill Road

‘

Seabrook, NH 03874

(603) 474-5541

Attn: Technical Services
OFTI

5 Fortune Drive
Billerica, MA 01821

(508) 663-6629
Siecor
489 Siecor Park

Hickory, NC 286030489
(704) 327-5000
3M Fiber Optic Products
10 Industrial Way East

Eatontown, NJ 07724
(201) 5440938

Ordering DECconnect System Fiber Optic Components

12-3

Option
Digitai PN

BN24B-01

Quantity

Description

Unit Price

Total Price

FDDI-to-FDDI Jumper
Crossover Cable
Im@3f)

BN24B-03

BN24B4E

FDDI-to-FDDI Jumper

BN24B-10

FDDI-to-FDDI Jumper
Crossover Cable
10m (32.8 ft)

BN24B-20

FDDI-to-FDDI Jumper
Crossover Cable

20 m (65.6 f1)
BN24B-30

FDDI-to-FDDI Jun.per

Crossover Cable
30 m (984 ft)
BN24D-01

FDDI-to-2.5 mm Bayonet

Connector Jumper Cable,
1 m (3.2 ft)
BN24D-03

FDDI-to-2.5 mm Bayonet
Connector Jumper Cable,
Im@O9f)

BN24D-4E

FDDI-to-2.5 mm Bayonet
Connector Jumper Cable,
4.5m (14.85 ft)

BN24D-10

FDDI-to-2.5 mm Bayonet

Connector Jumper Cable,
10m (32.8 ft)

BN24D-20

FDDI-to-2.5 mm Bayonet
Connector Jumper Cable,
20 m (65.6 ft)

BN24D-30

FDDI-to-2.5 mm Bayonet

Connector Jumper Cable,
30 m (98.4 ft)

124

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Option

Digital P/N

'BN24E-01

'BN24E-03

Description

Quantity

Unit Price

Total Price

Dual-2.5 mm Bayonet

Connector Jumper Cable,
Im@3.2ft)

Dual-2.5 mm Bayonet

BN24E-10

Dual-2.5 mm Bayonet

Connector Jumper Cable,
10 m (32.8 ft)
BN24E-20

Dual-2.5 mm Bayonet

Connector Jumper Cable,
20 m (65.6 ft)

BN24E-30

Dual-2.5 mm Bayonet
Connector Jumper Cable,

30 m (98.4 ft)

BN24E-4E

Dual-2.5 mm Bayonet
Connector Jumper Cable,
4.5m (14.85 ft)

EO0O-H3130-CA

72-inch Rack, enclosed
active and enclosed

passive bay!
E0O-H3130-CB
EO-H3130-C3

72-inch Rack, active and

passive bay, open!

72-inch Rack, open active

bay!

EO-H3130-D3
E0-H3130-D2
EO-H3130-C2

72-inch Rack, open

passive bay!

72-inch Rack, enclosed

passive bay!

72-inch Rack, enclosed

active bay!
E(0-H3130-X2

Side panels (for C2 or D2)

H3107-G

Splice Shelf

Ordering DECconnect System Fiber Optic Components

12-5

Option
Quantity

Digital P/N

Description

"H3107-H

Storage Shelf

TH3107-)

Combination Shelf

H3107-K

Termination Shelf

H3111-GA

Modular Office Wallbox Kit,

Unit Price

Total Price

color: DEC068 grey

(8 wallboxes per kit)

"H3111-GB

Modular Office Wallbox Kit,
color: white

(8 wallboxes per kit)
H3111-GC

Modular Office Wallbox Kit,
color: ivory

(8 wallbozxes per kit)
H3114-FA

Field-Installable 2.5 mm
Bayonet Fiber Optic

Connector Kit
(6 connectors per kit)

H3114-FC

2.5 mm Bayonet Connector

Coupler Kit

(12 couplers per kit)
H3114-FD

Splice Tool Kit

H3114-FE

FDDI-to-Dual 2.5 mm
Bayonet Connector Coupler
for the Modular Office
Wallbox (8 couplers per kit)

H3114-FF

Dual 2.5 mm Bayonet
Connector Coupler Panel for
the Modular Office Wallbox
(8 couplers per kit)

H3114-FG

Splice Kit
(12 splices per kit)

H3114-FH

Coupler Panel Kit for
Termination Shelf and
Combination Shelf
(12 loaded panels of

6 couplers per kit)

12-6

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Option

Digital P/N

Description

H3118-FA

2.5 mm Bayonet Connector
Pigtails (3 m length)

Quantity

Unit Price

Total Price

(6 pigtails per kit)
H3120

86-Inch Satellite Equipment
Room Rack

H3131-C

Remote Wall Enclosure for
Fiber

H8102-AA

2.5 mm Bayonet Connector
Termination Tool Kit
(110 volt)

H8102-AC

2.5 mm Bayonet Connector
Termination Tool Kit
(220 volt)

HE8102-AB

2.5 mm Bayonet Connector
Consumables Kit

H9646-EA

Office Communication
Cabinet (OCC) (100 volt)

H9646-EB

Office Communication

Cabinet (OCC) (220 volt)!

17-02432-01 4-Fiber Cable

(light-duty) Plenum?

17-02433-01 4-Fiber Cable

(light-duty) PVC?

17-02490-01

4-Fiber Cable

(heavy-duty) PVC?
17-02491-01 4-Fiber Cable

(heavy-duty) Plenum?

17-02534-01 12-Fiber Cable

(heavy-duty) PVC?
17-02535-01
17-02536-01

12-Fiber Cable

(heavy-duty) Plenum?
12-Fiber Cable

(light-duty) PVC?
17-02537-01

12-Fiber Cable

(light-duty) Plenum?
17-02433-01

6-Fiber Cable

(light-duty) Plenum?

Ordering DECconnect System Fiber Optic Components

12-7

‘Option

Digital P/N

Description

Quantity

17-02439-01 6-Fiber Cable

Unit Price

Total Price

(light-duty) PVC?

170254001

6-Fiber Cable

(heavy-duty) Plenum?
17-02541-01

6-Fiber Cable

22--00493-01

Fiber Transition Enclosure

(heavy-duty) PVC?
Kit?

I Available only from DECdirect Europe
2Available only from authorized distributors and manufacturers, such as Anixter Bros. Inc.
See Auxiliary Items section in Chapter 11 for additional accesscries and replacement parts.

12-8

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXK
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
OIS0 T 0.090.00068086000
000000 0.0.0.0.0.0.0.600689.868004
PO GO0 4000800000480
O 00.0.0:0.0.0.0.9:4.0.4.9:6.06.80.04
1O G 0.9.000.0.0,0.0.69.9.69.6.484
FO:0:0.0:0.0.0:6.0.0.9.9.0.9.9.9
KXUXKKXXAXKXKXKKX
KR AKERXHAKKKX
HXARXKXXXKKXX
XXKXXKXKK
XXXXXXX
S NXX
¥y

XXX

KXXXX

)9.6.9.9.9.¢4

h9.9:9.9.9.9.8.0.¢

XXKAXXAKXKXX

KEXXAXAXKXKXKKK

EXAXKIXXXXXEAKX

DO, 00.9.0.0.0.9.9.688.0980
KAXKXAXKAKXKXXKXAKKLKXX

XXXX
AX
KX KKKXK
XXXKX
XEXX
PO OD D D9.0.0.0.0.89.99.9800.6¢
PO O PPOEEP0.0.0.0.0:00.00908009.04

P 0000000 00000.05.00.008.000880
D00 000900.0000.0.0.0.0.60.988690000
HXA XK XXX X AKX XX KR KKK AR KKK EXKKXXX

NGO PO POV 00000000.0.048880.006.804¢
NS0 OPCOCVOIO VOO0 0.008:000800904
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXKXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
JXXXXXXXXXHKXXKXYXXKXHXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
EXX?XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

'“XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
“XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXKXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

Preinstallation Procedures
This chapter provides brief descriptions of the preinstallation project management taske that must be done between the time that the design process starts
and the installation is completed.
These general preinstallation and installation activities are usually organized

and supervised by a network project manager. This manager canr be the network
designer or someone who the designer works with in coordinating the designer’s
responsibilities.

The network project manager’s responsibilities include coordinating scheduling
and installation activity. This includes:
s

Creating the installation project plan

Ordering the equipment

Selecting th- installation contractor

Preparing the site for the installation activity and overseeing that activity

In addition, continuous supervision of the project by the network project manager can minimize delays by detecting problems and directing their correction
as early as possible. Without this level of project management, undetected proklems can result in an unreliable cable plant, customer dissatisfaction with the
installation activity or the installed cable plant, or unexpected expenser over the
functional life of the structured cable plant.

13.1 Create the Installation Project Plan
The installation project plan, which is used during the installation as a progress
report, consists of:

A list of required tasks showing the chronology and the person responsible

for the inception and completion of each task defined.
&

A complete set of the site and building floor plans as created or updated

during the design process, as well as copies of all diagrams (logical, concept,
network schematics, and footprints), connection maps (connection worksheets, connectivn cable maps, and crossconnect/interconnect maps), and
identifier worksheets. A set of design documents is needed for the customer,
as well as for all contractors and subcontractors involved in installing the
cable plant.

13.2 Order the Cable Plant Components
During the design process, bills of materials (BOMs) were created for all of the
components needed for the cable plant. These BOM components must be ordered, usually through the customer’s purchasing organization, well in advance
of the installation start date. In addition:

Check with the purchasing organization to learn the date the cable plant

components are scheduled to arrive. This information is critical to the installation schedule.

13-2

Establish a receiving and stocking area for materials and installation tools
as they arrive on site. For buildings that are under construction, a secure,
adequately sized space within an existing building or a storage trailer or
shed is required for the duration of the network installation.

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

13.3 Select a Network Installation Contractor

Whether selecting a sole source contractor or sending the installation out for
competitive bidding, it is important to have sound contracts and good work-

ing relationships with the contractors. It is also important to make sure that
the installation contractor has reviewed the DECconnect System Fiber Optic
Installation guide (EK-DECSY-FI) and agrees to follow the installation techniques and guidelines presented in that guide.

Additional criteria for selecting a installation contractor include:
s

Experience - ask for references to verify claims of expertise concerning ac-

tual or similar work.
®

Cost - remember that the lowest bid is not always the wisest choice. Cost is
only one component of the overall contractor selection. Extra money spent

on a quality installation pays off in network performance over the life of the
cable plant.
m

Availability - make sure that the contractor starts the work on the required

start date, and guarantees that the work will be completed by the scheduled
end date.

Warranty - find out for how long the contractor will warranty the installation. Use this as an indication of the contractor’s confidence in the work.

Testing - review the procedures and types of tools the contractor uses to test

and certify the installed system.
s

Documentation - make sure that the contractor provides as-built documen-

tation at the end of the installation that reflects the actual installation in
comparison with the design. A majority of the cabling will be hidden underground and behind walls. It is important for future maintenance and
growth that the cable plant is well labeled and documented.

Preinstailation Procedures

13-3

13.4 Prepare the Work Site and Oversee Installation

The following is a list of tasks that are involved in the overall preparation of the
work site for installation and in supervising and coordinating the install: tion:
s

Have a preinstallation meeting as close to the installation start date as pos-

sible. Include a walk-through of the site by the installation project manager,
the network designer, a customer representative, the general contractor, the
network installation contractor vendor, and any other people responsible for
the success of the installation.
»

For buildings under construction, inspect the site regularly and meet with
the general contractor before the cabling installation begins. Changes to the
original building design often occur as the structure is being constructed.
These changes can affcet such things as cable routing and equipment room
construction.

[Establish trash removal responsibilities and methods prior to the start of

the installation. This includes the disposal of toxic and nontoxic refuse materials.

Establish the available installation working hours. Determine whether the

work will be performed during regular day-shift hours or during off-shift
hours and weekends.
»

Establish access authorization to the site for the installation team. Make

sure that the installers have access to all areas where work is to be performed, including the equipment storage area.
w

Ensure that ac power and lighting will be available at the time equipment
i8 to be installed and tested in the equipment rooms.

13-4

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

‘

EORS PRSI

0
0
9.98.920349.0.999888
.65.8.0.9.80
80
O S0 0010010010.6

PRSI 006:8:6:310:8.0.9.0.0.0/0.0.8:¢.0.0.0.9.8.9.0.¢.089.9¢.¢8$9¢¢
EPP S

0:08.5.9°99319.01¢ 643100300099 9.:0.0.0.0.0.9,90.£99.¢.0800.9

PO ES SIS 09085000080.0.89.0.¢8869989.90088.00.9.4

OO0 00004989 6990060653000

088080889500004

PO 09:0.0.8.8.60:4:0.6.8.0.9:0.$.0.¢.6:0.¢.0.8.0.0.¢.0.49.:¢.62028
08

N
KRAK KKK LXK KK ARKAKANX
EARAKE
A KKK KRR
KAXRRA

PO 0.0°0.00.08.0.0.099.5.60909.9¢96¢8¢8
880980804
P 0. 03.8.9:90.0:9.0.0.8.0:8.0.8.6:0009.4909.98038.¢99.4

¢
118:09.819:0/0.3.0.9.9.6.9.8.$.0.8:90.¢.0.$.9.3.9.8.9.90.¢9
1900109.6/0.0:0.6.9.9.0.9.0.0.9.9,0.0.6:9$.086¢¢0

1’0000:0.6.8.0.9.9.0.0.8.9.0.¢.8.0.809
39960
19.0.9:0.0.9.0.0.0.0.9.0.0.0.0.9.0.¢.0.6.$.¢¢.9¢4

19:9:9.9.9.4:9.¢.9.94

10.9:0.:9.9.80.9.8:.4.9.8.0.0.9.9.9.0.0.9.¢.9,¢.04
b0

000 0¢.9.6:6.0.¢8.0.9.8.4.8.0.9.4¢

$09:0.89.9.8.0.0.0.0:9.9.0.0.9.0.9.9.04
L 0:8:0:93.6:0.¢.9.0.9.8.0.89.¢.0.¢.4
HEAKAKERXKXARKKKKKX

XANXKXKARXXKXXXX
XAAXAKARXKXXKX

.0.9:0.0.9.:0.8.¢.4

XXXXEXX
XAKKX

XXX

XXXXX
XXXXXKX

XEXXXXXXX

XXXKXXXXXEKX
AXXXAAXAXKXXK

):0.9.8:0.6.4.6.0.0.6,0.6.9.9.4
}.0.8.0.8.6.4.0.6.9.9.9.88.8
994

$9.0.0.0.6.0.8.0.9.0.0.90.8.0.88¢
1.6.6:0.6.0.0.¢.9.9.9.6.8.9.0.9.0.9.0.904

}9:0.9.0.9.0.0.0.0.0.¢.0.0.4.6.¢¢0.0.0.42.04
1.0.6.0.0.9.0.0.9.0.9.:6,0.8.¢.9.9.9.9.0.0.9.0.4.94

9,04
)8.9.0:0.0:0.8:0.0.0:0.9:0.9.0.0.8.0.9.8.9.8.99
19.0.0.9.0.6:0.9.:6.0.0.:6.9.9.0.9.9.:0.09.0.9.9.9.9.9.994
). 9.0.0:6.0:6.9.0.9.0.0.0.0.0.:0.9.9.9.0.0.9.9.:9.9.9.9.09.0.64
1:9:0.9.9.60.9.9:6.0:0.9:0.0.0.0.09.9.9.0.0.9.9.6.9.$.0.9.:4.9.6.9{

$$.9.0:0.9.9.9.0.¢.:0.0.0.0.9.900.0.9.0.0.0.0 $.0.:0.9.9.8.0.¢.90.0.6.¢

.0.84
0. ¢.5.9.0.0,0.8.4.8.¢.5.¢,¢
i8,9.6:6:9,0.0.9:0.0:0.0:0:0.9.6.9.9.0.0
RISIE.0.0,6:0.0.0:9:0:0.009.¢.6:0.0.0.:0
4. 9:0.000:0.0.0:9 9.9.9 6,999 ¢
OO
RG0S

N0.$.0.0:6.00:0:0.0.0:0.9.010.0.5.0.0:0.010.9.9.0.9.:8.:9.8.0.8
9.9 9.9 4

0.0:9:8.0.9'0.60.9.0.0:0.0.9.00.0.9.:0.0.9:0:0.9.0.9.0.6.5.9.0.$,0.9.0.0
¢ 6.4

RO0:9.0:0.0:0.0.0.0.0,0.6.6.0.9.6.9.8.9.00.0:0.9.0.9.090690.6.6.9.00808880004

$910.0:0.0:0:0.0.9.0.0.0.6.6.6.0.4.0.6:0.0.0.0.00.66.009600.0005¢98806¢0800
64

P00 0.9.00.0.06600000.0000.000069089068880.0.88880.0000604¢

Using 50/125 or 100/140 Micron Fiber

This appendix provides fiber specifications for 50/125 and 100/140 dual-window micron
fibers. It ulso provides performance information for using the FDDI and ORnet product
sets with these fiber sizes.

NOTE
For new installations, Digital recommends using
62.5/125 dual-window micron fiber. Digital also supports 50/125 for new installations.
Digital does not recommend or support 100/140 dual-

window micron fiber for new installations.

However,

Digital will support installations in existing cable plants.
In addition, this appendix gives information about using FDDI products on a previously
installed fiber optic cable plant that does not meet the requirements specified in Table
A-1. Table A-2, or Table 5-2.

A.1 Specifications for 50/125 and 100/140 Micron Fibers
Table A-1 and Table A-2 provide specifications for 50/125 and 100/140 micron dualwindow fibers. The specifications are given for the 850 nm and 1300 nm fiber windows.

NOTE
Cable plants installed using 50/125 or 100/140 micron
dual-window fibers must use patch cable assemblies
with the same fiber size as used in the cable plant. These

fibers must meet the specifications in Table A-1 or
Table A-2.

Patch cables using 50/125 or 100/140 micron dual-window fibers are available only as custom cable assemblies. See the Auxiliary section of Chapter 11 for
approved suppliers.

If the previously installed cable fails ro meet any of the modal bandwidth or chromatic
dispersion criteria listed in Table A-1 or Table A-2, see Section A.3.
If the previously installed cable meets the modal and chromatic dispersion criteria, but
not the attenuation values in Table A-1 or Table A-2, see Section A.3.1.2.

A-2

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Table A-1: 50/125 Micron Fiber Specifications

Fiber Size

Specifications

50/125 micron

Attenuation: 3.5 dB/km maximum at 850 nm; 1.5 dB/km maximum at 1300 nm
Numerical aperture: 0.200 £ 0.015 or 0.220 1 0.015 microns (depending on the

category of fiber)

Core diameter: 50.0 + 3.0 microns

Minimum modal bandwidth: 160 MHzekm at 850 nm; 500 MHzekm at 1300 nm
Chromatic dispersion requirements

The zero dispersion wavelength and dispersion slope must fall below the following

bounds when plotted as wavelength (x points) versus dispersion slope (y points) on
a graph:

1295 nm, 0.105 ps/(nm2skm)
1300 nm, 0.110 ps/(nm2ekm)
1348 nm, 0.110 ps/(nm2ekm)
1365 nm, 0.093 ps/(nm2ekm)

Table A-2:

Fiber Slze

100/140 micron

100/140 Micron Fiber Specifications
Specifications

Attenuation: 4.5 dB/km maximum at 850 nm; 2.5 dB/km maximum at 1300 nm
Numerical aperture: 0.290 + 0.015 microns
Core diameter: 100.0 t 4.0 microns

Minimum modal bandwidth: 160 MHzekm at 850 nm; 500 MHzekm at 1300 nm
Chromatic dispersion requirements

The zero dispersion wavelength and dispersion slope must fall below the following
bounds when plotted as wavelength (x points) versus dispersion siope (y points) on
a graph:

1295 nm, 0.105 ps/(nm2ekm)
1300 nm, 0.110 ps/(nm?ekm)
1348 nm, 0.110 ps/(nm?ekm)
1365 nm, (.093 ps/(nm<ekm)

Using 50/125 or 100/140 Micron Fiber

A-3

A.2 ORnet Product Applications

This section provides brief descriptions of ORnet operational parameters for 50/125 and
100/14/) micron fiber operation. Each description includes:

A table that indicates the maximum operational distances for the ORnet product
set’s fiber optic links for the specified fiber size, with the cable distances based
on the number of connector pairs and splices used in the link. (This table is
based on the fiber specifications in Table A-1 or Table A-2.) Remember to plan
for two maintenance splices.

Ontical parameters that affect the ORnet product set’s operation for the specified
fiber size.

NOTE
The link-loss tables in the 50/125 and 100/140 micron
fiber operation descriptions provide look-up methods
for determining a link's maximum distance, based on
the number of splices and connector pairs designed for
the link. Remember to add two splices for each link to
budget for service splices. The table includes a 1.0 dB
cable plant system loss margin and uses the indoor cable
attenuation.

Each table shows how the maximum link distance can
be affected by splices and connector pairs used at interconnect and crossconnect administation points. It is not
meant to imply that Digital recommends or supports

links that consist of multiple small segments.

When the optical parameters are different than those in Table A—1 or Table A-2, use the
Link-Loss Calculation Worksheet. (Procedures for using these worksheets are explained
in Chapter 5.) Make a photocopy of the blank worksheet for each link to be analyzed.
Filling in the worksheet allows you to analyze the link length that is possible, based on the
ORnet and cable plant’s optical parameters.

Consider the following when filling in the worksheet:
e

Use the attenuation value defined by the cable’s manufacturer.

Use the correct maximum ORnet allowable system budget for the fiber size of
the link’s cable.

— 5.55 dB for 50/125 micron
— 14.35 dB for 100/140 micron

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

If the link uses connectors other than 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connectors, do
not use the worksheets 0.7 dB value for connector pairs. Find out what the maximum loss value is for the connectors that are in use and use that loss value.

If the link uses splices other than the recommended splices, do not use the worksheets 0.4 dB value for splices. Find out what the maximum loss value is for
the splices that are in use and use that loss value.

A.2.1 ORnet Product Set — 50/125 Micron Fiber Operation
e

Fiber size — 50/125 micron

Wavelength — 820 nm

Maximum link length — 1000 m (3280 ft)

Maximum allowable system loss — 5.55 dB

Bandwidth derating — 0.25 dB/km

N'umber

Number of Connector Pairs

Splices | 0

813 | 626 | 440 | 253

1893 ] 706 | 520 | 333 | 146

2 ] 1000}
3

4 | 786 | 600 | 413 | 226

5 | 680 | 493 | 306 | 120

6 { 573 | 386 | 200

7 ] 466 | 280

8 | 359 | 173

Distance in Meters
LKG-3753-~80!

Using 50/125 or 100/140 Micron Fiber

A-5

A.2.2 ORnet Product Set — 100/140 Micron Fiber Operation
°

Fiber size — 100/140 micron

Wavelength — 820 nm

)

Maximum link length — 2000 m (6560 ft)

Maximum allowable system loss — 14.35 dB

Bandwidth derating — 0.25 dB/km

Number of Connector Pairs

Number
of
Splices

2000

1905

1757

1610

1463

2000

1968

1821

1673

1526

1378

2000

1864

1736

1589

1442

1294

2000

1947

1800

1652

1505

1357

121C

2000

1863

1715

1568

1421

1273

1126

2000

1926

1778

1631

1484

1336

1189

1042

2000

1842

1694

1547

1400

1252

1105

957

Distance in Meters

LKG-3754--891

A-6

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

A.3 FDDI Product Descriptions
FDDI products operate at a 1300 nm wavelength and are designed to operate with
62.5/125 micron fiber that is fully characterized for 1300 nm wavelength operation.
However, these products can be connected to other types of cable plants. These other
cable plants are grouped in two general categories:
e

A cable plant that uses dual-window fiber that meets the specifications defined
in Table A-1 or Table A-2. Cable in this category provides transmission distance as long as cable attenuation and other loss factors (such as connector and
splice loss) do not exceed the allowable system budget (see Section A.3.2).

A cable plant that uses fiber (50/125, 62.5/125, 100/140 micron) that does not
meet the requirements in Table A-1, Table A-2, or Table 5-2 for 1300 nm operation. Cable in this category has restrictions placed on the allowed lengths
which depend on the characterization data available for the cable (see Section
Al

A.3.1 Guidelines for Using FDDI Products with Previously Installed Fiber
Previously installed cable plants may use fiber that does not meet the requirements in
Table A-1 or Table A-2. The following data is required to determine if the cable is suitable for use with FDDI products:
e

The exact length of the installed link, including any patch cables that will be
used in the link.

The attenuation of the cable at 1300 nm, and the maximum loss values for connectors and splices used in the link.

The modal bandwidth (in MHzekm) of the cable’s fiber for 1300 nm operation.

This data is defined either by a direct measurement that was done by the insialler when the cable was installed, or by the cable manufacturer’s minimum-guaranteed modal bandwidth specification for the fiber at 1300 nm.

NOTE
To be supported, a specific fiber must have a minimum

modal bandwidth of 100 MHzekm at 1300 nm.
Use the information in this section to perform a link modal bandwidth analysis and an
optical link length/loss budget analysis to determine if the cable can be used by an FDDI
application.

Using 50/125 or 100/140 Micron Fiber

A.3.1.1

Link Modal Bandwidth Analysis

If the fiber in the cable meets the requirement of 100 MHzekm modal bandwidth at 1300

nm operation, then only a link length of up to 400 meters (1312 feet) can be supported. If

the link exceeds 400 meters (1312 feet), the cable cannot be used for 1300 nm operations.
If the fiber in the cable has a modal bandwidth that is greater than 100 MHzekm, perform
the following calculation to determine the maximum supportable length for the cable:

Maximum allowed length = M;da:;"d“"id‘h (or 1.6 km, whichever is less)
Z

NOTE
This calculation is also used to determine the length of
cable that can be supported when the fiber characteristics either fail to meet the requirements in Table A-1 or
have unknown chromatic dispersion characteristics.

The maximum supportable cable length is 1.6 km (5250
ft), even if the above calculation results in a greater
value.

If the link
's length does not exceed the maximum value allowed by the modal bandwidth
of the cable, proceed to the next section to determine if the link length/loss budget characteristics of the cable are acceptable.
A.3.1.2

Optical Link Length/Loss Budget Analysis

The optical link length/loss budget analysis is done using a Link-Loss Calculation Worksheet, but only after detenmining that the existing fiber optic link is withinlength parameters that meet the restrictions set by the fiber’s minimum guaranteed modal bandwidth.
Procedures for using the Link-Loss Calculation Worksheets are explained in Chapter 5.

Make a photocopy of the blank worksheet for each link to be analyzed. Filling in the
worksheet allows you to analyze the link length that is possible, based on the FDDI and
cabie plant’s optical parameters.

Consider the following when filling in the worksheet:

Use the attenuation value defined by the cable’s manufacturer.

Use the correct maximum FDDI allowable system budget for the fiber size of
the link's cable.
— 6.0 dB for 50/125 micron
— 11.0dB for 62.5/125 or 100/140 micron

A-8

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

If the link uses connectors other than 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connectors, do
not use the worksheets (0.7 dB value for connector pairs. Find out what the maxumum loss value is for the connectors that are in use and use that loss value.

If the link uses splices other than the recommended splices, do not use the work-

sheets 0.4 dB value for splices. Find out what the maximum loss value is for
the splices that are in use and use that loss value.

If the maximum link length determined by the worksheet is less than the actual link
length, the FDDI product cannot be used with the link. Only if the worksheet’s link length
is equal to or greater than the actual link can the FDDI product set be connected to that
link.

A.3.2 Guidelines for Using FDDI Products with Dual-Window Fiber
This section provides brief FDDI operational parameter descriptions for 50/125 and
100/140 micron dual-window fiber operation when using fiber that meets the specifications in Table A-1 or Table A-2. Each fiber size operational parameter description
includes:

A table that indicates the maximum operational distances for the FDDI product
set’s fiber optic links for the specified fiber size, with the link distances based on
the number of connector pairs and splices used in the link. Remember to plan
for two maintenance splices.

Optical parameters that affect the FDDI product set’s operation for the specified
fiber size.

NOTE
The link-loss tables in the 50/125 and 100/140 micron
fiber operation descriptions provide look-up methods
for determining a link's maximum distance, based on

the number of splices and connector pairs designed for
the link. Remember to add two splices for each link to

budget for service splices. The table includes a 1.0 dB
cable plant system loss margin and uses the indoor cable
attenuation.

Each table shows how the maximum link distance can
be affected by splices and connector pairs used at inter-

connect and crossconnect administration points. It is
not meant to imply that Digital recommends or supports
links that consist of multiple small segments.

Using 50/125 or 100/140 Micron Fiber

A-9

A.3.2.1

FDDI Product Set — 50/125 Micron Dual-Window Fiber Operation

Fiber size — 50/125 micron

Wavelength — 1300 nm

Maximum link length — 2000 m (6560 ft)

Maximum allowable system loss — 6.00 dB

Bandwidth derating — 0.00 dB/km

Nfumber
o

Number of Connector Pairs

Splices | 0

2 | 2000 | 2000 | 1866 | 1400 | 933 | 466

12000 | 2000 | 1599 | 1133 | 666 | 199

| 2000 | 1800 | 1333 | 866 | 399

{2000 | 1533 | 1066 | 600 | 133

{1733 | 1266 | 799 | 333

7 | 1466 | 1000 | 533 | 66

{1199 | 733 | 266

Distance in Meters
LKG-3756-89|

A-10

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

A.3.2.2

FDDI Product Set — 100/140 Micron Dual-Window Fiber Operation

Fiber size — 100/140 micron
Wavelength — 1300 nm

Maximum link length — 2000 m (6560 ft)
Maximum allowable system loss — 11.00dB

Minimum required system loss — 3.00 dB
Bandwidth derating — 0.00 dB/km

Number of Connector Pairs

Number
of

Splices
2

2000

2000 | 2000 { 200G [ 2000 { 2000

1719

1439

2000

2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 1839

1559

1280

2000

2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 1960 | 1680

1400

1120

2000

2000 | 2000 | 2000 | 1800 | 1520

1240

959

2000

2000 | 2000 | 1919 | 1640 | 1360

1079

800

2000

2000 | 2000 | 1760 | 1479 | 1200

919

640

2000

2000 | 1897 | 1600 | 1319 | 1039

759

479

Distance in Meters
LKG-3755~801

Using 50/125 or 100/140 Micron Fiber

A-11

PEP PN GIIIIS GG BT GIINIGEI OSSOSO G000 880088080801
K
O
K
A A I dO A
AR AR AT AR T A F
[RO I TGO OLON GO OO0.0.8800.6.000008000080
VOV OGTISOOO DGO

IO S OES PG0.00.0800010080000000:

08080008 04
P OO OGSV ISP VOO NI SD0050080080088
4¢
00804000000
00.00000880
0
5060000800
PO P00
90004
60008080000
PO G0 0000000998000060600

PP VOOV CPI.680060800086000.8080.48864
000600000800 800088080040009

PO OISOV

POV 0 50.0.0806.0.90088.0.00.000080000800030
P0:0.00:0.8.06.006.0.6.0.090009006800600004
}0:0.0.0.0.00.0.6.6.60.9.6.00.0.0060.09.080084
)9.0:9.0.0.0.60.0.0.9.0.0.899.99.9.9.9.¢00009

¢4
)9.9.0.8.0.0.0.88.0.6.0.0.6.0.6.00400.66
$i0.0.610.0.0.0.0.90.0.6:0.96.80098900d

).9.8.0.6.0.6.0.9.0.0.6.4.5.9.00.0¢.0¢1
$.9.0.9.6.0.9.0.8.0.0.6.6.6.9.060.0
$.9.0.0.:8.0.9.0.0.9.0.9.6.0.9.¢0.4

B08.0.8.8.9.0.9.65.0.0.9.9.4
),0.6.:9.0.9.9.0.9.9.9.9.0.¢

)9.9.6.9.9.9.9.¢.6.94
AHXXXKXXX

1.9.6.0.9.8.0.¢
XEXXX
XAX

XXX
XXXXX

KXXEXXXX
HANXXXKXXK

XXAXXKXXKKX
h0859060098694

XEAXAXKXXKXXXKAK

6.0.9
).9.0.0.0.9.0.8.0.6.0.0004
$:9:0.0.0.0.8.0:0.0.9.6.4.:0.0.9.9.9,¢

p9.9.08.0.0.0.9.6.0.9.00.6.9.09800
):9.0.8:0:0.0.6.0.0.9.6.0.0.0.99.6.990.604

P0.0:0.0.0:0.6.0.9.0.0.0.69.6.0.9.0.00.¢.9¢04

p0.6.0.0.6.0:0:0.0.0.6.0.0.9.0.9.0.9.9.0.9.8.$.6,0.0
0.9
PO, 80.0.8:0.0.0.6:0.6:0.9.0.0.9.6.0.8.000.9.06.9

$.9:0.0.6:9.9.0.0.0.0.6.0.0.0.9.6.6.0.8,0.8.¢,0.0.99.9.09.9
}00.9.0.0.0.0.0.0.00.0.0.0.9.0.0.0.0.0.0:9.8.0,6.9.¢.6.9.60

$0.0:0.0.0:0:0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.9.6.0.:8.8,0.6.0.0.06.8$.0,0,64
0983
9.9
0.99.9.9.988.9
0009:00
68000
OGS 00.9.0:0.00:0.
ER09.0.0:0. 0.0 RON0:0:0.6.9:0. 0508 K00000.9.9.9.0.9.8.0.9.9.0¢

¢.9 1
9.0
0.0.8.0.0.0.6.9.9.9.
0.0.0.0.
00060000
AT REE00.9.0.0.0.0.
N90.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.5.0.0.9:0.0.0.0.9:0.6.0.6.6.0.0.0:6:0.6.9.0.0.9.0.8.¢.0.6.9.¢.9.{

£9.0.9.0.0.0.0:0.0.0.9.0.8.0.9.8.0.8.9.¢:0.0.6.0.0.05.0.0.0.6.8.6.0.00.9$.0¢.0600
JO70.0.0.0:0.00.0.0.0.0.6.0.0 0.0.5.0.0.0.0.0.00.0.0.0.60.0.0.0.:9.9.0 88996808044
109000.0.0.0.000.08.900.0.0.0.0.0.9.0.0.0:0.0006000060.9.0.8805000800.0

PO VOO OOE ISP 0PE00.89.0.00680.00.000.00080000000.800090,8

Using FDDI and ORnet Products with
Existing Ethernet/802.3 Networks
This appendix provides information on how to use FDDI and ORnet products in interconnections with Ethernet/802.3 configurations. This information includes:

Descriptions of the types of FDDI or ORnet fiber-to-Ethernet/802.3 network
configurations, including application examples for using FDDI products in
those configurations.

Guidelines for using ORnet products in connections with Digital’s
Ethemet/802.3 products.

This appendix also addresses using FDDI and ORnet products for interconnections with
an Ethernet/802.3 network that is using any of the following types of copper media:
e

Standard Ethernet Coaxial Cable

ThinWire Coaxial Cable

Twisted-Pair Cable

NOTE

For more information on the guidelines that affect the
copper subsystems within a DECconnect System structured system, see the DECconne«: wystem Planning and
Configuration Guide (EK-DECSY-CG).

B-1

B.1 Integrating FDDI or ORnet Products with Ethernet/802.3 Hardware
Various types of network configurations can be created when integrating FDDI or ORnet
fiber optic and Ethernet/802.3 networks together.
Floor configurations — the fiber optic network interconnects with existing
multiple Ethernet/802.3 offices or work groups on a floor of a building.

Building configurations — the fiber optic network interconnects with existing
Ethemet/802.3 floor configurations in a building.

Campus configurations — the fiber optic network interconnects with standard
Ethemet/802.3 cabling within the buildings in a campus site.

B.1.1

Floor Configurations

Existing office clusters or work groups that are using an Ethernet/802.3 network can utilize FDDI or fiber optic Ethemet technologies.

Figure B-1 illustrates simple office clusters that are integrated using a ThinWire Ethernet. Figure B-2 and Figure B-3 illustrate possible configuration examples of how FDDI
technology can be integrated with existing Ethernet/802.3 networks within local offices
or work groups using the following components:

An FDDI wiring concentrator located in an HDF interconnects the various
office and work group cluster’s FDDI workstations and connects to an
FDDI-to-Ethernet bridge (Figure B2 and Figure B-3).
The FDDI-to-Ethernet bridge within the HDF connects to a multiport repeater
via ThinWire (Figure B-2 ) or connects to a DELNI within an ODF via a
transceiver cable (Figure B-3).

Workstations and VAX equipment connected to the multiport repeater via
ThinWire (Figure B-2).

FDDI workstation equipment conniects to wiring concentrator via fiber optic
cables (Figure B-2 and Figure B-3).

Terminals connected through twisted—pair to a terminal server (Figure B-2
and Figure B-3).

NOTE
For more information on FDDI product applications,
see Chapter 5.

B-2

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure B—1: ThinWire Ethernet Office Cluster

ODF

ThinWire A\

Office Clusters

LKG-3680—89A

Using FDDI and ORnet Products with Existing Ethernet/802.3 Networks

B-3

Figure B-2: FDDI-to-Ethernet Bridge-to-DEMPR Floor Configuration Exampie
Duol—Attochmena

P
1

Brid

|
1
]

i
|
1

[

J] j}

i FDDI-to—Ethernet

HOF

Concentrator

}

oy R

eo e
e e

_*—_‘ e

I
i
I
!
I
i
|
I
I

ThinWire

}

e e

e e e

Cable
e e e L e

e S

-l

=
—————

Multiport |[Repeater
/__—_\

!
I
!
i
I
!
[
I
1

DECserver

!
I
i
I

!
I
I
1

,
'

Office Cluster

Fiber Optic

/ Cables

1
|

t
|

|
|

]
|
|
t

]
|
I
|

|
|
|
|

|
i
|
i

|
|

1
t

]

|
i
|
|
|
i
I

|
|
I
|
|
!
i

]

- Fthernet Network ———————w-|<a——FDDI
-

Office

Cluster

—_—

Workstations

—

LKG-3888—B9A

B-4

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure B-3: FDDI-to-Ethernet Bridge-to-DELNI Floor Configuration Example

o o

[

f
!

e o e

o e

:
:

Dual Attachment
Concentrator

Fiber Optic |

Bridge

& e

e e

FDDI-to—Ethernet

{

|'!

e e

—

——

—

ThinWire
Cable
A

—

||i

/
——

——

———

—

_—

—

Transceiver

Cables

DECserver

Terminal
Interconnection

e e i e s

e e

o
—— ——

Workstations
FDDI

T
MicroVAX
_____[Workstations
I

=
1

Ethernet Network
Office

Cluster

g |wt—
FODIl —pm
Workstations

LKG-3716—88A

Using FDD! and ORnet Products with Existing Ethernet/802.3 Networks

B-5

B.1.2 Building Components
The building backbone riser allows for interconnecting various floors within a building.

The use of fiber optic cabling in the backbone riser allows high-speed network technology. such as FDDI, to interconnect existing floors already configured for Ethernet/802.3.

Figure B4 illustrates the connection of an FDDI building backbone riser to a standard

Ethemet cable located on each floor of the building using the following components:
An FDDI wiring concentrator (or concentrators) in the building’s IDF interconnects with an FDDI-to-Ethemet bridge on each floor using Single Attachment
Station (SAS) connections.

Each FDDI-to-Ethemet bridge connects to the standard Ethemet cable using a
transceiver and a transceiver cable.
The standard Ethernet cable provides direct connections with communications

equipment and computer facilities on each floor.

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure B—4: FDDI-to-Ethernet/802.3 Building Configuration Example

St ]

|
i

:1
i

!
!

|
|

=
-

{HDF

FDDI—to-Ethernet
Bridge

——r e e

e e em

|
!

Stondcrd—/ B

tthernet
Cable

’

Dual—Attachment

Concentrator

LKG~3689—89A

Using FDDI and ORnet Products with Existing Ethernet/802.3 Networks

B.1.3 Campus Configurations
Multiple buildings within a campus site environment are interconnected using fiber optic
links.

Figure B-5 shows buildings that have existing Ethemet/802.3 networks can be interconnected to a fiber optic campus backbone that is using FDDI fiber optic technology.
Figure B-6 illustrates a possible configuration for connecting an Ethernet/802.3 building
network to the FDDI campus backbone using the following components:
¢

An FDDI wiring concentrator within the campus site’s MDF interconnects to an
FDDI-to-Ethernet bridge at the building using Single Attachment Station (SAS)
connections.

The FDDI-to-Ethernet bridge located at the building’s IDF connects to the standard Ethemet building backbone using a transceiver and a transceiver cable.

The standard Ethemnet building backbone cable provides for the interconnections
with each floor within the building.

B-8

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure B-5: Campus Configuration Example

Standard Ethernet
HDF

LKG~ 3691—-89A

Using FDDI and ORnet Products with Existing Ethernet/802.3 Networks

B~9

Figure B-6: FDDI-to-Ethernet Campus Configuration Example

—

Building Configuration

-1

SER/OCC
Standard

Ethernet

Faceplate—SER/QCC
Configuration

¥
g

, Computer

DECrepeater

» Room

DECserver

200

Cable
S
g S
S
So

e o T o o S o S

I_!"\ """""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""
1|
FDDI—to~Ethernet
=]

ioF

1
|

Bridge

}

2 km (65.60 ft)

-s———— Fiber Optic Cable

S-

5
e
e
A

MDF

Dual—Attachment

Concentrator

To Other IDFs

e e e e

e et e e

ee o ee e ee ee ee e e ms

com et

LKG~3717—89A

B-10

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

B.2 Using ORnet Products with Digital’s Ethernet/802.3 Networking
Products
ORnet is a fiber optic Ethernet product set that includes a multiport star and a transceiver
(known as a fiber optic medium attachment unit (FOMAU)). The star provides for using
Ethemet in a star configuration rather than the bus configuration used by the standard
Ethemet/802.3 cabling.

As shown in Figure B-7, the star distributes the fiber optic Ethemet while th: FOMAU
interconnects the fiber optic Ethemet with Ethernet/802.3 networking hardware using a
transceiver cable.

Figure B-7: ORnet-to-Ethernet/802.3

Star

Fiber Cable

FOMAU
'

Transceiver Cable

Networking
Device
LKG-3760-801

Table B—1 defines the interconnections between the ORnet product set and Digital’s
bridge and repeater products, including identification of the maximum fiber optic link
lengths for each product when the specified bridge or repeater is connected to the
FOMAU.

NOTE
The maximum fiber link distances given in Table B-1

are based on the physical timing limitations for the IEEE
802.3/Ethemnet network. Optical budget limitations can
reduce the maximum distances further.
Refer to Chapter 5 for the optical budget information
conceming ORnet products to determine the maximum
distance for a link based on the maximum allowable system loss. The smaller of the two types of distances (the
timing or optical maximum distance) is used as the
s maximum distance.
link

Using FDDI and ORnet Products with Existing Ethernet/802.3 Networks

B-11

Table B~1: ORnet Interconnections with Digital’'s LAN Products
Maximum ORnet Fiber

Maximum Transclever

Link Distance

Cable Length

DEBET-xx

2000 meters (6560 feet)*

50 meters (164 feet)

DEBAM—xx

2000 meters (6560 feet)”

50 meters (164 feet)

DEREN-xx

770 meters (2525.6 feet)

50 meters (164 feet)

DEREP—xx

No connection allowed

no connection allowed

DEMPR~xx

950 meters (3116 feet)

50 meters (164 feet)

DESPR-xx

950 meters (3116 feet)

50 meters (164 feet)

2000 meters (6560 feet)”

50 meters (164 feet)

LAN Product
Remote Bridges

Remote Repeaters

Ethernet Repeaters

Local Network Interconnect

DELN-xx

*See the note on page B—11 concerning length restrictions.

B.2.1 Guidelines for Connecting ORnet Products to Ethernet/802.3 Networking
Hardware

The following guidelines affect the ORnet interconnections with the Ethemet/802.3 segments and active networking equipment:

The FCMAU is compatible with both IEEE 802.3 and Ethernet transceiver
cables.

An IEEE 802.3 transceiver cable and an Ethernet transceiver cable cannot be
interconnected.

The maximum length for the transceiver cable is S0 meters (164 feet).

The FOMAU can be connected to Digital’s local network interconnect (DELNI)
using the DELNI’s global port.

DEREN (DECrepeater 200) inteconnections with DELNIs are not supported by
Digital or by the IEEE 802.3 standards.

DEREP interconnections with FOMAU are not supported by Digital.

The direct connection of an ORnet star’s fiber ports to a LAN bridge or
DECrepeater product’s fiber ports are not supported due to incompatible
optical signaling.

B-12

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Additional ORnet stars can be cascaded in a series path to allow for multiple star
configurations. However, each additional star reduces the maximum fiber cable
distances given in Table B~1 by 180 meters (590.4 feet).

At the rear of the FOMAU there are three switches that must be set to specific
settings as follows:

SQE TEST switch — Digital requires setting this switch to its disabled
position when th: FOMAU is connected to an 802.3 repeater.

ALTERNATE COLLISION MODE switch — Digital requires that this
switch always be set to its disabled position.

FULL STEP switch — Digital requires that this switch always be set to
its disabled position.

B.2.2 ORnet-to-Ethernet/802.3 Interconnection Examples
Figure B8 through Figure B~10 illustrate the types of ORnet fiber optic Ethernet interconnections as follows:

Figure B-8 illustrates ORnet product interconnections with Digital’s various
LAN bridge products. As shown, these interconnections can be used to interconnect the ORnet campus backbone subsystem to a remote site or to standard
Ethemet backbone cables.

Figure B-9 illustrates ORnet product interconnections with Digital’s various
repeater products.

Figure B-10 illustrates a two star serial path ORnet configuration with direct
connection to a station device, LAN bridge, and repeater.

Using FDDI and ORnet Products with Existing Ethernet/802.3 Networks

B-13

Figure B-8: ORnet-to-LAN Bridge Connections

2000 m (6560 ft)

ORnet

2000 m (6560 ft)

Star

Fiber Optic Cable

Cable

50 m (164 )] 200
ac

Cable

ORnet

Transceiver FOMAU

lé’:i: e

100,9 150,

(6560 ft)
Fiber Optic

Ped

up to

2000 m*

F
(6560 ft)
Fiber Optic

net
| FOMAU

Transceiver

Remote

10C. 150, 200

25057005 ——m

100, 150,

Transceiver

200

)

ORnet

Fiber Optic

FOMAUY
,

Cable up to

F 3 km

Standard E@

ORnet

(9840 ft)

Ethernet

Cable

Remote
100,

ORnet

Star

150,

200

ORnet

Transceiver |FOMAU
TM
Cable

Transceiver [FOMAU
Cable TM

w—{4005——m=

Remote

200

/RG
DEBAM—RF

LAN Bridge

LAN Bridge
Fiber Optic

—lr‘_,/ Cable up to
F

1.5 km

(4920 ft)

Fiber Optic

Cable up to ~—— H
10 km

“

(32,800 ft)

—

DEBAM RF/RCH

DECrepeater 200

Remote

7005)

. "'"l

LAN Bridge

I’\-""""“

)

lé?irc\j,ge

Cable

LAN Bridge

ORnet
FOMAU

Transceiver

allcable

Cable g

4005

*See note on page B—11 concerning length restriction.
LKG~ 371+B88A

B-14

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure B-9: ORnet-to-Repeaters Interconnections

Fiber Optic
Cable up to
770 m (2525.6 ft)

ORnet
Star

Fiber Optic
Cable up to
950 m (3116 ft)

F
Fiber Optic

950 m (3116 ft)

FOMAU
«—_Transceiver
Cable

SRnT

[DECrepeater 200j

FoaeAU

DELNI

«— Transceiver
Cable

(THTH
«—Transceiver
Cable

[PEMPR

ThinWire

«—Tronsceiver
Cable

w—{4005}—4005}——

@
o

FOMAU
-__Transceiver
Cabie

Twisted—

Pair

Standard
Ethernet

Cable

Twisted—

Pair
LKG—-3712—B9A

Using FDD1 and ORnet Products with Existing Ethernet/802.3 Networks

B-15

Figure B-10: Multiple ORnet Star Connection Configuration

ORnet
Star

Fiber Optic

Cable

-~ 90 m (295 ft)
F

\Fiber Optic
Cable

1320 m (4329.6 ft)

ORnet
Star

ORnet
Star
Fiber Optic

Cable P

500 m (1640 ft)

ORnet
FOMAU

ORnet
Star
Fiber Optic

Cable P

500 m (1640 ft)

ORnet
FOMAU

f(-':ab;r Optic
able

4500 m (1640 ft)

ORnet
FOMAU

®—____ Transceiver__—%

LAN Bridge

E:;anlzce'vef

Cable

‘

| DECrepeater 200|

100, 150, 200

Tranceiver

4005

Cable

4005

Standard
Ethernet

Standard

Cable

Ethernet
Cable

LKG~3713—89A

B-16

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

NPT OOV P SD0000.0000000060600000680000000008.0800.4
N0 0 990000.0.000000.060.500060008080006000080860085000¢4
YOO VOIO VIR 90.0.0.00.0.0000600000880800.80080860004
8
60 0800004
0600
008800809
VOO POINOLI PP P0000800
PP 0000000.0090000000000000808080086668008804
PG000.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.8.0.6.6.66086960.69.6.66008008006000!
'S0.8.0.0.00.00.0.0.9.9.090.6606080900886080008980:
POV OOV000.0.0.0.6.0.0.80.8800.0000060.09880600604
PO 00.0.0.0.0.988.9.06.660660060806808000601
PO9.0.0.90.0.0.0.6.0.9.6.0.0000.0080080.068008004
19:9.9:0.9.0.0.0.0.6.0.0.6.0.0¢.6565535395409.9.04
P00 0.80:0.0.6608056.6046003080604
1.9.0.90.00.09.60.0.0.0.6.0.9.0.089048.686904
P9.8.0.09.0.6.0.0.0.6.0.0.09.068405604
1,910:0.6.6.0.0.6.4.0.0.0.0.9.9.9.9¢¢¢004
) 0:0.0.0.6.0.099.0.0.0.8.6.8.9.9.9.0.04
).0.0:0.0.0.0.0.60.9.0.0.9.8.9.¢¢9.¢
}9.6.6.0.6.90.99.0.9.99.008.01
):9.0.9:0.8.6.0.9.9.9.6.9.0.8.¢
}0.0.9.0.0.0.0.9.9.6.6.9.¢

)9.0.9.9.9.9.0.9.9.9.¢
HAXAKXXXXX

XXAXKXXX
XXXXX
XXX
X

X
XXX

XXXXX
XXKXXXXX

XXAKAKXXKX

HAAAKXKKXKKXX
KAXXXKXAXKXKX
). 9.0.9.0.0.9.998.66¢6.64

1,6.0.6.6.0.:9.0.9.6.6.0.0.0¢.9.¢4
).9:0:6.6.9.9.9.9.8.8.90.6.9.9.6064

1.0.6.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.8.6.98.9.9.96.0.0.0¢

)0:9:0.0.6.0.0.0.9.9.0.9.8.6.9.6.0.4,0.49.6.4

P6:6.6.6:0.6.0:0.0.0.0.9.6.0.0.9.9.0.0$.9.600
10.0:0,0.5.9.0:0.60.0.:0.0.:09.9.0.9.0.0.$.9.9.0.9.0¢
.49
)9.6:9.0.0.0.0.0.8.0.0.999.0.0.0.0.99.0.9.6.8.09
.9.4
.6.0.8.8.6.00.9.6
6.900.64000.9.0.6
P9:9:0.00.0.0:0.9:
v

pE0.0.9.9.9.0.6.0.0.0.6.0.0.6.00.0.0.9.0.0990.6.90068804
P O0.0.0.9:0.9.9.9.9.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.008 60699089000

0004
00605 0.9.889606060.0
D O0.9,0.0.0.0. 0000000900
R0 0:00.0 SO PPN

SO ENS VOO

NN4.0.8.9.6.0.00.684

PRSI .0.00.9.0.0.0.0.00.0 600006500050 000008948.60.4

PG 0NV 0000.08.9.9.0.9.00.00009,0060.6.6.00009998¢600
PO

00000.0.90.9.6.9.0.0.6.6.0.0:0.0000.0,0008.00.9909806869990

RO0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.60.0008.0.080660600000906806908860¢0001
P OP O P OO0 0000.0.09.0.0.0.000:6.0.008000000.68000000080090!

60
060860000
09800085008
HO0:0.00.0.0.0.00.00080.060.0660.0000060

C
Remcte Bridge and Repeater LAN
Products

Digital Equipment Corporation offers a selection of bridges and repeaters for use in LAN

(point-to-point) links. This appendix identifies:
e

Digital’s remote bridge and repeater products and the related documentation.

The maximum link length for the product for 50/125, 62.5/125, and 100/140

micron fiber.
¢

The maximum allowable system loss for the remote bridge and repeater
products.

C.1

Remote Bridge Products
The following lists Digital’s remote bridge products and their reference documents:
e

DEBET-xx (LAN Bridge 100 or LAN Bridge 150) — LAN Bridge 100
Installation Manual (EK-DEBET-UG) or LAN Bridge 150 Installation

Manual (EK-LB 150-IN).
e

DEBAM-xx (LAN Bridge 200) — LAN Bridge 200 Installation Manual

(EK-DEBAM-IN).

C.2 Remote Repeaters
The following lists Digital s remote repeater products and their reference documentation:
e

DEREP-xx (DECrepeater 100) — DECrepeater 100 Installation Manual
(EK-DEREP-IN).

DEREN-xx (DECrepeater 200) — DECrepeater 200 Installation Manual
(EK-DEREN-IN).

C.3 Maximum Fiber Optic Link Distances for Ethernet LAN Products
Table C-1 lists the maximum link distances and maximum allowable system loss for
Digital's fiber optic Ethernet LAN products. The products are listed by Digital part number, and described by wavelength, maximum distance, maximum power budget per fiber
size (62.5/125, 50/125, 100/140 micron), minimum attenuation, and bandwidth derating.
Table C-1 also includes descriptions of specific bridge-to-repeater links.
NOTE

The actual distances may be less depending on fiber attenuation, number of splices, and number of connectors
within the link. Use the link-loss calculation procedure
described in Chapter 5 to determine the actual link
length.

Regardless of the link-loss calculation results, do not exceed the maximum distances given in Table C-1.

c-2

DECconnect System Flber Optic Planning and Configuration

Table C-1: Remote Fiber Optic LAN Product Maximum Link Lengths
Fiber Size

Wavelength

Maximum

Distance

Loss Budget

Minimum

Bandwidth

Attenuation

Derating

PRODUCT: DEREP-RC/RD-t0o-DEREP-RC/RD LINKS

50/125

850 nm

62.5/125

850 nm

100/140

850 nm

500 meters

3.10dB

N/A

0.25 dB/km

1000 meters

8.30dB

N/A

0.25 dB/km

1000 meters

12.50dB

N/A

0.25 dB/km

{1640 feet)

(3280 feet)

PRODUCT: DEBET-RC/RD-t0-DEBET-RC/RD LINKS

50/125

850 nm

500 meters

3.10dB

N/A

0.25 dB/km

62.5/125

850 nm

2000 meters

8.30 dB

N/A

0.25 dB/km

12.50 dB

N/A

0.25 dB/km

(1640 feet)

(6560 feet)

100/140

850 nm

2000 meters
(6560 feet)

PRODUCT: DEBET-RC/RD-to-Remote Repeater (DEREP-RC/RD) LINKS
50/125

850 nm

500 meters

3.10 dB

N/A

0.25 dB/km

8.30dB

N/A

0.25 dB/km

12.50 dB

N/A

0.25 dB/km

8.00 dB

N/A

0.25 dB/km

12.00 dB

N/A

0.25 dB/km

14.00 dB

400dB

0.25 dB/km

8.00dB

N/A

0.25 dB/km

12.00 dB

N/A

0.25 dB/km

14.00 dB

4.00dB

0.25 dB/km

(1640 feet)

62.5/125

850 nm

1500 meters
(4920 feet)

100/140

850 nm

1500 meters
(4920 feet)

PRODUCT: DEREP-RH/RJ-to-DEREP-RH/RJ LINKS

50/125

850 nm

1000 meters
(3280 feet)

62.5/125

850 nm

1000 meters
(3280 feet)

100/140

850 nm

1000 meters
(3280 feet)

PRODUCT: DEBET-RH/RJ-to-DEBET-RH/RJ LINKS

50/125

850 nm

2000 meters
(6560 feet)

62.5/125

850 nm

3000 meters
(9840 feet)

100/140

850 nm

3000 meters
(9840 feet)

Remote Bridge and Repeater LAN Products

C-3

Fiber Size

Wavelength

Maximum
Distance

Loss Budget

Minimum
Attenuation

Bandwidth
Derating

PRODUCT: DEBET-RH/RJ-to-Remote Repeater (DEREP-RH/RJ) LINKS

501125

850 nm

62.5/125

850 nm

100/140

850 nm

1500 moters

8.00 dB

0.25 dB/Kkm

1500 meters

12.00 dB

N/A

0.25 dB/km

1500 meters

14.00dB

400dB

0.25 dB/km

8.00dB

N/A

0.25 dB/km

(4920 feet)
(4920 feet)

(4920 feet)

PRODUCT: DEBET-RP/RQ-10-DEBET-RP/RQ LINKS
50125

850 nm

2000 meters
(6560 feet)

62.5/125

850 nm

3000 meters

12.00dB

1.0dB

0.25 dB/km

100/140

850 nm

2600 meters

14.00 dB

4.00dB

0.25 dB/km

(9840 feet)
(8528 feet)

PRODUCT: DEBET-RP/RQ-to-Remote Repeater (DEREP-RH/RJ) LINKS
50/125

850 nm

62.5/125

850 nm

1500 meters
(4920 feet)

8.00 dB

N/A

0.25 dB/km

1500 meters

12.00 dB

1.0dB

0.25 dB/km

14.00 dB

4.00dB

0.25 dB/km

(4920 feet)

100/140

850 nm

1500 meters
(4920 feet)

PRODUCT: DEBAM-RC/RD-to-DEBAM-RC/RD LINKS
50/125

850 nm

2000 meters
(6560 feet)

9.00 dB

N/A

0.0 dB/km

62.5/125

850 nm

3000 meters
(9840 feet)

14.00 dB

N/A

0.0 dB/km

100/140

850 nm

2800 meters

16.00 dB

400dB

0.0 dB/&m

(9184 feet)
PRODUCT: DEBAM-RF/RG-to-DEBAM-RF/RG LINKS

50/125

1300 nm

62.5/125

1300 nm

10000 meters
(32800 feet)

12.00dB

3.00dB

0.0 dB/Kkm

10000 meters

17.00dB

7.00dB

0.0 dBkm

17.00 dB

9.00dB

0.0 dB/Kkm

(32800 feet)
100/140

1300 nm

4000 meters

(13120 feet)

cH4

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Maximum

Fiber Size

Wavelength

Distance

Loss Budget

Minimum
Attenuation

Bandwidth
Derating

PRODUCT: DEREN-RC/RD-to-DEREN-RC/RD LINKS
501125

850 nm

1000 meters
(3280 feet)

N/A

0.0 dB/km

62.5/125

850 nm

1000 meters
(3280 feet)

N/A

0.0 dB/Kkm

100/140

850 nm

1000 meters

4.00dB

0.0 d8/km

(3280 feet)

PRODUCT: DEBAM-RC/RD-to-Remote Repeater (DEREN-RC/RD) LINKS
50/125

850 nm

1500 meters

N/A

0.0 dB&m

N/A

0.0 dB/A&m

4.00dB

0.0 dB/km

(4920 feet)

62.5/125

850 nm

1500 meters
(4920 feet)

100/140

850 nm

1500 meters
(4920 feet)

Remote Bridge and Repeater LAN Products

PO 0000080 08000.8.00.08 0068 006060000.00088.80089800060600004
04864
690
0000800880800000
09009
000006808008
PO O P0000009
PH0.00.0.0.00:0.80.8.00.6.0.0.0090.0800.0000800.900068000000860,
PO0.90.0,6.00.0:0.:0.0:0.8.0.9.0.0.0.9:0.0.0.60.9.0.6.9.0.8,0.0.0.0080060668

10:0,0.9.0.0.0.0.0:9069.0.0.9.0.8.60.0¢60005.6008088080800848004
04
)000.8.0.00:0.0.09.9.6.0.69.9.6.0.09.00090600.0880000000
$ 8 0.9.0:0.0.00.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.6.0.0.8.60400.6609.090.¢0¢0.0:

$.9:0:0:6:0.6:8.9.0.0.6.0.008.6000
880808 888.9.9888894604

}9:0.0.0.090.08.00.00.0.09000000600.6006000004

KAXXKXXX KX XXX A XA XK KKK XK

K XKXAKKXKK

§.0.0.0.8.0.8.0.00.0.8.6.0.8.0.9.880080690060004

P0.0.0.9.8.:0.0.0.9.9.0.89.6.8.9.00.00.000000.04
1.010.0.0.0.00.0.9.0.8.0.0.09.9.0980$660004
) 9.0.0.6.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.9.8.0.6.00060¢001
PO.80.0.0.0.0.0.0.89.0.09.49009¢$004
)9.0.0.0.0.9.9.0.0.9.0.0.9.9.0.8.¢.9.60.¢

}:9:€.9.9.9.0.0.0.6.9,0.0.9.9.9.6,0,0.4
KAXXAXXXAK
KKK HXKX

AX
KKKXH
XX RUXXKXXX
XAXXXXXXARHKX

XAAXXKXXXKXX
1.9:8.0.0.0.9.8,0¢

).:9.8.9.9.9.9.¢
XXXXX
XXX
X

XXX
XXXXX

XXXXXXX

AAAXKXKXAX
§9:9.9.9.0.0.9.0.9.9.4

)0.0.0.0.4.0.9.0.94.¢.6.4

)0.0.0.9.0.9.9.0.9.6.9.9.9.¢.4
1:0.8.0.6:0.0.9.9.0.0.9 080484
1. 8.0.0.9.0.9.0.9.99.9.9.90.96.9.64

)89.9.0.9.0.6.8.:0.9.0.0.0.9.6.9.6.0.¢.0.
p.0:0.8:0.8.:0.0.0.9.0.5.6.6.0.0.0.0.0.9.8.0.8,4

p9.9.0:0.9:0.9.0.9.0.0.60.9.6.0.0.6.6.0.6¢09

0.9.8.8.:6.:0.0.9.0.0.6.9.9.9.9.9.9.9.9.9.9.¢.9,6.6.9.9.¢
$.0:0.0.0.0.0.8.0.6.0.6.0.0.0.0.0.6.9.0.0.99.00$.6.004
):0:9:9.0:0.:0:9.0.0:0.0.9.0.0.9.9.9,:6.6.0.9.:0,0.9.9.0.9.900¢

).9:9.0.0.9.0.6:9.6.0.0.9.9.0.0.0.9.9.09.9.:9.9.¢.9,0.9.¢.0.8.¢6¢
1:0.9.9.0.0.0.6.0.0.6.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.9.:0.6:0.0.0.0.0.8.0.0.0
50 6.4
10.0.0.6.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.9.09
09500 000:99.09.0.69.09.906.0461
EOBINNS 04 90 SONET00 S ED
XX

AR ID00.000.000090
84

0/8.9.9.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.9.9.00.00.0.09.99.0.9,6:0,0.0.0.9.69.4

ROAH.8.08.00.0.0.0.00.0.0.0.0.9.0.69.0000000006 089999800000
05.0.0:0.00.0.0.00.000.90.090.0005.08006000$9.0.0890088000004

1:9:0:0.0.0.9.9.0.0.08.0.60.0.60600.0.00905909.009000.9
9990486904604
$.0.0.0.6.6.0.0.0.00.000.0.008008.0.68.00090809.90808.8.00090000064004
).8.0.6.0.9.9.8.0.09.8.0.0.0.¢.00.0.0.0.9.0.09.0.9099.6.0909.909096.96960$000664

Connecting Sites
This appendix describes the structured wiring configuration connections to other sites for
known applications only.

D.1

iIntroduction
The DECconnect System structured wiring cable plant has specified a wiring infrastructure to be compliant with the EIA/TIA-568 building wiring standard (see Figure D-1).
Within the cable plant infrastructure, a single site has only one main distribution frame

(MDF). Connections to other sites can occur in the following type of configurations when
designed for known applications.

Campus Configuration

Metropolitan Configuration

Global Configuration

D.2 Campus Configuration
Multiple sites can exist wiiliin the campus grounds. Connection of these sites is done
through dedicated fiber optic links between each MDF. For most applications, Digital
recommends using extended LAN to connect sites. For more information on extended
LAN products, see the Network and Communications Buyer’s Guide available from
Digital Equipment Corporation.

Figure D—1: Wiring Structure

Building 1

Buiding
Backbone

@
L?J__

Equipment

Room

r ______ -y

CCiiC

Work Area

HDF

Building
Entrance
Point

Building 4

Building 3

Building 2
CC/IC ] cenc

CC/IC [——] coic

CC/IC ] cene

IDF

HDF

Work Areal

w13

cornc L wel{s]

HDF

Work Areal

Work Area

conc f—{we{s]

ceiAc

men

wal—{ s]

Legend:
X

Crossconnect

CrossconnecVinterconnect

[s] watibox
@ Station Equipment
LKG-4091-001

D-2

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

D.3 Metropolitan Configuration

When multiple sites in a metropolitan area must be connected and fiber optic links may

not be practical, use a microwave link between METROWAVE bridges at each MDF to
create an intersite extended LAN. Microwave links are “line—of-site,” reaching distances
of up to 7.2 kilometers (4.5 miles).

For more information on the METROWAVE bridge product, refer to the Network and
Communications Buyer's Guide available from Digital Equipment Corporation.

D.4 Global Configuration
When widely scattered sites must be connected, use a sateilite or terrestrial link between
TransLAN bridges located in each MDF. The TransLAN bridge supports network connections that can span the globe.

When widely scattered sites must be connected, or where connecting to multivendor
networks, use wide area network (WAN) communications media between Routers and/or
Gateways.

For more information on TransLAN bridges, Routers
and Communications Buyer's Guide available from

Connecting Sites

- Gateways, refer to the Network
gital Equipment Corporation.

D-3

KEERKK XX A XX XK X KKK XXX KKK A AKX XX AKX XXX XK AR AR KR KKK XX KKK
S 00000

IO IIPIT PO

84
00000 0.0.000.0.600.00.0.008000

XRARXRKXKXHX XK KX KR REXX XXX RICONAN XXX XX KX KKK KK
KREK XXX XXX XK KX K LK AN A XX LK XX KKK AKX KKK K AX KKK KX KX

e 0 00 0 0100000 001001 0100016 0.0 0.0/0.0:0.08.0.0.0.0.0.06.90.04

XXXHRXAX KX KKK KX XXX XAAXKAX XX XK KX RN AXKKKXKKX
KXKAXAX KX AR K XARRARK KA XX AKX AR KK XXX KKK KKK
X
XXX K XKXK
XKX
AKX KKK
XXX
XXX HAAKXKXKXXX
RAAXKX
00008680464
FOe 0000 PP PPOPPPITIITI
EXKXXK L KKK XX XXX XK HL KKK KKARKHXLKKX
KX EXKARK XXX KK AKX KKK LRXKKKKX KKK
AX
XX
XX XXX XK AXKXKLKLX
XX E XXX
KXX
KXKXKK
XKX
XX KKK KKK KX
KXXAXKXK

XX
LXK KKK KXKXKARXKKX
KXKXRXRA
XXX
XXX XX KAXAKXNKXKHAXKXK
XX NKAXHXKX
KXRAXXHKKKKX

S XKXKXKK
XUXAXXKNKKAK
POR P OO

O 000.0:0.0.0:4

KHKAAXKXKKKKHXX
AAXRKXAAKXKKKK

KAXKXXXAXKX
XXXKXXXKY
XAXAXXK
KRAXX
XXX
X

X
XXX
XXXXX

).0.9.9.9.6.0.4

XXAAXAKXX

P0.0.8.0.9.0.8.4.9.64

XXXXAXAXXAXXX
p.8.8.0.6.0.9.0.0.8.9965.5.4

10.9.9.0.0.0.6.04.0.6.96.0.¢04

)0.0:0.0.0.0.¢.6.¢,08.:9.8.9.6.80.04

p.0.9.0.9.6.0.9.0.0.0.0.0.¢.9.9.9.9.0,0,04
04
):9.9.0.9:0.0.6.9.0.6.0.0.8.0.9.0.0.66.60

PO EE0.6:0.9.9.490.09¢6.00.984

0
¢4
$.9.9:9.0.0.9.0.0.0.0.99.:0.0:0.0.0.9.9.0.9.9,00

F0.0.0.0:0.0.0.0.00.0.0.6.0.0.0.0.0.0.0,0.9.0.0.9.6.¢8
070.0.0.0,9°9.6.9.9.0.0.0.8.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.8.0.9.6.¢.0.¢
)9, 0.5.0.0.0.0.0.9.0. 6000000009 09.99.6.09.000.60

10.0.0.9.0.0.0.0.0.0:0.0.0.0.0.0.0.6.0.00.008.6.68.09.0$.6004
PO0.9:0.0.0.0.0.00.0.0.0.0.0.00.0.0.05.0.00.0.0.9.9.08.0.$.09

.9.¢.:6.9.0.0,4
9.4:6.0.0.
00 90.0/0.0.0.0.0.9,0,0.0
PO0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0
KD G000 0.000.90.0.0.009.0:0.0.0.068.00.0086008800880.064

4
.0
0 808809800080
.0.906
06000000000
.0.099
8060900
FO000.0.0.09

POV 0.00.000.0.6.0000000000.00.080.8.00800800060004
POS VOO PN OO PN 0P 0.00.0.80.808.0.0.60.0.06800800880000800,

Special Distance Situations
This appendix describes the special distance situations for known applications.

E.1

Introduction
The DECconnect System structured wiring cable plant has specified campus and build-

ing backbone distances to be compliant with the EIA/TIA-568 building wiring standard

(see Figure E-1).

Figure E-1: Campus and Building Backbone Distances

Main
Distribution
Frame (MDF)

intermediate
Distributicn
Frame

Horizontal
Distribution
Frame

e 1500m (4920f) ol
—
00m (1640
2000 m (6560 ft)
Maximum

LKG-4092-001

NOTE
When the HDF-to-IDF distance is less than maximum,
the IDF-to-MDF distance can be increased to a maxi-

mum of 2000 meters (6560 feet).

These distances provide a site with a structured wiring system that supports a multiproduct environment. In special cases, distance requirements for the campus backbone require dedicated campus backbone fiber optic cables of 2000 meters (6560 feet) or greater
with building backbone fiber optic cables up to 500 meters (1640 feet). These extended
distances are only designed into the cable plant with known applications. Since dedicated
active equipment is being designed with these links, it is important to verify the link-loss
calculation for each link.

Review the procedures given in Chapter 5 (Fiber Optic Design), and complete the linkloss calculation worksheet to verify the extended distance numbers.
Figure E-2 and Figure E-3 illustrate special distance situation examples:
¢

Figure E-2 is a concept diagram of a site showing a fiber optic Ethernet backbone with an extended 10 kilometer (6.2 miles) connection to a remote building.

Figure E-3 is a concept diagram of a dedicated FDDI backbone showing 2
kilometer (1.2 miles) connection between the MDF and building IDFs.

E-2

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

Figure E-2: Fiber Optic Ethernet Backbone with an Extended Connection

100 m (328 ft)
4 — 62.5/125

Bldg 3
1st Fir

10 km (6.2 mi)
4 - 62.5/125

Bldg 2

B|dg\

1st Fir

Bidg 1

510 m (1673 ft)

Tot FIr

4 — 62.5/125

1100 m (3608ft)

4 - 62.5/125

50 m (164 ft)
4 — 62.5/125

90 m (295 ft)
4 — 62.5/125

TM~

70 m (230 ft)
4 - 62.5/125
Bidg 1
2nd Fir

(00)
LKG-4093—89A

Special Distance Situations

E-3

Figure E-3: FDDI Backbone with 2 km (1.2 mi) Connection Between Buildings

100 m (328 ft)

6 — 62.5/125

Bidg 3
1st Fir

\500 m

(1640 ft)

1000 m (3280ft)
6 — 62.5/125

\Fm

Bidg 2
1st Fir

2000 m (6560ft)
6 — 62.5/125

—

6.25,/125
Bldg 4
1st Fir

(00)

1500 m (4920ft)
6 — 62.5/125
Fm

Bidg S

ist Fir

Bidg 1
1st Fir

2000 m (6560ft)
6 — 62.5/125
Bidg 2
1st Fir

(01)
Fm

50 m (164
4 —

ft)

62.5/125

90 m (295 ft)
6 — 62.5/125

~—

70 m (230 t)
6 - 62.5/125

50 m (164 ft)
6 — 62.5/125

LKG—4090-~89A

E-4

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

PO PP OPIIICOOP D009 040690.0000000060880800800088869
HRAXXA XK XXX XXX XXX AKX AX LA XXX KKK KK AKX KL KX KA KKK AKX
0
080600000904
0000
0000000006
ISP P00 00000800
8060600:
8.600080008
00006:008.0
PGPSOV
D000
PO PP

POPO OO0 PPPPE ISP 0.0.0.00000.0.80.000¢8008000
P OP OGP0 000000.00.50008000800808080096080
PO OO00.0.0090.0.086.00.6900900080088088006800

PO00.09.0:0.00.0.0.959.6000000000040866906480904

POV P00 080660060 008909.6068990099009
P OO0 090000 00.9.8.060000000600908400600604

}070.0.0:0.0.0.86:0.0.0.0.6.889.60006606660904
)00.08.0.6.000.0000.00600008090.90.984
PO OO0 8 0000000.0¢0008.090000404
19.0.0.8.0.0.069.05.0.09966040850¢4
10.0.0.9:¢.00.06.9.68.00060.9500604

1010.9.0.0.6.0.0.0.6.8.0.6.0.0.0.000.04
19.0.9.0.:0.6.6.60.0.6.9.9.0.4.6.0.4
XX KAAXAXAXKXKXKKXXX
1.0.0.9.9.9.6.0.6.9.4,0.9,0,0.¢

).6.0,0.9.0.9:0.9.6.9.8.9.4
XKAKXAXAXKKK

XUKXXKKXXXX
XXXXXXX
XHXXX
XXX
X

X
XXX

XXXXX

AXAXXXX

KXAXXXXKX
XXAXKKKXKXX

XXAXKXXAXEAXKX

$.9.9.0.0.8.9.6.9.6.9.6.0.9.04
p.0.6.6.0.0.6.6.5.9.6.9.$.06.6.0.4

1.0.6.0.0.0.0.0.6.0.:0.0.0.0.0.9.$.¢.¢¢
04
J.0.9.0.0.0.0.0.5.:9.8.0.80.0.90.68.6

D9.0:0.6.0.0.0.80.0.0.9.009.0.900086
)9:0.0.9.0:9.0.0.:0.0.9.9.9.9.0.09.696.9.0494

P9:0:0.0:0.9.8:9.0:6.6.0.0:6.9.0.0.00.0.9.9.9.4.0.0.¢
)070.9.0:9.9.0.0.0:0.,0.0.0.0:0.0.49.99.9:0.46.6.60.9.4
100:0°0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.00.0,6.0.0.0.0.9.6.9.690.969004

):9,0.9:0.0.0.0.0.0:0.9.0.0.0.0.0,6.0.0.9.4.6.8.0.9.90.9.05.9.0.4
P9.0.6.000.0.0.90.0.0.4.0.0.00000.080.9.0.6.590.900484

$00.6.9.0.9.0.0.9.05.0.0.6.0.0 ¢6,000080.6.9.0.9.9 06900604
0.9.0.0. 0008 000,00$00.0.08.5.00:9.0.0.50.08.9.69..6
RO
VORI N 0000 P00V 090.800.0040.50000000000000.904

PO0.9°0.00:0.0:0.0:0.98.0.0:0.06.0,0.0.0.048.0900.0.9.0.098966$¢004

000900
80008096004
6:0.0.6.09
0090000908
RO 6.0.9.0.9.0.0,0.0.0.
10.0.0,9.0:0.6.0.:0.0.9.0.0.0.6.0.90.8.0:0.00000060960008 6890000608008

10.00.0.0.0.9.0.9.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.980.9008600606000086856.00008000004¢
D0 0H090.00,00699 00049000000800085954990060.988399.994
POV

NEC Cabling Requirements
This appendix summarizes National Electrical Code (NEC) cabling requirements.

F.1

Overview of the National Electrical Code
The NEC is issued by the National Fire Protection Association. The NEC's purpose is to

safeguard people and property from hazards arising from the use of electricity and electrical equipment and conductors. The code is advisory and regulates the installation of electrical equipment and conauctors within buildings. The code :s updated every three years.
{The latest version available is dated 1990.)

NOTE
For installations outside of the United States, use the
appropriate local standards.
Although the code is advisory only, it is routinely adopted by jurisdictions across the

United States as part of their local building codes. Some jurisdictions do not adopt the
entire code and have local requirements that are different from the NEC. A local jurisdiction’s rules always supersede the NEC.

F.1.1

DECconnect System Copper Wiring Classifications
Generally, DECconnect System copper wiring is classed as either Class 2 (CL2) or Class
CM wiring.

NOTE
This guide describes the installation of Class 2 (CL2)
wiring. For international installations, refer to the ap-

propriate national standards.
This guide does not describe installation of Class 1 wir-

ing, which controls equipment whose failure to operate

may cause a direct fire or life hazard (fire alarms, medical call systems, elevators, cranes, conveyers or other
moving equipment.
F1.1.1

Class 2 Wiring

Class 2 wiring (NEC article 725) is power-limited signaling circuitry whose failure to op-

erate would not cause a direct fire or life hazard.
Class 2 wiring includes low-power heating and cooling control circuits, typical data and
voice trar.fer circuits, and wiring used for interconnecting electronic data processing and

computer equipment. Class 2 cables are marked CL2X, CL2, CL2R, and CL2P, depending on their flame resistance.
F.1.1.2

Class CM Wiring

Class CM wiring (NEC article 800) covers communications circuits used for telephones
and telephone circuits used for data transmission. Class CMVi cables are marked CMX,
CM, CMR, and CMP, depending on their flame resistance. CM cables can be used for
CL2 applications, but not vice versa.
F.1.2

Fiber Optic Cables Installed Along with Electrical Cables
The NEC also applies to the installation of fiber optic cables when they are installed along
with electrical cables. Fiber optic cables (NEC article 770) are divided into three types:

Nonconducting — contains no metallic members or other electrically conductive material. Nonconducting cables are labeled OFN, OFNR, or OFNP, depending on the NEC flammability rating.

Conducting — contains electrically conductive material (such as metallic
strength members or vapor barriers) that are not current carrying material. Conducting cables are labeied OFC, OFCR, or OFCP, depending on the NEC flammability rating.

Hybrid — contains both fiber optic and current carrying electrical conductors.
Hybrid cables are classified as electrical cables, depending on the type of electrical conductors they contain.

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration Guide

F.2

Fire Resistance of Cabling

The 1990 NEC divides wiring into four classes. Each class is based on standard flame

resistance and flame spread testing. The NEC specifies where each class of cable can be
installed. The NEC class must be marked on the cable. In order of increasing strictness,
the four NEC wiring classes are as follows:

Limited use cables — marked CMX or CL2X (the lowest flame resistance).
Used only in single and multifamily dwellings. There are no fiber optic cables
in this class.

General use cables — marked CM or CL2. Can be installed in offices and
rooms, but not behind or through walls or ceilings and not in environmental air
handling spaces. Fiber optic cables in this class are marked OFC or OFN.

Riser use cables — marked CMR or CL2R. Used between floors and in vertical
shafts. Fiber optic cables in this class are marked OFCR or CFNR.

Plenum use cables — marked CMP or CL2P (the highest flame resistance).

Used in plenums and air-handling spaces. Fiber optic cables in this class are
marked OFCP or OFNR.
With flammability ratings, the NEC allows the use of a higher rated cable in alower rated

application. For example, in DECconnect System applications, CL2 is recommended for
flammability classes CI.2X and CL2, and CL2P for CL2R and CL2P. Cable marked
CMP, CL2P, OFCP, or ()FNP can be used for all four applications.

F.3

Environmental Airspace
Often, cabling is installed in the space above a suspended ceiling or below a raised floor.
These spaces can also act as the return for the building's heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning (HVAC) systems.

Figure F-1 shows an example of an above-ceiling environmental airspace. Note that
there is no duct work for the air return; therefore, the entire area above the ceiling is considered environmental airspace.

Figure F--2 shows an example of an above-ceiling nonenvironmental airspace. Note that
there is duct work for the air return above the ceiling; therefore, the area above the ceiling
is considered nonenvironmental airspace.

NEC Cabling Requirements

F-3

NOTE

When designing cable links, make sure to adhere to all
Underwriter Laboratories (UL) regulations by selecting
air plenum certified cable for use in air plenums and
ducts.

Figure F-1: Typical Above-Ceiling Environmental Airspace

Environmental Airspace Classified as “Other”

~———————3»

Environmental Airspace
Classified as “Other”

§>/ g?itl:.lm Air

Suspended Ceiling
0

/ -

Diffuser & Q %

()

0 Og3

Lfi G %
Return Air Flow

Supply Air Flow
Occupied Area

LKG-3342-80!

F-4

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration Guide

Figure F-2: Typical Above-Ceiling Nonenvironmental Airspace

Nonenvironmental Airspace

Suspended Ceiling

)

L
&
Diffuser /

[

)
%

Supply Airflow

Return Air Duct
f

.l,:

0 Og

.
‘ G%
&]

Occupied Area

Return Airflow
LKG-3343-891

F.4

Fire Code Considerations
Any time cabling penetrates walls, partitions, floors, or ceilings that have a fire-resistance
rating, the cabling penetration points must be fire-stopped using approved methods to

maintain the fire-resistance rating. There are UL-listed prefabricated fire seals and caulking materials available. If there are any doubts about requirements, consult the local
building inspection authorities or the building’s architect.

NOTE
For installations outside of the United States, refer to the
appropriate local standards.

On the network floor plans, note any locations where a cable path penetrates a fire wall.

NEC Cabling Requirements

F-5

XZXXXXZZXXXXHXXXXXXXXXXXXKXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXIXXX
VTN YIS CAAI OGO TCII OGO EN SIS0 088.0.9.0.80
PTG OO TGN AIEGI SO INRN SIS IO ID SIS 00.800.0001
TP OO TSI SIS NI ST TA IS T IO 00004
A R Y S ¥ o AS S O S O R O
POV CTTIGII A ISS DI GH IS 0S50 0026 E 00
OOV ISIONGOL IO IO I IS GOS80 0800800008
NS OTIINOTIN BSOS SN GI I E09000588004
PRI VIO P IO HA ISV IND00000000004
0.09.80.0.01
IS IS IBN
IIN
NS OGS
NOTOIG
KXY
OO
H
KK
KRAKL YA KK
OO SISO S 0000000008080800004
)5.9.60. 0000.0.05046.0059694840088004
KANAS
AAX XK K KA KKK KA A
100.0.6.00.6009.0.9.90088890884
)8:0,6.0:8.0.9.0.0.0.0.9.4.0.6.09.0064

$8.0.0.0.0.0.0.8.9.00.0.0.0.9000
KL
L KAX
AAXXXARXAHEA

AXKAKKAKAXKKKALKXK
p$,0,8.8.0.0.4.8. 860,94
XXXAXKKKAXAK
D10.0.9.0.6.0.9.9.¢
XXXNXKX
XXXXX

XXX
X

XXX
NXXXX

XXXXAKX

b9.9.9.9.0.0.9.4.¢
XAXXAXKXKXX

KAXAXKXXKXXKXX
p.0.0.0.5.0.5:098.9.8.9.6.4

LXK
KX
KX XAKXEXK
XA
AXAKX

1'8:9.0,6:8.0.0.0.0,0.6.4.6.9.6.9.0.0
PO E9.0,0.6:0.80.6.0.0.80.088884
PP E V. 8.0.00.6.0.0.0080904¢0.04
I0.0.0.9.0.0.0.6.8:9.6.0.9.0.0.9.8:9.8.¢.6.99.0.4
PO 0.0 0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.6.0.0.0.0.0.69.909.89.8.04

PO 0.0.0.0.0.0.00.0.6:0.0.9.6.0 609988680984
POG OV 0.0.00.0.0.0.9.0.0.6.6.66:08¢0.0¢4¢
POO POIDP000.9.0.900.0.06.06908.60000080
KEXKRXEX KA XXX EX KA KL LKA XA K KAKRXAKXXEX
KYXAXKEKX KA KA XAXA XK LKA AT H XA XX KK A KLKKKK
XEXHHN POPP

$.9.9.9°9.9.0.04PO

VOO09000000.06.08:9.60.0.8¢.0869.60090
4
0G0 0000000 0.0000:0000000.8398e06¢

CXEXK XX A AKX KKK AKX AKX XK E XXX I KRR XA L LA XK XAKKK
OIIPIP VG0 0900000000 88.0080000060004
POR O PP
XXX AR ARXE XX E XX NI AR XXX AR KA XA XKL KXAK KK ALK A K AKX KK KALX
E
68800973
OPO
09.808880
EVO
00 8.00:0.00
O 000000T00IIININ

G
Reference Documents

This appendix provides ordering information for reference documents. Additional

sources of standards and codes are listed at the end of this appendix.

G.1 ANSI Documentation
Order the following documentation from:

American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
430 Broadway
New York, NY 10018

(212) 642-4900
e

Communications Wire and Cable for Wiring of Premises
ANSIICEA 5-80-576-1988, Second Edition, September 1988

ANSIIPC-FC-213, Undercarpet Cable Specification

Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Physical Laver Medium Dependent
(PMD)

ANSI/EIAITIA—492AAAA, Detail Specification for 62.5 wm Core Diameter/125
pum Cladding Diameter Class la Multimode, Graded—Index Optical Waveguide

Fibers
®

ANSIIEEE Std 802 .3b, ¢, d, and e (1989 Edition), an American National
Standard. 1EEE Standards for Local Area Networks.

G.2 ASTM Documentation
Order the following documentation from:

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1916 Race Street

Philadelphia, PA 19103
(215) 299-5400

ASTM D 4566-86, Electrical Performance Properties of Insulations and Jackets
for Telecommunications Wire and Cable

G.3 AT&T Documentation
Order the following documentation from:
AT&T Customer Information Center
Commercial Sales Representative
P.O. Box 19901
Indianapolis, IN 46219

1-800-432-6600
e

AT&T Premises Distribution System Fiber Installation Manual (Document No.
555-401-102)

G-2

LSTIU-072/7 Lightguide Termination Shelf Installation AT&T 636-299-103-5

LSCIU-024/5 Lightguide Combination Shelf Installation AT&T 636-299-103-6

LSSIU-072/5 Lightguide Splice Shelf Installation AT&T 636-299-103-11

LSJIU-072/5 Lightguide Storage Shelf Installation AT&T 636-299-103-14

LTI1A Splice Organizer Installation AT&T 636-299-103-15

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

G.4 BICSI Documentation
Order the following documentation from TESTMARK Laboratories, but make check

payable to GTE Supply Inc.

TESTMARK Laboratories
Publications Department
3050 Harrodsburg Road
Lexington, KY 40503
(606) 223-3061

BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual
The Building Industry Consulting Service, Intemational (BICSI)
19891990 price: $72 (members), $179 (nonmembers)

G.5 EIA/TIA Documentation
Order the following documentation from either of these sources:
The Electronic Industries Association (EIA)
1722 Eye Street, N.W., Suite 300
Washington, DC 20006
(202) 4574900

Telecommunications Industries Association (TTA)
1722 Eye Street, N.W., Suite 4040
Washington, DC 20006
(202) 4574934

EIA/TIA-568 Draft Standard,

Commercial Building Wiring Standard

EIA/TIA-570 Draft Standard, Residential and Light Commercial Building
Wiring Standard

EIA/TIA-569 Draft Standard, Building Standard for Telecommunications Media
and System

EIA-440A Fiber Optic Terminology

EIA Interim Standard Omnibus Specification, Local Area Network Twisted Pair
Data Communications Cable, NQ-EIA/IS-43, September 1987

EIA-A45S Fiber Optic Test Procedures

EIA-472, Generic Specification for Fiber Optic Cables

EIA-492 Specification Series for Optical Fibers

Reference Documents

G-3

EIA-472A, Sectional Specification for Fiber Optic

Communication Cables for

Outside Aerial Use

EIA-472B, Sectional Specification for Fiber Optic

Communication Cables for

Underground and Buried Use

EIA-479C, Sectional Specification for Fiber Optic Communication Cables for
Indoor Use

EIA-479D, Sectional Specification for Fiber Optic Communication Cables for
Outdoor Telephone Plant Use

Commercial Building Wiring Standard (EIA Part No. 1907)

G.6 GTE Documentation
Order the following documentation from:

GTE Communication Systems Corporation
Publications Manager

Department 431.1 — Tube Station C1
400 North Wolf Road

Northiake, IL 60164
(312) 681-7483 or (312) 681-7479
°

Line and Cable Placing (CH No. 140)
Approximate price: $32

Cable Splicing (CH No. 150)

Approximate price: $28
.

Cable Maintenance and Testing (CH No. 170)
Approximate price: $26

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

G.7 IEEE Documentation
Order the following documentation from:
The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. (IEEE)
1EEE Service Center
445 Hoes Lane

P.O. Box 1331

Piscataway, NJ 08855-1331
(201) 9810060

JEEE 802.3-1988 (also known as ANSI/IEEE Std 802.3—1988 or ISO 8802-3:
1989 (E)), Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD)
access method and physical layer specifications

|EEE 802.3 Supplements

|EEF 802.5-1985 (also known as ANSI/IEEE Std 802.5-1985 or ISO Draft Proposal 8802/5). Token Ring Access Method and Physical Layer Specification

G.8 ISDN Documentation
Order the following documentation from:
Intemational Standard Organization (ISO)
1, Tue de Varembe
Case Postale 56

CH-1211 Geneva 20
Switzerland
+412234 1240

|SDN BRI(ISO 8877)

G.9 NEC Documentation
Order the following documentation from:
The National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1 Batterymarch Park
Quincy, MA 02269
1-800-344-3555
°

Narional Electrical Code (NEC)

Reference Documents

G-5

G.10 NEMA Documentation
Order the following documentation from:

National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
2101 L Street
Washington, DC 20037

(202) 457-8400

NEMA-250-1985, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (100 Volts Maximum)

G.11 UL Documentation
Order the following documentation from:

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
333 Pfingsten Road
Northbrook, IL 60062

(312) 272-8800
e

UL 1863

G.12 Additional Sources
CSA:

Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
178 Rexdale Boulevard
Rexdale (Toronto), Ontario
Canada M9W 1IR3
(416) 7474363

FCC:

Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Washington, DC 20554

(301) 725-1585
Federal and Military Specifications:

Naval Publications and Forms Center
Commanding Officer
NPFC 43, 5801 Tabor Avenue

Philadelphia, PA 19120-5099
(215) 697-3321

G-6

DECconnect System Fiber Optic Planning and Configuration

ICEA:

Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)
P.O. Box 440
South Yarmouth, MA 02664

(508) 3944424
IEC:

Intemational Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)

Sales Department
P.O.Box 131
3 rue de Varembe
1211 Geneva 20

Switzerland
+41 22 34 01 50

Reference Documents

G-7

1010:0.6:0.6.000.0600.60.066000056080860
80800008800 8880.8008009
$.0.0.0.9.6.6.0.0.0.0.0.00.0.8000860880000000580.0000000000000004

PO00.0.0:00.00600.0.600048606080608500088008088088800
94
)0.0.9.0. 0005 $.0.0.9.9.6.60.00000000888008080088088800684
§0.8.0.0.0.0.080.8.6.090.0.068000008085080.0000800000.000¢

$0.6.0.:0.0.0.0.0.6.6.0.0.6.0.00688809600088500008888884
)0.0.0.0.0.0.0.09.0.0.00.80090909.008060060000600001

J0.0.9.00.0.0.9.6.8.6.0.6.0.0.0.8800.8900¢0600509900004

PSPPI ELO0 0 0808008600.0080008080004
p0.0.0.6.0.0.:6.00800.0.080690688000000080604
1. 0.0.0.0.0.00.00.00.80.609900660686$080004
P0.6.9.69.¢.:9890.00.0.6.8.9.90988480080604
$9.0.8.8.0.0.0.0.0.6.0.85.9.6.0.900.69¢6$0.04
1.9.0.0.0.0.6.6.9.9.9.0.0.0.0.0.8.0.9.0060.0004
PO9.9.5.8.0.65.8.9.0.6.9.90600910.664

).9.6.0.0.9.4.0.6.0.9.8.9.8.9.9.9.900.64

}.8.0.9.0.0.0.8.0.009.608.00001
).9:4:0.9.9.9.9.0.0.¢.0.9.9.0.9.6.4
). 9.9.9.8.9.9.9.9.4.0.¢,0.0.6.4
).0.0.0.0.9.6.6.0.4.0.0.0.¢
XAXKKXXXXXXXK
XXXXXXAKX

AXXXXKX
XXXXX
XXX
X

XXX

XXAXX
AXXXAKK

1.9.8.9.9.9.9.9.9¢
).9.0.0.0.9.9.4.0.4.0.4
). 9.4:6.9.9.0.0.9.9.9.0.9.¢

):9.9.9.9.9.9.0.9.0.9.9.9.¢.¢¢
b9 . 6.8.9.9.9.9.0.9.:0.0.0.0.9.0.04

)0.0.0.6.0.9.9.9.0.9.0.0.0.0.¢.9.99
p0.:6:9.9.9.0.0.9.9.9.9.8.9.9.:9,9.0.0.8.9¢
$.:6.0.:0.0.9.0.9.0.9.0.6.9.6.09.9.0.6.0660.4
).9.4.0.0.9.0.:0.0.0.0.0.9.9.9.0.9.9.0.0.0.9.9.9.94

19.9.9.9.9.0.9.0.8.8.0.6.0.9.0.9.0.8.9.0.0.0.0¢.0.0¢
D:9.9.0.9.0.9.0.0.0.0.0.9,00.0.9.9.9.9.0.9.¢.9.$.6.$.6.64

):0.0.0.9:0.9.9.0.0.0.9.9.9.9.9:9.6,0.0.9.9.6.0.6.0.0.0.9.6.0¢
).:9:0.8.:0.0.8.9.0.008.0.6.0.0.0.6.9.0.0.0.0.8.6.9.6.0.96.4.0.0.9¢
).0.0:0.0.0.9.5.9.9.6.0.0.0.9.0.0.0.9.0.0.0.8:9.0.6.0.0.9$9.9.0.9.¢4

$:0:9.0.0.90.8.9.0.9.0.9.0.6.0.9:0.0.9.9.9.09.9.0.8.0.9.09.$.0.9.00.0.0¢
DI 0:9.09.0.0.0.999.0.00.050.0.00.9.0.6.0.9.0.0.0.9.0.¢.9.6.¢4
b e O 006.000.00.9.9.0.099.0.90000098.0099000984¢0094

D39:9:8:9.9:0:9.9.9.0.9.0.4.9.9.9.0:9.0.0.9.6.0,6.0.0.0.0:0.9.9.9.6.9.9.0.¢.9.0.9.9.4.4

19.0:0.8.8.0.00.0.0.9.9.9.0.9.0.9.0.0.0.9.0.9.9:0.9.9.9.0.0.0.9.9.99.9.9.9.¢0.04$.094
D8 9.0.9.:00.0.9.6.0.0.09.9.0.0.005.809890086908000.608009009.00004
}.9:0.0.0:9.9.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.90.¢:0.9.09.9.0.¢.9.9.608.09.0.9.0.0000.80.99006046004

b098.8.0.0.0.608.00068000008000.0600900009998060.9098998806804

Glossary

Active Equipment

A device that provides for communication services and requires primary power;
for example, repeaters, bridges, terminal servers, concentrators, and computers.

Building

A structure containing floor(s) and an entrance area where communications cables enter and leave the structure.

Buliding Backbone cable

The communications cable installed inside a building.

Cable Plant

The campus and building v iring infrastructure that supports voice, video, and
data applications.

Campus

The buildings and grounds of a complex, such as a university, college, industrial
park, or military establishment.

Campus Backbone cable

The communications cable installed between buildings.

Glossary-1

Central Voice

The place where voice communications common carriers terminates customer

lines and locates switching equipment that interconnects those lines.

Crossconnect

A patch cable and passive hardware that is used to administer the connection of
cables at a distribution frame.

Crossover

Patch cable(s) within a link that connect in such a way to route the transmit
port of one piece of active equipment to the receive port of another piece of active
equipment.

Electronic Industries Association (EIA)

A standards organization that includes standards for the electrical and functional characteristics of interface equipment. These EIA standards are used to
make sure there is compatibility between data communications equipment and
data terminal equipment.

Equipment Room (ER)

A room in which active equipment, telecommunications equipment, MDF, IDF,
HDF, and SDF is housed.

Extended LAN

The local area network (LAN) formed by the connection of two or more segments
with bridges.

Horizontal Crossconnect (HC)

A crossconnect that is located within the horizontal wiring subsystem. Can occur
at an horizontal, satellite, or office distribution frame.

Glossary-2

Horizontal Distribution Frame (HDF)

Located in an equipment room on the floor of a building and consists of the active, passive, and support components that provide the connection between the
building backbone cabling and the horizontal wiring.

intrabullding cable

See Building Backbone cable.

Interbuilding cable

See Campus Backbone cable.

Intermediate Crossconnect (IC)

A crossconnect that is located at the intermediate distribution frame (IDF).

Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF)

Located in an equipment room and consists of the active, passive, and support
components that provide the connection between interbuilding cabling and the
intrabuilding cabling for a campus and the intrabuilding cabling for a building.

Link

A segment or a number of segments connected together through crossconnects

that provide the communication path between active equipment at both ends.

Main Crossconnect (MC)

A crossconnect that is located at the main distribution frame (MDF).

Main Distribution Frame (MDF)

Located in a equipment room and consists of active, passive, and support components that provide the connection of the interbuilding backbone cables between
IDFs.

Glossary—3

Not supported

Does not meet the requirements for use and may or may not function properly.
No support for service or troubleshooting problems.

Office Distribution Frame (ODF)

A enclosed rack usually located in an office area. It consists of the active, pas-

sive, and support components that provide the physical connection between the
horizontal wiring and the wallbox.

Recommended

A recommended configuration is a supported configuration.

Remote Walil Distribution Frame (RWDF)

A small wall-mounted cabinet that consists of the passive and support components that provide the physical connection between the horizontal wiring and the
wall box.

Satellite Distribution Frame (SDF)

Located in an equipment room on the floor of a building and consists of the active, passive, and support components that provide the connections between the
horizontal wiring and the wallbox.

Segment

The fiber optic cable that is behind the wall or in ground with fiber connectors
on each end.

Site

The campus and building wiring coverage with a geographical extent up to 3000

meters (9840 feet), up to 1,000,000 square meters (approximately 10,000,000
square feet) of office space, and a population of up to 50,000 individual users.
A site shall have one MDF.

Glossary—4

Site plan

A set of drawings that show the buildings on a campus, geological features of the
campus, streets, parking lots, waterwagys, interbuilding tunnels, conduits, and
utility hole covers.

Subsystem

A part of the structured wiring distribution system that is dedicated to a specific
purpose; for example, the horizontal wiring subsystem.

Supponed

Meets requirements for use. Has the backing of Customer Service and Engineering
in troubleshooting and remedial efforts if needed.

System Common Equipment

The equipment on a campus that provides functions common to terminal devices

such as telephones, data terminals, intergrated work stations, and personal computers. Typically, the system common equipment is the PBX switch, data packet
switch, or a central host computer.

Telecommunications Closet (TC)

A space in a building that is set aside to provide a safe, secure, and environmentally suitable area for the installation of cables, wires, telecommunications
equipment, termination, and administration cables.

Wallbox

Also called faceplate, information outlet, or telecommunications outlet. Connects
workstation wiring to horizontal wiring.

Glossary-5

9
003¢0
:0.8.
.600.¢6008680,0
:00.6
840 50800.0.00.0808
PESCPO0000
PO TP 000:0.0.0.9:0.40.5000068¢000850868¢0080680880,
KK
KKK XK HX KKK KKAKKXKKX
KK KRR R XK ARKKKAR
KXERARXHXR
P00 0000004:0.0.0.8.0.00806.0060088.0.68689880006480804
NS0 00.0.8:0:00.06.9.0.0100.0.0.0.08.00.0.90.9 8089800060880
10.0.0.0.9.0.8:6:0.8:0:3.4:6.9.6.9.8.9¢.0.0:0.6.0.0¢.69.¢.9.8¢2009000!
KARKAX XXX XXX XXX K XKARAKRKR XX KKK AKX XAKKKXK

POO0010.0.0.810.0.0.6:0.0.0099¢080880008060888]
8.¢,8298
1000:0°0:6.01519.0.0.8.0:6.0.:0.60.6.0.0.0.0.880904
1 6:9.0:09.9.00.0.0.0.0.6.010.0.0.0.80.9.8 998088888
8
DOSL910:0.0.6:0.90.9.6.6.8.0.9.8.0.8.8.0.6.0.888.0060
13.6:0.9.9.0.6:6.6.0.0.0.¢.03.¢:8..9.2.0,89.¢0.¢.604
10.0.010:9.0.010.0.0.9.6:1¢.9.0.¢.6.0.0,6.0.0.0.9.8.0

AKXKKKXY
XXX KKKAXKX
KEAXKKXX
1015.8:0.910.0.0.9.9.0.0.0.0.9.9.9.9.9,2.¢,¢
19.0.0:9.9.0.6:0.6.9.0.0 9,686,668 ¢4

XAR
AR KAXKXX
AXAXRXXAX

XU AURXRXKXAXKXKKKKXKXK
$.9:9.0.9.9.0.0.9.9.0.990.9.94
XX XXXXXXY

XXX

KEAXKXXXRAX
XXAXXXXXX
XXAHXXX

XXXXX
XXX
X

XXX
AXXXX

XXXXXXX

XXXXAXKXX
XAXXAXEXAXXK

XUXAXKXKXAXXXX
$.0.0.0.0.9.8.6.6.0.90.¢044

1.9.0.0.0.6.0.9.6.9.6.9.0.0.00.¢4
X
XX XXX XKXXKXXXXK
XXEXXE
XXXXAX
XX XXX HAAXAXKXKXKX

P0:8:0.8.0.0.6.0.6.0.0.0.900.0.060000

P .80, 0.0.80.4.8.:0.6.0.6.8.080.9.400.99.¢4
1.9:0.6.6:6.0.0.9.0.:0.0.0.0.8.:8.0.9.9.9.9.9.0.0.9.0.0.4

$6.0.6.0.0.0.9.8.0.0.699.:0.9.8.9.9.9.89.659.990.0
$.9.:6.9:¢.0.6.0.0.0.0.0.80.0.6.9.6.0,8.0.9.9 95,898,984

0604
$19.9.0:9:0.0:6:0.6.3.6.0:0,0.0.0.0.9.9.9.9.0.0.8.0.89.99
10.6.0.60.6.0.6.0.0.0.0.0.6.0.8.0.00.0.00.6.8.9.8.0.8.9.9.800.04
1:9:0:9:0.4.9.0.0.0.9.6.0.0:0.9.6.9:8:9.00.:0.0:0.0:0.6.9.0.9.:0.9.9.9.8.0¢
0910.0:0.0.0.0:0:9°0:0.9.0.09.9.:9.9.0.0.0.9.9:9.0.9.9.:0,¢.9.9.¢.¢.0
4.4

SR D929:6.6.0:0.0.0:0:0.0:0.9:0.0.:6.0.0.0,6.0.6.0.0.9.0.0.0.0.9.¢.0.6.9.9
¢4

10:0:0.0.0.0.0:0.0.0.0.0.9.0.0.0.00.:9.89.8.0.5.0.0.0,069.9.9.6.09.06086

F0.0:0.0:0.09.0.8.0.9.0.0.6:0.0.0.9.9.8.0.6.0.6.0,00.9.0.0.8.9.0.8.¢.8.¢.9.00.6.00.0

PO S 0.08.8.80.8.0.0.0.000000006060000000000¢.9090880000044
08800000004
000000.0.8008
080080860008
$9.6.0.6:0.0:0.0.0.00.0.66.0

:910.0.6.0.0.0.0°0.0.0.0.90.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0¢,0000.066.08.60808080004

Index
Administration subsystem (Cont.)

A
Above-ceiling cable trays (Digitalrecommended building horizontal routing method), 7-10

Acoustical requirements (ODF only), 10-25
Active networking equipment
considerations, 3-19
Administration
crossconnects, 2-18, 44
crossovers, 4-22
interconnects, 4-10
overview

planning, 2-17

subsystem, 4-1
strategy, 4-23

Patch Panel, 4-7, 4-8

planning, 2-13, 2-17
strategy, 4-22, 4-23
zones, 4-13, 4-40

All-dielectric cable, see construction listing
under Cable

Allowable system loss, 5-52, 8-12, 9-24
Architecture
building and campus backbones, 1-9
horizontal wiring, 1-12
structured wiring, 1-6

Armored cable, see construction listing
under Cable

zones, 4-13

Administration subsystem
crossconnect

components, 44, 4-5
locations, 1-23, 2-18, 41

overview, 1-23, 4-1
structure, 44

crossover definition, 4-22
documents overview, 4-1
hierarchy, 4-3
interconnect

active equipment, 5-24, 5-27, 5-29,
5-39

components, 4-10, 4-11
locations, 1-23, 2-18, 4-1

overview, 1-23, 4-1

structure, 4-10

Base concept diagrams, see Concept
diagrams
BICSI
overview, 1-5
references

cable plant, 1-5, 2-12
cables, 2-19
grounding cable at building entrance
point, 2-19

routing, 2-12, 7-10, 8-3, 8-7, 9-3,
9-15

Telecommunications Distribution Methods
Manual, xxiii, 14, 1-5, 2-12, 2-19,
2-38, 2-39, 242, 7-4, 7-10, 83,
9-3, 9-7, 9-15, 104

overview, 1-15, 1-23, 4-1

index—-1

BN24B-xx FDDI-to-FDDI cable assembly,
5-29
BN24D-xx FDDI-t0-2.6 mm bayonet ST-type
connector cable assembly, 5-28

Building backbone
Backbone ldentifier Worksheet, 4-32
BOM Worksheet, 8-16
Building Backbone
Cable Worksheet, 8-13
Cable Routing Worksheet, 8-9
Campus backbone
Cable Routing Worksheet, 9-17
design process
flow chart, 84
overview, 84
required documents, 8-3
distance restrictions, 3-18, 3-19, 8-12
function

cables, 1-17, 8-1

IDF, 1-9, 1-17, 1-25, 44, 8-1, 10-1
IDF

active networking equipment, 3-19
cable routing diagram requirements,
10-28

concept diagram symbol, 3-8, 3-26
crossconnect/interconnect map
requirements, 10-39

crossconnects, 1-23

distribution frame design process,
10-1

equipment racks, 2-36, 10-11
fiber

optic cable plant components,
10-9

footprint diagram requirements,
10-26

hierarchy, 3-6
identifiers, 4-32, 4-39
IDF-to-HDF links

building cabling, 8-6, 8-9,
8-11, 8-13

concept diagram symbols, 3-26
fiber count, 3-32, 3-33
interbuilding cabling, 3-33
intrabuilding cabling, 9-7,

9-12, 9-17, 9-23
interconnects, 4-10

layout diagram example, 10-16

Building backbone
IDF (Cont.)
panel connection map requirements,
10-33

links

concept diagram symbol, 3-8
configuration factors, 3-22
recommended fiber count, 3-33
maximum growth configurations, 3-25
overview, 1-15, 1-17

Building Industry Consulting Service,
International, see BICSI

Cable
concept diagram symbols, 3-8
considerations
environmental
indoor, 2-25
indoor/outdoor, 2-25

outdoor, 2-25
overview, 2-24

slack

distribution frames, 2-26
outdoor splice point, 2-26
overview, 2-25
system common equipment,
2-26

wallboxes, 2-26
construction

all-dielectric, 2-19, 2-20
armored, 2-19, 2-20, 2-21
Digital-recommended vertical
(heavy-duty), 8-11
heavy duty, 5-13, 8-11
light duty, 5-13
defining
building backbone, 8-11
campus backbone, 9-23

horizontal wiring, 7-13
Digital-recommended
indoor (tight-buffered), 2-19

outdoor (loose-tube or slotted-core),
2-19

entrance point requirements, 2-12

environmental considerations
outdoor, 923

plant, 5-11

Index—2

Cable (Cont.)

Cable (Cont.)
fiber optic overview, 2-18
Identifier Worksheet, 4-33
indoor

attenuation specifications, 5-12
building

label

breakout links, 4-45
Cable ldentifier Worksheet, 4-43,
4-44, 4-46, 4-50, 4-52
examples, 4-44

Backbone Cable Worksheet,

identifier code, 4—43

84, 8-11, 8-13
routing methods, 8-7

multiple-segment links, 4—44

building backbone

Backbone Cable Worksheet,
9-4, 9-7
building backbone and horizontal
wiring, 2-23
cable entrance point routing

overview, 4-43
maximum length
backbone, 1-9, 3-19, 5-14, 5-15,
5-19, 8-12, 9-19, 9-24
building backbone, 1-9, 3-19, '-12

FDDI link, 5-31
horizontal wiring, 1-12, 3-11 5-14,

methods, 9-9

5-19, 7-16

considerations, 2-25

ORnet link, 5-41

construction

work area wiring, 5-14, 6-3, 6-10,

6-11

heavy duty, 2-25

light duty, 2-25
Digital-recommended stranded tightbuffered, 2-19
equipment room routing methods,

10-28

fiber color code, 4-16, 5-13
heavy duty, 5-13
Horizontal Wiring Cable Worksheet,
7-15, 7-16, 7-17
interconnection and patching

factory-terminated assemblies,

outdoor

aenial, 2-21
applications, 2-21
armored and all-dielectric, 2-19
attenuation specification, 5—-12

breakout links, 3-22, 9-19
buried conduit, 2-21
Campus Backbone Cable Worksheet,
94, 9-23, 9-25

considerations, 2-25

light duty, 5-13

direct-buried, 2-21
fiber color code, 4~16, 5-13
loose-tube, 2-19, 2-20, 9-23

routing

routing methods, 9-15

2-24

horizontal methods, 7-10

slotted-core, 2-20, 9-23

vertical methods, 8-7

splice closures, 9-19, 9-20

tight-buffered, 2-22
work area wiring
factory terminated assemblies,

2-24
Worksheet, 6-8, 6-9, 6-12

installation methods, 2-38

jacket

types, 2-19, 9-23

underwater, 2-21
overview, 2-18

patch cable assemblies, 3-8, 4-11, 4-26,
5-28, 5-29, 5-38, 6-1, 610, 811
9-7, 10-5, 10-19, 1037, 10-39,
10-43

fanction, 7-15, 7-17, 8-11, 8-13
non-plenum, 2-23, 6-10
plenum, 2-23, 6-10, 6-11, 6-12,
7-15

PVC (non-plenum), 6-11, 6-12, 7-15
riser, 2-23
types, 5-13

patch cable assembly, 2-38
plant
BICSI references, 1-5, 2-12
combination shelf, 2-32
Digital Equipment Corporation
recommended dual-window
fiber, 5-8

Index-3

Cable
plant (Cont.)

routing

distribution frame components, 10-9

defining (Cont.)

equipment racks, 2-36
fiber optic remote wall enclosure,

horizontal wiring methods, 7-9
Digital-recommended

233

building methods (above-ceiling

installation methods, 2-38
NEC and local code affect, 2-12

cable tray and sleeve), 8—7
campus backbone method
(buried conduit), 9-15

operational specifications, 5-12

equipment room method

link models, 5-15

ordering Digital components, 11-1

(above-ceiling cable tray),

overview

1028

components, 2-18, 2-27
design, 2-16, 5-45
labeling, 2-17
product descriptions, 11-1
requirements, 510, 5-12, 548

horizontal method (above-

ceiling cable tray), 7-10
effect of 30° turns on conduit fill
ratio, 2-27

Equipment Room Routing Diagram,

site survey, 2-10
gplice

10-5, 10-28, 10-29

Horizontal Wiring Cable Routing

closure, 2-34

shelf, 2-30
storage shelf, 2-31

Worksheet, 7-5, 7-13

methods
building, 8-7

system design factors, 5-9

cable entrance point, 9-9

termination

campus backbone, 9-15

shelf, 2-28

termination methods, 2-38
wallbox, 2-35
routing

equipment rooms, 10~28
horizontal, 7-10

multiple-segment links, 9-14
requirements, 2-19, 2-20, 2-25

above-ceiling cable tray method,

site survey, 2-10, 2-11
sample label, 4-50

7-11

BICSI references, 2-12, 7-10, 8-3,
87, 9-3, 9-15

Building Backbone Cable Routing
Worksheet, 84, 8-9, 9-4, 9-7

slack considerations
backbone, 8-12, 9-24
cable design, 3-28

distribution frames, 3-28, 3-29

buried conduit method, 9-15

horizontal wiring, 7-16

cable entrance point

storage, 10-10

method, 9-9
worksheet, 9-10

campus backbone alternate routing,
3-22, 3-25, 3-34

Campus Backbone Cable Routing
Worksheet, 94, 9-17

conduit fill ratio (50% maximum),

system common equipment, 3—29

wallboxes, 3—-29

Cable Construction
Fiber Cable Color Code, 4-18
Cable plant
design process
overview, 2-13

cable plant hardware, 10-9

2-27

considerations, 2~26
defining

Campus

backbone fiber redundancy, 3-30

building methods, 8-6

campus backbone methods,
9-12

layouts
overview, 3-25

Campus backbone

Campus backbone (Cont.)

Backbone Identifier Worksheet, 4-32
breakout cable links, 3-22
Building Backbone

Campus backbone
MDF

MDPF-to-IDF links (Cont.)
building cabling, 8-6, 8-9,
8-11, 8-13, 94

Cable Routing Worksheet, 8-9
Cable Worksheet, 8-13
Cable Routing Worksheet, 9-17
design process
flow chart, 94

campus backbone cabling,
9-17, 9-23
concept diagram symbols, 3—26

fiber count, 3-32, 3-34
interbuilding cabling, 9—12

overview, 94
required documents, 9-3

panel connection map requirements,
1033

distance restrictions, 3-18, 3—19, 8-12,

shared equipment room symbols,

9-24

3-8

function

cables, 1-15, 9-1
MDF, 1-9, 1-15, 9-1, 10-1
links

concept diagram symbol, 3-8

overview, 1~15

Splice Closure Worksheet, 9-20
Campus Backbone
BOM Worksheet, 9-28

configuration factors, 3—22

Cable Worksheet, 9-25

recommended fiber count, 3-34

Interbuilding

Cable Worksheet, 9-25

topologies
overview, 3~25

maximum growth configurations, 3-25

MDF

active networking equipment, 3-19,
531

cable routing diagram requirements,
10-28

concept diagram symbol, 3-8, 3-26
crossconnect/interconnect map
requirements, 10-39

Chipcom, see ORnet
Color codes, see color code listing under

Fiber

Color-to-color splice relationship, 445,
446, 4-50, 4-53
Components, see plant listing under Cable
Concept diagrams
base
backbone
overview, 3-18, 3-26

crossconnects, 1-23, 44

distribution frame design process,
10-1

sample, 3-26

horizontal, 3—10
overview, 3-16

equipment racks, 2-36, 10-1i

fiber

optic cable plant components,
10-9
footprint diagram requirements,
10-26

hierarchy, 1-25, 3-6, 4-3

identifiers, 4-32, 4-39
interconnects, 4-10

layout diagram example, 10-14
MDF-to-IDF cables

building backbone cabling, 9-1,

9-7
MDF-t0-IDF links

sample, 3-16
design process
flow chart, 3-3
overview, 33

fully modified sample, 4-13
information, 2-15, 3-2

modifying for
administration zone numbers, 4-13
distances, 3—-28
fiber count, 3-29
overview, 2-15, 3-1
symbols, 3-8
types

backbone, 3-2
horizontal, 3-2

Index-5

Configurations
overview, 1-27
point-to-point, 1-27

ring, 1-31

star, 1-30
tree, 1-33
Connector

fiber optic ferrule size, 240, 241
field termination, 2-39

termination methods, 2-38

Diagrams
network schematic (Cont.)
campus, h—48

horizontal, 5-51
Digital’s fiber optic products, 11-2
Distance restrictions

active networking equipment considera-

tions, 3-19

backbone, 1-9, 3-18, 3-19, 5-14, 5-15,
5-19, 8-12, 9-19, 9-24

combination shelf, 1042

building backbone, 3-19, 8-12
horizontal wiring, 3-11, 5-14, 5-15, 5-19,

function, 10-37
overview, 10-37

maximum transmission, 5-6

Crossconnect/interconnect maps

procedure, 10-38
RWDF, 1043
termination shelf, 1041

7-16

work area wiring, 5-14, 6-3, 6-10, 6-11
Distribution connection map
overview, 10-30
Distribution frame
active networking equipment, 10-9

D
DECconnect System

documentation, xxi
related documents, xxii
Design process

building backbone, 84

campus backbone, 94
concept diagrams, 3-3

distribution
frames, 104

subsystems, 2-16

documents, 2—-17
fiber optic applications, 5-1

horizontal wiring, 7-5
logical network diagram, 2-7

network, 2-7

BOM Worksheet, 1045
cable plant components, 10-8, 10-9
crossconnect/interconnect map requirements, 10-39

design process
flow chart, 10-5
overview, 104

required documents, 104

diagrams
equipment room cable routing,
10-28
footprint, 10-26

layout, 10-8, 10-13
equipment

racks, 10-11
room requirements

configuration, 10~20
electrical 10-23

schematics, 545, 5-47
overview, 2-1

work area wiring, 6-8

Diagrams
concept

backbone, 3-26, 3-34, 3-37

horizontal, 3~16
distribution frame
footprint, 10-26

layout, 10-13
equipment room cable routing, 10-29

logical network design, 2-8

network schematic
building, 5-50

Index—6

thermal, 10-24
for tprint
equipment room, 10-21

ODF, 10-22
ODF requirements

acoustical, 10-25

configuration, 10-22
electrical, 10-24
thermal, 10-24

panel connection map requirements,
10-33
rack layouts

Distribution frame
rack layouts (Cont.)

FDDI (Cont.)
connections

dual-attachment, 5-27
single-attachment, 5-27
wallbox, 4-24

guidelines, 10-11
mixed-racik, 10-12
separate-rack, 10-12

Distribution Subaystem
worksheet, 10-31

Distribution Subsystem Field Color, 4-19

dual ring campus backbone, 5-31
dual ring of trees, 5-26
equipment

dual-attachment concentrator (DAC),
5-25
dual-attachment station (DAS), 5-25
single-attachment station (SAS),
5-25

Dual-window fiber, 5-8, 5-39

E
EIA/TIA-668
architecture
backbone, 1-9
horizontal wiring, 1-12
structured wiring, 1-6
Commercial Building Wiring Standard,
1-2, 14

crossconnect restrictions

backbone, -3
horizontal wiring, 1-12

DECconnect System compliance, 1-2, 1-3
overview, 1-5
EIA/TIA-668 compliance, 14
Electrical requirements

equipment room, 10-23
ODF, 10-24
Environmental airspace, 2-23
Environmental specifications, 5-11
Equipment room

distribution frame mounting racks
footprint, 10-21
requirements

configuration, 10-20

electrical, 10-23
thermal, 10-24

Routing Diagram, 10-28
Ethernet, fiber optic, see ORnet

fiber count, 3-31, 3-33, 5-32
interconnections, 5-25

media interface cor nector (MIC), 5-28
product
applications
62.5/125, 524
impleraentations, 5-31
stations

dual-atiachment (DAS), 3-33
single-attachment (SAS), 3-33
transmission performance bit error rate

(10712), 5-6

Fiber

cable plant components, 2-18

color code
cable bundles, 4-16, 4-17, 445,
4-46
overview, 4-16

panel connections, 1043
specification, 5-13
splicing, 445
table, 4-16
connector

backshell size, 2-41
bend radius boots, 5-28, 5-29, 5-39,
5-40, 10-39

Biconic, 2—42, 6-11

color coding, 528, 5-29, 5-39, 540,
10-39

FDDI, 1-1, 2-7, 3-1
active equipment, 5-23

ANSI/ISO FDDI PMD Standard, 5-14
configuration

dual ring, 5~29
tree, 5-29

FDDI
A, 5-27
B, 5-27

M, 5-27

MIC, 5-28
S, 5-27
ferrule size, 2-40

index—7

Fiber
connector (Cont.)
field connectorization, 10-10
field termination, 2-39
H3114-FE FDDI wallbox panel,
6-11, 6-12

Fiber (Cont.)
panel connection, 448
patch panel connection map, 10-30
size

100/140 micron, multi-mode, xx, 1-9,

240, 2-41, 3-2, 3-16, 3-26,
b6-563, 610, 6-11, 6~-12
50/125 micron, multi-mode, xx, 1-9,
2-40, 241, 3-2, 3-16, 3-26,
5-53, 6-10, 6-11, 6~-12
62.5/125 micron, multi-mode, 1-5,

H3114-FF ST-type wallbox panel,
6-1, 6~11, 6-12
optical loss, 242, 6-9, 5-52, 5~54,

5~5b, 558
SMA, 242, é-11
specification, 5-14

1-9, 240, 241, 3-2, 3-16,

ST-type (2.5 .um bayonet), 2-24,
2-39, 242, 4-16, 5-28, 5-40,
7-17, 7-19, 8-14, 9-26

3-26, 5~-12, 5-16, 6~19, 5-31,

5-39, 541, 5-53, 6-b4, 5-55,
6-10, 6-11, 6-12, 6~14

8.5/125 micron, single-mode, 2-40

type, 1-2, 2-38

wallbox panels, 2-35, 3-13, 4-32,
4-42, 6-10, 1-7
work area wiring, 6-1, 6-10
count, 2-20, 3-2, 3-3, 3-12, 3-25, 3-28,

specifications
multimode dual-window
62.6/1256, 5-12

single-mode, 5-12

3-29, 3-30, 3-31, 3-32, 3-33, 3-34,

structured wiring strategy, 4~15

4-17, 4-18, 4-32, 4-43, 5-13, 548,
7-156, 7-17, 8-11, 8~13, 9-23, 9-25,

type

104

crogsconnect/interconnect maps, 10-37

jackets, 2-41
link

certification loss values
overview, 5-57

summary worksheet, 5—60
worksheet, 5-57

design factors
active equipment integravion,

5-6

multi-mode, 2-19, 2-22, 2-40, 2-41,
242, 3-2, 3-25, 3-26, 3-30,
3-32, 3-33, 3-34, 5-12, 5-53,
5-54, 5-5b, 7-13, 8-11, 9-23,
10-9
gingle-mode, 1-9, 2-19, 2-22, 2-40,
241, 2-42, 3-2, 3-25, 3-30,
3-32, 3-33, 3-34, 5-12, 5-53,
7-13, 8-11, 9-23, 10-9
Worksheet, 3—34
Fiber optic
application design process, 5—1
required documents, 5-5

maximum transmission, 5-6
transmission performance, 5~6

loss calculations

approach, 1-3, 1-6, 4-1, 4-15
cable plant

methods, 5-53
overview, 5-52

process, 5-52
tables, 5-53

worksheet, 5-54

components, 2-18

products, 11-1
color code, 4-16
design process
flow chart, 5-2
links

optic
application design process overview,
2-15

distribution subsystem design
process overview, 2-16

structured wiring, 1-3
pairs, 4~16

Index—8

bandwidth, 5-8
design factors, 5-6
models, 5-14
optical loss, 5-7
overview, b~5

power budget, 5-6

Fiber optic

links (Cont.)
structure, 5-5

system design factors, 5-9
wavelength, 5-7
Field termination (Digital-recommended

termination method)
considerations
backshell size, 240
ferrule size, 2-40
procedure, 2-39

Fire blocking, 7-10
Floor plans

description, 2-11
obtaining copies for site survey, 2-10
Flow charts

building backbone wiring design process,
84

campus backbone design process, 94
concept design process, 3-3
distribution frame design, 10-5

fiber optic design process, 5-2
horizontal wiring design process, 7-5
network design process, 2-13
Preplanning process, 2-5
work area wiring design process, 6-8

Footprint
equipment room, 10-21

equipment room distribution frame
mounting racks, 10-21

ODF, 10-22

Heavy duty cable, see construction listing
under Cable
Hierarchical
physical star topology, 1-25
Hierarchical physical star topology

advantages, 1-25
overview, 1-25

supported configurations, 1-27
Hierarchy rules of structured wiring, 4-23

Horizontal wiring
active networking equipment, 3—19
administration zones, 4-13
BOM Worksheet, 7-19
cable
function, 1-19
routing methods, 7-9
routing worksheet, 7-13

slack requirements, 7-16
worksheet, 7-16
crossconnect restriction, 1-12

design process
flow chart, 7-5
overview, 7-5

required documents, 74
distance restrictions, 3—11
distribution frame
cable routing diagram requirements,
10-28

concept diagram symbol, 3-8
crossconnect/interconnect map
requirements, 10-39

crossconnects, 1-12, 1-23, 44

design process, 10-1
equipment racks, 2-36, 10-11

G
Grounding requirements, see grounding

fiber

listing under Requirements

optic cable plant components,
10-9

footprint diagram requirements,

10-26

H3111-x5 wallbox, 2-35

H3111-xx wallbox, 2-39, 6-1, 6-11
H3114-FA 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector panel, 6-1
H3114-FE FDDI connector panel, 6-1, 6-11
H3114-FF 2.5 mm bayonet ST-type connector panel, 6-11
H9646-xx DECconnect communications

cabinet, 2-36, 10-25

identifiers, 4-32, 440
interconnects, 1-23, 3-14, 4-10

panel connection map requirements,
10-33

fiber count, 3—32
function

cables, 1-19, 7-1
HDF, 1-19, 1-25, 44, 7-1, 10-2
ODF, 1-19, 10-2
RWDF, 1-19, 10-2

Index-9

Horizontal wiring

function (Cont.)

wallbox (Cont.)

SDF, 1-19, 10-2

hierarchy, 1-25, 3-6, 4-3
identifiers, 4-32, 442
Identifier Worksheet, 4-33
installation

transition point distribution frames,
1-12, 1-19
wallbox, 1-12, 1-19, 7-1

HDF

mounting, 6—4

administration zone numbers, 4-13,

recommendations, 6—4

4-40

interconnects, 4-10

identifiers, 4-40

link topologies, 3—-14

interconnects, 4-10

Requirements Worksheet, 7-7
sample label, 4-52
stubbed conduit use, 7-10

layout diagram example, 1017

hierarchy, 4-10
Identifier Worksheet, 433
links

cable restrictions, 3-12

concept diagram symbol, 3-8
configuration factors, 3-12
fiber counts, 3-12, 3-32
HDF-to-

ODF-to-wallbox, 1-19

Identifiers, 4-31
scheme, 4-37

Indoor cable, see indoor listing under Cable

Innerduct
fill ratio (40%), 2-27

RWDF-to-wallbox, 1--19
SDF-to-wallbox, 1-19
system common equipment,

1-19

in conduit, 2-26
overview, 226

Intermediate distribution frame, see IDF
listing under Building backbone

wallbox, 1-19
recommended fiber counts, 3-32
topology, 3-13
maximum growth configurations, 3—12

L
Label

ODF
crossconnects, 1-12

creation process, 4-31, 4-50

interconnects, 4-10

definition process, 4-31

layout diagram examrie, 10-19

identifiers

cable, 443, 4-50

overview, 1-15, 1-19

requirements, 3-10

RWDF interconnects, 4-10
SDF
crossconnects, 1-12
interconnects, 4-10

layout diagram example, 10-18
svstem common equipment

identifiers, 4—41

distribution frames, 4-39
wallboxes, 442
scheme, 2-17, 4-31
strategy, 4-31

Labeling
fiber pair far end connection, 10-5
Layout diagrams, distribution frame, see

diagrams listing under Distribution

iinks, 1-19
transition point

distribution frames, 7-1
identifiers, 441
interconnects, 4-10

wallbox
connectors, 3—-13

index—10

frames

Light duty cable, see construction listing
under Cable

Link
certification loss
calculations
overview, b-57

Network (Cont.)

Link

certification loss (Cont.)

configurations, 1-27

design process
flow chart, 2-13

Value Summary Worksheet, 560
Value Worksheet, 5-57

loss calculations

logical design diagram, 2-7

methods, 5-53

schematic diagrams

overview, 5-62

building, 547

process, 5-52
tables, 5~563

campus, 547
creation process, 548

worksheet, 5-54

design process, 5§45, 547
horizontal, 547

Link-Loss recommended design
planned maintenance splices (two) in
campus and building backbone links,

information, 5-48
overview, 2-15

symbols, 546

5-55

Logical network design

schematics

diagram, 2-7, 2-8

creation process, 548
information, 548

process, 2-7

Loose-tube cable, see outdoor listing under
Cable

overview, 5—45, 547

symbols, 546
Nonenvironmental airspace, 2-23

Not recommended (but supported) design

breakout links in campus backbone, 3-22
factory terminated assemblies for inside

Main distribution frams, see MDF listing
vnder Campus backbone

wall wiring, 2-38

Maintenance splice planning requirements,
5-55

Minimum bend radius, 2-26
Mizxed-rack layout, distribution frames,
10-12

Multimode fiber, see type listing under

o
ODF
cabinet footprint, 10-22
requirements

acoustic, 10-25

Fiber

electrical, 10-2a

thermal, 1024

Office distribution frame, see ODF listing

National Electrical Code (NEC), see NEC

NEC

cable jacket requirements, 2-23
overview, 1-5
reference, xxiii, 1-4, 2-12, 2-19, 2-20,
2-25, 6-3, 74, 8-3, 9-3, 9-7, 104
requirements for

grounding armored cable at cable
entrance points, 2-19, 9-7

routing outdoor cable into buildings,
2-19, 2-20, 2-25

Network

analysis process, 2-7
communications analysis, 2-7

under Horizontal wiring
One-to-one structured wiring rule, 4-23

Optical loss
allowable system loss
active equipment, 5-52, 8-12, 9-24
FDDI products, 5-32
ORnet products, 541
connectors, 2-42, 5-9, 5-14, 5-52
crossconnects, 5-16, 5-19
interconnects, 516, 5-19

link

certification loss calculations
overview, 5-H7

worksheets, 5-57

loss calculations

Index-11

Optical lozs
hink
los= calculations (Cont.)

Overview

cable (Cont.)

overview, 5-52

slack considerations, 2-25
cable plant
design process, 2-13

process, 5-52

campus layouts, 3-25

methods, 5-53

tables, 5-53
worksheet, 5-54
overview, 5~7
splices, 2—43, 5-14, 5-16, 5-19, 5-52

worst-case link models, 5-15
Ordering fiber optic cable piant products,

concept disgrama, 2-15, 3-1, 3-16

backbone, 3-18
design process, 3-3
horizontal, 3-10
information, 3-2
types, 3-2
configurations, 1-27

11-1

ORnet
active equipment, 5-39

configuration, 539
interconnections, 5-39

product

applications
62.5/125, 5-39
implementations, 5-41
transmission performance bit error rate

(10-19) 5 ¢

Outdoor cable, see outdoor listing under
Cable

connection map, 10-30
crossconnect/interconnect maps, 10-37

design process
building backbone, 84
campus backbone, 94
concept diagrams, 3-3
distribution
frames, 10-4
subsystems, 2—-16
fiber optic application, 5-1
horizontal wiring, 7-5
network

communications analysis, 2-7

Overview
active networking equipment

considerations, 3--19
administration
crossconnects, 1-23, 2-18, 44
interconnects, 1-23, 2-18
planning, 2-17

strategy, 4-22

subsystem, 1-23, 4-1
zones, 4-13

backbone link configuration factors, 3-22
base concept diagrams, 3-18
BICSI Telecommunications Distribution
Methods Manual, 1-5

cable
building backbone, 8-11
campus backbone, 9-23

schematics, 545, 547

work area wiring, 6-8
distribution frame
cable plant components, 10-9
design process, 104

Equipment Room Cable Routing
Diagrams, 10-28
Footprint Diagrams, 10-26
Layout Diagrams, 10-8, 10-13
EIA/TIA-568 Commercial Building
Wiring Standard, 1-5
fiber optic

application design process, 2-15, 5-1
approach to structured wiring, 4-15
bandwidth, 5-8
cables, 2-18

considerations, 2-24

color code, 4-16

horizontal wiring, 7-13

crossovers, 4-22

indoor, 2-22

link-loss calculations, 5-52

labels, 443

links, 5-5

outdoor, 2-19

optical loss, 57

plant components, 2~18, 2-27

power budget, 5-6

routing considerations, 2-26

structured wiring, 1-3

Index~12

Uverview
fiber optic (Cont.)

Overview

structured wiring (Cont.)
subsystems, 1-15
unstructured wiring comparison, 1-3

subsystem design process, 2-16
system design factors, 59

work area wiring, 1-22

wavelength, b-7

ST-type (2.5 mm bayonet) connectors,

horizontal wiring requirements, 3—-10
identifier scheme, 4-37
industry standards, 14

2-39

termination methods, 2-38
topologies
building backbone, 3-25

innerduct, 2-26

interconnect administration points, 4-10

campus backbone, 3-25

label

creation process, 4-50
identifiers, 4-32
scheme, 2-17
strategy, 4--31
link certification loss values, 557
logical network design
diagram, 2-7
process, 2-7

horizontal wiring, 3-13

Panel connection
overview, 448

Panel connection map

combination shelf, 10-35
termination shelf, 10-33

NEC and local codes, 1-5
network

analysis process, 2-7
schematic
creation process, 5—-48
diagrams, 2-15

panel connection, 4-48
planning process, 2-1

Preplanning process, 2-5
product applications, 5-23
safety, grounding, and space requirements, 2—-11
gite survey, 2-10

Patch Panel connection label maps, 10-30
Planning

for maintenance splices, 5~-55
process

administration, 2-17
overview, 2—1

Point-to-point configuration, see Configurations
Preplanning process
flow chart, 2-5
overview, 2-5
Product applications
FDDI, 5-24

Splice Description Worksheet, 4-45
splicing methods, 242
structured wiring, 1-1, 1-2
administration, 1-23
architecture
backbone, 1-9

horizontal wiring, 1-12
building backbone, 1-17
campus backbone, 1-15
fiber optic strategy, 4-15
hierarchical physical star topology,
1-256

hierarchy, 3-6
horizontal wiring, 1-19
rules

fiber optic strategy, 4-23

hierarchy, 4-23, 4-26

ORnet, 5-39
overview, 5-23

R
Recommended design
backbone single-cable links, 3-22

building vertical cable (heavy-duty tightbuffered), 8-11
cable

indoor (tight-buffered), 219
outdoor (loose-tube or slotted-core),
219

campus layouts, 3-25
configurations, 1-27

connector (2.5 mm bayonet ST-type), 2-39

index~-13

References (Cont.)

Recommended design (Cont.)

DECconnect System
Facilities Cabling Installation

fiher
color codes, 4-16

Guide, xxii

count, 3-32
counts, 3-12, 3-32

dual-window, 5-8
redundancy, 3-30
size (62.6/126), 3-2
identifier scheme, 4-37
indoor cable (tight-buffered), 2-26
installing single-mode fiber (campus and
building backbones only), 3-30
patch cables (factory terminated assemblies), 2-38
routing

cable entrance point (conduit), 2~25,
9-9

campus backbone (buried conduit),
9-156
equipment rooms (above-ceiling
cable trays), 10-28
horizontal building (above-ceiling
cable trays), 8~7
horizontal cable (above-ceiling cable
trays), 7-10
vertical building (sleeve), 8-7

Fiber Optic Installation, xxi
Planning and Configuration Guide,
xxi

Requirements Evaluation Workbook,

xxi

DECconnect System Facilities Cabling
Installation Guide, 2-18
DECcuiinect System Fiber Optic
Installation, 2-18, 5-57

DECconnect System Planning and
Configuration Guide, 3-1, 5-1
DECconnect System Requirements
Evaluation Workbook, 2-10, 2-12,
3-10, 3-18, 6-3, 7-9, 8-6, 9-13
EIA/TIA-568 Commercial Building
Wiring Standard, 1-2, 1-3, 14, 1-5,
1-6, 1-9, 1-12
Fiber Optic Installation, 4-24
floor plans, 2-10, 2-11, 446, 6-3, 74,

7-5, 7-10, 8-3, 84, 8-6, 8-7, 8-12,
9-3, 94, 9-8, 9-24, 104, 10-5
industry standards, 14
Introduction to Network Performance

slack

distribution frame cable end (4.5
outdoor splice point cable end (9.0
meters), 2-26

system common equipment cable
end (0.6 meters), 2—26
wallbox cable end (0.6 meters), 2-26

splicing method (single-fiber capillary),
242

termination method (field termination),
2-38

topology (hierarchical physical star), 1-25
using complete, non-spliced cables in all
links, 9-19

wallbox (H3111-GA/GB/GC), 2-35
work area wiring cables (factory termi-

nated assemblies),

2-38

References

ANSI1/1SO FDDI PMD Standard, 5-14
BICSI manual, iy, 14, 1-5, 2-12,
2-19, 2-38, 2-39, 242, 74, 7-10,
8-3, 8-7, 9-3, 9~15, 104

index—-14

Guide, xxii, 2-7
local codes, 1-5, 6-3, 74, 8-3, 9-3, 104

meters), 2-26

NEC, xxiii, 1-4, 1-5, 2-12, 2-19, 2-20,
2-23, 2-25, 6-3, 74, 8-3, 9-3, 9-7,
9-9, 104
Networks and Communications Buyer’s
Guide, xxii, 2-7
site plans, 2-10, 2-11, 446, 9-3

Remote wall distribution frame, see RWDF
listing under Horizontal wiring

Requirements
acoustical (ODF only), 10-25

active networking equipment
bit error rate, 5-6
general, 5-45
optical, 548
backbone
distance, 326
layout, 3-26

links, 3~18
building
cables, 8-11, 8-13

Requirements

horizontal wiring (Cont.)

building (Cont.)
cable slack, 8-12

cable slack, 7-16

connectors, 8-11, 8-13

connectors, 7-156, 7-16

general, 84

distance, 3~16
general, 3—-10, 7-1, 7-5

routing, 8-6

maximum growth, 3-12
routing, 7-9, 7-13
topology, 3-16
wallbox, 7-1, 7-7

building backbone
cable slack, 8-12
component, 8-16
general, 8-1, 8-4

innerduct in conduit, 2-26

cable
entrance point

interbuilding

armored cable grounding, 2-19,
9-7
general, 2-12, 9-7, 9-8
routing, 219, 2-20
plant
general, 2-12, 5-10, 5-48

cable slack, 9-24
maximum vertical cable run, 2~-26
minimum
footprint space

distribution frame, 10-21
ODF, 10-22
NEC and local code, 1-5, 2-12

system loss margin, 5-7, 5-32,

541, 5-52, 5-53, 5-5b6

network, xxi, 1-3, 2-7, 2-10, 3-25

nonenvironmental airspace, 2-23
performance, xxii, 2-7
safety, 2-5, 211

slack, 3-28
cable support
horizontal, 2-26
vertical, 2-26

space, 1-5, 2-5, 2-11

campus backbone

splice closure, 9-20

cables, 9-23, 9-25

thermal
equipment room, 10-24

components, 9-28

ODF, 10-24
work area wiring
cables, 6-10

connectors, 9-23, 9-25
general, 9-1, 94 9-7
routing, 9-12

communication, 2-7

component specifications, 5-12
configuration, 2-7

components, 6-12

general, 6-1
Right-side/left-side panel separation
strategy, 4-7

equipment room, 10-20

ODF, 10-22

connector ferrule size, 2—41
distribution frame
components, 10-45

Ring configuration, see Configurations
Routing methods, see routing listing under
Cable

general, 10-1, 104
routing, 10-5
electrical

equipment room, 10-23
ODF, 10-24

environmental airspace, 2-23
fiber count, 3-25, 3-29, 3-30, 3-34
general planning, xxii

grounding, 2-5, 2-11, 9-9
horizontal wiring, 3-10

cables, 7-13, 7-16

S
Safety, grounding, and space requirements,
2-11

Safety requirements, see safety listing
under Requirements

Satellite distribution frame, see SDF listing
under Horizontal wiring
Single-fiber capillary (Digital-recommended
splicing method), 242

Index-15

Single-fiber capillary splicing method, 242
Single-mode fiber, see type listing under
Fiber

Single-rack layouts, distribution frames,
10-12

Site
plans

description, 2-11
obtaining copies for site survey,

ST-type (2.6 mm bayonet) connector, see
connector listing under Fiber
ST-type (2.6 mm bayonet) connectors, 2-39
Stubbed conduit use with wallboxes, 7-10
Supported (but not recommended) design
breakout links (campus backbone only),
3-22
fiber size

50/126 micron, 3-2

2-10
survey

information, 2-11
overview, 2-10
process, 2-5

Sleeve (Digital-recommended vertical

building routing method), 8-7
Slotted-core cable, see outdoor listing under
Cable
Space requirements, see space listing under
Requirements
Splice
color-to-color relationship, 4-45, 446,
4-50, 4-53

methods, 2—42

single-fiber capillary, 2-43
Star configuration, see Configurations
Structured wiring

administration, 1-23
architecture, 1-6
building backbone, 1-17

campus backbone, 1-15
crossconnect

campus and building backbone
guidelines, 1-9
horizontal wiring guidelines, 1-12
fiber optic strategy, 4-15
hierarchy, 3-6, 4-3
horizontal wiring, 1-19

overview, 1-2
recommended fiber count, 3-32
rules

fiber optic strategy, 4-23
hierarchy, 4-23, 4-26
one-to-one wiring, 4-23

subsystems, 1-15

topology, 1-25
unstructured wiring comparison, 1-3
work area wiring, 1-22

index—16

Termination methods, 2-38
Thermal requirements
equipment room, 10-24
ODF, 10-24

Tight-buffered cable, see indoor listing

under Cable
Topology, 1-6, 1-9, 1-25

Tree configuration, see Configurations

w
Wallbox
H3111-GA/GB/GC, 2-35
Wallbox, see wallbox listing under

Horizontal wiring
Work area wiring
BOM Worksheet, 6~14

cable

customized design, 6-11
function, 1-22
options, 6-10

overview, 6-9

terminated assemblies, 6-10
worksheet, 6-12

design process
flow chart, 6-8

guidelines, 6-3
overview, 6-1, 6-8
required documents, 63

distance restrictions, 63
function, 6-1
overview, 1-15, 1-22

Work area wiring guidelines, 6-3

Worksheets

Backbone Identifier Worksheet, 4-32
Building Backbone

Worksheets
Building Backbone (Cont.)

Cable Routing Worksheet, 8-9
Cable Worksheet, 814

Building Backbone BOM Worksheet, 8-16
Cable
Entrance Point Worksheet, 9-10
Identifier Worksheet, 4-33
Campus Backbone
Cable Routing Worksheet, 9-17
Cable Worksheet, 9-26
Campus Backbone BOM Worksheet, 9-28

crossconnect/interconnect map
RWDF, 1043
termination shelf, 10-41
Crossconnect/interconnect map

combination shelf, 1042
Distribution Frame BOM Worksheet,
1045

Fiber Count Worksheet, 3-34
Horizontal Wiring

BOM Worksheet, 7-19
Cable Routing Worksheet, 7-13
Cable Worksheet, 7-17
Identifier Worksheet, 4-33
Link Certification Loss

Value Summary Worksheet, 560

Value Worksheet, 65568
Link-Loss Calculation Worksheet, 5-556
overview, 2-16
panel connection map
combination shelf, 10-35
termination shelf, 10-33
Splice
Closure Worksheet, 9-21
Description Worksheet, 446
Wallbox
Identifier Worksheet, 4-33

Requirements Worksheet, 7-7
Work Area Wiring

BOM Worksheet, €14
Cable Worksheet, 6-12

index—17